America Betrayed: Bush, Bin Laden, & 9/11 Part 1


 

“Naturally, the common people don’t want war. Voice or no voice, the people can always be brought to the bidding of the leaders. All you have to do is tell them they are being attacked and denounce the pacifists for lack of patriotism.”

—Hermann Goering, Hitler’s 2nd in command & President of the Reichstag.

America Betrayed: Bush, Bin Laden, & 9/11 by R. Joseph, Ph.D. (University Press, $24.00, ISBN: 0971644578

Copyright ©2003 R.Joseph

NOTE: This is the HTML version of a downloadable PDF by Rhawn Joseph, Ph.D. Please visit his site for more of his remarkable and important work.

newmexChapter 1 THOSE WHO BURN BOOKS….

Chapter 2 THE NAZI-TERRORIST OIL-CONSPIRACY

Compare the emblem of the Skull & Bones, which preceded the Nazis and supported them, to the Nazi Death HeadChapter 3 THE BROTHERHOOD OF DEATH

SwastikaGoogle_468x318Chapter 4 CIA-NAZIS: TERROR & MURDER INCORPORATED

reaganChapter 5 THE TERRORIST ASSASSINS

pictures-from-history-04-742870Chapter 6 THE TANGLED ROOTS OF TERRORISM

tumblr_mbk6rlZp861rdlo0io1_1280Chapter 7 BUSH-LADEN, WAHHABISM & THE GULF WAR

Continued: America Betrayed, Part 2

Chapter 1

THOSE WHO BURN BOOKS….


When History Repeats Itself… The Nazi Roots.

“Naturally, the common people don’t want war. Voice or no voice, the people can always be brought to the bidding of the leaders. All you have to do is tell them they are being attacked and denounce the pacifists for lack of patriotism.”

—Hermann Goering, Hitler’s 2nd in command & President of the Reichstag.

ECHOES FROM THE PAST

31077The new leader of the “free world,” who promised a “new world order” did not win power by democratic means. He was appointed after he failed to win the presidency with a majority of the votes (1,2). Yet, he did have the backing of banks, industrialists, and transnational corporations, including those controlled or directed by America’s leading families, and the father of George Bush (2,3,4).

And that same year he took office, the nation was struck by terrorists. One of the nation’s most recognizable symbols, a towering majestic building, burned and then crashed to the ground (5).

“This is a cunning and well-prepared plot,” the leader of the nation proclaimed (6). Terrorists were to blame, the government announced, foreign terrorists and their agents.

Yet, what the people were not told, was that the man ostensibly in charge of the investigation, deleted critical information and rewrote investigative police reports. He did so to protect and cover up government involvement in this dastardly deed (7,8).

The government and the nation’s media were instead warned that terrorists were running amok, the nation was in danger, freedom itself was under assault. The nation and freedom must be protected from terrorism, the people were told (7,9).

The leader who promised a “new world order” warned the nation that only his party could protect the people from terrorism. Only his party was concerned with national security. He, his minions, and the media which supported him, demanded that the people give them their votes, to give his party a ruling majority, and he derided the patriotism of those who opposed him (7,9,10).

Officials of opposing parties were threatened. Laws were hastily passed, supported even by those who opposed his rule. The constitution itself was modified, in order to protect the citizens, to protect freedom, to protect the nation, the people were told (11).

“The laws are too liberal” the leader complained.

Those “associated” with the “terrorists,” were rounded up and jailed without charge, and their property, their homes, their charities, were seized by the state. Citizens, children, government officials, working men and women were encouraged to spy on their friends, neighbors, and coworkers, and to report anyone and anything that might be suspicious. And those deemed suspicious, were rounded up without charge, jailed, and denied legal counsel, and most were never seen or heard from again (7,9,12).

And then the leader demanded that civil service laws be altered to give him power to hire only those of his choosing, and to fire those who displeased him. The leader required this power to protect the people from the terrorists who were threatening the nation, it was said (13).

But the true terrorists, those responsible for the “terrorist attack,” were government agents, controlled by the most powerful men in government. As Hermann Goering later boasted, “who burned the Reichstag? I burned it.”

As the people later learned, but as many suspected even then, it was Hitler, Goering, and the Nazis, who were behind the plot to set fire to the Reichstag, Germany’s parliament–the same men who would use terrorism and the threat of terrorism to consolidate their power and as a pretext to set the world on fire (7,9).

THOSE WHO BURN BOOKS, BURN PEOPLE

In 2000, as the election year heated up, the presidential race between Bush and Gore seemed too close to call. According to national polls, both men were in a statistical dead heat.

And then, a sensational book was published, which threatened to destroy Bush’s chances for the presidency. St. Martin’s Press had just released 70,000 copies of “Fortunate Son,” a biography of George W. Bush, written by investigative journalist, author, and one-time convict, James H. Hatfield. Within 72 hours the book shot to to #8 on Amazon.com’s Top 100 and #30 on The New York Times Best Seller list.

The well research and documented book (14) confirmed what many suspected. George Bush, a man with a history of alcoholism, and at least one ticket on his record for drunk driving, had also abused drugs. In 1972, while absent without leave from the Texas Air National Guard–a period of desertion which lasted at least 11 months (14,15)– George W. Bush had been arrested and convicted for possession of cocaine. He had been sentenced, by a Dallas judge, to perform community service, at the completion of which, the conviction was expunged from his record.

Even before Hatfield’s book hit the shelves, it had already been confirmed that George W. Bush had been a cocaine abusing drunk.

Michael C. Dannenhauer, the chief of staff of former President George H.W. Bush (George W’s father) revealed in an April 1998 interview with Houston Public News reporter Toby Rogers, that Bush “was out of control since college. There was cocaine use, lots of women, but the drinking was the worst” (16).

During the 2000 campaign, when confronted by reporters, Bush confirmed these allegations by dismissing them. He blurted out that he hadn’t taken drugs “since 1974.” Later he and his staff dealt with these charges by refusing to discuss them.

As to Hatfield’s book, that too was dealt with. First, the Dallas Morning News received confidential information on Hatfield’s criminal past which was then trumpeted before the nation. As to the book itself, the powers that be at St. Martin’s Press announced they were going to withdraw Hatfield’s best selling book, and burn it. It will be turned into “furnace fodder” they proclaimed (17).

The burning of dangerous books… that too has Nazi roots.

In May, 1933, the Nazis conducted book burning campaigns throughout Germany. Tens of thousands of books which threatened the Nazi leadership and their ideology, were burned by university students and professors, as well as SA troops who ransacked public libraries. Books were burned in Frankfurt, Hamburg, Hannover, Munich, Nuremberg, Cologne, Dortmund, Halle, Würzburg, Münster, Göttingen, Königsberg, Salzburg, and Koblenz, and the burnings were celebrated with torch light parades. And those which were not burned, were pulped and sent off to paper mills–the same fate which befell the copies of Hatfield’s book which escaped the fires.

History tells us, those who burn books… burn people. In 2000, the powers that be, like those from Nazi Germany, again ordered the burning of books. Hatfield’s dangerous book, was thrown to the flames.

And history tells us, those who burn books… burn people.

On July, 20, 2001, James Hatfield, the nemesis of George Bush and the author of this dangerous book, was found dead (18).

On the morning of September 11, 2001, three thousand other Americans would also die–and like the dangerous book written by James Hatfield, they too would burn in flames.

But unlike Hatfield’s book, which threatened to upset the Bush plans for grabbing the Presidency, the death of these three thousands innocent souls would save the Bush Presidency and fuel a Bush power grab and an assault on the constitution and civil liberties unprecedented in the history of the United States–but eerily reminiscent of those terrible events that led to the rise of Nazi Germany.

THE POST 9/11 DICTATORSHIP?

“A dictatorship would be a heck of a lot easier, there’s no question about it.” -George W. Bush.

“We don’t seek to change a single word of the Constitution . . . we are merely proposing a few practical exemptions.” – George W. Bush.

We must “update our Bill of Rights to reflect 21st Century realities.” -George W. Bush

Like the Nazis who passed or issued numerous edicts designed to destroy constitutionally guaranteed civil rights, following the “terrorist” attack on the Reichstag, the Bush administration did likewise. Using the threat of terrorism, the Bush administration proposed laws such as the “Patriot Act,” and the Homeland Security bill–laws which would give the FBI unprecedented access to private homes, business, phone calls, e-mails, and letters, and which would provide Bush with the right to fire those civil service employees who did not share his views (19).

The Bush team also ushered in the Operation TIPS program which encourages tens of thousands of mail carriers, utility workers and others with access to private homes to spy on American citizens and report suspicious activity (20). The Nazis also inacted similar programs soon after coming to power.

With little debate, the “Patriot Act” was hastily passed by congress in October of 2001. The “Patriot Act” constituted a major “legal” assault on civil liberties and the constitution.

The American Civil Liberties Union describes the “Patriot Act” as “significantly boosting the government’s law enforcement powers while continuing a trend to cut back on the checks and balances that Americans have traditionally relied on to protect individual liberty.”

“This law is based on the faulty assumption that safety must come at the expense of civil liberties,” said Laura W. Murphy, Director of the ACLU’s Washington National Office. “The USA Patriot Act gives law enforcement agencies nationwide extraordinary new powers unchecked by meaningful judicial review.”

Indeed, like the Nazi laws passed 70 years prior, the Patriot Act, signed into law by Bush (21), suspends or curtails a number of constitutionally guaranteed civil rights (19,20,22,23), i.e., individuals can be arrested and detained indefinitely without charge; police powers are increased enabling them to monitor private telephone conversations or to conduct secret searches with minimal judicial oversight; private business records can be seized even if there is no evidence of a crime; American citizens can be spied on for “intelligence” purposes and without the need of a warrant; even librarians can be ordered to provide police with lists of all books and reading material checked out by a “person of interest” even though there is no evidence of a crime.

Non-citizens, basically have no rights at all if the president or his attorney general decides to suspend them. If the person is not a U.S. citizen they may be arrested on the order of the president or attorney general. They may be held in secrecy for an indefinite period, have their conversations with attorneys monitored, be tried by a military tribunal, and if found guilty they may be executed without the right of appeal or judicial review . In fact, they have no right to a lawyer. A non-citizen can thus be arrested, tried, and executed in secret–and the same applies to U.S. born citizens who are identified as “enemy combatants” by the Bush administration (23,24).

As summed up by Nancy Chang, Senior Litigation Attorney Center for Constitutional Rights (25), “The Administration’s blatant power grab, coupled with the wide array of anti-terrorism tools that the USA PATRIOT Act puts at its disposal, portends a wholesale suspension of civil liberties that will reach far beyond those who are involved in terrorist activities. First, the Act places our First Amendment rights to freedom of speech and political association in jeopardy by creating a broad new crime of “domestic terrorism,” and by denying entry to non-citizens on the basis of ideology. Second, the Act will reduce our already lowered expectations of privacy under the Fourth Amendment by granting the government enhanced surveillance powers. Third, non-citizens will see a further erosion of their due process rights as they are placed in mandatory detention and removed from the United States under the Act. Political activists who are critical of our government or who maintain ties with international political movements, in addition to immigrants, are likely to bear the brunt of these attacks on our civil liberties.”

Cities, townships, and several police departments across the United States also objected to this law. Many passed resolutions, laws, or issued statements proclaiming they would not comply, explaining that the Patriot act was an assault on civil liberties (19). The Bush administration responded to these complaints by attacking those who made them.

On February 28, 1933, following a terrorist assault on the Reichstag, an almost identical assault on the constitution and civil rights, was signed into law by the Nazi government of Adolf Hitler (11).

And like Hitler, President George Bush has repeatedly attacked the patriotism of those who do not support his assaults on civil liberties. And like Hitler, Bush asked the citizens to give his party a ruling majority: “The democrats…. [in the] Senate are more interested in special interests in Washington and not interested in the security of the American people.”

Hitler used the threat of terrorism as a campaign theme and to consolidate his power to gain control of the German parliament. George Bush and team have followed the same Nazi recipe.

“We expect to get votes in the fall because of the War on Terrorism.” – Ari Fleischer, Bush White House Spokesman “Bush Adviser Suggests War as Campaign Theme,” -New York Times, 1/19/02

“President Bush’s top political adviser said today that Republicans will make the president’s handling of the war on terrorism the centerpiece of their strategy to win back the Senate and keep control of the House in this year’s midterm elections.” -Washington Post, 1/19/02

Identical political strategies were used and implemented by Nazis in 1933.

“Bush wants to divert attention from his domestic problems. It’s a classic tactic. It’s one that Hitler also used.” -Herta Daubler-Gmelin, Germany’s Justice Minister, 9/17/2002.

******

BUSH-NAZIS

George W. Bush, has a tendency to use an upraised, stiff-armed Nazi salute when greeting crowds of friends and supporters. And, just as Adolf Hitler repeatedly emphasized that his actions were based on “feelings,” “emotions,” and intuitive thoughts, George Bush claims likewise.

” I have always been guided by the wisdom of the inner Voice… by Divine intuition. I have never trusted logic” — Adolf Hitler.

As noted in a recent book by Bush-administration “deep-throat” insider, Bob Woodward (“Bush’s War”), Bush prides himself on relying on his emotions, on “intuition” and “gut feelings” and hte “inner voice” when making judgments or planning some course of action.

Like Hitler, Bush has also voiced a desire to be a “dictator.”

“If this were a dictatorship, it’d be a heck of a lot easier, just so long as I’m the dictator.” –George W. Bush 12/18/2000.

These similarities are not a function of “coincidence.” The Bush family was in business with the Nazis prior to and after Hitler declared war on America. As detailed by John Loftus, former prosecutor in the U.S. Justice Department’s Nazi War Crimes Unit, “the Bush family fortune came from the Third Reich” (4).

“A clique of U.S. industrialists is hell-bent to bring a fascist state to supplant our democratic government and is working closely with the fascist regime in Germany and Italy. I have had plenty of opportunity in my post in Berlin to witness how close some of our American ruling families are to the Nazi regime.” –William Dodd, US Ambasador to Germany in 1937.

The Nazi-link to the Bush family, was first alleged in 1934 by the U.S. Congress which believed that Hamburg- America Line and Union bank, which were directed by Prescot Bush, were subsidizing the Nazi movement in Germany and the United States (3,4,26,27). Corporations associated or directed by Bush and his cronies, had been working with and financing the Nazis and their supporters, since 1924.

“The Bush family were crucial players in setting up the industrial power behind the Third Reich.” -Robert Lederman, Philadelphia City Paper (26).

In 1942, the Bush family was still in business with the Nazis, despite the declaration of war by Hitler against the United States (3,4,26,27). In consequence, three Bush companies were seized by the U.S. government, for being in violation of the Trading with the Enemies Act (27,28).

As we shall discover, doing business with those who kill Americans is a Bush business tradition. In October of 1942, however, the government of the United States tried to put the Bush family out of business.

US Government Vesting Order No. 248, issued in 1942, resulted in the seizure of Union Banking’s assets as they were being used to support the Nazi war effort and were serving as a Nazi front. Two other Vesting Orders were issued that year (nos. 259 and 261) and two more Nazi-front companies directed by the Bush bank and his associates were seized: Holland American Trading Corporation and Seamless Steel Equipment Corporation (21,28).

Prescot Bush was forced to divest himself, at least overtly, of his Nazi associations.

Following the end of the war, Bush negotiated with his friends in government, trading his Nazi assets and Nazi contacts in return for political favors, including support when he sought political office. With the helpful assistance of Bush and his cronies including in particular, Allen Dulles, Nazis were recruited and became high ranking members of an American Intelligence organization that would later be renamed the CIA (3,23,24)–an organization that George H.W. Bush would soon lead.

As detailed by Christopher Simpson, BBC News, UPI, and others (29,30,31) after WWII, Nazis were recruited, brought to the United States, and then subsidized by the CIA to build a power base for the Republican right wing. Several Nazi became top Bush campaign aids (31,33,33).

******

LIKE FATHER LIKE SON

George H. W. Bush when he sought the Presidency in 1988, was forced, like his father, Senator Prescot Bush, to divest himself of Nazi associations. The Bush-Nazi connection was exposed by the Washington based weekly newspaper, Jewish Week (31), and George Bush was forced to fire a number of Nazi and neo-Nazi advisors (32,33).

Of course, after the election, four of these neo-Nazis were brought back into the fold and were offered high paying positions in the Republican Party (30).

******

It has been said, that those who do not learn from the past, are condemned to repeat it.

Some repeat the past, because they have learned from it. GETTING OUT OF HARM’S WAY

At 10 am, that nightmarish September 11 morning, a jet soared above the clouds, a thousand miles from the raging fires that burned in New York city. Inside that jet stood a smirking, smiling man who later explained to reporters that he had run for his life in order to “get out of harm’s way” (34). And in that moment of triumph, as he ran for his life, his picture was taken, a picture which would later be sold and distributed to his supporters.

The picture was of President George W. Bush as he spoke by phone to his vice-president, Dick Cheney, who was hiding in the White House basement.

A picture says a thousand words.

There is no sign of sadness on the smirking face of George W. Bush. There is no sign of compassion or concern for those innocent women and men who burned to death or who fell a thousand feet and died. There is not a hint of sympathy for the thousands of grieving families, for the wives, sons, mothers, fathers, husbands daughters, or friends of those who died.

Indeed, in comments made to reporters, Bush admitted that his only thoughts were for those of his family, his father, and himself, which is why he was running for his life in order to “get out of harm’s way” (34).

A picture says a thousand words.

Although he is frightened, although he is running for his life, he seems to be saying: “I’m safe… We won!”

NOTES:

1). On January 30, 1933, Adolf Hitler was appointed Chancellor of Germany, by President Paul von Hindenburg. Adolf Hitler in the two previous elections had failed to obtain a majority of the votes for the Presidency.

2). After five weeks, the disputed 2000 presidential elections were decided, o n December 12, 2000, by the United States Supreme Court, which ruled that Democratic Presidential nominee, Albert Gore, did not have the right to demand a recount of the contested Florida ballots: SUPREME COURT OF THE UNITED STATES, GEORGE W. BUSH, et al., PETITIONERS v. ALBERT GORE, Jr., et al. [December 12, 2000]. Justice Scalia argued that a recount would “threaten irreparable harm to petitioner (Bush) … by casting a cloud upon what he claims to be the legitimacy of his election.” By ruling in favor of George Bush, the Supreme Court thus effectively ruled him the winner of the 2000 elections even though Bush had lost the popular vote. Thus it could be said that by taking the side of Bush, and by making “an unmistakable partisan decision without any foundation in law,” that right-wing Justice Scalia appointed Bush president. The Court’s actions, were seen as sensible, legally legitimate, and pragmatically defensible to some, and an egregious, traitorous abuse of power to others. Vincent Bugliosi, former California prosecutor, has argued that “the five justices stole the election” (The Nation, 2/5/2001).

3). Webster G. Tarpley & Anton Chaitkin, “George Bush: The Unauthorized Biography,” The Executive Intelligence Review.

4). John Loftus and Mark Aarons. “The Secret War Against The Jews” St. Martins Press, New York, 1994.

5). On February 27, 1933, the Reichstag, the German Parliament building, was burned. Marinus van der Lubbe, a Dutch Communist “terrorist,” was arrested and later executed.

6). Adolf Hitler, 2/27/1933

7). J. Toland. “Adolf Hitler,” Doubleday, New York, 1976. As detailed in Toland’s book, Hermann Goering, rewrote investigative notes and records of the Reichstag fire in order to throw investigators off the scent and to implicate several individuals who had no part in the plot.

8). Coleen M. Rowley, FBI division legal advisor for 12 years, Rowley accused FBI director Mueller and the FBI of a “cover-up ” for “political reasons.” and went on to note that other agents were accusing FBI headquarters of “deliberate” sabotage. That sabotage included deleting critical information and rewriting a search warrant in order to prevent Minnesota FBI agents from uncovering the plot to attack the World Trade Center.

9). W. L. Shirer. “The Rise & Fall of the Third Reich.” Fawcett World Library, New York, 1960.

10). Following the 9/11 attack, and during the 2002 mid-term elections, vice-president Dick Cheney and President George Bush, repeatedly attacked the patriotism of democrats. Using the “war on terrorism” as a campaign gimmick, Bush pleaded with the public to elect a Republic House and Senate, and claimed that the Democrats were putting special interests ahead of the safety of the country.

11). On February 28, 1933, an emergency decree “For the Protection of the German People” altered the constitution and eliminated a number of civil rights. This “Law” restricted demonstrations, freedom of speech, freedom of the press, and the sanctity of the home, security of mail and telephone, and authorized the confiscation of literature considered to be dangerous to the state. Likewise in 2002, Republic president George Bush, asked Congress to pass several laws, such as “Patriot ACT” and the Homeland Security Bill, which would alter the Bill of Rights, and give authorities the right to search homes and offices, wire tap phones, and open mail, without the necessity of a search warrant.

12). After the 9/11 attack, over 1,000 Muslim men, including at least two American citizens, were rounded up, jailed, and held without charge and without benefit of an attorney and with no right to speak with relatives or friends.

13). On April 7, 1933, the “Law for the Restoration of the Professional Civil Service” was passed. This law gave Hitler the authority to dismiss all politically unwanted persons from Civil Service jobs including those in universities and libraries. The “Homeland Security” bill provides George W. Bush with the same right–that is, the right to hire and fire security agents and personnel who would be denied civil service protection and whose loyalty would thus be to President Bush.

14). St. Martin’s Press stated that Fortunate Son had been “scrupulously corroborated” and “fact-checked” by in-house attorneys and a respected Washington, DC. firm that specialized in “vetting” biographies for publishing houses.

15). Boston Globe, 5/23/2000. “One-year gap in Bush’s National Guard Duty. No Record From 1972-73, by Walter V. Robinson. See also, The New Republic, 10/16/2000, 11/13/2000.

16). The Greenwich Village Gazette, 9/13/1999.

17). On October 1, 2002, I called the executive offices of St. Martin’s Press, to obtain an explanation for why they burned these books. No explanation was forthcoming.

18). Hatfield’s death was officially ruled a suicide.

19). The homeland security legislation will launch the largest government reorganization in US history. It would combine 22 federal agencies involved in counter-terrorism into a new department with more than 170,000 employees and a budget of $17.5bn. Mr. Bush argues that he must have broad powers to hire and fire workers to deal with changing terrorism threats. But Democrats, long allies of organized labor, charge that the president is seeking an unwarranted rollback of collective bargaining and civil service protections. Among the provision of the bill, passed by the U.S. Senate, on November 19, 2002, includes a number of special interest provisions that have nothing to do with terrorism, but which rewards companies which avoid US taxes by leaving the country and establishing their headquaters “off shore,” and which provide legal protection for pharmaceutical companies which make drugs that might harm men, women, and children. Some of the pharmaceutical companies that will be protected include those in which George H.W.Bush and his associates, have investments, and those which have created experimental drugs which have harmed over a hundred thousand Gulf War veterans.

20). The TIPS program was announced by the Bush administration in January 2002. The TIPS program creates a national information sharing system for specific industry groups, such as water, electric, and gas meter readers, telephone repairmen, delivery drivers, postal workers, and so on, to report suspicious, publicly observable activity , including activity observed in private homes, that could be related to terrorism. This reporting system is to be administered by the Department of Justice in coordination with several other federal agencies, including the Office of Homeland Security, the Department of Labor, the Federal Bureau of Investigation, and FEMA, as a part of Citizen Corps. The TIPS program includes a centralized telephone hotline and web-based reporting system that automatically and immediately routes tips to appropriate federal, state, and local law enforcement nationwide; The program is scheduled to be operational in the fall of 2002 as one of the new Citizen Corps programs.

21). Reminiscent of the laws which were hastily passed following the Reichstag fire, the Patriot acts was hastily- drafted, and then passed with virtually no public hearing or debate. The Senate was stampeded into passing this law, 98-to-1. In the House, 356 congressman voted yes, vs 66 who dared to vote no. On October 26, the Act was signed into law by a triumphant President George W. Bush.

22). In a letter sent to letter was sent to Senators Bob Graham, Orrin Hatch, Patrick Leahy, and Richard Shelby, Assistant Attorney General Daniel J. Bryant, of Department of Justice, acting as a representative of the Bush administration, openly advocated the suspension of the Fourth Amendment: “As Commander-in-Chief, the President must be able to use whatever means necessary to prevent attacks upon the United States; this power, by implication, includes the authority to collect information necessary to its effective exercise. . . The government’s interest has changed from merely conducting foreign intelligence surveillance to counter intelligence operations by other nations, to one of preventing terrorist attacks against American citizens and property within the continental United States itself. The courts have observed that even the use of deadly force is reasonable under the Fourth Amendment if used in self- defense or to protect others. . . Here, for Fourth Amendment purposes, the right to self-defense is not that of an individual, but that of the nation and its citizens. . . If the government’s heightened interest in self-defense justifies the use of deadly force, then it certainly would also justify warrantless searches.”

23). In addition to the opposition of numerous civil rights groups, cities and police departments across the nation voiced opposition and passed laws and resolutions which called that called the USA Patriot Act a threat to the civil rights of the residents of their communities. Cities passing resolutions in opposition include Cambridge, Denver, Northampton, Amherst, Leverett, Carrboro, Berkeley, Ann Arbor, and so on. The resolution passed in Cambridge, says in part, “We believe these civil liberties [freedom of speech, assembly and privacy; equality before the law; due process; and freedom from unreasonable searches and seizures] are now threatened by the USA Patriot Act.” Police departments in various cities across the nation, including Portland, Ore., vowed to defy the Justice Department and this law, explaining that state law barred police from questioning people who are not suspected of a crime.

24). U.S. citizen, Jose Padilla, of Chicago Illinois, was labeled as an “enemy combatant,” in June of 2002, by the Bush administration. “Enemy combatant,” is a legal designation allowing the government to jail him without formal criminal charges. As of October, 2002, Padilla was still being held in a military prison in South Carolina, although he has not been charged with a crime. Padilla can be held indefinitely. His attorney has argued in court that he is being held illegally and should be released as his arrest and incarceration is “unconstitutional.” Yaser Esam Hamdi was born in Louisiana. He is being held in a military prison, in Norfolk, Virginia, although he has not been charged with a crime. The Justice Department has argued that he is not entitled to an attorney. U.S. District Judge Robert Doumar who is hearing the case, responded to the government’s position by asking, “so the Constitution doesn’t apply to Mr. Hamdi?” He then when on to say: I have no desire to have an enemy combatant get out. But due process requires something other than a declaration by someone named Mobbs that he should be held incommunicado. Isn’t that what we’re fighting for?”

25). Nancy Chang, Senior Litigation Attorney, Center for Constitutional Rights, 10/1/2001. 26). Robert Lederman, Philadelphia City Paper, 1/18/01

27). In October of 1942, Prescott Bush, was managing partner of Brown Brothers Harriman. On Oct. 20, 1942, Under the Trading with the Enemy Act, the U.S. government ordered the seizure of Nazi German banking operations in New York City which were being directed by Prescott Bush, including the Union Banking Corporation, in which Bush was

a director. The U.S. Alien Property Custodian seized Union Banking Corp.’s stock shares, all of which were owned by Prescott Bush, E. Roland, Bunny Harriman, and three Nazis, and two other Bush associates. The vesting order noted that the Union Banking Corporation was run as a front for the “Thyssen family” of “Germany” and designated “Thyssen” as “nationals … of a designated enemy country.” In 1941, Fritz Thyssen, wrote a book, titled, “I Paid Hitler” Kennikat Press, New York, 1972.

28). Office of Alien Property Custodian, Vesting Order No. 248, executed October 20, 1942; F.R. Doc. 42-11568; Filed, November 6, 1942; 7 Fed. Reg. 9097. New York City Directory of Directors list Prescott Bush as a director of Union Banking Corporation for the years 1934 through 1943. Alien Property Custodian Vesting Order No. 259: Seamless Steel Equipment Corporation; Vesting Order No. 261: Holland-American Trading Corp. Alien Property Custodian Vesting Order No. 370: Silesian-American Corp. New York Times (12/16/1944) “The Union Banking Corporation, 39 Broadway, New York, has change its principal place of business to 120 Broadway.” 120 Broadway is the address of the government’s Alien Property Custodian.

29). BBC News, 9/17/2001?CIA Recruits Nazis;” UPI 9/20/2000, “CIA says Nazi general was intelligence source;” Christopher Simpson, “Blowback,” 1988; As detailed by Simpson, BBC News, and UPI, after WWII, Nazis were recruited, brought to the United States, and then subsidized by the CIA to build a power base for the Republican right wing. Some were brought here as individuals others as well organized groups. The U.S. State Department and the CIA put high-ranking Nazis on the intelligence payroll in order to use “their expertise in propaganda and psychological warfare.” Reinhold Gehlen, Hitler’s most senior eastern front military intelligence officer, was employed by the U.S. to fight an intelligence war and to employ propaganda against the American people.

30). Russ Bellant “Old Nazis, The New Right And The Republican Party.” South End Press. Boston, 1991. 31). Washington Jewish Week, 9/8/1988.

32). David Lee Preston, Philadelphia Inquirer, “Fired Bush backer one of several with possible Nazi links” (9/10/1988).

33). Among those fired, included Nicholas Nazarenko, an ex-Waffen SS officer, and Bohdan Fedorak, who headed a WWII Nazi group involved in anti-Jewish wartime pogroms.


–~~~~~~~~~~~~–

Chapter 2

THE NAZI-TERRORIST OIL-CONSPIRACY

ADOLF HITLER

standard-oil-ogo-ig-farben-swastika-rockefeller-nazi-germany-cartel

To fully comprehend the mind set that led to the events of 9/ 11/2001, it is important to understand the history of the Bush family, the CIA, and the leadership of the Republican party, in the years prior to and after Hitler became Chancellor of Germany.

Hitler rose to power on the backs of his own private terrorist organizations, the SA and SS (1,2,3). Hitler also received considerable financial assistance from transnational corporations, including those directed or controlled by Prescott Bush and his associates, Harriman, Walker, and Rockefeller (4,5).

Hitler had been seeking power, to become the leader of Germany, since the early 1920s. Following the failed “beer hall putsch” in November of 1923, and Hitler’s subsequent brief imprisonment, Hitler had vowed to take power “legally” through the ballot box.

In 1932, as his storm troopers ran amok and the next presidential election neared, Hitler was in desperate need of an infusion of cash. It was his intention to again run against von Hindenburg for the Presidency of Germany. Hitler required lots of money if he was to defeat the venerable old general.

Hitler arranged a private speech, before a group of rich industrialists, which he gave at the Park Hotel in Dusseldorf (2,6). This was followed by a second meeting, on January 27, at the Industrial Club, which was arranged by Bush business partner, Fritz Thyssen (2,6,7)

The attendees included the owners and representatives of Germany’s largest companies and corporations including those that were controlled or directed or in business with Prescott Bush, his father-in-law George Walker, and their associates, Harriman and Rockefeller: Standard Oil, IG Farben, Hamburg-Amerika shipping, Consolidated Silesian Steel Corporation, German Steel Trust’s Union Banking Corporation, etc. (4,5,8).

Hitler explained to this moneyed-elite, that he was in favor of eliminating the unions—which is exactly what he did after coming to power. The industrialists were all for that. Hitler also explained he was for total managerial freedom, and that once he came to power the Nazis would begin public works programs and a massive rearmament program that would be directed by the leaders of industry—the wealthy and powerful men in his audience. The government would pay these men to rebuild and re-arm Germany. He certainly had their attention now.

Hitler not only offered them hope, but catastrophe. Communism would destroy them, he explained. If the communists came to power they would confiscate the factories, the private property, and the wealth of the aristocrats and moneyed elite.

Hitler explained, “Bolshevism, if unchecked, will change the world as completely as Christianity. If Communism continues unchecked, three hundred years from now Lenin will be regarded not only as one of the revolutionaries of 1917, but as the founder of a new world doctrine and will be worshipped as much as Buddha.” Only the Nazi party, he warned, could stem the Red tide.Only the Nazi party could lead Germany back to greatness as a world power. Only the Nazi party was offering hope and business opportunity—the opportunity for unlimited growth and unlimited wealth. Within days Hitler and the Nazis were in receipt of incredible sums of money which Hitler put to use in the coming election, and to finance terrorism —terrorism which was funded and supported by companies associated, directed, or controlled by Prescott Bush and his partners (4,5). Hitler believed in the power of terror. Terrorism works.

As Hitler explained in his speeches, private conversations, and in his book, Mein Kampf: Terrorism is a form of propaganda. It is a political weapon that can be used to instill fear, horror and indignation, and to sap and destroy the will of a people. Through fear and terror one can demand obedience and blind submission. Through death and terror (and the promise of more terror to come), the terrorist will conquer all opposition. Terror is a political weapon and its purpose is to force capitulation:

“Cruelty is impressive. Cruelty and brutal strength. The masses want it. They demand it. They need the thrill of terror to make them shudderingly submissive.”

“The joy of killing brings men together.”

“Hate, hate, and more hate. There is nothing that sustains you like hate!”

“My morality is that of the magnificent blond beast, roaming wantonly in seach of prey and victory.”

“Yes, we are barbarians. We want to be barbarians. It is an honorable title.”

“When I came to power, I did not want the concentration camps to become old age pensioners homes, but instruments of terror.”

“Terror is a salutary thing…The most effective method has at all times been terror or violence… terror and violence… is the weapon which most readily conquers reason.”

“Terror at the place of employment, in the factory, in the meeting hall, and on the occasion of mass demonstrations will always be successful unless opposed by equal terror….The defeated adversary in most cases despairs of the success of any further resistance.”

“Violence is broken only by violence and terror by terror. Only terror is capable of smashing terror.”

“This is a tactic based on precise calculation of all human weaknesses and its result will lead to success with almost mathematical certainty… the importance of physical terror toward the individual and the masses…the psychological effect can be calculated with precision…Shameless spiritual terrorization…the hideous abuse of their human freedom…ruthless force and brutality… they always submit in the end.” –Adolf Hitler

As summed up by Hitler in his book, Mein Kampf: Terror is the most effective form of politics. The people must never know if they or their loved ones will be maimed or murdered. They must always feel they are at risk of suffering a horrible death. They must always feel as if the iron hand of terror may strike at any moment, for any reason, or for no reason at all. They or their neighbors may be killed or maimed at any time, at any place—at home, in bed, while making love, while kissing their children good night. Through brutality, physical terror and violence we are able to gain mastery over the soul and the mind of our enemies. We win by making them afraid.

In 1932, Adolf Hitler, flush with the cash that was pouring into his coffers, prepared for the next election by unleashing terrorists upon the people. Germany, in 1932, was thrown into “a state of civil war.” “There was a wave of political violence and murder such as even Germany had not previously seen,” wrote William Shirer (3).

Christopher Isherwood recalled: “Hate exploded suddenly without warning, out of nowhere; at street corners, in restaurants, cinemas, dance halls, swimming baths, at midnight, after breakfast, in the middle of the afternoon. Knives were whipped out, blows were dealt with spiked rings, beer-mugs, chair legs or leaded clubs; bullets slashed the air and rebounded from iron roofs… The storm troopers swarmed the streets seeking battle and blood.”

Even so, despite the terror and an incredible propaganda blitz financed by his friends in commerce and industry, Hitler lost the election. Again, he resorted to terrorism in order to undermine the government. His hope was that if the government fell, President Hindenburg would be forced to appoint him Chancellor.

“We must be ruthless,” Hitler announced. His terrorists gangs were again ordered to run amok, and the government began to totter and fall. And as it fell, the government was given a final shove by Hitler’s friends in industry and commerce who prevailed upon Hindenburg to appoint Hitler Chancellor and to install a Nazi government (2,3).

In 1933, Hitler was appointed Chancellor. The Nazi government immediately unleashed its storm troopers, who swept through the streets, arresting, dragging off, and then beating up and torturing all enemies of the Nazi State who were then confined, if they lived, in one of the numerous make-shift concentration camps that were springing up all over Germany. By the end of 1933, over 50 impromptu concentration camps were established—usually in cellars and bunkers (1,2,3).

Goering, as Minister President of Prussia controlled the Prussian police. He also created his own secret police force, Abteilung IA, which he had exempted from Paragraph 14 of the Prussian Administrative Police Law, and which was rechristened the Geheime Staatspolizei, the Secret State Police. It was a bureaucrat in the post-office who invented the abbreviation, Gestapa; and thus the Gestapo was born (1).

It was Goering’s Gestapo, along with the SA and SS which led the terror campaign to arrest, beat up and to destroy anti-Nazi organizations and individuals without regard for the law. The Gestapo was above the law and it had no obligation to abide by the law. Its job was to annihilate and exterminate all political opposition. It was not just enemies of the Nazis who were murdered and tortured, but anyone and everyone who had somehow offended a member of the SA or SS. German citizens were being beaten with iron bars and truncheons and then starved and whipped (1,2,3).

In April 1934, Goering appointed Heinrich Himmler to be deputy chief of the Prussian Secrete Police. Soon the Gestapo became an arm of the dreaded SS (which had replaced the SA as Hitler’s private terrorist army). The Gestapo and the Nazi SS came under the control of the greatly feared, Heinrich Himmler (1). Those who were counted among Himmler’s “circle of friends” included the leading business men of Germany, several of whom were in business with Prescott Bush, Harriman, Dulles, and Rockefeller.

Himmler’s dreaded SS recruited its members from the upper echelons of society, i.e. the blue bloods, bankers, and aristocrats. As detailed in Heinz Hohn’s, The Order of the Death’s Head, “the first arrivals were from the aristocracy. Even before the Nazi seizure of power certain great names had been added to the SS list” including Grand Dukes, Counts, and Princes. However, after Hitler came to power, “in 1933 there came a further infusion of blue blood. Many of the senior SS posts were occupied by the ruling class elite. The primary requirements in the SS, were money and officer material, and they could come only from one source—the old-established ruling class elite—the nobility, the world of commerce and the financiers… Germany’s captains of industry” (pp. 152, 153, 158).

The SS sported, along with its SS insignia, a skull, the “death head,” and was known as the “brotherhood of death” (1). The SS could, in many ways, be likened to a business-savvy Satanic organization. It was the SS which ran Hitler’s exterminationand slave labor camps.

There have been allegations that Hitler’s German-Nazi SS had a fraternal counterpart in the United States, the “Order of Skull and Bones,” which was known as “the Order” and the “Brotherhood of Death.”

The American chapter of the “Order of Skull and Bones” also has its roots in Germany (see chapter 3). Its headquarters? Yale University (7) the alma matter of Prescott Bush, George H.W. Bush, and George W. Bush.

Like its German counterpart, the American “brotherhood of death” also known as the “Order of Skull and Bones” recruited its members from the upper echelons of society, i.e. the blue bloods, bankers, and aristocrats. Among is members: Prescott, George H.W. and George W. Bush (8).

BUSH THE NAZI BUSINESSMAN

Hitler had always intended the SS to be his personal instrument of terror. It was to be mysterious, sinister, a black-robed secret order that was totally above the law, but whose tentacles reached into every German home. Listening and watching with hundreds of thousands of unseen eyes, the Gestapo, aided by informers and 2,800,000 men in the regular police, duly noted any and all suspect behavior that even remotely suggested even a hint of treachery or opposition to Nazism. The SS ruthlessly weeded out all enemies of the Nazi state. Thousands of German citizens, including politicians and labor leaders, were either murdered or confined to one of the more than 20 concentration camps or the 160 affiliated labor camps where they were used as slave labor (1).

These slave laborers not only earned money for Himmler’s SS, but those industrialists and bankers who helped the Nazis come to power. Some of those banks and corporations were directed by or directly connected to Prescott Bush and the Rockefellers (4,5,9).

Prescott Bush and his partners were in fact in business with several leading Nazis, such as Friedrich Flick (4,5,10) who later became Hitler’s minister of the Interior (2,3). IG Farben (11,12) the company that developed the poison gas to kill Russians, gypsies, and Jews, and which also ran several of the concentration camps, was in partnership with Rockefeller’s Standard oil, as well as in business with Bush and associates. Likewise, Bush and his partner, Harriman, were in business with Fritz Thyssen (4,5) who had been supporting Hitler since the early 1920s (2,3).

According to the United States Government, Prescott Bush’s Union Banking Corporation (which he directed) was working as a front for the “Thyssen family” of “Germany… nationals … of a designated enemy country” (12). In 1941, Fritz Thyssen, wrote a book, titled, “I Paid Hitler.”

Likewise, Prescott Bush and associates and Standard Oil, were in business with IG Farben, providing loans, executive expertise, and petroleum-related products (13). IG Farben in fact owned a huge stake in Standard Oil. IG Farben, in association with Standard Oil, used that expertise to develop poison gas and petroleum related products to drive the Nazi war machine. IG Farben—a consortium of companies that included Bayer— also ran the slave labor and death-camps, the most notorious of which was Auschwitz where 83,000 people worked as slaves. IG Farben/Bayer not only worked people to death, but provided funds, scientists, and medical personnel to conduct horrible experiments on inmates.
Throughout the 1930s, and the early 1940s, the Bush family and other “Bonesmen” formed an unholy alliance with the SS and Hitler’s Nazi Germany. Indeed, the evidence indicates that Prescott Bush was not just doing business with the Nazis and profiting from the use of slave labor, but that his company became members of the “Friends of the Reichsfuhrer SS,” that is, friends of SS Gestapo chief, Heinrich Himmler.

As detailed by Heinz Hohn (1), the Hamburg-Amerika shipping company, and its directors, were honored as “Friends of the Reichsfuhrer SS.” Prescott Bush was one of the directors of the Hamburg-Amerika shipping company (13, 14). Hamburg-Amerika was seized by the U.S. government in August 1942 along with another Bush company, Union Bank in November of that year (12), for trading with the enemy or for acting as Nazi-fronts and for distributing Nazi propaganda in the United States. Indeed, Congressional hearings in 1934 established that Hamburg-Amerika routinely provided free transatlantic passage for those distributing Nazi propaganda (15).

Why would Bush and friends import Nazi propaganda? In order to destroy democracy in the United States.

“A clique of U.S. industrialists is hell-bent to bring a fascist state to supplant our democratic government and is working closely with the fascist regime in Germany and Italy. I have had plenty of opportunity in my post in Berlin to witness how close some of our American ruling families are to the Nazi regime.” —William Dodd, U.S. Ambassador to Germany in 1937.

Before his companies were seized, Prescott Bush freely admitted and described his own role in running the Hamburg-Amerika shipping company: “Three or four of us were really running the business, the day to day business all the administrative decisions and the executive decisions. We were the ones that did it. We were the managing partners, let’s say. What other proof do we have? Emil Helfferich, the chairman of Bush company, Hamburg-Amerika, frequently wrote out checks to Heinrich Himmler (payable on a special Standard Oil account). According to U.S. intelligence documents reviewed by author Anthony Sutton, Helfferich was still making these payments to the S.S. in 1944 —the same S.S. which was rounding up, enslaving, and supervising the mass murder of “subhumans” (Russians, Jews, Gypsies, Poles, etc.), at IG Farben’s death camps.

Thus as a director of the Hamburg-Amerika shipping company Prescott Bush, the father of George H.W. Bush, became “partners” with and “Friends of the Reichsfuhrer SS,” and thus provided financial support for a Nazi terrorist organization (the Gestapo) that spied on, terrorized, and murdered not just German citizens, but Jews, Americans, and the peoples of Europe.

“The Bush family were crucial players in setting up the industrial power behind the Third Reich.” -Robert Lederman, Philadelphia City Paper (1/18/01).

“Certain American industrialists had a great deal to do with bringing fascist regimes into being in both Germany and Italy. They extended aid to help Fascism occupy the seat of power, and they are helping to keep it there.”—William Dodd, US Ambassador to Germany in 1937.

“The Bush family fortune came from the Third Reich.” — John Loftus, former prosecutor in the U.S. Justice Department’s Nazi War Crimes Unit.

Hitler and his SS, as is well known, murdered tens of millions of people, including six million Jews, and millions of other “sub-humans” including Germans who were retarded, disabled, or suffering from epilepsy and other disorders.

This Nazi program was based on the emerging science of “eugenics,” a neo-Darwinian concept in which the State weeds out the weak, in favor of the strong; i.e. the sterilization and/or execution of mental patients, the insane, the retarded, the feeble minded, criminals, and physically disabled including those who are blind or deaf. The goal of eugenics is the purification of the race by preventing the breeding of inferior races and unfit individuals.

“Those who are physically and mentally unhealthy and unworthy must not perpetuate their suffering in the body of their children. The prevention of the faculty and opportunity to procreate on the part of the physically degenerate and mentally sick, over a period of only 600 years, would … free humanity from an immeasurable misfortune.” -Adolf Hitler

“Famine in India, unwanted babies in the United States, poverty that seemed to form an unbreakable chain for millions of people—how should we tackle these problems? It is quite clear that one of the major challenges of the 1970s will be to curb the world’s fertility.” -George H. W. Bush

Prescott Bush and his son, George H.W. Bush were enthusiastic supporters of “eugenics,” the weeding out of inferior humans. Before G.H.W. Bush became president, he frequently made remarks about the “down-breeding… of America” and sponsored hearings, such as one that took place in August 5, 1969, on the threat posed by black babies (16).

We should not be surprised therefore to learn that companies directed or associated with Prescott Bush and his associates such as Rockefeller and Harriman, also supported the Nazi eugenics programs. As noted, Emil Helfferich, the chairman of Bush company, Hamburg-Amerika, frequently wrote out checks to Heinrich Himmler and his S.S.—the same S.S. which was rounding up and supervising the mass murder of “subhumans” at IG Farben’s death camps.

The principle behind eugenics, is that only those with “good genes” that is, those of “good birth” and who are “well born” (i.e. aristocrats) deserve to live and to breed. Prescott and George H.W. Bush, as blue-blooded members of America’s aristocracy, and thus of “good birth” and “well born” were thus ardent supporters of eugenics, with George Bush later pushing for the sterilization of inferior races (16).

Thus, being birds of a feather, Prescott Bush and his partner, Harriman, used the Hamburg-Amerika Line, to transport Nazi specialists in propaganda to the United States, including those advocating and practicing eugenics—and the Rockefellers did likewise (17).

NAZIFICATION OF THE CIA

Prescott Bush was in business with the Nazis, his son George H.W. Bush would hire Nazis, and neo-Nazi advisors (9,18), and both would advocate Nazi practices such as eugenics, in order to purify the race. Indeed, both men even made arrangements for Nazis and those supporting Nazi policies to come to this country.

Prescott Bush, of course, did not act alone. Bush was in business with his father-in-law, George Walker, the Harrimans, and the Rockefellers. And then there is the Dulles brothers, Allen Dulles acting as legal counsel to the Bush-Harriman-Rockefeller clique, as well as a go-between in setting up deals with leading Nazis.

At the close of the second world war, Prescott Bush, Rockefeller, and Dulles were still in business with the Nazis, and assisted hundreds of Nazis to come to the United States, and to obtain work in the Republican party and in the OSS (5,9)—a spy agency which would later be named, the CIA (19).

As revealed by the National Archives, as admitted by the CIA, and as reported by BBC and UPI (20), the CIA recruited and employed hundreds of high ranking Nazis, including Nazi General Reinhard Gehlen who placed his Nazi spy ring at the disposal of the United States following the close of WWII. Gehlen was Hitler’s senior intelligence officer on the Eastern Front during the war and was responsible for the torture and murder of millions of Soviet prisoners.

Gehlen’s network of SS and Gestapo Nazi agents, not only in the East, but in Europe were secretly released from prisoner of war camps by U.S. intelligence officers (4,20), including Allen Dulles (4,24), the same Allen Dulles who worked for Prescott Bush and company, as a lawyer (25). Prescott Bush, Harriman, and the Rockefellers called upon the Dulles brothers to help cover up the fact that they were in business with the Nazis.

Dulles was an excellent choice, because of his connections to the Roosevelt administration, and because, in the 1930s Dulles had helped establish several interlocking financial networks between IG Farben, Standard Oil and the ruling family of Saudi Arabia, the House of Saud.

Dulles was well rewarded for his work and became the first director of the CIA. Gehlen’s Nazi CIA spy ring, became known as “the Gehlen Organization and received millions of dollars in funding from the U.S. until 1956” (UPI 9/20/2000).

Additional files released by the CIA on April 29. 2001, indicates that hundreds of World War II Nazi war criminals ended up on the CIA payroll, including Klaus Barbie, the infamous “Butcher of Lyon.” Barbie was eventually convicted of crimes against humanity by a French court. Barbie was not the only “Butcher” that the Bush-Dulles clique helped to escape from justice.Nazi Major General Walter Dornberger who had been sentenced to death by hanging for war crimes was also welcomed with open arms (21).

A U.S. Justice Department spokesman Eli Rosenbaum said “the files demonstrated hat the real winners of the war were Nazi war criminals” (21). Not surprisingly, the CIA, like the Gestapo, would employ espionage, propaganda, terror, chemical and biological warfare, including the purposeful infection and murder of American citizens to obtain its objectives (22, see also chapter 8). And, like the Gestapo, the CIA would be, as it still is, above the law.

TERROR: HITLER STYLE

“The great masses of the people will more easily fall victims to a big lie than to a small one.”—Adolf Hitler,

Hitler believed in using terror as a political weapon and to justify war and the destruction of his enemies. Terror would also play a major role in assisting him in pursuing one of his major objectives, an attack on the Soviet Union, and the seizure of the oil-rich states in the Caspian basin (2,3,23).

It was the oil rich lands of the Caspian basin, and “living space” that Hitler sought. But before he dared grab what he believed was rightfully his, he had to first deal with Poland which blocked the way (2,3). Initially, Hitler tried to negotiate with the government of Poland for a “corridor” across their land, upon which the Nazis intended to construct highways and railroad routes, which could be used to transport German troops. Hitler tried threats and bribes, but it was to no avail. Finally, after months of negotiation and days and months of “terrorist” provocation (which he claimed was directed at Germany by Poland) he gave the Poles one last chance. He made them a final “generous offer.”

They refused. Hitler was not the only one involved in a dispute with Poland. Since 1934, the Polish government had been fighting with the American and German stockholders who controlled the Upper Silesian Coal and Steel Company (2)—a Prescott Bush company(14). According to a March 19, 1934, article which appeared in the New York Times, the Upper Silesian Coal and Steel Company was being accused of “excessive borrowing, fictitious bookkeeping and gambling in securities.” The New York Times then went on to say: “Two-thirds of the company’s stock is owned by Friedrich Flick, a leading German steel industrialist, and the remainder is owned by interests in the United States” i.e. Bush, Harriman and gang. According to the New York Times, “Herr Flick” fearing “an attempt to make the company’s board entirely Polish, retaliated by restricting credits” so that “the new Polish directors were unable to pay the workmen regularly.”

The Polish division of the Upper Silesian Coal and Steel Company, in addition to fraud, had also failed to pay taxes to the Polish government. Millions were owed. The dispute would be settled, in 1939, with the destruction of Poland by Nazi Germany.

Hitler, however, needed justification to attack an independent state which had done him no harm. His generals were reluctant to attack, as they knew that the German people and the international community were opposed to war (2,3).

Hitler promised his generals that he would give the German people “a propagandist reason for starting the war. The victor” he told them, “will not be asked afterward whether he told the truth or not. In starting and waging a war, it is not right that matters, but victory.”

However, Hitler knew that he needed deeds not words. Days later, on August 31, 1939, operation “Canned Goods,” the code name for a “terrorist” attack on German citizens and German property, was carried out by SS men dressed in Polish Army uniforms (2,3). There had already been numerous “terrorist” attacks conducted against German property and civilians by SS men dressed as Polish soldiers. Hitler, however, needed one final grand attack to justify his war.

On August 1, concentration camp inmates, who had been drugged and shot, and dressed in Polish uniforms, were displayed as evidence of unceasing Polish terrorism being waged on Germany. These “terrorist” attacks, including the final, August 31, attack on a German radio station, provided the justification for war.

On September 1, 1939, Hitler explained to the German people and the world, that because of these terrorist assaults, “I have therefore resolved to speak to Poland in the same language that Poland for months past has used toward us. Polish soldiers fired on our territory. We have now been returning fire, and from now on bombs will be met with bombs.”

As the world later learned, these terrorists assaults on Germany were conducted by German SS agents under the watchful eye of Himmler’s SS and Gestapo (1,2,3).

–~~~~~~~~~~~~–

HITLER & IBN SAUD

In 1941, after defeating France and conquering Europe, Hitler prepared to attack Russia, which in fact, had been his plan since the 1920s, as detailed in his book, Mein Kampf (23): “And so we National Socialists consciously draw a line beneath the foreign policy tendency of our pre-War period. We take up where we broke off six hundred years ago. We stop the endless German movement to the south and west, and turn our gaze toward the land in the east. At long last we break off the colonial and commercial policy of the pre-War period and shift to the soil policy of the future. If we speak of soil in Europe today, we can primarily have in mind only Russia and her vassal border states.”

Hitler wanted “living space” and “oil.” And, he planned that upon conquering the Soviet Union, that Russia would be “divided up into individual states with governments of their own.”

One of Hitler’s allies in this campaign, was the king of Saudi Arabia, Ibn Saud (26). Ibn Saud was the leader of the SunniWahhabi sect of Islam. Saud was the principle Arab leader who had united the Arabian Peninsula early in the 1900s. Hitler was most appreciative of Arab support, but not in the manner that Ibn Saud may have envisioned. In 1942, Hitler once said: “I’m going to become a religious figure. Soon, I’ll be the great chief of the Tartars. Already, Arabs and Moroccans are mingling my name with their prayers. Amongst the Tartars, I shall become Khan. The only thing of which I shall be incapable is to share the sheiks mutton with them. I’m a vegetarian, and they must spare me from their meat. If they don’t wait too long, I’ll fall back on their harems!”

In the 1930s Ibn Saud had his eye on Iraq and the southern states of the Soviet Union, whose populations were predominantly Muslim. Ibn Saud dreamed of spreading Sunni-Wahhabi control over this region, thus creating an even greater Islamic state which would be under the domination of the Saud family. Ibn Saud’s preferred methods of conquest, terror and the sword.

Hitler saw eye to eye with Saud: “In this struggle which will decide the fate of the Arabs I can now speak as a man dedicated to an ideal and as a military leader and a soldier. Everyone united in this great struggle who helps to bring about its successful outcome, serves the common cause and thus serves the Arab cause…. The situation is as follows: We are conducting the great struggle to open the way to the North of the Caucasus…during the struggle (and we don’t know when victory will come, but probably not in the far future) we will reach the Southern Caucasus…then I would like to issue a declaration; for then the hour of the liberation of the Arabs will have arrived.”

Ibn Saud was not only in business with Hitler, but with the Rockefellers and associates—individuals and corporations which were likewise in business with the Nazi-regime.

Hitler, the oil companies, Bush-Harriman-Rockefeller-Dulles, and the Saudi-Wahhabi clan of Saudi Arabia, joined in an axis of evil. They all had their eyes on the same prize: the Persian Gulf, the central Asian states, and oil.
The only way to grab that prize would be war. The Soviet Union would have to be defeated and destroyed, something that Hitler had been promising since writing his book, Mein Kampf.

War has always been good for business—that is, the business of war. Thus those who would most profit from war, e.g., bankers, arm’s manufacturers, and those oil-companies and nations with their eyes on the same prize, had latched onto Hitler and his Nazi party, for the sole purpose of bringing him to power so that he would launch his war against the Soviet Union. Hitler’s early allies included Bush, Harriman, Rockefeller’s Standard Oil, and the royal family of Saudi Arabia.

“The Nazis would have remained a minor political party, and Germany would have remained a cash-starved country, weaponless and powerless, but for the massive influx of outside investment capital. Our intelligence sources believe that the most important event of this period was the alliance between American oil companies and Saudi Arabia. It was the indispensable precondition for the war and the Nazi holocaust” (John Loftus & Mark Aarons, 4).

The Nazis wanted oil, world domination, and supported mass extermination and terrorism. Bush and Harriman were in business with the Nazis and supported eugenics and terrorism. Standard oil wanted oil and funneled money to Himmler’s SS and supported terrorism (13). The Wahhabis, like the Nazis, were seeking world domination through mass conversion to Sunni-Wahhabism, and failing that, the mass extermination of those who resist. And all had their eyes on the oil-rich southern Caucuses and Caspian basin.

Six decades later terror would again be employed and would again serve as justification for seeking access to these oil-rich states which would be torn away from Russia. And just as the royal family of Saudi Arabia, Bush and associates, and American oil formed an unholy alliance with a terrorist (Nazi) regime in the 1930s and 1940s (4,5,11,12,13,19), the Saudi royal family, Bush and associates, and American oil companies would form an unholy alliance with a terrorist regime that would attack America on September 11, 2001.

The goals would remain the same: the oil-rich lands of the Caspian basin.

According to UNOCAL, nearly 200 billion barrels of oil may lie beneath the soil of Turkmenistan, Kazakhstan, Azerbaijan, and Uzbekistan —what had been the southern states of the Soviet Union: $40 trillion dollars in oil!

The Saudi Royal family, the CIA, and the Bush family and their associates in the oil business, have been drooling over these riches for decades.

THE OIL-TERROR PIPELINE

In the 1930s and 1940s, the Nazis would lead the effort to break up and conquer the southern states of the Soviet Union. At the end of the war, thousands of Nazis would be recruited into the CIA (19,20) and the Republican party. Decades later, the Nazi-infested CIA who would again set out to break up and conquer the oil-rich southern states of the Soviet Union. Like the Nazis, the CIA would employ terrorists and form an alliance with a consortium of oil-companies and the SunniWahhabi clans of Saudi Arabia in order to achieve this objective (27,28,29).

As detailed by Zbigniew Brzezinski, National Security Adviser to the Carter Administration, in an interview with weekly French publication, Le Nouvel Observateur (28), in July 1979 President Jimmy Carter secretly approved CIA efforts which were already underway in Afghanistan to topple the Soviet backed regime. The purpose of this aid, was to draw the Soviets into Afghanistan and to instill civil unrest in the central Asian oil-rich countries it controlled.

It was also in 1979, that Osama bin Laden, who was representing his family company in Istanbul, began working with the CIA to recruit “Arab-Muslim volunteers for Afghan’s resistance against the Red Army” (30). In 1979, Osama bin Laden, the business man, helped launch the holy war which was to topple the Soviet-backed regime in Afghanistan—the key to the central Asian states—and hopefully strip the oil rich regions of central Asia from the grasp of the Soviet Union.

Afghanistan was the key, for in the words of UNOCAL vice president, John J. Maresca: “A route through Afghanistan is the best option with the fewest technical obstacles that would bring Central Asian oil closest to Asian markets and thus would be the cheapest in terms of transporting the oil.”

First Afghanistan then central Asia, and then an oil pipeline could be built leading to the sea.

Osama bin Laden’s family, being in the construction and oilrelated business, and the Saudi royal family —all of whom were in business with the Bush family, even in the 1970s— stood to make billions of dollars if Afghanistan and the central Asian states became subject to western control.

According to William Casey (27), Director of the CIA during the Reagan-Bush administration, the principle reason for training and funding the Afghan mujahideen, was to wage terrorism and war against the Soviet Union, “with Saudi cooperation,” and to sow discord in the Soviet Central Asia, in order to stir an Islamic revolution and pry these states away from the Soviet sphere of influence.
Afghanistan was a key player because Afghanistan provided the only sensible route from the oil fields north of its border to Pakistan and thus the sea.

As detailed by Peter Schweizer (27), “arms were being purchased on the international market with Saudi money and the CIA was flying them from Dhahran to Islamabad. The CIA was also flying in weapons and ammunition. Ten thousand tons of arms and ammunition were going through the channel every year. However, that this was done through the Wahhabi clan was top secret;” the Wahhabi clan being the bin Ladens and the Saudi royal family. The Saudis were happy to play a major role. Saudi Arabia’s King Faud, and other prominent Saudi families belonged to the Wahhabi clan. Like king Ibn Saud from decades before, they wished to extend the rule of Wahhabi-Sunni Muslims across Afghanistan, Pakistan, and the oil-rich states of the former Soviet Union in order to create a single Islamic superstate ruled by Muslims subscribing to the Wahhabi branch of Sunni Islam (31,32).

The Wahhabis, like Hitler, were seeking to establish a ruthless Nazi-like “New World Order” which would be ruled with an iron-fist by the Saudi-Wahhabism elite and the chosen few: “Wahhabism exalts and promotes death in every element of its existence, the suicide of its adherents, mass murder as a weapon against civilization, and above all the suffocation of the mercy embodied in Islam”—Stephen Schwartz, The Two Faces of Islam (32).

*******

The Soviet Union finally collapsed in the 1990s, but as the first Bush administration would soon be out of power, and as civil war raged in Afghanistan, conditions were not yet ripe for establishing the pipeline and gaining access to the fabulous riches that lay beneath the soil of the Caspian basin. Ten years would pass.

With the election of George W. Bush, in 2000, negotiations began in earnest with the Taliban rulers of Afghanistan (29). But, the Taliban refused the terms offered by the Bush team, and could not be bought off by the tens of millions of dollars they had already received since Bush came to power. The Bush administration threatened to destroy them (29).

The Taliban were not swayed.

The Bush team, however, had an ace in the hole, and his name was Osama bin Laden.

As the Bush team well knew, a terrorist assault, launched against the United States from a base deep inside Afghanistan, would be justification for the invasion of that country, the annihilation of its government, and the installation of a regime which would welcome the United States military and the construction of an oil pipeline across its soil. And this is exactly what came to pass after the terrorist attack of 9/11.

Hence, just as Hitler and the Nazis would first negotiate with the government of Poland for a “corridor” across their land, the Bush administration would first negotiate with the Taliban rulers of Afghanistan for the right to build a pipeline across their country (29). And just as Germany was repeatedly provoked by terrorist attacks (conducted by its own agents) the United States would be repeatedly provoked by Osama bin Laden—a man whose family (and their associates) stood to make millions of dollars in oil-related business if only the Taliban would agree to the Bush administration terms (see chapter 12).

And like the Poles 60 years before, negotiations with the Taliban rulers of Afghanistan would be to no avail. Finally, in August, after threatening to destroy them, the Bush administration made a final generous offer and a stark choice: “A carpet of bombs or a carpet of gold” (29).

The Taliban leadership of Afghanistan refused.

On September 11, 2001, the United States was attacked by terrorists who had in the past received funding from the CIA (27,29); terrorists who belonged to an organization linked to Osama bin Laden. Bin Laden’s family had been in business with the Bush family for years (34,35,36) and they, along with Bush associates, stood to make billions of dollars in U.S. war-related spending and and pipeline construction (35). Conveniently, these terrorists made Afghanistan their home base during the final term of the Clinton administration, in 1996.

And, conveniently, these terrorists attacked the United States only after George W. Bush had been installed as President of the United States and the representatives of the oil business were installed in positions of power in his administration (36). And, just as the world and the German people had learned that these terrorist attacks occurred under the protective gaze of Germany’s intelligence agencies, Americans would learn that the terrorists who struck on 9/11, did so under the watchful gaze of the modern American version of Hitler’s Gestapo.

THIS IS NOT TERRORISM: ITS STRICTLY BUSINESS

“In politics, nothing happens by accident. If it happens, it was planned that way.” —President Franklin D. Roosevelt

“The president was provided information about bin Laden wanting to engage in hijacking,” -Bush White House Spokesman, Ari Fleischer.

As we shall detail in later chapters, despite their claims of having been taken unawares and with complete surprise, top officials in the FBI, CIA, and Bush administration, knew with absolute certainty that al-Qaeda was planning to launch a major attack on the United States before the end of 2001. And they knew that five-man hijacking teams would commandeer American commercial jetliners and crash them, kamikaze style, into the twin towers of the World Trade Center.
“They don’t have any excuse because the information was in their lap and they didn’t do anything to prevent it,” -Senator Richard Shelby.

Not only was the information in their lap, but some of the 9/ 11 hijackers may have been in their pocket. We know that the CIA and bin Laden formed an association in 1979 (if not sooner) and that his mission was to recruit Arab-Muslim volunteers for Afghan’s resistance against the Red Army (37,38). Despite official denials, there is considerable evidence that “five of the alleged hijackers… received training at secure U.S. military installations” (39). We know that the Reagan-Bush administration wanted to assassinate Libyan President, Moamar Gadafy and that 10 years later, in 1996 bin Laden would be hired by British Intelligence to assassinate Gadafy (40).

That same year, bin Laden, who was losing millions of dollars in his many business ventures in Sudan, left his troubles behind. In 1996, at the urgings of the U.S. and the Saudi royal family, bin Laden moved to Afghanistan, where he then proceeded to buy influence and power—courtesy of tens of millions of dollars being funneled to him via his many friends in the U.S. and the Saudi royal family.

“This is not jihad. This is strictly business” —Osama bin Laden (41).

It has also been reported by independent intelligence sources that bin Laden has frequently met with CIA agents, and that he met again with a CIA agent in July, 2001 and provided details of the coming 9/11 attack (42). Attorney General, John Ashcroft broke with tradition and stopped flying commercial jets after that meeting (43).

And we know that the CIA had been tracking and closely monitoring several of the 9/11 hijackers since 1999 (44). We know that the CIA tracked and then met with and debriefed one of the 9/ 11 hijackers in January and February of 2001 (45). We know that the CIA was monitoring the phone conversations of several of the 9/11 hijackers during which the coming attack was discussed (46). We know the CIA as well as top officials in the FBI sabotaged and actively interfered with the investigative efforts of FBI field agents who were on the verge of uncovering the 9/11 plot (47,48).

And we know that Hitler’s SS employed similar tactics in 1939, training and employing “terrorists” who attacked German targets, which “justified” Hitler’s war on Poland (1,2,3).
And we know that the CIA recruited thousands of Nazis and SS leaders following the war, and has repeatedly relied on Nazi tactics to meet its objectives and those of big business including the oil industry (9,13,20).

In the days before the attack, the CIA tape recorded 9/11 hijacker, Mohammed Atta as he described by phone to a known al-Qaeda leader, the upcoming attack and gave that date on which it would occur: September 11, 2001 (46).

By law, Atta and fellow 9/11 hijacker, Marwan Al-Shehhi, should have never been granted visas or allowed into the country.

Atta had been implicated in previous terrorist attacks and he had allegedly met with a senior Iraqi intelligence officer (46,49). Atta and al-Shehhi had also been tracked, by the CIA, to Afghanistan and Osama bin Laden’s terrorist training camps (50). And yet, in the months prior to 9/11 they were allowed to continue their activities in this country unhindered; activities which included flight training. Atta and Marwan were not alone. Several of the other hijackers had also been granted visas and allowed into this country in the weeks and months before 9/11 although they were known to be directly associated with bin Laden’s al-Qaeda (46,49).

The CIA had been monitoring two of the 9/11 hijackers, Khalid al-Midhar and Nawaf al-Hazmi since at least January 2000 (46). Both men, as the CIA knew, were linked to al-Qaeda and had met with Osama bin Laden. In fact the CIA monitored their movements in Afghanistan and then tracked them to Malaysia, where they were photographed attending an al-Qaeda conference speaking with a number of al-Qaeda operatives. And then, the CIA tracked both men from Malaysia to the United States where they took up residence in San Diego, renting a room in the house of an FBI informer (46). These two terrorists then proceeded, for the next 18 months, to move about freely and to hold meetings with at least six of the other hijackers, including Mohammed Atta and Hani Hanjour. Hanjour would later hijack American Airlines Flight 77, Yet another 9/11 hijacker, Ziad al-Jarrah had even been questioned by the CIA about “his terrorist activities” after spending three weeks at an al-Qaeda training camp in Afghanistan. The CIA had closely monitored his movements, and then questioned, debriefed, and then allowed al-Jarrah to travel to the United States (50). On 9/11, Ziad al-Jarrah piloted the hijacked jet that crashed in Pennsylvania.

Top officials in the FBI, CIA, and other U.S. intelligence agencies had known since the year 2000, that individuals known or suspected to be linked with bin Laden or other terrorists groups, had been slipping into the country, and were planning on hijacking and crashing commercial jetliners into U.S. cities (46,49).

They also knew that suspected terrorists on the FBI’s “watch list” were receiving flight training. And they knew that men on their “watch list” were holding late night meetings that were attended by other men who were being watched (46,49).

In fact eight of those on the FBI’s watch list lived at the same address as two of the 9/11 hijackers: Hamza al-Ghamdi and Ahmed al-Ghamdi. All ten men shared a dormitory at Flight Safety International—a flight school in Vero Beach—and were training to be pilots. Hamza and Ahmed were on the jet that hit the south Tower of the World Trade Center (46,49).

Yet another certified pilot on the FBI’s watch list shared an address in Daytona Beach with Waleed al-Shehri, a hijacker on the flight that struck the north Tower of the World Trade Center. Also at that address: Saeed al-Ghamdi, a hijacker on the flight that crashed in Pennsylvania (46,49).

Top officials in the FBI, CIA, and Bush administration, not only knew of this activity, they acted, in the words of FBI agents, Colleen Rowley (47) and O’Neil (48), to “block,” “sabotage” and interfere with the investigative efforts of FBI agents, including those who were on the verge of uncovering the plot.

For example, in July of 2001, Phoenix FBI agent, Kenneth Williams (51), submitted a five page report to FBI Headquarters that linked a number of Middle Eastern flight students to Osama bin Laden and to a radical British Islamic group, Al-Muhajiroun. He also discovered that one of the flight school students had communicated with Abu Zubaydah, one of bin Laden’s top aides. He recommended that the FBI immediately begin canvassing flight schools in order to identify any suspected terrorists.

FBI headquarters turned down his request (46).

Top FBI officials then interfered with the investigative efforts of Minneapolis FBI agents who believed they had uncovered a plot to attack the World Trade Center (47).

The Minneapolis offices asked for a warrant to search the computer and personal effects of Zacarias Moussaoui who had been arrested by FBI agents on August 15 of 2001, just weeks before the 9/11 attack (47,49). Moussaoui had been requesting training in a Boeing 747 simulator. However, he had no interest in learning about landings or takeoffs. According to an instructor at the flight school: “He just wanted to learn to steer the plane, which was very odd.”

Instead, the warrant was rewritten by headquarters, critical information was deleted (47), and was then rejected by the same top level FBI officials who had rejected the William’s memo which warned of a similar terrorist attack (46).

As detailed by Coleen Rowley, a senior FBI agent in the Minneapolis office, in a 13 page memo sent to FBI Director Mueller, FBI officials instead “blocked” and “sabotaged” their investigation, and altered and deleted critical information so that a warrant would not and could not be issued (41). She accused Mueller and FBI headquarters of sabotaging and blocking the investigation, and of engaging in a “cover up” for “political reasons.”

What political reasons?

Oil. Trillions of dollars in oil.

Coleen Rowley (47) went on to note that other agents were accusing FBI headquarters of “deliberate” sabotage. Comments “were actually made that the key FBIHQ personnel had to be spies or moles.. who were actually working for Osama Bin Laden.”

OF COURSE BUSH KNEW

The CIA and Bush administration knew about the attack in advance, they allowed known al-Qaeda terrorists to come to this country and move about freely, they interfered with the investigative efforts of those FBI agents who threatened to uncover the plot, and they knew that the attack of 9/11 would be immediately followed by biological terrorism, i.e. letters containing weapons-grade anthrax.

On the morning of 9/11, top Bush administration officials and support staff, began taking the anthrax-antibiotic Cipro, weeks before the first anthrax attacks became public (52).

Bush administration officials not only knew in advance about the anthrax and that the World Trade Center would be attacked on 9/11 they welcomed the attacks which is why these same officials conspired to block and sabotage the efforts of FBI field agents who were on the verge of uncovering the 9/11 plot.

The claims by the intelligence community that they “failed to connect the dots” is an absurdity.

“I don’t believe any longer that it’s a matter of connecting the dots. I think they had a veritable blueprint and we want to know why they didn’t act on it.” Republican Senator Arlen Specter, 6/6/ 2002.

Top CIA and FBI officials, and members of the Bush administration, failed to connect the dots because they are the dots.

The terrorist assault of 9/11 would provide the Bush administration and their associates in the oil and defense industries, with the justification for war and the opportunity to build a pipeline across Afghanistan in order to gain access to the multi-trillion dollars in oil that lay just beyond Afghanistan’s northern border.

Iraq would be next.

Terrorism, of course, is not just about oil and money, but power. As will be detailed in later chapters, the CIA and thus the American government, have employed terrorism for decades in order to topple left-wing leaders and bring to power right-wing governments in their place. We should thus not be surprised to discover that the September 11, 2001 terrorist attack on the United States was also in the best interests of a right wing government— that of George W. Bush.

“We expect to get votes in the fall because of the War on Terrorism.” Ari Fleischer, Bush White House Spokesman.

“Bush Adviser Suggests War as Campaign Theme.” -New York Times, 1/19/02

Identical political strategies were used and implemented by Nazis in 1933. “It’s a classic tactic. It’s one that Hitler also used.” -Herta Daubler-Gmelin, Germany’s Justice Minister, 9/17/2002.

NOTES

1). Heinz Hohne. The Order of the Death’s Head.” Ballantine, New York. 1967.
2). J. Toland. “Adolf Hitler,” Doubleday, New York, 1976
3). W. L. Shirer. “The Rise & Fall of the Third Reich.” Fawcett World Library, New York, 1960.
4). John Loftus and Mark Aarons. “The Secret War Against The Jews” St. Martins Press, New York, 1994; Charles Higham, “Trading with the Enemy: An Expose of the Nazi-American Money Plot 1933-1949,” Delacorte Press, 1983.
5). Webster, G. Tarpley & Anton Chaitkin, “George Bush: The Unauthorized Biography,” The Executive Intelligence Review.
6). Goebell’s Diaries.
7). Anthony Sutton, “America’s Secret Establishment: An introduction to The Order of Skull & Bones” Liberty House, New York. 1986; Ron Rosenbaum, “The Last Secrets of Skull and Bones,” Esquire Magazine, September, 1977; Peggy Alder-Robohm, “Skull and Bones — Bush’s Boy’s Club,” Covert Action Quarterly No. 33, 1990; John Schrag, “Skeleton in His Closet,” Willamette Week, September 19-25, 1991; David W. Dunlap, “Yale Society Resists Peeks Into Its Crypt,” New York Times, 11/4/88
8). Anthony Sutton, “America’s Secret Establishment: An introduction to The Order of Skull & Bones” Liberty House, NewYork. 1986; Peggy Alder-Robohm, “Skull and Bones — Bush’s Boy’s Club,” Covert Action Quarterly No. 33, 1990; John Schrag, “Skeleton in His Closet,” Willamette Week, September 19-25, 1991.
9). Russ Bellant “Old Nazis, The New Right And The Republican Party.” South End Press. Boston, 1991. Charles Higham, “Trading with the Enemy: An Expose of the Nazi-American Money Plot, 1933-1949,” Delecorte Press, New York, 1983
10). Prescott Bush acknowledged his partnership with Frick, in a March 19, 1934, letter to Averell Harriman. Prescott Bush. Bush, who was director of the German Steel Trust’s Union Banking Corporation was concerned about a problem which had developed in the Flick partnership. See also Webster G. Tarpley & Anton Chaitkin, “George Bush: The Unauthorized Biography,” The Executive Intelligence Review; John Loftus and Mark Aarons. “The Secret War Against The Jews” St. Martins Press, New York, 1994.
11). As detailed by Robert Lederman in the Philadelphia City Paper (1/18/01) “banks and shipping companies operated by the Bush family” invested millions of dollars into IG Farben. It is IG Farben, which produced the poison gas, Zyklon B which was used to murder Jews, Gypsies, Russians and so on. IG Farben built and operated, in conjunction with Himmler’s SS, more than 40 concentration camps, including Auschwitz.
12). On Oct. 20, 1942, Under the Trading with the Enemy Act, the U.S. government ordered the seizure of Nazi German banking operations in New York City which were being directed by Prescott Bush, including the Union Banking Corporation, in which Bush was a director. The U.S. Alien Property Custodian seized Union Banking Corp.’s stock shares, all of which were owned by Prescott Bush, E. Roland, Bunny Harriman, and three Nazis, and two other Bush associates (see Office of Alien Property Custodian Vesting Order No. 248, Vesting Order No. 259, Vesting Order No. 261, Vesting Order No. 370). Vesting Order No. 248 noted that the Union Banking Corporation was run as a front for the “Thyssen family” of “Germany” and designated “Thyssen” as “nationals … of a designated enemy country.” See also testimony of Capt. Frederick C. Mensing, John Schroeder, Paul von Lilienfeld-Toal, “Investigation of Nazi Propaganda Activities and Investigation of Certain Other Propaganda Activities,” Public Hearings before A Subcommittee of the Special Committee on Un-American Activities, United States House of Representatives, Seventy Third Congress, New York City, July 9-12, 1934—Hearings No. 73-NY-7, Washington: U.S. Govt. Printing Office, 1934.
13). Prescott Bush, the vice-president of Harriman and Co. and president of Union Banking, became, In 1929 became a director and chief financial officer for Dresser industries which supplied oil-related equipment to the Rockefeller Standard Oil Company. Prescott Bush was also one of the directors of the Hamburg-Amerika line. Hamburg-Amerika Line, was a Nazi front-company whose partners included I.G. Farben. Emil Helfferich was the chairman of Hamburg-Amerika as well as chairman of Standard Oil’s German subsidiaries. Standard Oil provided expertise to I.G. Farben including the know how to make leaded gasoline. As detailed in An I.G. Farben memo: “Since the beginning of the war we have been in a position to produce lead tetraethyl solely because, a short time before the outbreak of the war, the Americans had established plants for us ready for production and supplied us with all available experience. In this manner we did not need to perform the difficult work of development because we could start production right away on the basis of all the experience that the Americans had for years.” In another I.G. Farben memo Standard Oil’s assistance in procuring $20 million worth of aviation fuel and lubricants is acknowledged: “The fact that we actually succeeded by means of the most difficult negotiations in buying the quantity desired by our government… and transporting it to Germany, was made possible only through the aid of the Standard Oil Co.” At the completion of WWII, IG Farben was split up by the Allies into different pharmaceutical companies, the best known of which is Bayer. Currently, Bayer in a major investor in the Carlyle Group, a defense related investment group which is chaired by former Reagan-Bush secretary of Defense, Frank Carlucci, and which counts George H.W. Bush as among it most prominent stockholders. At the completion of WWII, when the Rockefeller-IG Farben relationship was finally brought to light, including the fact that IG Farben owned 30% of Standard Oil stock, the company hired lawyer Allen Dulles to represent it before congress and Federal Court. Allen Dulles would later become the first Director of the C.I.A. Dulles was also in business with Brown Brothers and was a board member of a Nazibank, the Schroeder Bank.
14). Prescott Bush was director of the German Steel Trust’s Union Banking Corporation. Prescott Bush, George Walker (Prescott Bush’s father-in-law) and their associates owned controlling shares of Consolidated Silesian Steel, and Bush served as President of Union Banking and a senior partner in Brown Brothers, and together these companies controlled and directed the North American operations of the Hamburg-Amerika Line, as well as Consolidated Silesian Steel (see Consolidated Silesian Steel Corporation Meeting of Board of Directors, Oct. 31, 1930; Harriman papers, Library of Congress; John A. Kouwenhouven, “Partners in Banking. Brown Brothers Harriman,” Doubleday & Co., Garden City, 1969. Andrew Boyle, “Montagu Norman,” Cassell, London, 1967. Sir Henry Clay, “Lord Norman,” MacMillan & Co., London, 1957).
15). Investigation of Nazi Propaganda Activities and Investigation of Certain Other Propaganda Activities, op. cit., chapter 2, 1934. See testimony of Capt. Frederick C. Mensing, John Schroeder, Paul von LilienfeldToal, Public Hearings before A Subcommittee of the Special Committee on Un-American Activities, United States House of Representatives, Seventy Third Congress, New York City, July 9-12, 1934—Hearings No. 73-NY-7, Washington: U.S. Govt. Printing Office, 1934.
16). Congressional Record for Bush speech in the House of Representatives, Sept. 4, 1969. See also Bush Task Force testimony 8/5/69. After he became President, sterilization became his administrations “first choice” of reducing the population in third world countries (Joanne Grossi, USAID’s Population Office, July 16, 1991). Under his administration, the U.S. government paid for the surgical sterilization of undesirables in Mexico, the Caribbean, Puerto Rico, Panama, Brazil, and India (Nafis Sadik, “The State of World Population,” New York, United Nations Population Fund; User’s Guide to the Office of Population, 1991, Office of Population, Bureau for Science and Technology, United States Agency for International Development).
17). Letters to and from Averell Harriman, the principle partner, in the Hamburg-American Line, frequently make references to eugenics. These include letters to and Dr. Charles B. Davenport, President, The International Congress of Eugenics, Cold Spring Harbor, L.I., N.Y. (e.g., letter of January 21, 1932 from Harriman to Davenport: I will be only too glad to put you in touch with the Hamburg-American Line.” Letter of January 23, 1932 from Davinport to Harriman: “Thank you very much for the action you took which I hope will enable more of our German colleagues to come to America on the occasion of the congresses of eugenics and genetics. In 1934, congressional hearings established that Hamburg-Amerika was transporting Nazis into America who were distributing and promoting Nazi propaganda (See Investigation of Nazi Propaganda Activities and Investigation of Certain Other Propaganda Activities, U.S. Congress, 1934). See, Rockefeller Collection, Title Rockefeller/Eugenics, Stacking Code GC/88, AccNo 239, box 1: Includes copies of correspondence from the Rockefeller
Family Archives, pertaining to support given to the English Eugenics Society for their researches in birth control and eugenics, 1934-1940. See also,Stefan Kuhl, “The Nazi Connection: Eugenics, American Racism, and German National Socialism,” Oxford Univ Press, 2002. As detailed in this book, American scientists, social theorists, and America’s royal families, inspired and applauded Nazi racist ideology. A 1907 Indiana law permitting the sterilization of the mentally handicapped predated and served as a model for Germany’s 1933 Law on Preventing Hereditarily Ill Progeny. The 1924 American Immigration Restriction Act was praised by Adolf Hitler in Mein Kampf. With the help of the Harrimans and Rockefellers, German theorists came to the U.S. seeking international legitimacy. The Rockefeller Foundation and Jewish philanthropist James Loeb helped fund major eugenics institutes in Germany, including the Kaiser Wilhelm Institute for Anthropology, Eugenics and Human Heredity. See also Wendy Kline, “Building a Better Race: Gender, Sexuality, and Eugenics from the Turn of the Century to the Baby Boom,” University of California Press, 2001; Philip R. Reilly, Gerald Grob, “The Surgical Solution: A History of Involuntary Sterilization in the United States,” Johns Hopkins Univ Press, 1991.
18). Washington Jewish Week, 9/8/1988; David Lee Preston, Philadelphia Inquirer, “Fired Bush backer one of several with possible Nazi links” 9/10/1988.
19). R. Harris Smith, “OSS: The Secret History of America’s First Central Intelligence Agency,” University of California Press, 1972; Fletcher Prouty, “The Secret Team: The CIA and Its Allies in Control of the U.S. and the World,” Prentice Hall, 1973; Jonathan Kwitney, “The Crimes of Patriots: A True Tale of Dope, Dirty Money & the CIA,” WW Norton, 1987; Rodney Stich, “Defrauding America: A Pattern Of Related Scandals— Dirty Secrets Of The CIA And Other Government Operations,” Diablo Western Press, 1993; William Blum, “Killing Hope: US Military and CIA Intervention Since WWII,” Common Courage Press, 1995.
20). BBC News, 9/17/2001; UPI, “CIA says Nazi general was intelligence source” 9/20/2000. According to the UPI story, “the National Archives said that the CIA had filed an affidavit in U.S. District Court “acknowledging an intelligence relationship with German General Reinhard Gehlen that it has kept secret for 50 years. The CIA’s announcement marks the first acknowledgment by that agency that it had any relationship with Gehlen and opens the way for declassification of records about the relationship,” the National Archives said. Gehlen was Hitler’s senior intelligence officer on the Eastern Front during the war and transferred his expertise and contacts to the U.S. as World War II reached its climax. The CIA’s acknowledgment of its dealings with Gehlen came in a response to an appeal of a Freedom of Information Act request by researcher Carl Oglesby, the National Archives said. See also Linda Hunt “Secret Agenda: The United States Government, Nazi Scientist and Project Paperclip, 1945 to 1990,” St. Martin’s Press, 1991; Charles Higham, “American Swastika: The Shocking Story of Nazi Collaborators in Our Midst from 1933 to the Present Day,” Doubleday, 1985.
21). BBC News 4/28/2001,
22). Rodney Stichm “Defrauding America: A Pattern Of Related Scandals — Dirty Secrets Of The CIA And Other Government Operations,” Diablo Western Press, 1993; Jonathan Kwitney, “The Crimes of Patriots: A True Tale of Dope, Dirty Money & the CIA,” W.W. Norton, 1987.
23. Adolf Hitler, “Mein Kampf.”
24). The Dulles brothers (John Foster, later Secretary of State, and Allen, later director of the CIA) represented the interests of Bush, Harriman, Rockefeller, and other Nazi collaborators. Allen Dulles had also negotiated business deals between the “Bonesmen” and Hitler’s Nazis. The Nazis considered Dulles to be “the most influential White House man in Europe” and Dulles had numerous meetings with top members of the SS.In January of 1943, Dulles, acting as a representative of the United States, began negotiating with top Nazis, and was urging that Hitler be deposed and replaced by SS chief Himmler. The white House and Himmler were agreeable. “The stumbling block was the question of how the SS could get rid of Hitler.” Himmler wished to make Hitler an “honorary president.” The entire plan of replacing Hitler, however, when awry, when, according to Dulles, Hitler became aware of the plan due to “some Allied agency neither American or British.” Himmler panicked. Dulles then began negotiating with Obergruppenfuhrer Karl Wolff, Himmler’s “senior aid” and “Head of his Personal Staff; he knew all the murkiest secrets of SS headquarters.” This too came to naught. By this late stage of the game, it was no clear that Germany would lose the War. It would be impossible to replace Hitler with Himmler, the leader of Germanys secret order of Skull and Bones, the SS—the “Brotherhood of Death.” Allen Dulles, in his book “The Secret Surrender,” repeatedly refers to “good” Nazis, such as Standartenfuehrer Eugen Dollmann, Himmler’s representative in Rome, and SS Obergruppenfuehrer Karl Wolff, the High SS and Police Leader of Northern Italy. In 1938, this “good” Nazi, Karl Wolff played a major role in the atrocities of “Kristallnacht,” in November of 1938, during which 20,000 Jews were attacked and sent to concentration camps. After the conquest of Poland, Wolf sent a letter to Himmler which read as follows: “For your letter of July 28th, 1942, I thank you— also in the name of the Reichsfuehrer SS—sincerely. With particular joy I noted your assurance that for two weeks now a train has been carrying, every day, 5000 members of the Chosen People to Treblinka, so that we are now in a position to carry through this ‘population movement.’ With best regards and Heil Hitler!” Thus, in the mind of Dulles and his CIA, there are “good” sadists and mass murderers such as Wolff and even SS chief, Himmler, and those that are bad.
25). From 1927 to 1941, Dulles worked as lawyer and international finance specialist for Sullivan & Cromwell, a Wall Street law firm in New York. Dulles performed work for Bush, Harriman, and Rockefeller in setting up business relationships with the Nazis and with top Nazi industrialists and played a pivotal role in promoting U.S.-Nazi corporate relations. Allen was also legal counsel for Standard Oil and the Nazi’s IG Farben, coowned by the Rockefellers. Dulles was recruited by OSS intelligence chief Colonel William J. Donovan, in 1941, and was posted to Berne, Switzerland. Dulles was picked because of his great expertise on Germany which he acquired through his law firm during the 1930s. From October 1942 to May 1945, he gathered intelligence information on Nazi Germany related to all aspects of the war effort, including as it pertains to commerce and industry. There have been suggestions that President Roosevelt suspected that Dulles was a traitor and had his New York “Office of Coordinator of Information” wiretapped 1941-42. Dulles as well as Bush were both suspected of treachery by Roosevelt, and this led to the seizure of Bush-Dulles-linked firms, like Bush’s Union Banking Corp., were seized under the Trading with the Enemy Act (1942). It is also rumored that Roosevelt intended to have Dulles, Bush, and their associates charged with treason once the war ended, but his plan died with him in 1945. In 1951, Dulles was appointed Deputy Director of the nascent Central Intelligence Agency, and in 1953 he was appointed CIA Director by President Dwight D. Eisenhower. In that capacity, Allen Dulles orchestrated a number of remarkable covert intelligence operations including the overthrow of Iranian nationalist leader Mohammed Mossagdeh in 1953, and the overthrow of Guatemalan leader Guilermo Arbenz in 1954. Dulles and his brother, John, were deeply linked to the United Fruit Company and when the company assets in Guatemala were nationalized, Dulles orchestrated the overthrow of the Guatemala leader and the ruthless mass murder of Guatemalian peasants who had been demanding a fair wage. See also, William Blum, “Killing Hope: US Military and CIA Intervention Since WWII,” Common Courage Press, 1995.
26). OFFICE OF U.S. CHIEF OF COUNSEL FOR PROSECUTION OF AXIS CRIMINALITY No. 792-PS 17 September 1945 Source of Original OKW Files, Flensburg [Excerpt] LEADS: CANARIS, IBN SAUD, GRAND MUFTI. SUMMARY OF RELEVANT POINTS (with page references): 1. Only through the funds made available by Germany to the Grand Mufti of Jerusalem was it possible to carry out the revolt in Palestine. (Page 1). 2. Germany will keep up the connection with the Grand Mufti. Weapons will be stored for the Mufti with Ibn Saud in Arabia. (Page 2). 3. Ibn Saud himself has close connections with the Grand Mufti and the revolting circles in Trans Jordan. (Page 2). 4. To be able to carry out our work one of Germany’s agents will be placed in Cairo (Page 3). 5. The document is undated but obviously written before the outbreak of the war in 1939. It is not signed. Analyst Landmann Doc. No. 792-PS.
27). Peter Schweizer, “Victory-The Reagan Administration’s Secret Strategy that Hastened the Collapse of the Soviet Union.”
28). Le Nouvel Observateur, 11/15-21/1998, see also, Bill Blum, “Killing Hope,” Common Courage Press.
29). Jean Charles Brisard & Guillaume Dasquie, “Bin Laden: The Forbidden Truth.” These two French Intelligence analysts report that the U.S. government saw the Taliban regime “as a source of stability in Central Asia that would enable the construction of an oil pipeline across Central Asia” from the rich oil fields in Turkmenistan, Uzbekistan and Kazakhstan, through Afghanistan and Pakistan, to the Indian Ocean. President Bush, in fact, made public statements to that effect, and his administration, in March, announced it was providing $43 million dollars to the Taliban and this was duly reported by the American media. Brisard & Guillaume Dasquie reported that he Bush Administration began to negotiate with the Taliban immediately after coming into power in February and held a number of meetings in Washington, Berlin and Islamabad, with the last and final meeting taking place in August, five weeks before the attacks on New York. That some of these meetings took place has been confirmed by Niaz A. Naik, former Pakistani Secretary for foreign affairs.
30). Le Figaro 10/31/2001.
31). Hamid Algar, “Wahhabism: A Critical Essay,” Islamic Publications International, 2002; SaÔd K. Aburish, “A Brutal Friendship: The West and the Arab Elite,” St. Martins Press, 1997; Ahmed Rashid, “Jihad: The Rise of Militant Islam in Central Asia,” Yale Univ Press, 2002.
32). Stephen Schwartz, “The Two Faces of Islam,” Double Day, 2002. 33). Washington Post, “Bush: Out of These Troubled Times… a New World Order,” 9/12/1990; Washington Post, “Bush’s Talk of a ‘New World Order:’ Foreign Policy Tool or Mere Slogan?” 5/26/1991.
34). BBC News, 6/11/01; Wall Street Journal, 9/19/2001; Hindustani Times, 9/28/01;
35). Daniel Golden, James Bandler, Marcus Walker, “Bin Laden Family Could Profit From a Jump In Defense Spending Due to Ties to U.S. Bank,” Wall Street Journal, 9/27/2001; Judicial Watch Chairman and Gen Alliances, Oil Deals Follow,” 12/15/2001. According to the New York Times: “The State Department is exploring the potential for post-Taliban energy projects in the region, which has more than 6 percent of the world’s proven oil reserves and almost 40 percent of its gas reserves. Secretary of State Colin L. Powell said he was particularly impressed with the money that American oil companies were investing there. He estimated that $200 billion could flow into Kazakhstan during the next 5 to 10 years.”
36). Dick Cheney (Vice President), former chairman, Halliburton, one of the top companies providing service to the oil industry. Haliburton gave Cheney $34 million as a farewell gift when he left the company; Condoleezza Rice (National Security Advisor), former board member, Chevron Oil. Chevron named one of their oil supertankers the “SS Condoleezza Rice.” Richard Armitage (Dept. of State), formerly of UNOCAL oil; Zalmay Khalilzad (National Security Council) a top advisor to UNOCAL who became undersecretary of defense during the first Bush administration; and the list goes on.
37). Le Figaro 10/31/2001.
38). Jean Charles Brisard & Guillaume Dasquie, “Bin Laden: The Forbidden Truth.”
39). Newsweek 9/15/2001. The FBI and military claim that the 9/11 hijackers stole the identities of these men who are all Saudi nationals. However, the 9/11 hijackers were Saudi nationals, and their names are identical to those who underwent military training in the U.S. Neither the military, FBI, or CIA, has been able to produce or identify anyone else with those names. The obvious conclusion is that five of the hijackers received training in the United States at U.S. military bases.
40). According to David Shayler, an M15 British intelligence agent, and as reported by French Intelligence Analysts, Jean Charles Brisard & Guillaume Dasquie, in their book, “Bin Laden: The Forbidden Truth,” bin Laden was providing leadership and financial support to an Islamic fundamentalist group called al-Muqatila. The membership of al-Muqatila consisted entirely of Libyans who had been recruited by bin Laden, to fight and conduct terrorist attacks against the Soviets during the 1980s and early 1990s—terrorist attacks which were funded by the CIA. In 1996, bin Laden ordered al-Muqatila to assassinate Gadafy. The assassination plot failed. Gadafy suspected that the assassination attempt had been orchestrated by the CIA and British Intelligence, and he also feared that bin Laden was attempting to use al-Muqatila to conduct terrorist attacks against Western targets that could then be blamed on Libya. Shayler, Brisard, and Dasquie, report that in March, 1998, Libya issued an international arrest warrant against bin Laden and the leadership of al-Muqatila. The warrant was sent by the Libyan interior ministry to Interpol on March 16th, 1998, and accused bin Laden and al-Muqatila of murdering two German intelligence agents, Silvan Becker and his wife, in 1994. According to former MI5 agent David Shayler, the warrant was ignored by the CIA and British intelligence because of British collaboration with al-Muqatila.
41). United States v. Usama bin Laden et al., S (7) 98 Cr. 1023 (LBS), Sworn testimony of Essam Al-Ridi at the Southern District Court of New York, February 14, 2001; See also, United States District Court, Southern District of New York, “United States of America v Ali Mohamed.”
42). Le Figaro, 10/31/2001; United Press International, 11/01/2001; Radio France International, 11/1/2001.
43). On July 26, 2001 General, John Ashcroft broke with tradition and refused to ever again fly on any commercial jets. When questioned by CBS News correspondent Jim Stewart, about this unusual move, the Justice Dept. issued a terse reply: “Because of a “threat assessment” by the FBI. Yet when pressed by CBS, “neither the FBI nor the Justice Department … would identify what the threat was, when it was detected or who made it.” When Ashcroft was directly asked by reporters about the “threat” he replied with a straight face: “Frankly, I don’t,” know anything about it, he told reporters.
44). Newsweek, 6/4/2002; ABC News, 6/4/2002; CNN, 8/1/2002. Confirmed before joint House and Senate Intelligence Committees, United States Congress, June-September 2002. As reported by Newsweek, 6/4/2002 and ABC News, 6/4/2002, and as reported before joint House and Senate Intelligence Committees, United States Congress, the CIA tracked two of the 9/11 hijackers (al-Midhar and al-Hamzi) from Malaysia to the United States, and informed the FBI of their arrival in the U.S. in January 2000. Both men had flown directly to San Diego, a principal U.S. Naval base. However, neither CIA did not notify Immigration until 18 months later, in August of 2001. In June 2001, the State Department issued alMidhar a multi-entry visa even though the FBI and CIA knew he was a suspected terrorist. It is noteworthy that both men arrived at a Naval base and that 10 months later a Navy ship, the USS Cole was bombed. However, almost 11 more months would go by before the CIA notified Immigration, but by then, they had disappeared. Also of significance, both men, while living in San Diego, were under the surveillance of an FBI informer who provided the FBI with details about their activities. As of October, 2002, the FBI and Justice Department have refused all demands by the joint House and Senate Intelligence Committees, to interview the informer or the FBI agent he reported to (see New York Times, 10/6/2002 “The Inquiry: Congress Seeks F.B.I. Data on Informer; F.B.I. Resists”).
45). CNN, 8/1/2002, reported that “Jarrah had spent at least three weeks in January 2001 at an al-Qaeda training camp in Afghanistan.” Upon completing his terrorist training, the CIA, which had been monitoring his movements, requested that intelligence officials based in the United Arab Emirates question him about “his terrorist activities.” According to CNN, “the CIA notified officials that he would be arriving from Pakistan on his way back to Europe.” The CIA had closely monitored his movements, and then questioned, debriefed, and then allowed al-Jarrah to return to the United States. On 9/11, Ziad al-Jarrah piloted the jet that crashed in Pennsylvania.
46). Confirmed before joint House and Senate Intelligence Committees, United States Congress, June-September 2002.
47). Coleen Rowley, 13-page letter to FBI Headquarters and FBI Director, Robert Mueller, May 21, 2002; joint House and Senate Intelligence Committees, United States Congress, May 2002. University Press, “America Attacked,” University Press, California, October 11, 2001.
48) Jean Charles Brisard & Guillaume Dasquie, “Bin Laden: The Forbidden Truth,” Paris.
49). Sara Jess et al., “America Attacked,” University Press, California, October 11, 2001.
50). CNN, 8/1/2002.
51). Kenneth Williams, “Phoenix Memo,” July 10, 2001; joint House and Senate Intelligence Committees, United States Congress, May 2002.
52). Judicial Watch, 6/7/2002; Associated Press, “White House Mail Machine Has Anthrax,” 10/23/2001.

–~~~~~~~~~~~~–

Chapter 3

political cal

THE BROTHERHOOD OF DEATH

“We must speak the truth about terror. Let us never tolerate outrageous conspiracy theories concerning the attacks of September 11, malicious lies that attempt to shift the blame away from the terrorists themselves, away from the guilty.” —George W. Bush speaking before the UN General Assembly 11/10/2001

“Conspirators are successful because the moral citizen cannot accept the conclusion that other individuals would actually wish to create incredibly destructive acts against their fellow citizens.” Ralph Epperson (the Unseen Hand).

“Some of the biggest men in the U.S. in the fields of commerce and manufacturing know that there is a power so organized, so subtle, so complete, so pervasive that they had better not speak above their breath when they speak in condemnation of it.” -President Woodrow Wilson, 28th President of the USA

THE HEGELIAN DIALECTIC

The philosophical and political roots of the 9/11 conspiracy do not have their source in Afghanistan or from within the inner sanctum of al-Qaeda or the current Bush administration, but instead can be traced backwards in time, to Berlin, Germany, and the year 1823.

It was in 1823 that Hegel, the great German philosopher and political scientist, proposed his dialectic (1), an idea that spread like a virus from the University of Berlin, to Yale college—the alma matter of George W. Bush, his father, George H.W. Bush, and grand-father, Prescott Bush.

Hegel proposed and developed the concept of “Controlled Conflict.” Hegel argued “that all historical events emerge from a conflict between opposing forces” and that change is a product of conflict between two opposing forces that produced such change. However, by creating, manipulating and controlling that conflict, Hegel proposed, it was possible to create a specific end result: “Conflict produces change, and controlled conflict produces controlled change.” The controlled change is referred to as a “synthesis” such that in the end, both opposing forces undergo change and cease to exist except as an altered state (1).

By understanding and putting this principle to work, Hegel argued, one could create a specific end result and shape world history, simply by creating and managing a controlled conflict between opposing parties and opposing states.

Hegel also believed the state to be representative of the Divine Will. He argued that the end result of a controlled conflict, was a product of reason and Divine Will, and had little or nothing to do with the will of the masses whose purpose was simply to obey.

Hegel’s views were also consistent with and incorporated the theology of Martin Luther, the founder of Protestantism.

Luther preached that the true Christian owes absolute authority to the State (2). It is not for the people to decide what is right or wrong, but merely to obey.

Adolf Hitler deeply admired Luther, and considered the Protestants to be “submissive as dogs, and they sweat with embarrassment when you talk to them.”

When the German peasants revolted against the state in 1525, Luther advised the princes to act ruthlessly against these “mad dogs.”

Luther’s brand of Protestantism considered the state to be a representative of the will of God on earth. Thus the Protestant Church in Germany has always stood up for the advancement of German nationalism and the interests of the state. Since its inception Protestant pastors have always stood solidly behind the King, the Junkers, and the Army, until 1918 when the King was overthrown; an event which made the Weimar Republic an enemy of the Protestant Church (3).

Thus, the German Protestant Church, being nationalistic, antidemocratic, and a willing instrument of the state, was easy to Nazify, though there was also opposition (3—pp 326-327).

Adolf Hitler considered Luther to be “one of my spiritual ancestors. I have sought to carry out the ideas of this man of God, to the smallest detail.” Indeed, both Hitler and Luther believed the state to be the personification of divine will, and both men condemned the Jews “and their lies.”

“Throughout the history of Germany,” Luther once said, “the Jews have exploited and sought to enslave honest Germans. While Germans toiled, the Jews fleece us of our money and goods and then sit around the stove and fart.”

Hitler also agreed with Luther’s solution to “the Jewish problem.” According to Luther (2): “First set fire to their synagogues… raze and destroy their schools… take away their prayer books and Talmudic writings, in which adultery, lies, and sex with children is taught. Forbid that Rabbis be allowed to teach. Take away their cash and silver. Let whosoever throw brimstone and pitch upon them and let them be driven like mad dogs from the land.”

To destroy the Jews, would also be in keeping with the Nazi’s version of eugenics: the extermination of a dangerous “subhuman” race.

Hitler celebrated Luther’s birth date by unleashing his storm troopers on November 9 and 10, 1938. The Nazis, funded by bankers, industrialists, Standard Oil and Prescott Bush and associates (4) destroyed Jewish business, and set fire to their synagogues and schools—the so called Kristallnacht (3,5,6): “The Night of Broken Glass.”

Though it is true that almost half of the Protestant clergy and leadership initially opposed Hitler’s attempts to Nazify the Protestant church (3), Nazi ideology is deeply rooted in Lutherism and Hegelian thought. Both Luther (2) and Hegel (1) saw the state as being an instrument of God.

As explained by Hegel (1): “The march of God in history is the cause of the existence of states, their foundation is the power of Reason realizing itself as will. Every state, whatever it be, participates in the Divine essence. The State is not the work of human art, only Reason could produce it.”

Because the State is also God and a representative of absolute pure reason, it is the absolute duty of all citizens to serve God and Reason by serving the State. Democracy, individualism, morality, the will of the masses are irrelevant. According to Hegel, the individual can only find freedom through worship and utter obedience to the State (1).

Hitler believed that he had been chosen by “divine providence” to lead the state (3,5,6,7). Believing himself to have been chosen by God, and that he was acting as an instrument of God, Hitler—and his Nazi followers who shared these beliefs —also believed that the Nazi state should act according to Hitler’s will, and Hitler’s will alone.

As summed up by Rudolf Hess: “Hitler is Germany and Germany is Hitler!”

“The individual is nothing.” —Adolf Hitler.

“If men were given complete liberty of action, they would immediately behave like apes. Slacken the reins of authority, give more liberty to the individual, and you are driving the people along the road to decadence” —Adolf Hitler (7).

The philosophies of Hegel (1), Luther (2), and Hitler (7), in equating the state with Divine Will, also promotes the goal of annihilating all individuality. The individual is nothing. The individual has no rights. Morality consists solely in obedience to the state which is a manifestation of the Divine essence and the power of reason.

Democracy, therefore, is the antithesis of Hegelian thought.

As summed up by Hegel (1): “All the worth which the human being possesses, all spiritual reality, he possesses only through the State. For truth is the unity of the universal and subjective will; and the Universal is found in the State, in its laws, its universal and rational arrangements. The State is the Divine Idea as it exists on earth.”

Likewise, according to Hegel, the synthesis resulting from the conflict between opposing forces and opposing states (thesis vs anti-thesis) represents the “march of God through history.”

However, because God and the Divine essence is also a manifestation of reason, the use of reason to manipulate and create a controlled conflict (between “thesis” and “anti-thesis”) could therefore result in the creation of a new state (Synthesis): A new world order that is divinely inspired and governed by an all powerful intellectual elite.

In the 1990s, George H.W. Bush, repeatedly announced and called for a “New World Order.”

THE NEW WORLD ORDER

Paradoxical as it may seem, Hegel’s philosophy not only provided a theoretical basis that supported Germany’s Protestant religion and the most conservative and rabidly nationalist of German political movements during the 19th century, but opposing revolutionary movements of the 20th century: Marxism (8) and the rise of Nazism and Adolf Hitler (9).

Broadly considered, Hegelians can be divided into two seemingly oppositional camps: the right-wing Hegelians who promoted German/Prussian militarism and spawned Baron von Bismarck and later Adolf Hitler (9), and the left-wing Hegelians (the “scientific socialists”) who provided the philosophical foundations that gave rise to Karl Marx, Friedrich Engels, and thus Marxism/Communism (8).

Be it Nazi or Communist, regardless of their rightor leftward leanings, these Hegelians all share the same unifying beliefs: The supremacy of an all powerful state, the total insignificance of individuality, contempt for democracy, and the desire to create a New World Order—a singular all powerful government which would rule the world (7,8,9).

THESIS VS ANTI-THESIS = SYNTHESIS

The existence of these two opposing Hegelian-political/governmental organizations, is also Hegelian. The Hegelian dialectic envisions the participation of two opposing parties (thesis vs antithesis) who are then guided and manipulated into engaging in a controlled conflict (1). The result of this conflict between thesis and anti-thesis, is synthesis: change in the form of increased wealth, increased power, and the concentration of this power and wealth in the hands of a divinely elected elite who control the state; i.e. a New World Order.

At the turn of the 19th century, the major national powers of the world were ruled by Kings or democratically elected governments whose economies were capitalistic. Communism was as yet, a theory.

The first world war was not fought between communists and capitalists, but between kings and kings (e.g., Germany against Russia), and between kings and democratically elected governments (i.e. Germany against France, Britain and America).

As the first world war neared to a close, it became apparent that the democratic states would triumph and that the Kings of Germany and Russia would be exiled and deposed.

War and conflict is good for business, at least for those lending money or selling oil and weapons. But if the kings were deposed and replaced by democratically-elected governments, wars and thus controlled conflict, among the major powers might well become obsolete.

As the first world war drew to a close, an American bank, with direct ties to Prescott Bush and George Walker (Bush’s future father-in-law), began providing loans, funds, and other assistance to Communist terrorists and Bolshevik revolutionaries who were striving to overthrow the Russian Zsar (10). In 1917, the Bolsheviks took power in Russia, and the “red terror” began. Millions of Russians were murdered by terrorists who were financed by Standard Oil and a New York investment bank, Guaranty Trust (10).

The communist government of the new Soviet Union would now be in conflict with the democratic West, as the stated goals of both were world dominion; i.e. a communist world (Thesis), or a democratic world (Anti-Thesis). Those who would finance and thus control the coming conflict, would be bankers, oil companies, and arm’s merchants, and in return they would be the recipients of incredible wealth, i.e. synthesis.

Thesis Antithesis

| |

Communist Russia Capitalist West

| |

-Loans/Debt/Spending-

|

-Synthesis= Profit-

| |

Thesis Antithesis

| |

Communist Russia Capitalist West

| |

-The Cold War—Controlled Conflict-

| |

-Loans/Debt/Spending-

|

-Synthesis= Profit-

With the defeat of Germany, World War I came to an end. However, although Germany’s king was deposed and exiled and a democratic government was installed in his place (the Weimar Republic), the controlled conflict within Germany had just begun. Nationalists, Nazis, and monarchists battled with the Communists and the democratically elected government in order to install their own regimes in its place (3,5,6,7).

The German communists advocated the creation of a Soviet Socialist state aligned with and eventually to become a satellite of Soviet Russia. The Hitler wing of the Nationalist movement instead promised to destroy both the Weimar Republic and the German Communists. As detailed in Hitler’s Mein Kampf, he also promised to destroy Communist Russia which would become, instead, a Nazi slave state (3,5,7).

The Nazis and Russian Communists not only shared the same fascist Hegelian roots but were propped up financially by some of the same individuals and organizations (10,11), including the alumni of a Yale secret society, “The Brotherhood of Death” (also known as “Skull and Bones”), e.g., the Bush family and their associates in the oil and banking industries.

Hitler and his Nazis began receiving tens of thousands of dollars from individuals, banks and business associated with BushHarriman and Standard Oil, as early as 1923 (12). By the late 1920s until he came to power, Hitler and his Nazis were receiving millions of dollars in payments (12) —money and assistance which kept pouring in even after Hitler declared war on Russia and America (12,13).

From the perspective of bankers and arm’s merchants, there is no contradiction in providing funds to and doing business with opposing groups, organizations, or states. If both could be guided into conflict, both would require loans to buy weapons, which would trigger an arm’s race, and eventually, war. And war is good for banks, oil companies, and arm’s merchants.

This strategy also has Hegelian roots.

Thesis and anti-thesis = controlled conflict between opposing states: Nazi Germany vs Communist Russia, for the purposes of creating a synthesis.

Synthesis: The creation of new wealth for bankers, the armaments industry, and the financial backers of the Nazi and Communists regimes, and the creation of a “New World Order.”

Thesis Antithesis

| |

1917 Bolshevik Revolution 1923 Hitler’s rise to power

|

-Loans/Debt/Spending-

|

-Synthesis= Profit-

| |

Thesis Antithesis

| |

Marxist Russia Nazi Germany

| |

-Loans/Debt/Spending-

|

-Synthesis= Profit-

| |

Thesis Antithesis

| |

Marxist Russia Nazi Germany

| |

-World War II—Controlled Conflict

| |

-Loans/Debt/Spending-

|

-Synthesis= Profit-

| War Ends

|

-Loans/Debt/Spending-

|

-Synthesis= Profit—New World Order-

THE NEW WORLD ORDER: A WORLD OF SLAVES

During the 1930s and early 1940s, the Bush family and their associates (Harriman, Rockefeller), were betting on the Nazis as were a number of other influential Americans, such as Joe Kennedy(14) and newspaper magnate William Randolf Hearst (15). Some of these men not only openly supported the Nazis, but were predicting the death of democracy (as well as Communism) and advocating a Nazi form of government for the United States.

In the 1930s and 1940s, it seemed to many that Hitler and his Nazis would finally deliver the Hegelian promise of a New World Order, ruled over by a divinely inspired and a divinely chosen, business-friendly, powerful elite (3,4).

“My presence on earth is providential. I owe it to a superior will.” —Adolf Hitler.

Power, however, requires money. Money can be borrowed, stolen, or earned. To make the most money requires the elimination of competitors. As summed up by John D. Rockefeller: “Competition is a sin.”

It was in fact the goal of the SS, also known as “The Order” and the “Brotherhood of Death” to gain monopolistic control over all forms of German industry and commerce and to employ, as slave labor, the conquered peoples of other countries (6,7)—slaves who would be kept ignorant, impoverished, unhealthy, and uneducated.

As pontificated by Hitler (7):

“What will the social order of the future be like? Comrade, I will tell you. There will be a class of overlords, after them the rank and file of the party members in hierarchical order, and then the great mass of anonymous followers, servants and workers in perpetuity, and beneath them again all the conquered foreign races, the modern slaves. And over and above all these will reign a new and exalted nobility of whom I cannot speak.”

“In order to retain our domination over the people in the territories we have conquered… we must therefore…deprive them of any form of State organization and consequently, keep them on as low a cultural level as possible.”

“The ideal solution would be to teach this people an elementary kind of mimicry. No special books for them! The radio will be enough to give them the essential information. Of music, they can have as much as they want. They can practice listening to the tap running. I’m against entrusting them with any work that calls for the least mental effort.”

“To teach the Russians, the Ukrainians and the Kirghiz to read and write will eventually be to our own disadvantage; education will give the more intelligent among them an opportunity to study history, to acquire an historical sense and, hence, to develop political ideas which cannot but be harmful to our interests.”

“A loud-speaker should be installed in each village, to provide them with odd items of news and, above all, to afford distraction. What possible use to them would a knowledge of politics or economics be? There is also no point in broadcasting any stories of their past history. All the villagers require is music, music and plenty of it. Cheerful music is a great incentive to hard work; give them plenty of opportunities to dance, and the villagers will be grateful to us.”

“In the field of public health, there is no need whatsoever to extend to the subject races the benefits of our own knowledge. This would result only in an enormous increase in local populations, and I absolutely forbid the organization of any sort of hygiene or cleanliness crusades in these territories. Dentistry, too, should remain a closed book for them.”

“Compulsory vaccination will be confined to Germans alone, and the doctors in the German colonies will be there solely for the purpose of looking after the German colonists. We must even try to stifle any desire for such things, by persuading them that vaccination and the like are really most dangerous!”

“I recently read an article from the pen of some Herr Doktor advocating the prohibition of the sale in the occupied territories of contraceptives. If any criminal lunatic should really try to introduce this measure, I’d soon have his head off! In view of the extraordinary fertility of the local inhabitants, we should be only too pleased to encourage the women and the girls to practice the arts of contraception at all times. Far from prohibiting the sale of contraceptives, therefore, we should do our utmost to encourage it.”

“The local population must be given no facilities for higher education. Instruction in geography can be restricted to one single sentence: The Capital of the Reich is Berlin, a city which everyone should try to visit once in his lifetime. There is no need to teach them much more than, say, the meaning of the various road-signs. Jodl is quite right when he says that notices in the Ukrainian language ‘Beware of the Trains’ are superfluous; what on earth does it matter if one or two more locals get run over by the trains?”

“As for the ridiculous hundred million Slavs, we will mould the best of them to the shape that suits us, and we will isolate the rest of them in their own pig-styes; and anyone who talks about cherishing the local inhabitant and civilizing him, goes straight off into a concentration camp!”

When Adolf Hitler spoke of a “New World Order,” he envisioned a world of slaves ruled over by the Nazi elite: “The Brotherhood of Death,” his SS, the high ranking membership of which consisted almost exclusively of aristocrats and the kings of industry and commerce (6,7).

“Thanks to its method of recruiting, the SS will be a nursery of rulers. In a hundred years’ time from now, we’ll control this whole empire without having to rack our brains to know where to find the proper men.” —Adolf Hitler (7).

When the newly elected George H.W. Bush (and his administration) took office in 1988 and repeatedly spoke of “a new world order,” and when, twelve years later, his son, President George W. Bush (and his administration) spoke the same words, these men were not addressing the American public. They were speaking to the same brotherhood which brought Hitler to power, “the Brotherhood of Death.”

–~~~~~~~~~~~~–

IT ALL BEGINS AT YALE: SKULL & BONES

psychopath psy·cho·path (s?'k?-p?th') n. A person with an antisocial personality disorder, especially one manifested in perverted, criminal, or amoral behavior. The American Heritage® Stedman's Medical Dictionary Copyright © 2002, 2001, 1995 by Houghton Mifflin Company. Cite This Source. Psychopath defined? The Skull and Bones. On the table is the allegedly stolen skull of Geronimo, sacred burial remains over which his heirs sued. To the right of the clock is George H. W. Bush. His father, Prescott Bush, is said to have stolen it. (The controversy over this claim is meaningless, and it is welcome as it brings the following to light: Bush was forced to admit he was in Skull & Bones, and that's all that matters, as you will soon see.) In regards to the skull, consider this: President John Quincy Adams concluded in his Address to the People of Massachusetts: “I saw a code of Masonic legislation adapted to prostrate every principle of equal justice and to corrupt every sentiment of virtuous feeling in the soul of him who bound his allegiance to it…. I saw the practice of common honesty, the kindness of Christian benevolence, even the abstinence of atrocious crimes; limited exclusively by lawless oaths and barbarous penalties, to the social relations between the Brotherhood and the Craft. I saw slander organize into a secret, widespread and affiliated agency….I saw self-invoked imprecations of throats cut from ear to ear, of hearts and vitals torn out and cast off and hung on spires. I saw wine drunk from a human skull with solemn invocation of all the sins of its owner upon the head of him who drank it.”

In 1823, Samuel Russell, a child of the Wall Street banking establishment, founded “Russell & Company” the largest opium smuggling operation in the world. Russell and Company was based in Connecticut, and in addition to Chinese tea and silk, specialized in acquiring opium in Turkey and smuggling it to China (16).

In 1830, Russell and Company bought out their primary competitor, the Perkins (Boston) syndicate and thus established Connecticut as the epicenter of the illegal opium trade. Because of the incredible wealth generated, and through his connections to Wall Street, Russell’s company (and thus Connecticut) became an epicenter of illegal and secret political power (16).

The grandfather of President Franklin Delano Roosevelt, Warren Delano, Jr., served as Chief of Operations, at Russell and Company, and later became a partner (16).

In 1831, William Huntington Russell, half-brother to Samuel, left the United States and Yale college, to spend a year studying in Germany (17). Germany was in a fever, the epicenter of “new ideas” and a scientific revolution in psychology, philosophy, and educational reform. In the new Germany, children were being educated according to the “scientific method.” They were taught what to think and how to think it, as well as total obedience to the state.

William Huntington Russell wanted to learn first hand, “The “Scientific Method” and the ideas and philosophy of Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel. Hegel held the Chair in Philosophy at the University of Berlin from 1817 until his death in 1831.

In Germany, the scientific method, and the Hegelian dialectic were being applied to every aspect of human endeavor: through reason and the application of the scientific method, it was possible to create a pre-determined synthesis and thus the most desirable predetermined outcomes (1).

Russell was particularly impressed with the concept of “thesis versus anti-thesis” and Hegel’s historical dialectic: the state is absolute, individuals are granted their freedoms based on their obedience to the state, controlled conflict, by an intellectual elite, can produce a pre-determined outcome.

Russell, being a child of the Wall Street banking elite, quickly realized the implications. Hegel’s philosophy and the “Scientific Method” could be applied to banking: Through controlled conflict, it was possible to create a synthesis in the form of incredible financial wealth. Those engaged in this conflict would require financing. Controlled conflict, when conducted in secret, would be good for business.

Indeed, secrecy is mandated when the dialectic is applied to the creation of “opposing forces” who are to be manipulated into engaging in a “controlled conflict.” Secrecy is also necessitated so that the opposing forces do not realize that the same banks are providing funds to both of those in conflict.

Of course, William Huntington Russell was not the first to realize the necessity of secrecy for the purposes of applying Hegel’s dialectic to banking and commerce. Banking requires secrecy, particularly when it comes to laundering incredible sums of money acquired through criminal enterprise and the drug trade.

Long before he arrived in Germany, Russell had learned the value of secrecy. What he wanted was to learn first hand was the Hegelian scientific method. So, it is not surprising that after he enrolled at the University of Berlin, Russell became a member of a secret society which also incorporated Hegelian ideas.

Russell joined the secret order of “Skull and Bones” (17).

The membership of the Berlin order of Skull and Bones came from the privileged class, the aristocracy, and the families of bankers and the moneyed elite. Russell fit fight in and formed a warm and close relationship with many of its members.

When it came time for his to return to America and Yale college, Russell sought and obtained permission to form an American chapter of the secret German Society of Skull and Bones: chapter 322, The Brotherhood of Death (17,18).

Russell returned to the United States and Yale College in 1832. Russell, along with his very close friend, Alphonso Taft (the father of William Howard Taft who became President of the U.S. and then Chief Justice of the Supreme Court), and 13 other children of the Wall Street elite, established and became the founding members of “The Order of Scull and Bones,” later changed to “The Order of Skull and Bones.”

The Order of Skull and Bones was to be a super secret society for the elite children of the Anglo-American Wall Street banking establishment (17,18). Its purpose: To generate incredible wealth and power for its members.

Presumably, the Order of Skull and Bones exists only at Yale. As detailed in Antony C. Sutton’s superbly researched 1986 text, America’s Secret Establishment (17): “Those on the inside know it as The Order. Others have known it for more than 150 years as Chapter 322 of a German secret society. More formally, for legal purposes, The Order was incorporated as The Russell Trust in 1856. It was also once known as the ‘Brotherhood of Death.’ Those who make light of it, or want to make fun of it, call it ‘Skull & Bones’, or just plain ‘Bones’.”

The Order of Skull and Bones, however, is certainly not a college fraternity fun-house. Rather, the purpose of Skull and Bones is the application of skull duggery, piracy, and the scientific method to the creation of power, wealth, and the inducement of controlled conflict between opposing individuals, businesses, and states.

The Order of Skull and Bones is also geared to promote the mutual success of its members in the post-collegiate world. Hence, only those of the incoming senior class become members (17,18) and membership is retained for life.

Each year fifteen juniors are selected by the graduating seniors to be initiated into next year’s group. New members are reportedly given a large sum of money, and a clock—the significance of which is to remind them that the Order of Skull and Bones is timeless.

As detailed by Antony Sutton (17) it is the “timeless” nature of this secret brotherhood which provides it with continuity and thus the capacity to build up both vertical and horizontal “chains of influence.” These multi-generational chains of influence ensure the success of its members in their varied schemes, be it drug smuggling or the creation and financing of controlled conflict for the purposes of acquiring power and incredible wealth.

Prescott Bush, George H.W. Bush, and his son, George W. Bush, are alumni of Yale and members of Skull and Bones (17,19).

THE BROTHERHOOD OF DEATH

After its founding, Russell and friends hoisted a pirate flag as a symbol and talisman of their brotherhood. The pirate flag has an obvious meaning: death. Pirates are terrorists, murderers, marauders, cutthroats and thieves, answerable to no one, above the law, and without morals and scruples.

Soon after its establishment at Yale, the Order of Skull and Bones began to develop an unsavory reputation (17).

In October of 1876, an investigative article on The Order, appeared in Volume 1, Number 1, of “The Iconoclast.” The Inconclast was published off campus, in New Haven, “because the college press is closed to those who dare to openly mention ‘Bones’.”

The Iconoclast reported evidence of Satanism, i.e. walls covered in black, and in room 322, the “sanctum sanctorium of the temple…[was] furnished in red velvet…[with] a pentagram on the wall… and in the hall….pictures of the founders of Bones at Yale, and of members of the Society in Germany, when the chapter was established here in 1832.”

The Iconoclast goes on to report that “Out of every class Skull and Bones takes its men. They have gone out into the world and have become in many instances, leaders in society. No doubt they are worthy men in themselves, but the many, whom they looked down upon while in college, cannot so far forget as to give money freely into their hands. Bones men care far more for their society than they do for the college.”

“At first the society held its meetings in hired halls; in 1856, the ‘tomb,’ a vine-covered, windowless, brown-stone hall was built. This is where they hold their strange, occultist initiation rites and meet each Thursday and Sunday.”

“Year by year the deadly evil is growing,” The Iconoclast warned. “The society was never as obnoxious as it is today. Never before has it shown such arrogance and self-fancied superiority. It grasps… and endeavors to rule. It clutches at power with the silence of conscious guilt… a society guilty of serious and far-reaching crimes.”

An uninvited “guest” to the tomb reported seeing: “On the west wall, an old engraving representing an open burial vault, in which, on a stone slab, rest four human skulls, grouped about a fools cap and bells, an open book, several mathematical instruments, a beggar’s script, and a royal crown (17,18). On the arched wall above the vault are the explanatory words, in Roman letters, ‘We War Der Thor, Wer Weiser, Wer Bettler Oder, Kaiser?’ and below the vault is engraved, in German characters, the sentence; ‘Ob Arm, Ob Beich, im Tode gleich.’”

The English translation of the German words reads as follows: “Who was the fool, who the wise man, beggar or king? Whether poor or rich, all’s the same in death.”

And what does that mean?

There are no morals. There is no right or wrong. The ends justify the means. Everything ends the same, “in death.”

*******

For the next 30 years after its founding, various members of The Order of Skull and Bones made a pilgrimage to Germany and the University of Berlin (17). The University of Berlin was Ground Zero for the study of Hegelian principles and the “scientific method” as applied to business, government, education, psychology, and the acquisition of power and wealth .

In Germany, the state had taken complete responsibility for the education of children. The purpose of a German education was to mold the character and thinking of all German citizens and to make them obedient to the German state (1).

These Hegelian principles were absorbed by the visiting Bonesman, three of which, upon returning to America, applied these principles at home (17).

Timothy Dwight (class of 1849) became Professor in theYale Divinity School and then 12th President of Yale University.

Daniel Coit Gilman (class of 1852) became the first President of the University of California, first President of the Johns Hopkins University and first President of the Carnegie Institution.

Andrew Dickson White (class of 1853) became the first President of Cornell University.

For these three “Bonesmen,” a university education was the key to shaping the thoughts, prejudices, and ideas of future generations and training those who would someday become the future leaders of America. Of course, these noble “Bonesmen” had no interest in providing a university education to the masses. A university education was only for the children of the rich and powerful; men who would seek to fulfill the Hegelian dialectic and the eventual creation of a New World Order which would be ruled over by the moneyed elite.

NEW WORLD ORDER: CIVIL WAR & THE MONEYED ELITE

Although, most certainly, the founding of colleges and universities is to be commended in the most laudatory of terms, not all “Bonesmen” were interested in improving the lot of mankind. Education would be a form of thought control and mankind would serve only one purpose: to engage in controlled conflict, to help create a New World Order, and to thus make the Bonesmen and their banker and business friends very powerful and very rich.

The American civil war offered the Bonesmen and their associates in banking, the first opportunity, in America, to fund controlled conflict. The resulting “synthesis” would include the erosion of democracy at the local level (“states rights”), the elimination of state-chartered “Free Banking” and the establishment of centralized “national” banking and thus the establishment of a few private “national” banks that could be owned and controlled by a handful of families.

From the outset of the American civil war, these private national banks (as well as the “Free” banks), loaned money to both the Union and the Confederacy (20). Many of these bankers also funded and equipped “bushwakers,” “death squads,” and private militias whose specialties included the torture and assassination of Union or Confederate sympathizers. Neighbors were sometimes “slain before the eyes of their wives and children,” some were killed for “fun” (21). Not uncommonly these “death squads” would pick “off neighbors one by one,” ambushing and assassinating suspected enemies, and spreading terror. Every man, armed or unarmed, was fair game. Men were shot down in their fields, on their doorsteps, while on the road. Men taken captive were scalped, beheaded, castrated, and mutilated. Crops, homes and entire towns were burned (21).

The owners of these banks, these merchants of death, essentially funded the war and the many competing death squads in order to reap the incredible, staggering profits. Indeed, by the end of the war, over $6.6 billion dollars in direct costs (that is, in 1860s dollars) had been consumed by the civil war and the government of the Union and Confederacy (20).

War and terror were good business. The merchants of death made incredible fortunes.

In 1863, Abraham Lincoln identified this moneyed elite, as the enemies of mankind and the enemies of the United States of America:

“The money powers prey upon the nation in times of peace and conspire against it in times of adversity. It is more despotic than a monarchy, more insolent than autocracy, more selfish than bureaucracy. It denounces, as public enemies, all who question its methods or throw Light upon its crimes. I have two great enemies, the Southern Army in front of me and the bankers in the rear. Of the two, the one at my rear is my greatest foe… corporations have been enthroned, and an era of corruption in high places will follow, and the money power of the country will endeavor to prolong its reign by working upon the prejudices of the people until the wealth is aggregated in the hands of a few, and the Republic is destroyed.” —Abraham Lincoln

Thomas Jefferson was of the same opinion: “I sincerely believe that banking institutions are more dangerous to our liberties than standing armies. Already they have raised up a money aristocracy that has set the government at defiance. The issuing power should be taken from the banks and restored to the people to whom it properly belongs.”

In 1863, after a failed attempt to bring the banks under centralized government control, President Lincoln and Congress took the advice of his Secretary of the Treasury and the northern banking establishment, and created a national banking system and a uniform national currency to be issued only by “national banks” (20).

The National Banking Act of 1863 and a subsequent law passed in 1865 (which levied a 10-percent tax on State banks) put the free banks out of existence. The control of the national banks was put squarely into the hands of the members of the order of Skull and Bones (20).

It wasn’t just banking but money which was put under the control of a handful of individuals. National Bank Notes were printed by private bank note companies under contract to the Federal government.

The Guaranty Trust Company was one of the national banks which emerged during the war between the states. The Guaranty Trust Company, established in 1864, was controlled almost entirely by families whose sons were, or would soon become, members of Skull and Bones: Vanderbilt, Whitney, and Harriman (17,22).

THE BROTHERHOOD OF SHIPPING & BANKING: HITLER’S ANGELS

The concept of a bank is quite simple. Money is deposited in the bank for safekeeping, and the bank may pay a small interest fee to depositors in return. This same money is loaned to businesses, governments, and men of means, at a high rate of interest. This same money can be loaned to those who own the banks, at a 0% interest rate, and the loans may even be “forgiven.”

A bank is a risk-free money-making machine for those who own the bank. If anyone defaults on a loan, and if the bank goes bankrupt, only the depositors lose money.

With the incredible amounts of money flowing into the coffers of the Guaranty Trust Company, the Harriman family was able to finance and buy the bankrupt Union Pacific Railroad, as well as create the W. A. Harriman investment firm.

Bert Walker (the maternal great-grand-father to the current George Walker Bush clan) was one of Harriman’s principal partners. Bert Walker had sought and lost the Republican presidential nomination, but in so doing, had established himself as a member of the Republican power-elite (23). Bert Walker and then later, his son, George Walker, were not only partners with the Harrimans, but, due to their Republican credentials, were well situated to influence the administrations of successive Republican presidents.

The Harrimans were also partners with the Rockefellers. The Harriman railroad shipped the oil pumped out of the ground by John D. Rockefeller, the founder of Standard Oil.

Samuel P. Bush—the father of Prescott, was also in business with the Harriman-Walker-Rockefeller clique. Samuel P. Bush, owned Buckeye Steel Castings Co. which manufactured parts for the Harriman railroad company (23).

It is men likes these, if not these very men, who Lincoln referred to as “The money powers [who] prey upon the nation in times of peace and conspire against it in times of adversity…until the wealth is aggregated in the hands of a few, and the Republic is destroyed.”

TRADING WITH THE ENEMY

In the 1930s, Bush, Harriman, and Rockefeller, established themselves as enemies of democracy by going into business with Hitler, and by importing Nazism to the United States. As detailed in chapter 2, it is because Bush was still in business with the Nazis after Hitler declared war on the U.S., that several of his companies, including the Hamburg-Amerika shipping line, was confiscated by the government of the United States.

History was repeating itself, for at the close of the first world war, and Germany’s defeat, the Hamburg-Amerika’s commercial shipping fleet was first confiscated by the American government in 1919—part of the spoils of war.

In 1920, the Harrimans became the new owners of Hamburg-Amerika. The Harrimans also obtained the exclusive right to 50% of all shipping business that originated in Hamburg and 100% control of all activities of the Hamburg line that originated in the United States.

In 1931, Harriman & Co. merged with Brown Brothers to become one of the biggest investment banks in the world. Prescott Bush became a senior partner in the new firm. That same year, George Walker began running the North American operations of the Hamburg-Amerika shipping line under the auspices of Walker’s American Shipping & Commerce, which in turn was controlled by a holding company called the Harriman Fifteen. Averell Harriman, George Walker, and Prescott Bush were the directors of this holding company and thus the owners of the Hamburg-Amerika line (4,23).

Three years later, U.S. government investigators determined that several of the directors of the Hamburg-Amerika line, were major contributors to the Nazi Party. These men, it was determined, had provided a wealth of funds to Hitler for his 1932 election campaign (12). Prescott Bush was one of these men. Prescott Bush was financing Nazi terrorism as a means of destabilizing Germany’s democratic government and catapulting Hitler to power.

Prescott Bush and one of the companies that he directed, the Hamburg-Amerika Line, was identified by the U.S. embassy in Berlin as providing the funds to support Hitler’s “costly election campaigns’’ and “the cost of maintaining a private army of 300,000 to 400,000 men.” It was these men who spread terror throughout Germany.

As detailed by Tarpley and Chaitkin (24) “The American embassy also reported that the Hamburg-Amerika Line was purchasing and distributing propaganda attacks against the German government, for attempting this last-minute crackdown on Hitler’s forces.”

After Hitler came to power, the Hamburg-Amerika Line also began financing Nazi propaganda and subsidizing pro-Nazi newspapers here in the U.S. The purpose of this propaganda was clear. The Bonesmen were not just seeking to support Nazi Germany, but were seeking to undermine the constitutional government of the United States (4,24). The Bonesmen were sworn enemies of democracy.

THE BROTHERHOOD

After Hitler came to power, his dreaded terrorist organization, the SS was unleashed upon the German people (3,5,6). The SS was not just a terrorist organization, but deeply involved in spying and espionage as well as business. Other long range goals was to establish monopolies not only in Germany, but in all the countries it conquered (6). Himmler’s dreaded SS, had a lot of friends in the business world who also hoped to benefit from the spoils. They gave him and his SS incredible sums of money, making them, so to speak, stockholders in his money-making terrorist organization.

The Hamburg-Amerika line, which was directed by Prescott Bush, not only contributed money and helped to distribute Nazi propaganda in the U.S. and Germany, but it was also one of the official “Friends of the Reichsfuhrer SS” (6) —also known as “The Order” and the “Brotherhood of Death.”

Like its American counterpart, the “Order of Skull and Bones” the German “Order” was dedicated to making money, and recruited its membership from the aristocracy and the moneyed elite.

HITLER AND THE BROTHERHOOD OF DEATH

In 1922, Averell Harriman, an alumni of Skull and Bones (Class of 1913), made a pilgrimage to Germany. But Hamburg wasn’t the lure. It was Berlin—the ancestral home of Skull and Bones, the Brotherhood of Death. Indeed, various members of The Order of Skull and Bones had been making pilgrimages to Germany and the University of Berlin since the inception of the American chapter of the Brotherhood of Death (17). Harriman was a dedicated “Bonesman.”

According to his third wife, Pamela, Averell “Harriman regularly went back to the tomb (the Bone’s Temple) on High Street, once even lamenting that his duties as chief negotiator at the Paris Peace Talks prevented him from attending a reunion” (25).

While in Berlin he made contact with Fritz Thyssen, also, allegedly, a member of a Germany-based secret society; though which one, of course, is a secret.

A number of German secret societies were in existence at the time, such as the Illuminnati of Bavaria and the Thule Society.

These secret societies counted rich industrialists, mystics, aristocrats, bankers and high ranking military men among their members (26).

In the early 1920s, when Harriman paid his visit to Germany, the membership of the Thule Society included Dietrich Eckart, Rudolf Hess, and Heinrich Himmler (27) all of whom were directly associated with Adolf Hitler, and all of whom became Nazi leaders (3,5). The secret society that had anointed Hitler as its leader, would later become known to the world as the SS —The Brotherhood of Death (6).

Although it cannot be proved, there is evidence to suggest that Himmler’s SS, and its American counterpart, Skull and Bones, were one and the same and directly linked with the Thule Society or the Illuminnati. In fact (and as will be detailed later in this chapter), some of the occult rituals that were said to be part of the initiation into the Thule Society and the SS (27), are similar to those that are said to be practiced by initiates into the American chapter of the Brotherhood of Death, that is, Skull and Bones (17,28).

For example, both employ initiation ceremonies in which the initiate “dies to the world and be born again into the Order…”

(29). In October of 1988 then Vice-President George H.W. Bush was asked by a reporter if he were “a Christian.” At first Bush seemed confused by the question, but then said, “if you mean born again, then, yes, I am a Christian.”

In his book, Mein Kamph (7) and in some of his speeches, Hitler also refers to being born again, that is “born anew.”

Likewise, George Bush jr., refers to himself as “born again” and freely admits he was “honored” to be chosen to be a member of Skull and Bones. As reported in the August 7, 2000 issue of Time magazine, Bush was asked: “Did you have any qualms, say, about joining an elite secret club like Bones?” Bush replied, “No qualms at all. I was honored.”

The motto of Hitler’s SS begins as follows: “It is an honor to be an SS man. It is an honor…” (6).

The leaders of the Thule Society also believed it to be an honor to have inducted Hitler into the mysteries of its secret order (27). In 1919, Dietrich Eckart, a leading member of the Thule Society, met Adolf Hitler for the first time. Eckhart believed that Hitler was the German “Messiah… the long-awaited savior” who would lead Germany to her destiny. Eckhart took Hitler under his wing and initiated Hitler into the mysteries of the secret order: “Follow Hitler; he will dance, but it is I who have called the tune. I have initiated him into the Secret Doctrine, opened his centers of vision, and given him the means to communicate with the powers” (27).

Hitler, in turn, referred to Eckhart as the “spiritual founder of” the Nazi party (7). In Table Talk (7) Hitler says of the man: “We’ve all taken a step forward on the road of existence, and we could no longer picture to ourselves exactly what Dietrich Eckart was for us. He shone in our eyes like the polar star.” In the final paragraphs of Mein Kampf (7), Hitler says of Eckart, “he was one of the best, who devoted his life to the awakening…”

Prominent members of Thule also included Rudolf Hess. Fritz Thyssen, who Harriman visited in 1922, reports that it was Hess who introduced him to Adolf Hitler. Thyssen too, thought Hitler would be the savior of Germany (30). Like the Bonesmen, Thyssen believed that the New World Order would be ruled by the kings of banking and commerce.

THE BANKING BROTHERHOOD

Thyssen and Harriman agreed to establish a banking association, and two years later, in 1924 the W.A. Harriman Co., established an international investment firm, “Union Banking Corporation,” which was in business with the Thyssens (31). Bert Walker’s son, George Herbert Walker, was made president (24).

As detailed by Webster G. Tarpley & Anton Chaitkin in their superbly documented book, George Bush: The Unauthorized Biography, “ by personal agreement between Averell Harriman and Fritz Thyssen in 1922… the Union Banking Corporation has since its inception handled funds chiefly supplied to it through the Dutch bank by the Thyssen interests for American investment…. transferring funds back and forth between New York and the Thyssen interests.”

The Union Banking Corporation and the Thyssen bank also acted as Nazi fronts and served to launder funds for Thyssen and the Nazis—money and funds that could be used to buy guns, arms, favorable publicity, and dozens of U.S. senators, congressman, and newspaper editors (12).

“Prescott Bush became vice president of W.A. Harriman & Co. in 1926. That same year, a friend of Harriman and Bush set up a giant new organization for their client Fritz Thyssen, prime sponsor of politician Adolf Hitler. The new German Steel Trust, Germany’s largest industrial corporation, was organized in 1926 by Wall Street banker Clarence Dillon. Dillon was an old comrade of Prescott Bush’s father Sam Bush” (24).

Thyssen went into business with Harriman for the same reasons he went into business with Hitler, to increase his wealth and power. It is unlikely that Thyssen did not inform Harriman of his intention of helping Hitler come to power. Indeed, Fritz Thyssen was Adolf Hitler’s primary financial backer and had been providing considerable financial support to Hitler and the Nazis, since 1923 (30). At their first meeting, Thyssen gave the new “German Messiah,” $25,000. At the same time, Thyssen and Harriman were also making big plans, some of which were dependent on Hitler coming to power.

As Thyssen explained (30): “We were at the worst time of the inflation. In Berlin the government was in distress. It was ruined financially. Authority was crumbling. In Saxony a communist government had been formed and the Red terror, organized by Max Hoelz, reigned through the countryside. The German Reich … was now about to crumble.”

Thyssen states that it was General Erich Ludendorff who first told him of Hitler and that Hess made the introductions. In 1923, General Erich Ludendorff was also the chief patron of Hitler’s SA— which, because it had been outlawed by the German government, had been renamed “Frontbann” (6). The SA (“Frontbann”) was a terrorist organization, which counted among its members, Heinrich Himmler.

Thyssen admits that he was mesmerized by Hitler (30). “I realized his orator gifts and his ability to lead the masses. What impressed me most however was the order that reigned over his meetings, the almost military discipline of his followers.”

In 1924, after his meetings with Hitler, Fritz Thyssen sent Hendrick J. Kouwenhoven, the managing director of his bank, to meet with the Harriman-Walker clique. It was after that meeting that the Union Banking Corporation was established.

In 1926 George Walker made his son-in-law Prescott Bush, vice-president of Harriman & Co. and president of Union Banking (24). The Thyssen banking relationship was expanded to include partnerships in the new German Steel Trust, Germany’s largest industrial corporation, which was also headed by Fritz Thyssen, Adolf Hitler’s primary financial backer.

According to the United States Government, Prescott Bush’s Union Banking Corporation (which he directed) was working as a front for the “Thyssen family” of “Germany… nationals … of a designated enemy country” (31).

As summed up by John Loftus, former U.S. Department of Justice Nazi War Crimes prosecutor, and the President of the Florida Holocaust Museum: “Thyssen (and the Nazi Party) obtained” his “early financing from Brown Brothers Harriman, and its affiliate, the Union Banking Corporation. Union Bank, in turn, was the Bush family’s holding company for a number of other entities, including the Holland American Trading Company. The Bush’s Union Bank bought the same corporate stock that the Thyssens were selling as part of their Nazi money laundering.”

These Nazi-front companies, “Brown Brothers, Harriman” and “Union Banking Corporation,” were controlled almost entirely by men who belonged to the American chapter of “Skull and Bones” (32).

Prescott Bush and associates, and Standard Oil, also provided loans, executive expertise, and petroleum-related products to IG Farben (12). IG Farben used that expertise to develop poison gas and petroleum to drive the Nazi war machine, and to run its slave labor and death-camps, the most notorious of which was Auschwitz where 83,000 people worked as slaves.

It is estimated that in the concentration camps alone, Himmler’s SS, worked to death and killed over 10 million men and women (6). A favored method of killing was using a special gas developed by IG Farben.

As detailed in chapter 2, Prescott Bush and Harriman were also in business with several other leading Nazis, such as Friedrich Flick who later became Hitler’s minister of the Interior, as well as IG. Farben, the company that developed the poison gas to kill Russians, gypsies, and Jews. Like Harriman and Bush, Flick was a member of The Order (6). The Flick-Harriman partnership was managed

by Prescott Bush (see chapter 2).

According to a U.S. government brief presented in 1946 at the Nuremberg war crimes tribunal, industrialist Friedrich Flick, was “a leading financial contributor to the Nazi Party from 1932 on and a member of the Circle of Friends of Himmler who contributed large sums to the Nazi SS.”

The “Circle of Friends” is also known as the “Friends of the Reichsfuhrer SS.” The Hamburg-Amerika line, which was directed by Prescott Bush, was also counted among the Friends of the Reichsfuhrer SS (6)—also known as “The Order” and the “Brotherhood of Death.”

Frick joined this most secretive and powerful of societies in 1932. By contrast, Prescott Bush and the Harriman brothers (W.A. and E.R) joined the American chapter of The Order, in 1917, 1913, and 1917, respectively, long before Hitler had taken the first steps on his long road to power. They were all part of the same brotherhood, however. Indeed, be it the Thule Society, the SS, or the American version of “The Order,” all sprouted from the same German roots.

THE BROTHERHOOD OF DEATH

The evil, diabolic symbolism of Skull and Bones is designed to stir feelings of terror and to warn of death which is why it appears on bottles of poison and has been the symbol of choice for pirates and death squads. It is precisely because it is designed to induce terror that the symbol of the death head became the talisman worn on the black uniforms of Adolf Hitler’s Nazi elite: The Order—the dreaded SS, the Brotherhood of Death.

The Bonesman of Yale shared not just the symbolism of the Skull and Bones with the SS Nazi elite, but practiced many of the same exact initiation rituals and recruited their elite members from the same strata of society.

Like the Bonesmen of Yale, the Nazi SS recruited its members from the upper echelons of society, i.e. the blue bloods, bankers, and aristocrats. As detailed by Heinz Hohns (6), “the first arrivals were from the aristocracy. Even before the Nazi seizure of power certain great names had been added to the SS list” including Grand Dukes, Counts, and Princes. However, “in spring 1933 came a further infusion of blue blood. Many of the senior SS posts were occupied by the nobility… and the ruling class elite. The primary requirements in the SS, were money and officer material, and they could come only from one source—the old-established ruling class elite—the nobility, the world of commerce and the financiers… German’s captains of industry.”

There were, however, different ranks within the SS. Those who were to belong to the highest ranks underwent an initiation ceremony similar to that of the Order of Skull and Bones at Yale.

As detailed in Heinz Hohn’s, The Order of the Death’s Head (6), initiates into the SS underwent an occult-like quasi-religious midnight ceremony involving oath-taking, question and answer confessions, and prayer-like sessions, all of which were designed to impress upon the initiate that he was able to become a “knight” and a member of a secret brotherhood.

The ceremony took place at midnight, in a castle, beneath the dining hall where there lay “a stone crypt” and “the realm of the dead” (6). “A flight of steps in the middle of the crypt led down into a well-like cavity; in the centre of the cavity were twelve stone pedestals.” Bones and relics, including the skull and skeleton of noble men and kings were also kept within the “holy of holies” including the bones of “King Heinrich.”

Initiates would thus commune with the spirits of the dead, who might appear and even speak. The initiate into the SS, by undergoing this spiritual journey, would also be reborn, as a knight, and a member of the secret order (6).

Likewise, we are informed that initiates into Yale’s The Order, were required to undergo an array of “exotic and occult” “bonding rituals” including a quasi-religious midnight ceremony which involved question and answer confessions that took place while the initiate lay in a coffin (17,29).

The ceremony took place in castle, at midnight, in “the tomb.” As explained by Ron Rosenbaum (29) while lying in the “coffin” the initiates goes “off on a symbolic journey through the underworld to rebirth, which takes place in Room Number 322. There, the Order clothes the newborn knight in its own special garments, implying that, henceforth, he will tailor himself to the Order’s mission” (p. 89, 148).

The Castle walls of Himmler’s SS headquarters, were heavily decorated with Nazi symbols and regalia.

Likewise, based on several independent reports by those who visited the Skull and Bones’ Yale Castle—what Bones initiates call “the Tomb”—some of the walls and rooms are covered with Nazi symbols and regalia, including swastikas, and “SS macho Nazi iconography.” One visitor described a room with “a little Nazi shrine inside” (17,18).

In yet another room of the Order of Skull and Bones, one visitor observed “mantelpieces decorated with loads of skulls.” She and others have been told “that in order to prove their mettle and perhaps to bond them in mutual guilt over participation in an illicit act, each class of 15 new initiates to Skull and Bones are required to dig up the skull of a famous person and bring it to the Tomb to be enshrined in its skull collection” (17,18).

Like the SS, The Order of Skull and Bones is also known as the Brotherhood of Death. And we are told, initiates into the SS and The Order of Skull and Bones, are required to say the words: “It is an honor…”

When George W. Bush was asked, “Did you have any qualms, say, about joining an elite secret club like Bones?” Bush replied, “I was honored” (33).

The identical symbolism and use of similar language is not just coincidence. In fact, Prescott Bush and several of his fellow Bonesmen, felt such an affinity with Nazi terrorist ideals, that they helped arm Hitler’s SS and the Nazi terrorist war machine.

However, Bush and his partners in banking and oil, did not link up with Hitler and his SS just because of shared ideology but because of money, oil, and an unquenchable thirst for power.

THE OIL BROTHERHOOD

As the 1932 presidential elections began, Hitler and the Nazi party were almost broke. They were desperate for funds. And then, after meeting with the captains of industry, Hitler was suddenly flush with cash.

According to Hitler’s vice-Chancellor, Franz von Papen (34), “the most documented account of the National Socialists’ sudden acquisition of funds was contained in a book published in Holland in 1933.” It was published “by the old established Amsterdam publishing house of Van Holkema & Warendorf, called De Geldbronnen van Het Nationaal-Socialisme (Drie Gesprekken Met Hitler) under the name “Sidney Warburg.”

In that book, “The Financial Sources of National Socialism” it is claimed that Hitler’s rise to power was aided directly by Wall Street bankers, industrialists, and oil companies, including Standard Oil, and John D. Rockefeller, who contributed $32,000,000 between the years 1929 to 1932.

In the opening paragraphs, the author, who calls himself “Sydney Warburg” states that: “There are moments when I want to turn away from a world of such intrigue, trickery, swindling and tampering with the stock exchange …. Do you know what I can never understand? How it is possible that people of good and honest character — for which I have ample proof — participate in swindling and fraud, knowing full well that it will affect thousands.” The New York Times (11/24/1933), was quick to dismiss the book, but in so doing, revealed its own Nazi sympathies: “Hoax on Nazis Feared.”

Feared?

The New York Times, “feared” that not only the Nazis, but the publishers were “victims of a hoax.”

The New York Times was apparently a fan of Hitler, for prior to 1933, and during the same time Rockefeller and Standard Oil were contributing millions of dollars, it ran several quite positive stories about Adolf Hitler in 1929, 1930, and 1931 (35) as did the Hearst publishing empire (15).

The author of this “feared hoax” was “Sydney Warburg.” However, after the book’s publication, not only the NewYork Times but the Warburg family, which included Max Warburg, a director of IG Farben in Germany, and Paul Warburg a director of American IG. Farben, denounced the book. Of course, we also know that IG. Farben was a major financial supporter of Hitler, and we know the Standard Oil and the Bush-Harriman clique were in business with IG Farben (36). So, the Warburg denunciation cannot be taken completely seriously.

Nevertheless, James Warburg demanded that the book be destroyed because it contains “a mass of libelous material against various members of my family and against a number of prominent banking houses and individuals in New York.” However, Warburg then goes on to say, “I have never to this day seen a copy of the book” (37).

Within days of the books publication, and although those who denounced it have never seen a copy it disappeared from circulation and almost all copies were quickly destroyed (36).

As detailed in Antony C. Sutton’s well documented book, Wall Street and the Rise of Hitler (36), the first section of the book explains that in 1929, American banks and investors were concerned that the demands by France on German war reparations, were eating into their own profits. Thus, these American business men called a meeting in June 1929 to discuss the problem and what might be done. Those in attendance included “members of the Federal Reserve Bank and leading American bankers” including the “directors of Guaranty Trust Company, the Presidents of the Federal Reserve Banks, in addition to five independent bankers, young Rockefeller, and Glean from Royal Dutch Shell. Rockefeller” and “Carter” of Guaranty Trust Company, “dominated the proceedings. The others listened and nodded their heads.”

Antony Sutton, then goes on to report that according to Warburg’s book, “The general consensus at the bankers’ meeting was that the only way to free Germany from French financial clutches was by revolution, either Communist or German Nationalist.”

Rockefeller argued that the money should go to Hitler. After some negotiation, 10 million dollars was transferred to the Nazis.

During subsequent meetings, it was explained that Hitler’s storm troopers and SS, were insufficiently equipped and badly needed machine guns, revolvers, and carbines. Hitler explained that he had two plans for takeover in Germany: (a) revolution (b) legal takeover plan. Hitler is quoted as saying, “revolution costs five hundred million marks. Legal takeover costs two hundred million marks — what will your bankers decide?”

A legal takeover thus offered the best deal.

Warburg passed these demands to Rockefeller and Guaranty Trust and received the following answer in reply:

“Suggested amounts are out of the question. We don’t want to and cannot. Explain to man that such a transfer to Europe will shatter financial market. Absolutely unknown on international territory. Expect long report, before decision is made. Stay there. Continue investigation. Persuade man of impossible demands. Don’t forget to include in report own opinion of possibilities for future of man.”

After further negotiations, Rockefeller and the American banking and oil interests offered an additional $15 million which would help finance the legal takeover. Revolution would be too expensive and destructive.

In the months after Hitler took power, in 1933, Warburg delivered yet another payment from Rockefeller and Carter and their associates in banking, industry, and oil, i.e. 7 million dollars (37).

Although the New York Times, and the directors of IG Farben—a company that assisted in the murder of millions of men, women, and children—have decried this cruel “hoax” which puts the Nazis, Rockefeller, Standard Oil, and the bankers at Guaranty in such a bad light, we do know that these men and these companies were in business with the Nazis (13). And we know that Emil Helfferich, chairman of the Bush-Harriman company, Hamburg-Amerika, was also chairman of Standard Oil’s German subsidiaries. Emil Helfferich frequently wrote out checks to Heinrich Himmler payable on a special Standard Oil account. According to U.S. intelligence documents reviewed by author Anthony Sutton (36), Helfferich was still making these payments to the S.S. in 1944—the same S.S. which was rounding up, enslaving, and supervising the mass murder of Russians, Jews, Gypsies, Poles, etc., at IG Farben’s death camps.

–~~~~~~~~~~~~–

THE STANDARD OIL NAZIS

“In two years Germany will be manufacturing oil and gas enough out of soft coal for a long war. The Standard Oil of New York is furnishing millions of dollars to help.” -Commercial Attaché,

U.S. Embassy in Berlin, Germany, January 1933.

Standard Oil also provided expertise to IG. Farben including the know how to make leaded gasoline. As detailed in an IG Farben memo: “Since the beginning of the war we have been in a position to produce lead tetraethyl solely because, a short time before the outbreak of the war, the Americans had established plants for us ready for production and supplied us with all available experience.

In this manner we did not need to perform the difficult work of development because we could start production right away on the basis of all the experience that the Americans had for years.”

In another IG Farben memo Standard Oil’s assistance in procuring $20 million worth of aviation fuel and lubricants is acknow edged:

“As a further remarkable example of advantageous effect for us of the contract between IG and Standard Oil, the following should be mentioned: in the years 1934 / 1935 our government had the greatest interest in gathering from abroad a stock of especially valuable mineral oil products (in particular, aviation gasoline and aviation lubricating oil), and holding it in reserve to an amount approximately equal to 20 million dollars at market value. The German Government asked IG if it were not possible, on the basis o fits friendly relations with Standard Oil, to buy this amount in Farben’s name; actually, however, as trustee of the German Government. The fact that we actually succeeded by means of the most difficult negotiations in buying the quantity desired by our government from the American Standard Oil Company and the Dutch — English Royal — Dutch — Shell group and in transporting it to Germany, was made possible only through the aid of the Standard Oil Co.”

Standard oil, Rockefeller, and the Bush-Harriman clique, not only provided financial and technological assistance to Hitler, but assisted his war effort and terror campaign to the detriment of the United States (13,36,38).

It is because of this collaboration, that the Bush-HarrimanWalker properties were seized by the U.S. government for violation of the Trading with the Enemy Act (31).

Charges of “criminal conspiracy with the enemy” were also filed against Standard Oil. However, when evidence of collusion was presented by Thurman Arnold, chief of the Antitrust Division of the U.S. government, it was pointed out by Standard that it was also selling oil and fuel to the U.S. Army, Navy, and Air Force. If Standard Oil were punished, America might lose a major share of its oil supply, and might lose the war.

Standard Oil not only threatened the government of the United States, but it had already orchestrated a major oil and gasoline shortage during the Summer of 1941. These artificial shortages were also investigated by the United States Congress.

As summarized by the U.S. National Archives, a “Special Committee to Investigate Gasoline and Fuel-Oil Shortages” commenced hearings on August 28, 1941. “18.89 Fear of impending gasoline scarcity along the Atlantic seaboard gripped the American public during the summer of 1941. Members of Congress were deluged with letters and telegrams from concerned constituents. In August… authorities… sought to quiet public concern. These statements failed to stop the hoarding of gasoline and the deterioration of public confidence.”

“18.90 In response to the confusing situation, the Senate established the Special Committee to Investigate Gasoline and FuelOil Shortages (78A-F31) on August 28, 1941. The committee, chaired by Francis T. Maloney of Connecticut, was to investigate the shortage of fuel in the various States, the methods of delivery, and the means to ensure an adequate supply for national defense without undue hardship to the private sector…. A major focus of the committee was the petroleum distribution system.”

Recalling the terrible gas shortages which were due to a problem in the “petroleum distribution system” the government backed down and Rockefeller and Standard oil escaped punishment. The charges of “criminal conspiracy with the enemy” were dropped. However, Standard Oil did not get off the hook completely. Standard oil agreed to release its patents and pay a modest fine.

Thurman Arnold did not let the matter drop, however. He, along with Secretary of the Interior Harold Ickes, provided the documents detailing the collusion between Standard Oil and IG Farben, to Senator Harry Truman, chairman of the Senate Special Committee Investigating the National Defense Program. There followed a series of hearings in March 1942, “In order to disclose the truth about Standard” (13, 39).

After the hearing, the committee chairman, Harry S. Truman, characterized the arrangements between Standard oil and IG Farben as “treasonable.”

Again, however, the entire matter was dropped. Standard Oil again threatened to disrupt the U.S. war effort.

According to Mark Aarons and John Loftus (The Secret War Against the Jews), “There was a reason for Rockefeller’s escape: blackmail. According to the former intelligence officers we interviewed on this point, the blackmail was simple and powerful: The Dulles brothers (John Foster, later Secretary of State, and Allen, later director of the CIA) had one of their clients threaten to interrupt the U.S. oil supply during wartime. Standard executives made it clear that the entire U.S. war effort was fueled by their oil and it could be stopped. . . . The American government had no choice but to go along if it wanted to win the war” (39).

In May of 1942, another aspect of the treasonable relationship maintained between Standard Oil and IG Farben was brought up during testimony before a Patents Committee hearings, chaired by Senator Homer T. Bone. Even after Hitler declared war on the United States, Rockefeller and thus Standard Oil was collaborating with Nazi Germany and seeking to prevent the U.S. from manufacturing explosives and synthetic rubber (40,41,42).

Following the conclusion of the war, Standard Oil’s treasonable behavior was again brought to light by the United States Congress. During congressional hearings conducted before the Truman, Bone, and Kilgore Committees, it was concluded that “Standard Oil” had “seriously imperiled the war preparations of the United States” and that Standard Oil had colluded with IG Farben, to prevent the United States from gaining access to war-related technologies such as the creation of “synthetic rubber.”

As noted, although the most serious charges against Standard Oil were dropped, the U.S. government did seize a number of its patents, under the Trading with the Enemy Act.

However, in July of 1944, Standard Oil, filed a lawsuit against the U.S. government, contesting the seizure of its patents. In November of 1945, Judge Charles E. Wyzanski ruled that the government had been entitled to seize the patents.

Standard Oil appealed. On September 22, 1947, Judge Charles Clark rejected the appeal, concluding that “Standard Oil can be considered an enemy national in view of its relationships with IG. Farben after the United States and Germany had become active enemies” (40).

Rockefeller, of course, was a member of the Brotherhood. Rockefeller was also in business with other Nazi collaborators, including Prescott Bush and the Harrimans.

THE OIL BROTHERHOOD

From 1927 to 1941, the future director of the CIA, Allen Dulles worked as lawyer and international finance specialist for Sullivan & Cromwell, a Wall Street law firm in New York. Dulles performed work for Bush, Harriman, and Rockefeller in setting up business relationships with the Nazis and with top Nazi industrialists, and served as legal counsel for Standard Oil and the Nazi’s IG Farben, who had partnered with the Rockefellers (43).

Allen Dulles played a pivotal role in promoting U.S.-Nazi corporate relations. The Nazis considered Allen Dulles to be “the most influential White House man in Europe” and Dulles had numerous meetings with top ranking members of the SS (6).

In fact both Dulles brothers (John Foster, later Secretary of State, and Allen, later director of the CIA) represented the interests of Bush, Harriman, Rockefeller, and other Nazi collaborators prior to, during and after the ending of the second world war. Whereas Allen served as a spymaster, lawyer and deal maker who brought over a thousand high ranking Nazis into the CIA and found jobs for them in the Republican party and corporate America (43,44), John Foster Dulles was on the board of IG Farben who had partnered with Standard Oil (43).

As was the case with Guaranty Trust, which provided loans to the Nazis and to the Soviet Union, Rockefeller’s Standard Oil was also in business with Hitler’s nemesis: the Soviet Union. By doing business with both fascist regimes, this guaranteed that regardless of who won the war, Standard Oil would profit. The Dulles’ brothers are said to have played a major role in ironing out the Soviet deal.

In 1938, oil was discovered in Saudi Arabia. The king of Saudi Arabia, Ibn Saud, was a supporter of Adolf Hitler. Dulles, acting as a representative of Standard Oil (as well as IG Farben) also played a major role in negotiating and gaining major concessions from Ibn Saud.

As Saudi Prince Bandar explained to PBS Frontline (45):

“America has never been a colonizing power as far as we were concerned. Our relationship with America… started in the 1930s. And when the Americans came to Saudi Arabia, they didn’t come as an invader. They came actually as a private sector, trying to help us find oil. They found the oil for us, and they’ve been our friends ever since.”

The result of these discoveries and negotiations was a joint venture between Standard Oil, Texaco, and Mobil, and the formation of the Arabian-American Oil Company (ARAMCO). King Ibn Saud and his family were promised millions in return, whereas the Arabian people received basically nothing (46).

By 1944, Standard Oil had twice artificially created oil shortages as a means of gaining leverage over the U.S. government. Based on the discoveries made in Saudi Arabia, the Standard oilled cartel successfully lobbied the U.S. Senate, which in turn proposed that the U.S. government should finance the construction of oil pipelines and oil refineries so as to meet future energy needs. With the assistance of the Dulles brothers, this proposal soon became a program to assist Standard oil and ARAMCO in the Persian Gulf.

In February and March of 1944, the “Special Committee Investigating Petroleum Resources” began hammering out the details. As summarized by the United States National Archives: “18.94 In February 1944, the Petroleum Administrator for War, Secretary of Interior Harold Ickes, announced that the Arabian-American Oil Co. would construct a refinery to produce petroleum war products for the Allied Nations, and that the U.S. Government would construct a petroleum pipeline from the Persian Gulf area to the eastern shore of the Mediterranean and would obtain a crude oil petroleum reserve of one billion barrels in the Gulf area.” Because of interests pertaining to “national welfare and security” this Special Committee also agreed to “the disposal of Government-owned pipelines and refineries as surplus properties, tidelands oil, and other issues related to petroleum supplies.”

In other words, after twice being held hostage by Standard Oil, the U.S. government agreed to give “Government-owned pipelines and refineries” to this Standard oil-led cartel, and to fund the creation of new pipelines and refineries in Saudi Arabia.

The U.S. government and the oil cartel headed by Standard Oil, were now in business with the “royal family” of Ibn Saud. Saud and his family began receiving millions of dollars in payments as their reward for selling out so cheaply (46).

Roosevelt, it is said, had been considering bringing charges of treason against Dulles, Bush, and Rockefeller following the conclusion of the second world war. However, Roosevelt’s death put a stop to that. Not only did these traitors get off scott free, but the Dulles brothers also received handsome rewards, Allen becoming the first director the CIA, and John, the Secretary of State.

Nevertheless, although faded by time, and despite the purposeful destruction of incriminating records, the facts remain the same: Prescott Bush, the Harrimans, Rockefellers, the Dulles brothers, and Ibn Saud, had partnered with a terrorist Nazi regime at war with the United States. The Saudi royal family, the Bush family, the Harrimans, Rockefellers, American banks, American Oil, and America’s political elite, went into business with Nazi terrorists who murdered tens of millions of innocent, men, women, and children, including tens of thousands of Americans. They partnered with a terrorist regime that was at war with America for three interrelated reasons: money, oil, and power.

Decades later, after Bush was elected vice-president and then President, he, the Saudi royal family, and the CIA, would provide tens of millions of dollars in support of yet another terrorist organization that would declare war with the United States, this one ostensibly headed by Saudi multi-millionaire, Osama bin Laden.

As we shall see, doing business with gangsters, thugs, and terrorists who preach death to America, and who kill Americans, is a Bush family tradition (4,47).

NOTES

1). Phenomenology of Spirit; Philosophy of History; Science of Logic; The Philosophy of Right; by Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel.

2). The Bondage of the Will; By Faith Alone; by Martin Luther. 3). W. L. Shirer. “The Rise & Fall of the Third Reich.” Fawcett World Library, New York, 1960.

4). John Loftus and Mark Aarons. “The Secret War Against The Jews” St. Martins Press, New York, 1994; Charles Higham, “Trading with the Enemy: An Expose of the Nazi-American Money Plot 1933-1949,” Delacorte Press, 1983; Webster G. Tarpley & Anton Chaitkin, “George Bush: The Unauthorized Biography,” The Executive Intelligence Review.

5). J. Toland. “Adolf Hitler,” Doubleday, New York, 1976

6). Heinz Hohne. The Order of the Death’s Head.” Ballantine, New York. 1967.

7). Adolf Hitler, “Mein Kampf;” Adolf Hitler, “Table Talk.”

8). David MacGregor, “Hegel and Marx After the Fall of Communism, “Demy, 1998; Sowell Thomas, “Marxist Philosophy and Economics,” William Morrow and Company,” New York 1985. In 1843, Marx began work on a line-by-line analysis of Hegel’s “Philosophy of Right” and introduced a synthesis which he described as “dialectical materialism,” the philosophy of communism. In 1948, Karl Marx and Friedrich Engels published The Communist Manifesto, in which he applied Hegel’s ideas of thesis and anti-thesis to government and capitalism to arrive at the synthesis of a “conflict-free society;”i.e., communism. Marx believed his idea of a communist society was the fulfillment of Hegel’s ideal, which, according to Marx and Engle, “had been turned upside down on its head.” Marx believed he had put the Hegelian Idea right side up. In Marxist communism, instead of just a few individuals owning all the means of production, and thus all the wealth, all the people would own their own means of production and would share equally in its rewards. “Hegelin contrast to his disciplesdid not parade ignorance, but was one of the finest intellects of all time” -Friedrich Engels, “The Critique of Political Economy.”

9). Tom Rockmore, “On Heidegger’s Nazism and Philosophy,,” University of California Press, 1992. Leonard Peikoff, “The Ominous Parallels,” Second Renaissance, Inc. 1986.

10). Antony Sutton, “Wall Street and the Bolshevik Revolution,” Arlington House, 1974; Among the banks loaning millions of dollars to the Soviet Union in the early 1900s: J.P. Morgan, Guranty Trust Company (Harriman-Walker), and Rockefeller’s Chase-Manhattan Bank. It is estimated that over $75,000,000 in assistance was provided. In 1912, Mrs. Edward Harriman (Mother of Roland and Averell Harriman) sold 8,000 shares of Guaranty Trust to J.P. Morgan which thus acquired a controlling interest. The Harriman-Walker-Bush and Rockefeller banking clique had their eye on the oil-rich Caspian basin and the Caucuses. With these loans, the Soviet Union was able to purchase oil-related services from companies controlled by this same clique, including Rockefellers Standard Oil which built oil refineries which were financed by the loans provided by Harriman-Bush-Rockefeller banks.

11). The Washington Post, 2/2/1918; John Loftus and Mark Aarons. “The Secret War Against The Jews” St. Martins Press, New York, 1994; Charles Higham, “Trading with the Enemy: An Expose of the Nazi-American Money Plot 1933-1949,” Delacorte Press, 1983; Webster G. Tarpley & Anton Chaitkin, “George Bush: The Unauthorized Biography,” The Executive Intelligence Review; Antony Sutton, “Wall Street and the Bolshevik Revolution,” Arlington House, 1974; Eustace Mullins, “The World Order,” 1980.

12). Anthony Sutton, “Wall Street and the Rise of Hitler,” Anthony Sutton, “How the Order Creates War & Revolution;” John Loftus and Mark Aarons. “The Secret War Against The Jews” St. Martins Press, New York, 1994; Charles Higham, “Trading with the Enemy: An Expose of the Nazi-American Money Plot 1933-1949,” Delacorte Press, 1983; Christopher Simpson, “The Splendid Blond Beast.”

13). “Senate Special Committee Investigating the National Defense Program,” Senator Harry Truman, chairman, May-August, 1942; NMT, “IG. Farben Case,” Volumes VII and VIII; “Elimination of German Resources,” United States Congress; United States Senate, Patents Committee, Senator Homer T. Bone, Chairman, May, 1942.

14). Edward J., Jr. Renehan, “The Kennedys at War, 1937-1945,” Doubleday, 2002.

15). William E. Dodd, U.S. Ambassador to Germany, 1937, “Ambassador Dodd’s Diary;” see also Court Documents: Hearst vs Gillmor, see paragraph 61: “Promptly after this said visit with Adolf Hitler and the making of said arrangements. . . said plaintiff, William Randolph Hearst, instructed all Hearst press correspondents in Germany, including those of INS [International News Service] to report happenings in Germany only in a friendly’ manner. All of such correspondents reporting happenings in Germany accurately and without friendliness, sympathy and bias for the actions of the then German government, were transferred elsewhere, discharged, or forced to resign.” According to journalist George Seldes: “William Randolph Hearst, Sr., was the lord of all the press lords in the United States. The millions who read the Hearst newspapers and magazines and saw Hearst newsreels in the nation’s moviehouses had their minds poisoned by Hitler propaganda.., Hitler had the support of the most widely circulated magazine in history, ‘Readers Digest,’ as well as nineteen big-city newspapers and one of the three great American news agencies, the $220-million Hearst press empire” (George Seldes, “Even the Gods Can’t Change History”).

16). Karl Meyer, “The Opium War’s Secret History,” New York Times, 6/28/1997; Jack Breeching, “The Chinese Opium Wars,” Harcourt Brace Jovanovich 1975.

17). Anthony Sutton, “America’s Secret Establishment: An introduction to The Order of Skull & Bones” Liberty House, New York. 1986.

18). Ron Rosenbaum, “The Last Secrets of Skull and Bones,” Esquire Magazine, September, 1977; Peggy Alder-Robohm, “Skull and Bones — Bush’s Boy’s Club,” Covert Action Quarterly No. 33, 1990; John Schrag, “Skeleton in His Closet,” Willamette Week, September 1925, 1991; David W. Dunlap, “Yale Society Resists Peeks Into Its Crypt,” New York Times, 11/4/88.

19). Peggy Alder-Robohm, “Skull and Bones — Bush’s Boy’s Club,” Covert Action Quarterly No. 33, 1990; John Schrag, “Skeleton in His Closet,” Willamette Week, September 19-25, 1991.

20). Bensel, Richard F. “Yankee Leviathan: The Origins of Central State Authority in America, 1859-1877,” Cambridge University Press, 1990; Ransom, Roger L. “Conflict and Compromise: The Political Economy of Slavery, Emancipation, and the American Civil War.” New York: Cambridge University Press, 1989; Ransom, Roger L. “The Economic Consequences of the American Civil War.” In The Political Economy of War and Peace, M. Wolfson. Norwell (Ed), Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1998; Goldin, Claudia, and Frank Lewis. “The PostBellum Recovery of the South and the Cost of the Civil War: Comment.” Journal of Economic History 38, 487-492, 1978.

21). Michael Fellman, ‘’Inside War.” T. J. Stiles, “Jesse James, Last Rebel of the Civil War,” Knopf, 2002.

22). Ted Flynn, “Hope for the Wicked;” Webster G. Tarpley & Anton Chaitkin, “George Bush: The Unauthorized Biography,” The Executive Intelligence Review. A veritable list of America’s financial elite and powerful have been members of Skull and Bones.

23). Fitzhugh Green, “George Bush: An Intimate Portrait,” Hippocrene Books; Russell S. Bowen (ret. Brigadier General, U. S. Army), “The Immaculate Deception: The Bush Crime Family Exposed,” America West Publishers 1991; Webster G. Tarpley & Anton Chaitkin, “George Bush: The Unauthorized Biography,” The Executive Intelligence Review; Christopher Simpson, “The Splendid Blond Beast.”

24). Webster G. Tarpley & Anton Chaitkin, “George Bush: The Unauthorized Biography,” The Executive Intelligence Review.

25). Walter Isaacson and Evan Thomas, “The Wise Men: Six Friends and the World They Made,” Simon & Schuster, 1986; Christopher Ogden, “Life of the Party: The Biography of Pamela Digby Churchill Hayward Harriman,” Little and Brown and Company 1994

26). William Still “New World Order: The Ancient Plan of Secret

Societies,” Huntington House, 1990; Michael Howard, “The Occult Con-

spiracy: Secret Societies — Their Influence and Power in World His-

tory,” Destiny Books 1989; Bill Cooper, “Behold A Pale Horse.”

27). Trevor Ravenscroft, “Spear of Destiny.”

28). Bill Cooper, “Behold A Pale Horse.” Ron Rosenbaum, “The Last Secrets of Skull and Bones,” Esquire Magazine, September, 1977;

29). Ron Rosenbaum, “The Last Secrets of Skull and Bones,” Esquire Magazine, September, 1977.

30). Fritz Thyssen, “I Paid Hitler.”

31). On Oct. 20, 1942, Under the Trading with the Enemy Act, the

U.S. government ordered the seizure of Nazi German banking operations in New York City which were being directed by Prescott Bush, including the Union Banking Corporation, in which Bush was a director. The U.S. Alien Property Custodian seized Union Banking Corp.’s stock shares, all of which were owned by Prescott Bush, E. Roland, Bunny Harriman, and three Nazis, and two other Bush associates (see Office of Alien Property Custodian Vesting Order No. 248, Vesting Order No. 259, Vesting Order No. 261, Vesting Order No. 370). Vesting Order No. 248 noted that the Union Banking Corporation was run as a front for the “Thyssen family” of “Germany” and designated “Thyssen” as “nationals … of a designated enemy country.” See also testimony of Capt. Frederick C. Mensing, John Schroeder, Paul von Lilienfeld-Toal, “Investigation of Nazi Propaganda Activities and Investigation of Certain Other Propaganda Activities,” Public Hearings before A Subcommittee of the Special Committee on Un-American Activities, United States House of Representatives, Seventy Third Congress, New York City, July 9-12, 1934—Hearings No. 73NY-7, Washington: U.S. Govt. Printing Office, 1934.

32). Members of Skull & Bones in Brown Bros, Harriman: Ray Morris (Class of 1901), Mortimer Seabury (Class of 1909), W.A. Harriman (Class of 1913), E. Roland Harriman (Class of 1917), Prescott Sheldon Bush (Class of 1917), Ellery S. James (Class of 1917),

Knight Wooley (Class of 1917), Robert A. Lovett (Class of 1918). Members of Skull and Bones in Union Banking Corp: E. Roland Harriman (Class of 1917), Prescott Sheldon Bush (Class of 1917), Knight Wooley (Class of 1917), Ellery Sedgewick James (Class of 1917).

33). Walter Isaacson, “My Heritage Is Part Of Who I Am,” Time Magazine, 6/72000.

34). Franz von Papen, “Memoirs,” E.P. Dutton & Co., Inc., 1958, Translated by Brian Connell.

35). New York Times, 9/15/1930, 9/21/1930/ In 1929 the New York Times reported only one brief item on Adolf Hitler. In 1931 it repeatedly ran articles on Hitler most of which presented him in a favorable light.

36). Antony C. Sutton, “Wall Street and the Rise of Hitler,”

37). James P. Warburg’s Sworn Affidavit, New York City, New York, 8/15/1949. However, there is also evidence that the Warburgs were also enthusiastic supporters of Hitler. In a letter dated, March 27, 1933, Max Warburg states that “For the last few years business was considerably better than we had anticipated, but a reaction is making itself felt for some months. We are actually suffering also under the very active propaganda against Germany, caused by some unpleasant circumstances. These occurrences were the natural consequence of the very excited election campaign, but were extraordinarily exaggerated in the foreign press. The Government is firmly resolved to maintain public peace and order in Germany, and I feel perfectly convinced in this respect that there is no cause for any alarm whatsoever.” On March 29, 1933, Max’s son, Erich Warburg, sent a cable to his cousin Frederick M. Warburg, a director of the Harriman railroad system; “use all your influence ‘’ to stop all anti-Nazi activity in America, including “atrocity news and unfriendly propaganda in foreign press, mass meetings, etc.” On March 31, 1933, the American-Jewish Committee, issued a statement asking that “no American boycott against Germany be encouraged.” See John L. Spivak “Wall Street’s Fascist Conspiracy,” New Masses, January 29-February 5, 1934.

38). Leonard and Mark Silk, “The American Establishment;” Carrol Quigley, “Tragedy and Hope;”James F. Hopkins, “A History of the Hemp

Industry in Kentucky,” University of Kentucky Press, 1951; George Seldes, “Facts and Fascism,” In Fact, Inc., 1943; George Seldes, “Even the Gods Can’t Change History: The Facts Speak for Themselves,” Lyle Stuart, Inc., 1976.

39). John Loftus and Mark Aarons. “The Secret War Against The Jews” St. Martins Press, New York, 1994;

40). “Trading with the Enemy,”

41). As detailed in the book, Trading With the Enemy, “John R. Jacobs, Jr., of the Attorney General’s department, testified that Standard had interfered with the American explosives industry by blocking the use of a method of producing synthetic ammonia. As a result of its deals with Farben, the United States had been unable to use this vital process even after Pearl Harbor. Also, the United States had been restricted in techniques of producing hydrogen from natural gas and from obtaining paraflow, a product used for airplane lubrication at high altitudes.” In addition, “Texas oil operator C.R. Starnes appeared to testify that Standard had blocked him at every turn in his efforts to produce synthetic rubber after Pearl Harbor.” This testimony was followed by that of “John

R. Jacobs” who “reappeared in an Army private’s uniform (he had been

inducted the day before) to bring up another disagreeable matter: Stan-

dard had also, in league with Farben, restricted production of methanol,

a wood alcohol that was sometimes used as motor fuel.”

42). NMT, IG. Farben case, Volumes VII and VIII, pp. 1304-1311; “Elimination of German Resources, p. 1085.”

43). Richard Sasuly, “IG Farben.” Joseph Borkin, “The Crime and Punishment of I.G. Farben,” 1978.

44). Christopher Simpson, “Blowback: America’s Recruitment of Nazis and Its Effects On the Cold War,” Wiedenfeld & Nicholson, 1988; Tom Bower, “The paperclip conspiracy : the hunt for the Nazi scientists,” Little, Brown, 1987; Charles R. Allen, Jr. Nazi war criminals in America

: facts—action : the basic handbook,” Highgate House, 1985; Clarence Lasby, “Project Paperclip; German scientists and the Cold War,” Atheneum, 1971.

45). PBS Frontline, Prince Bandar interview, 9/2001.

46). SaÔd K. Aburish, “A Brutal Friendship: The West and the Arab Elite,” St. Martins Press, 1997; Micah L. Sifry and Christopher Cerf, “The Gulf War Reader,” Random House, 1991; A. M. Vasilev, Alexei Vassiliev, “The History of Saudi Arabia,” New York University Press, 2000.

47). Russell S. Bowen (ret. Brigadier General, U. S. Army), “The Immaculate Deception: The Bush Crime Family Exposed,” America West Publishers. 1991; Peter Brewton, “The Mafia, CIA, and George Bush,” Shapolsky Book Pub., 1992.

–~~~~~~~~~~~~–

Chapter 4

CIA-NAZIS: TERROR & MURDER INCORPORATED

After World War II, the CIA eventually split into two factions, one which was controlled by Nazis/fascists that had allied with the South’s Klan political engine, one which managed to place at least two Klan leaders on the Supreme Court, Hugo Black and Supreme Court Chief Justice Earl Warren. By 1967, they were so deeply established in the political establishment, and in the military and intelligence community they could build navy barracks like this one in Coronado, California. That George W. Bush’s grandfather, Prescott Bush, was involved in financing the Nazis isn’t contested nor is the fact that he was part of a criminal cabal that actively sought to impose a fascist coup in America in the 30s (the Business Plot). Under George W. Bush, however, this fascist state– one completely controlled by Wall Street– that Prescott Bush envisioned came into being with the passage of the Patriot Act.


Throughout the 1930’s and early 1940s, Prescott Bush, the Harrimans, Rockefellers, and their associates, had been in business with Nazis and the terrorist brotherhood, the SS (1,2). With the assistance of the Dulles brothers, who were playing pivotal roles in and out of the White House, the Brotherhood of Death began expanding its cancerous tentacles into the heart of the United States government (1,2). With the help of friends in high places, including Dulles and hundreds of Nazis in the new CIA, Bush and friends were not only able to completely cover up their treacherous crimes, but would use the government of the United States as a tool for committing new ones.

Within just a few years after the end of World War II, Hitler’s SS, would be transformed into an American version of the Ge­stapo: the CIA. Like Hitler’s Gestapo, the CIA would be used as an instrument for murder and terror, and the assassination of men who threatened the political, business, and financial interests of Dulles, Bush, and the Wall Street elite.

THE NAZIFICATION OF THE CIA & REPUBLICAN PARTY

“After the Nazis’ 1943 defeat at Stalingrad,” write Loftus and Aarons (1), “various Nazi businessmen realized they were on the losing side and made plans to evacuate their wealth. The Peron government in Argentina was receiving the Nazi flight capital with open arms, and Dulles helped it hide the money?.”

“The Guinness Book of Records lists the missing Reichsbank treasure” estimated at $2.5 billion dollars “as the greatest unsolved bank robbery in history. Where did it go?”
“According to our source,” write Loftus and Aarons (1), the bulk of the treasure was simply shipped a very short distance across Austria and through the Brenner Pass into Italy. Dulles’ contacts were waiting.”
“Our sources claim that Dulles and his colleagues exerted a great deal of influence to ensure that Western investments in Nazi Germany were not seized by the Allies as reparations for the Jews. After all, much of ‘Hitler’s Gold’ had originally belonged to the bankers in London and New York. The captured Nazi loot went underground.”

At the end of WWII, some of that money, with the direct assistance of Dulles, may have been laundered through Bush-Harriman-Rockefeller banks. Dulles was in an excellent position
to help his friends and cover up his tracks, because with Roosevelt dead, any effective opposition to him had also died. Dulles and his brother began consolidating their forces in the new Truman administration, volunteering their services, spreading their tentacles, covering up their crimes, and buying power (3). Loftus and Aarons (1) go on to say, “Dulles and some of his friends volunteered for postwar service with the government not out of patriotism but of necessity. They had to be in positions of power to suppress the evidence of their own dealings with the Nazis.”

Through the influence of the Dulles brothers, investigations into their traitorous acts, and those of the Harriman-Bush- Rockefeller clique, were quashed. Ongoing investigations were also taken away “from the Treasury and turned over to the State Department. There Dulles’ friends shredded the index to the interlocking corporations and blocked further investigations” (1).

“Dulles had this goal in mind: Not a single American businessman was ever going to be convicted of treason for helping the Nazis. None ever was, despite the evidence. According to one of our sources in the intelligence community, the U.S. Army Counter Intelligence Corps (CIC) had two large ‘Civilian Internment Centers’ in Occupied Germany, code named ‘Ashcan’ and ‘Dustbin.’ The CIC had identified and captured a large number of U.S. citizens who had stayed in Germany and aided the Third Reich all through World War II. The evidence of their treason was overwhelming. The captured German records were horribly incriminating.” So, they were destroyed.

With the destruction of these and other records, Bush, Harriman, Rockefeller, as well as the Dulles brothers were almost in the clear. “Almost” would not be good enough. The cover up continued.

“Justice Department attorney, O. John Rogge, dared to make a speech about Nazi collaborators in the United States.” He “was quickly fired. However, the attorney who buried the treason cases was later promoted to special assistant attorney general” (1).

A number of Americans who had been in business with or agents of Bush, Dulles, Harriman, Rockefeller, and the Nazis, were unable to cover their tracks, and had been imprisoned at the conclusion of the war, even though they were American citizens. It was important that they be cleared and never brought to justice, otherwise they would likely testify against Bush and gang.

“Victor Wohreheide, the young Justice Department attorney responsible for preparing the treason trials, suddenly ordered the prisoners’ release. All of the Nazi collaborators were allowed to return to the United States and reclaim their citizenship” and their money (1). Once released, and with charges dropped, there would be little threat of these Nazi criminals ever testifying against Bush, Dulles, Harriman, Rockefeller, and the others.

It was not just Nazi businessmen, but Nazi businesses that were spared.

“Despite direct orders from President Truman and General Eisenhower, IG Farben, the citadel of the Nazi industrialists, was never dismantled” (1). Instead, companies such as Bayer, which comprised a major part of the IG Farben cartel, were allowed to continue doing business, with Bush, Harriman, Dulles, and Rockefeller getting a piece of the action.

Even worse, just as the U.S. congress had decided to give away oil pipelines, refineries, and petroleum-related industries and properties to the Rockefeller led oil-cartels, and to use American tax dollars to fund new refineries and pipelines in the Middle East (see chapter 3), “Dulles’ clients demanded, and received, Allied compensation for bomb damage to their factories in Germany” (1).

“Only a few of the top Nazis were executed. Most of the rest were released from prison within a few years. Others would go virtually unpunished. No one ever investigated the Nazi sympathizers in Western intelligence who had made it all possible.”

“The bottom line is that the Nazi businessmen survived the war with their fortunes intact and rebuilt their industrial empires to become the richest men in the world.” Indeed, some became “multibillionaires” even though they “had been prominent members of Hitler’s inner circle” (1,2).

Dulles’ clients got away with it. President Roosevelt’s dream of putting the Nazis’ money-men on trial died with him” (1,2).

Dulles and his clients had won.

However, insofar as the Dulles-Bush-Harriman-Rockefeller clique were concerned, this was just a single battle. The great prize would be to seize power in the United States and to use the govern­ment to serve their own ends. Like Hitler, they intended to do it “legally.”

Knowledge is power. Secrecy insures that knowledge and power are controlled by those controlling the secrets. If crimes remain secret, there is no punishment, just rewards.

Espionage and spying are a means of gaining access to the secrets of others. Knowledge is power.

It was the job of Allen Dulles to bury the secrets which would implicate his patrons and business partners, as well as himself, in treasonable and criminal acts. However, Dulles, with a long his­tory in spying and espionage, wanted more than to just bury se­crets. Dulles wanted to build a spy agency (4), that like Himmler’s Gestapo, would be above the law, and thus beyond any possibility of penalty for crimes such as terror, theft, slavery or murder.

Even before the end of World War II, Dulles, who would soon become the first director of the CIA, had begun recruiting his dream team of super- spymasters from the “Brotherhood of Death,” that is, from Himmler’s dreaded SS, the Gestapo (5). Dulles would create an American version of the Gestapo: the CIA. The CIA would become his personal instrument of power.

From 1927 to 1941, the Dulles brothers worked as lawyers and international finance specialists for Sullivan & Cromwell, a Wall Street law firm in New York. Allen Dulles performed work for Bush, Harriman, and Rockefeller in setting up business rela­tionships with the Nazis and with top Nazi industrialists. Dulles played a pivotal role in promoting U.S.-Nazi corporate relations

Dulles was also legal counsel for Standard Oil and the Nazi’s IG Farben, which had partnered with the Rockefellers and owned considerable Standard oil stock. His brother John Dulles (who later became Secretary of State) was an IG Farben board member

Dulles was originally recruited by OSS intelligence chief Colonel William J. Donovan, in 1941, and was posted to Berne, Switzerland. Dulles was picked because of his great expertise on Germany which he acquired through his law firm and by working as an agent for Bush, Harriman, and Rockefeller (6).

From October 1942 to May 1945, he gathered intelligence information on Nazi Germany, especially as it pertained to commerce and industry. Much of this information was also passed on to his business associates, i.e. Bush and gang (1,2,6).

The Nazis considered Dulles to be “the most influential White House man in Europe” and Dulles had numerous meetings with top ranking members of the SS (4,6,7). In January of 1943, Dulles, acting as a representative of the United States, began negotiating with top Nazis. Dulles was urging that Hitler be deposed and replaced by SS chief Himmler (7).

Himmler was a mass murderer, responsible for the deaths of at least ten million men, women, and children, in the Nazi death camps and elsewhere (7,8). However, Himmler was still a business man and a member of the “Brotherhood of Death” (8), as were Bush, Harriman, Rockefeller, and other Dulles’ associates (9). Dulles and gang thought Himmler would make a fine leader.

All were in agreement with the Dulles plan, including Himmler, and presumably, the White House (7). “The stumbling block was the question of how the SS could get rid of Hitler” (7). Himmler wished to make Hitler an “honorary president.”

The entire plan of replacing Hitler, however, went awry, when, according to Dulles (4), Hitler became aware of the plan due to “some Allied agency neither American or British.”(6).

Himmler panicked.

Dulles then began negotiating with Obergrappenfuhrer Karl Wolff (4), Himmler’s “senior aid” and the “Head of his Personal Staff.” Wolff “knew all the murkiest secrets of SS headquarters.”

This too came to naught, perhaps because Hitler learned of the meetings with Dulles. Curiously, Hitler seemed to know Dulles personally, and thus did not object to these meetings. In April, 1945, for example, Hitler summoned Wolff and asked him about Dulles (7,8). Wolf replied: “I am happy to report to you, my Fuhrer, that I have succeeded in opening doors through Mr. Dulles.” After fur­ther discussion, Hitler relied: “Go back to Italy. Keep up your relationship with Dulles and the Americans.”

By this late stage of the game, it was clear that Germany had lost the War. It was also clear that it would be impossible to install Himmler as the leader of Germany, though, that hope was actually kept alive until the final weeks of the war.

Dulles and the Bush gang had lots of Nazi “friends” including hundreds of men who wore the dreaded SS death head. Many of these were Nazi businessmen—men who, in the name of profits, enslaved, starved, and worked to death, millions of men and women.

When the war ended, Dulles acted to insure that Nazi businessmen would escape punishment with their fortunes intact. He also helped thousands of high ranking SS officers to escape.

Dulles was not acting out of kindness. He wanted to put these men to work as spies who would murder and kill in the name of the good ‘ol USA. Even before the war ended, Dulles had begun recruiting Gestapo agents, that is, members of the German Order of Skull and Bones, the Brotherhood of Death, into what would become the American version of the Gestapo, the CIA (5,6).

As recently revealed by the CIA (5) and as documented by Christopher Simpson, in his extensively researched book, Blowback (10), “hundreds of convicted Nazi war criminals” were “smuggled out of Germany to avoid prosecution at the war crimes trials at Nuremberg.” They were “recruited by, and were put on the payroll of several U.S. government agencies, including the Army CIC, the OSS, and the Office of Policy Coordination within the State Department.”

Dulles was well rewarded for his work on behalf of his Nazi friends and American business partners. He became the first director of the CIA.

Once the war ended, thousands of SS men, murderers, torturers, killers of women, children and babies, were recruited by Dulles, including, as admitted by the CIA on April 29, 2001 (11), Klaus Barbie, the infamous “Butcher of Lyon.” Barbie was eventually convicted of crimes against humanity by a French court.

SS Nazi Major General Walter Dornberger was yet another “butcher” recruited by Dulles. Dornberger had been sentenced to death by hanging for war crimes. With the help of Dulles he es­caped his fate, and was welcomed with open arms into what would become the CIA (5).

As revealed by the National Archives, as admitted by the CIA, and as reported by BBC and UPI (5), the CIA employed high ranking Nazis, including Nazi General Reinhard Gehlen who placed his Nazi spy ring at the disposal of Dulles following the close of WWII. Gehlen’s Nazi CIA spy ring, became known as “the Gehlen Organization and received millions of dollars in funding from the U.S. until 1956” (11).

Gehlen was Hitler’s senior intelligence officer on the East­ern Front during the war and was responsible for the torture and murder of millions of Soviet prisoners of war. However, instead of being brought to justice, Gehlen’s network of SS and Gestapo Nazi agents, were secretly released from prisoner of war camps by U.S. intelligence officers at the urging of Allen Dulles.

According to T. H. Tetens author of “The New Germany and the Old Nazis, “Gehlen “immediately asked for an interview with the commanding officer ” and offered the United States “his intelligence staff, spy apparatus, and the priceless files for future ser­vice.”

Dulles made personal arrangements for Gehlen to be sent to Washington where his offer was accepted. “The Pentagon-Gehlen agreement,” states Tetens (12), “in practice guaranteed the continuation of the all-important Abwehr division of the German General Staff. Hundreds of German army and SS officers were quietly released from internment camps and joined Gehlen’s headquarters in the Spessart Mountains in central Germany. When the staff had grown to three thousand men, the Bureau Gehlen opened a closely guarded twenty-five-acre compound near Pullach, south of Munich, operating under the innocent name of the South German Industrial Development Organization.”

“In the early fifties it was estimated that the organization employed up to 4,000 intelligence specialists in Germany, mainly former army and SS officers, and more than 4,000 V-men (undercover agents). Gehlen’s spy network stretched from Korea to Cairo, from Siberia to Santiago de Chile. Within a few years the Gehlen apparatus had grown by leaps and bounds” (12).

As summed up by Tetens (12), “the short period of 1950-51 must be marked as the time when Hitler’s old officers, SS leaders, and [Nazi] party functionaries returned to power and influence.”

A US Justice Department spokesman, Eli Rosenbaum, said “the files demonstrated that the real winners of the war were Nazi war criminals.”

Allen Dulles, in his book “The Secret Surrender,” justifies his use of Gestapo agents, by making a distinction between “good” and “bad” Nazis. Standartenfuehrer Eugen Dollmann, Himmler’s representative in Rome, was a “good” Nazi, as was SS Obergrappenfuehrer Karl Wolff.

In November, 1938, this “good” Nazi, Karl Wolff played a major role in the atrocities of “Kristallnacht” (the night of broken glass), during which 20,000 German Jews were attacked, beaten up, their homes and business burnt, and then sent to concentration camps where they were tortured, starved, and murdered.

After the conquest of Poland, Wolf sent a letter to Himmler which read as follows: “For your letter of July 28th, 1942,1 thank you—also in the name of the Reichsfuehrer SS—sincerely. With particular joy I noted your assurance that for two weeks now a train has been carrying, every day, 5000 members of the Chosen People to Treblinka, so that we are now in a position to carry through this ‘population movement.’ With best regards and Heil Hitler!”

Thus, in the mind of Dulles and his CIA, there are “good” sadists and mass murderers such as Wolff and even SS chief, Himmler, and those that are bad sadists and murderers, i.e. communists and labor leaders.

The CIA, thus, became a Nazi refuge and would soon become an instrument of Nazi-like terror. The CIA, like the Gestapo, would employ espionage, propaganda, terror, chemical and biological warfare, including the purposeful infection and murder of innocent American and foreign citizens, to obtain its objectives (13, see also chapter 8). And, like the Gestapo, the CIA would be, as it still is, above the law, and its agents would be encouraged to break the law and to commit crimes against humanity.

“Hitherto acceptable norms of human conduct do not apply. If the United States is to survive, long-standing American concepts of ‘fair play’ must be reconsidered. We must develop effective espionage and counterespionage services and must learn to subvert, sabotage and destroy our enemies by more clever, more sophisticated, and more effective methods than those used against us. It may become necessary that the American people be made acquainted with, understand and support this fundamentally repugnant philosophy.” —General James Doolittle, report to President Eisenhower, 1954.

“The CS is the only part of the IC [intelligence community], indeed of the government, where hundreds of employees on a daily basis are directed to break extremely serious laws in countries around the world. A safe estimate is that several hundred times every day (easily 100,000 times a year) DO officers engage in highly illegal activities that not only risk political embarrassment to the US but also endanger the freedom if not lives of the participating foreign nationals and, more than occasional^, of the clandestine officer himself.” —Permanent Select Committee on Intelligence, House of Representatives, 104th Congress, 1996.

“Over the past fifty years, it is now documented, these Americanized fugitive Nazi war criminals have been involved in, and in many cases in charge of U.S. government covert operations — international weapons smuggling, drug cartels, Central American death squads, right wing anti-communist dictatorships, LSD mind control experiments — the Republican National Committee’s Ethnic Heritage Councils, and the Presidential campaigns of Richard Nixon, Ronald Reagan, and George Bush” (12).

Hitler’s dream and his SS essentially became the CIA.

Indeed, the Dulles, Bush, Harriman, Rockefeller clique, like Hitler before them, would employ Nazi-CIA terrorists not just for spying and murder, but as instruments to be used for gaining incredible wealth, as well as political power, and as yet another means of gaining control over the United States government.

THE BIRTH OF THE CIA

The CIA was the afterbirth of a marriage between Hitler’s SS, and the OSS (6,10,12). In 1944, William J. Donovan, the creator of the OSS, and his assistant, Allen Dulles, presented a draft proposal for the creation of a super-spy agency, “which will procure intelligence both by overt and covert methods and will at the same time provide intelligence guidance, determine national intel­ligence objectives, and correlate the intelligence material collected by all government agencies.”

Three years later, in 1947, President Harry S. Truman, agreed to the formation of a centralized intelligence agency, with Dulles acting as a director (14). In 1949, the Central Intelligence Agency Act (15) was passed, thus creating a spy agency which would be modeled after the SS, and which would be above the law, and could carry out its activities in secret and independent of congressional scrutiny. The act also exempted the CIA from having to disclose its “organization, functions, officials, titles, salaries, or numbers of personnel employed.”

Dulles immediately began recruiting Nazi terrorists and SS torturers to fill the ranks, and to teach SS methods to new CIA recruits (6,10,12). Almost overnight, the CIA became a criminal enterprise, devoted to protecting the business interests of the Wall Street elite, including those directed or controlled by Bush, Harriman, Rockefeller, and the Dulles brothers. Anyone and everyone challenging or threatening the ability of these men and their associates to make money and to rape and exploit third world countries, became dangers to “national security.” Opponents would be eliminated, their governments or organizations toppled, and indig­enous populations, including workers, murdered or terrorized into submission—tactics identical to those employed by Hitler’s SS— the Brotherhood of Death (7).

THE SECRET WARS OF THE CIA

“”I worked in the CIA for 13 years” explained John Stockwell, in a speech given on October 10, 1987. In 1978, Stockwell, the highest-ranking CIA official ever to leave the agency and go pub­lic, was awarded the Medal of Merit before he resigned.

“I sat on a subcommittee of the NSC [National Security Council] so I was like a chief of staff, with the GS- 18s, Henry Kissinger, Bill Colby (the CIA director), making the important decisions. My job was to put it all together and make it happen and run it” (16).

“I was conditioned by my training, my marine corps train­ing, and my background, to believe in everything they were saying about the cold war, and I took the job with great enthusiasm…. only to discover…that nothing we were doing in fact defended U.S. national security interests.”

“The CIA, the state department, works with the death squads. They don’t meet the death squads on the streets where they’re actually chopping up people or laying them down on the street and running trucks over their heads. The CIA people meet the police chiefs, and the people who run the death squads, and they do liaise with them, they meet them beside the swimming pool of the villas. And it’s a sophisticated, civilized kind of relationship. And they talk about their children, who are going to school at UCLA or Harvard. They don’t talk about the horrors of what’s being done.”

“I went to Nicaragua a total of 7 times. This was a major covert action. It gave me a chance, after running operations from Washington, to go to a country that was under attack, to talk to the leadership, to talk to the people, to look and see what happens when you give white phosphorous or grenades or bombs to people, and they go inside a country… It gave me a chance to talk to the people, who have been shot, or hit, or blown up…. We’re talking about 10 to 20 thousand covert actions.”

“The Indonesian covert action of 1965, not only eliminated the Indonesian communist party, it also eliminated the entire segment of the population that tended to support the communist party – the ethnic Chinese, Indonesian Chinese. The CIA’s report put the number of dead at 800,000 killed. Ralph McGehee,” who helped run that operation, “said that this was a model operation that should be copied everywhere in the world.”

“That’s the sentiment in Washington. If you’re killing 1 to 3 million communists, that’s great. The problem, though, is that these people killed by our national security activities are not communists. They’re not Communists, they’re not Communist KGB. In the field we used to play chess with the KGB officers, and have drinks with them. It was like professional football players – we would knock heads on Sunday, maybe in an operation, and then Tuesday you’re at a banquet together drinking toasts and talking. The people that are dying are people of the third world. That’s the common denominator. People that have the misfortune of being born in the Metumba mountains of the Congo, in the jungles of Southeast Asia, in the hills of Nicaragua. Far more Catholics than communists, far more Buddhists than communists. Most of them couldn’t give you an intelligent definition of communism, or of capitalism.”

“The CIA creates police units that become death squads with the leaders on the CIA’s payroll, trained by the CIA. We had the ‘public safety program’ going throughout Central and Latin America for 26 years, in which we taught them to break up subversion by interrogating people. Interrogation, including torture. Dan Metrione, the famous exponent of these things, was the master of the business, how to apply the right amount of pain, at just the right times, in order to get the response you want from the individual. They developed a wire. They gave them crank generators, with ‘U.S. AID’ written on the side, so the victims would know where these things came from.”

“Now how do you teach torture? Dan Metrione: ‘I can teach you about torture, but sooner or later you’ll have to get involved. You’ll have to lay on your hands and try it yourselves.’”

“To teach torture, sometimes they would grab beggars from off the streets. All they could do was lie there and scream. And when they would collapse, they would bring in doctors and shoot them up with vitamin B and rest them up for the next class. And when they would die, they would mutilate the bodies and throw them out on the streets, to terrify the population so they would be afraid of the police and the government. And this is what the CIA was teaching them to do.”

“To destabilize Nicaragua, beginning in 1981, we began funding Somoza’s ex-national guardsmen, calling them the contras (the counter-revolutionaries). We created this force, it did not exist until we allocated money. We’ve-Snned them, put uniforms on their backs, boots on their feet, given them camps in Honduras to live in, medical supplies, doctors, training, leadership, and then sent them in to de-stabilize Nicaragua. Under our direction they systematically blew up granaries, saw mills, bridges, government offices, schools, health centers. They ambushed trucks so the produce couldn’t get to market. They raided farms and villages… they assassinated religious workers, teachers, health workers, elected officials, government administrators. They use terror, a technique to traumatize the society so that it can’t function.

“They’d go into villages, haul out families, and with the children forced to watch they’d castrate the father, peel the skin off his face, put a grenade in his mouth and pull the pin. With the children forced to watch they’d gang-rape the mother, and slash her breasts off. And sometimes for variety, they make the parents watch while they do these things to the children. Its been documented that 13,000 people were killed this way in Nicaragua, mostly women and children. These are the activities done by these contras. The contras are the people Reagan and Bush call ‘freedom fighters’” (16).

–~~~~~~~~~~~~–

THE NAZI-REPUBLICAN WING OF THE PARTY

Like Hitler’s Gestapo (7,8), the mission of the CIA had a definite political purpose which was to put into power those sympathetic to the interests of the Wall Street elite and who supported the fascist ideology of the Brotherhood. However, it was not just third world countries which would be subverted, but the government of the United States.

As explained by Loftus and Aarons (1) “Dulles had been re­cruiting Nazis under the cover of the State Department’s Office of Policy Coordination. Eastern European emigre networks that had worked first for the SS, then the British, and finally Dulles” were also recruited and put on the payroll of the State Dept., even though they were Nazis working for the CIA.

“The CIA did not know it, but Dulles was bringing them to the United States less for intelligence purposes than for political advantage. The Nazis’ job quickly became to get out the vote for the Republicans.”

“According to several of our sources among the ‘old spies,’ Richard Nixon’s political career began in 1945, when he was the navy officer temporarily assigned to review… captured Nazi documents” (1). The documents revealed the Nazi record of Karl Bless­ing, “former Reichsbank officer and then head of the Nazi oil cartel, Kontinentale Ol A.G. ‘Konti’ was in partnership with Dulles’ principal Nazi client, IG Farben. Dulles” with Nixon’s help “lost Blessings Nazi party records and personally vouched for Blessing as an anti-Nazi in order to protect continued control of German oil interests in the Middle East. Blessing’s Konti was the Nazi link to Ibn Saud [King of Saudi Arabia] and ARAMCO [the Arabian-American Oil Company]. If Blessing went down, he could have taken a lot of people with him, including Allen Dulles,” and the Bush, Harriman, Rockefeller gang.

Naturally, the Dulles, Bush, Harriman, Rockefeller clique were eager to reward Nixon for his help, and together, they “ar­ranged financing for Nixon’s first congressional campaign. Nixon, they believed, would be yet another useful tool in the toolbox they were constructing in Congress. Some of these tools, i.e. Thomas Dewey, they hoped to place in the White House. Nixon won, but Dewey lost the election.

Not surprisingly, Richard Nixon gives a different explanation as to how his relationship with the Bush gang first developed. In his biography (17), Nixon claims that he saw an advertisement, in a Los Angeles newspaper, that had been placed there, in 1946, by the Orange County Republican Party and a wealthy group of businessmen led by Prescott Bush. Bush and friends, Nixon claims, wanted a young candidate to run for Congress against the liberal democratic incumbent. Nixon says he responded to the ad, and they basically hired him to run for congress, which he did, thus becoming a congressional mouthpiece for the Bush gang.

Nixon, acting as the pro-business, anti-communist mouthpiece of the Dulles-Bush-Harriman-Rockefeller clan, was so effective in this capacity, that he became Eisenhower’s running mate, in 1952—despite Eisenhower’s dislike of the man.

“In preparation for the 1952 Eisenhower-Nixon campaign, the Republicans formed an Ethnic Division, which, to put it bluntly, recruited the ‘displaced Fascists’ who arrived in the United States after World War II. Like similar migrant organizations in several Western countries, the Ethnic Division attracted a significant number of Central and Eastern European Nazis, who had been recruited by the SS as political and police leaders during the Holocaust” (1).

The Nazis worked not only for the Eisenhower-Nixon ticket, but to put Prescott Bush in the Senate. It was during this same time period, during the early days of the attempted Nazification of the Republican party, that Prescott’s son, George H. W. Bush, became actively involved with Republican politics. It was possibly also around this same period, that G.H.W. Bush began working in the

It was the dream of Dulles and gang, to elevate their man Nixon, to the White House. In 1960, Nixon ran against Kennedy. Although the Nazi wing of the party was put at Nixon’s disposal, he lost. Nixon didn&##8217;t blame his loss on the Nazis. Far from it. Instead, and at the urging of Dulles and gang, he intended to make full use of his Nazi friends the next time he ran for president.

“In 1968 Nixon promised that if he won the presidential election, he would create a permanent ethnic council within the Republican party” (1). The word “ethnic” was code for “Nazi.” In the early 1960s, if not before, George H.W. Bush also began playing an active role in the creation of these ethnic councils. Thus he willingly carried out Nixon’s promise after the 1972 election, while he served as chairman of the Republican National Committee (1,19).

One of the men Bush helped to recruit was Laszlo Pasztor, who became the Chairman of Nixon’s Republican Heritage Groups council. During World War II Pasztor served as a government official representing Nazi Hungary in Germany. Other emigre slots were also filled by the members of various Nazi collaborationist organizations (1,12,18,19).

As documented in a 1988 study by Russ Bellant of Politi­cal Research Associates, virtually all of the Fascist organizations of World War II were welcomed into the Republican party during the Nixon administration—and George W. Bush, as chairman of the party, played a major role. Emanuel Jasiuk was representative of the character of the Republican ethnic leaders that Bush and Nixon were after. Emanuel Jasiuk, was a notorious mass murderer who was recruited by the Nazis when they invaded what is today called the independent nation of Belarus (which during WWII was part of the Soviet Union).

In addition to being Nazi fascists and haters of democracy, what all these George H.W. Bush recruits had in common was that they had fought against the United States, during World War II.

While George Bush did his duty bringing Nazis into positions of power in the republican party, Nixon, after he became President, was surrounding “himself with what was known as the Berlin Wall, a long succession of advisers with Germanic names: We recall at the top of his “German General Staff’ as it was also known, there was Haldeman. Erlichman, Krogh. Kliendienst. Kissinger (the Rockefellers’ emissary) and many others” (19).

As described by Groden and Livingstone (19), “Some of these men would watch the great Nazi propaganda films in the basement of the White House until all hours of the night, and drink, in fact, get drunk with their power, with blind ambition, as one of them wrote.”

As detailed by Loftus and Aarons (1), “According to several of our sources in the intelligence community who were in a position to know, the secret rosters of the Republican party’s Nationalities Council read like a Who’s Who of Fascist fugitives. The Republican’s Nazi connection is the darkest secret of the Republican leadership.”

NIXON NAZIS ASSASSINATE SALVADORE ALLENDE

“An Allende victory would represent a definite psychological set-back to the US and a definite psychological advantage for the Marxist idea.” — CIA study, 9/7/70.
Chile had long been ruled by a U.S.-backed Nazi-like military dictatorship which served as a lackey for the Wall Street elite (20).

In 1969. during Nixon’s second year in office, a coalition of socialists, communists, and most of the social-democratic parties of Chile, banded together to create the “Popular Unity.” Popular Unity offered a comprehensive program that was designed to reorganize the national economy and to provide improved health care, education, nutrition to the people of Chile. Salvador Allende Gossens, a physician with a distinguished record of government service, was chosen to be the Popular Unity’s presidential candidate (21).

In a speech, Allende laid out one of his “dangerous” proposals that so aggrieved Nixon and his Nazis: “Today in Chile there are over 600,000 children mentally retarded because they were not adequately nourished during the first eight months of their lives, because they did not receive the necessary proteins.” To correct the problem, Allende announced his intention to develop a free milk-distribution program.

Wall Street, the CIA, and it’s cadre of Nazis in the Republican party and Nixon White House, became alarmed. As detailed in the previous chapter, it was Nazi policy under Hitler, to keep conquered peoples, and all “subhumans” uneducated, and to prevent them from gaining access to health care.

CIA agents and U.S. dollars began streaming into the country (22,23) to fight Allende. Jorge Alessandri, the former dictator of Chile was one of the beneficiaries of CIA help and U.S. dollars. In the days before the election, when it became clear Allende would win, he issued a warning: “I don’t think that [Allende] will achieve his objective because the organized public forces and Carabineros (military police) of Chile will not allow the criminal doctrines to win. Moved by patriotism, they will save us at the cost of sacrificing the liberty that we all enjoy” (23). In other words, the military will overthrow Allende and his supporters, and a blood bath will ensue.

Allende, realizing the dangers posed by the military, promised that if elected, he would only gradually implement his educational and health care programs and would not call for any changes in Chile’s military (21,23).

General Rene Schneider Chereau, Commander in Chief of the Chilean Army was satisfied: “The Armed Forces cannot stop the changes. Allende has given us his assurance that he will stay within the Constitution and laws.” The military thus stayed neutral. Despite the CIA’s attempt to interfere with the election, Allende won by a huge plurality.
Wall Street and the Nixon administration went into shock (20,21,22). Nixon began referring to Allende as “that bastard… We’re going to get that bastard…”
As summed up by one Chilean newspaper (24): “This election must have been a shock to foreign investors in Chile, mainly for the mining companies owned by the Americans…Allende is ready to install a revolutionary government to end the dominion of foreign capital.”

Nixon and his Nazis knew better. They decided to kill Allende.

“I don’t see why we need to stand by and watch a country go communist because of the irresponsibility of its own people.” — Henry Kissinger, National Security Adviser to Nixon.

“Save Chile! … not concerned with risks involved … $10,000,000 available, more if necessary.” — handwritten notes of CIA Director Richard Helms, 9/15/1973.

“It is firm and continuing policy that Allende be overthrown by a coup. It would be much preferable to have this transpire prior to 24 October but efforts in this regard will continue vigorously beyond this date. We are to continue to generate maximum pressure toward this end utilizing every appropriate resource. It is imperative that these actions be implemented clandestinely and securely so that the United States government and American hand be well hidden… . Please review all your present and possibly new activities to include propaganda, black operations, surfacing of intelligence or disinformation, personal contacts, or anything else your imagination can conjure which will permit you to press forward toward our objective.” —Cable from CIA headquarters to Henry Heckscher, CIA station chief in Santiago, Chile, 10/16/1973.

The CIA realized, however, that if it was to regain control of the country, not just Allende and his supporters, but the General Rene Schneider Chereau would also have to be removed. General Chereau had promised to obey the constitution and to uphold democracy. A military coup would be impossible with General Chereau at the helm.

On October 26, General Rene Schneider Chereau was dead. He had been attacked and shot by 10 men. According to Chilean intelligence sources, U.S. President Richard Nixon had given “orders to prevent the socialists’ rise to power, hoping to prevent the creation of another Soviet ally in the Western Hemisphere” (25). That is, the Nixon administration ordered the assassination of General Chereau. Allende would be next.

The CIA now had control over Chile’s military. Chilean General Pinochet, would become one of the leaders of the military coup, and then, following the overthrow of Allende, Pinochet would become Chile’s new US-backed dictator.

On September 11,1973, US Navy ships, which had gathered off the coast of Chile, went on high alert offshore. Over 30 jet fighters and support planes began to appear along the borders.

The signal was given: Sections of the Chilean navy seized the port city of Valparaiso, west of Santiago. Allende called his Minister of Defense, Orlando Letelier, and asked him to investigate. Letelier was immediately arrested. Allende began calling his generals. “No one is answering,” he remarked. “I think that this time all of them are involved.”
Soon the Presidential palace was surrounded by tanks. Jets soared overhead. Snipers had taken up their positions.

The attack began. Tank cannons boomed. Jets fired missiles. And then Chilean soldiers attacked and swarmed into the Palace.

A little after 12 noon, Salvador Allende was dead. He had been shot in the head (26).

It was not enough to kill Allende. Wall Street, the CIA, and the Nixon Nazis were determined to terrorize the Chilean population into helpless submission and to destroy his supporters root and branch.

NIXON NAZIS TERRORIZE & MURDER THE PEOPLE OF CHILE: 9/11-1973

The CIA had learned their art from the masters of terror: Hitler’s SS. In order to subdue and enslave a population, it must be subjected to unrelenting terror. The Nixon White House, the Rockefeller-Bush Wall Street clique, and the CIA, were determined to crush and destroy the people of Chile and to eliminate any member of the intellectual or professional class who even harbored a socialist thought (26).
Based on lists provided by the CIA, students, teachers, doctors, nurses, and of course, members of the Popular Unity party, were the first to be “disappeared;” i.e. rounded up, hideously tortured, and killed. Then the working class and the peasants were targeted. Those who had dared to elect Allende would be tortured, murdered, and severely punished (26,27).

The following eye-witness accounts are taken from Robinson Rojas Sandford’s book, The Murder of Allende and the End of the Chilean Way of Socialism (26):

“During the first weeks of October, I had to cross Bulnes bridge to get over the Mapocho very early every morning. The first time I could not believe my eyes. It couldn’t be true. From a dis­tance I could see lots of people gathered along the bridge’s railing and the riverbanks. They were looking at the half-floating corpses, four men’s bodies. I still remember, one was wearing a red shirt. Farther off, there was a fifth body which had been dragged ashore.”

“This scene went on every day, and not just at this bridge. You could see them at Pedro de Valdivia bridge too. Dozens of women would station themselves at the bridges every day, in hopes of seeing the body of a husband or son who had disappeared after being picked up by the soldiers.”

“One day I saw nine corpses, all with bare chests, hands tied behind their backs. The bodies were perforated by bullet holes. And with them was the body of a girl, apparently fifteen or sixteen years old.”

“Some peasants traveling over the Las Tejuelas bridge, which crosses the Nuble River about a mile and a half from Chilian, noted that, as usual, the water level was beginning to drop with the end of the rainy season. Along with this phenomenon, they noticed an­other one, new and horrifying: the appearance of dozens of head­less cadavers with their arms tied behind their backs. Some of the bodies were half decayed. When the peasants notified the military police post at the city gates, they were told curtly: ‘You saw noth­ing. If you say anything, we will arrest you and cut your throats, just like those corpses.’”

“Those bodies were the leftovers from the ‘extermination’ operation in Nuble Province, resembling the “leftovers” in any other province in Chile after September 11—human debris left by bayo­nets, machine guns, and torture devices of the Chilean Air Force, Navy, and Army.”

“Shortly before this incident at the Las Tejuelas bridge, the Arauco Fishing Association, which produces canned seafood in the port of Talcahuano, had to halt work for several days. The fish they were receiving were full of bits of human flesh from bodies the Chilean Navy had tossed into the ocean after they came out of the naval base’s torture chambers.”

“Chilean Air Force troops deposited the body of a seven­teen-year-old boy, an MIR party member, in a town south of Santiago. Part of the boy’s abdomen had been subjected to vivisec­tion. Both his legs were broken, and also his left arm. His entire body was covered with holes made by cigarette burns. He had also been castrated. ”

“Children were not spared. On September 18 a military pa­trol went to pick up Jose Soto, a maker of wrought iron furniture, in his sixties, president of the supply and price control junta in his district, Quinta Normal. Soto wasn’t home. His fourteen-year old son was alone in the house. The military patrol seized the boy. Afterward they threw the boy’s bullet-riddled body on Soto’s door­step – ‘so the sonofabitch won’t be a faggot and will turn himself in,’ the soldiers shouted to his neighbors.”

“Other common forms of torture practiced by the Army’s SIM and military police intelligence officers were to extinguish cigarettes in the victim’s anus and to apply electric current to the ears, anus, and testicles.”

“During September and part of October, in the Santiago com­munities around the industrial areas, the soldiers would leave bod­ies in the streets. When their relatives came to pick them up, they were arrested. The bodies generally had fingernails pulled out, or legs broken, or testicles smashed. Several had their eyes burnt out, apparently with cigarette butts.”

The torture and the murders continued for years. Anyone could be a target, even citizens of other countries including the United States and Britain (28).

William Beausire was a citizen of Britain. “He was apoliti­cal. He had committed no crime. In November 1974, William was on his way to England from Santiago when he was abducted in Buenos Aires by agents of DINA, General Pinochet’s intelligence service. He was taken to their notorious Villa Grimaldi torture cen­tre in Santiago. Over the next seven months William was systematically tortured by the Chilean secret police. We know from witnesses that William had electrodes attached to his genitals. We know that he had sticks forced into his rectum. We know he was suspended from a wall, hanging by his arms. We don’t know what happened to William. He was last seen in July 2nd 1975, being escorted by DINA agents from a torture center in Santiago. He is now missing, presumed dead.”

William Beausire was just one of the thousands of those tortured and killed because of the likes of Wall Street, Nixon, the CIA, and Rockefeller-clone, Henry Kissinger. Kissinger, who never met a mass murderer he didn’t like—that is, so long as the murderer wasn’t a communist—was pleased as punch by the atrocities that were committed.

“In the United States, as you know, we are sympathetic with what you are trying to do here. I think that the previous government was headed toward Communism. We wish your government well.” —Henry Kissinger, speaking to Chilean military dictator, Pinochet, 6/8/76.

Prior to joining the Nixon Nazis, Kissinger had served as a top aid to Rockefeller, and played a major role in covering up the tracks of his boss, while in Germany immediately following the war.

Other interesting characters that served in the Nixon White House, included, Donald Rumsfeld who would later hire his old buddy, Dick Cheney to be his deputy. Rumsfeld and Dick Cheney not only served during the 9/11/1993 tragedy orchestrated by the Nixon White House, but the 9/11/2001 tragedy that occurred during the Bush Jr. presidency, Like Mr. Bush, Cheney attended Yale.

And of course there is George H.W. Bush. In 1973, he was the chairman of the Republican party, and a member of the CIA, during the Nixon administration. What role he played in the mass murder and torture of Chilean men, women, and children, can only be guessed at.

Almost 30 years after the 9/11 tragedy in Chile, Cheney and Rumsfeld would again be part of a Republican administration during another 9/11 tragedy, this one headed by the son of George H.W Bush.

WATERGATE & BUSH

The Nixon Presidency ended with his resignation, after a failed cover up of petty crimes, a burglary, committed by men associated with or employed by the CIA (29).

Nixon was not brought down by the second rate burglary known as “Watergate,” but by the subsequent cover up and the fear of what might also be exposed if Congress voted for impeachment. There were numerous cover-ups in place, one of which may well have served the purpose of covering up the role of Bush and friends in a number of sordid and illegal plots including the financing of the CIA-“plumbers” unit who committed the Watergate burglary

Five men had been arrested in the early morning hours of June 17, 1972, while committing a burglary at Democratic headquarters, at the Watergate hotel. In addition to their burglary gear, they carried nearly $3,000 in hundred dollar bills, all in sequence. Four of the men were from Florida—Bush country. Three were Cuban-Americans.

When burglar James W. McCord was asked his occupation by the judge, he replied he had recently retired from government service, from the “CIA.” He was not alone. The four men from Miami all had CIA connections, and had been involved in “anti-Castro” activities (31). James W. McCord, however, also had worked as an FBI agent, and as the former chief of physical security for the CIA. At the time of the burglary he was a lieutenant colonel in the Air Force Reserve and employed full time as the security coordinator for Nixon’s Committee for the Re-election of the President.

The loyalty of McCord and the others was not to Nixon per se, but to the Anglo-American financier elite and to the notion that communism must be extinguished wherever it may rear its head. Some of these individuals were directly associated with CIA bureaus which in turn have been linked to George Bush, such as the Office of Security- Security Research Staff (30).

It was Henry Kissinger—Rockefeller’s man in the Nixon White House— who demanded the creation of “The Plumbers.” Kissinger insisted that something had to be done to stop leaks to the press (29). Kissinger got his wish following the “Pentagon Papers” affair of 1971.

The Plumbers were funded through a mechanism that ap­pears to have been set up by George Bush. Funds were provided by (30) a fellow oil man and Bush business partner, Bill Liedtke, the president and CEO of Pennzoil. This was first discovered by the U.S. House of Representatives Banking and Currency Committee, chaired by Texas Democrat Wright Patman.

The first hint that big money might be behind the Plumbers, was the large amount of cash found in the pockets of the Watergate burglars. Cold, hard cash, is the most common means used by Wall Street, CIA spooks, and organized crime, when financing murders or other crimes.

However, this time, the Wall Street elites and big oil not only paid cash, they used checks. $100,000 was found in the Miami bank account of Watergate burglar Bernard Barker (31). Baker had been a CIA operative since the Bay of Pigs invasion of Cuba— which was yet another link to George H.W. Bush.

The $100,000 was traced to Texas CREEP (Committee to Re Elect the President) chairman William Liedtke, longtime business partner of George H.W. Bush.

When this discovery was made by Patman’s committee, an all out effort was made by the Nixon White House to stop any investigation which might lead from Liedtke to Bush and thus from Bush to Barker and to the Bay of Pigs…. which in turn, as we shall see, could lead to questions about the assassination of John F. Kennedy. Indeed, CREEP had set aside hundreds of thousands of dollars to subvert the electoral process and to eliminate any and all democrats who might pose a threat to the election of Richard Nixon

As would be the case following the cover up of the events leading up to the tragedy of 9/11/2001, the FBI took the lead in mishandling the Watergate “investigation.” For example, “the government inexplicably failed to execute search warrants for the homes of the five arrested burglars… Persons in critical positions who might know details of the bugging operation, particularly secretaries,” were not interviewed (31). Others were questioned with their lawyers present and then, they were not asked the right questions (31). Likewise, “prosecutors had not pursued other crimes—no matter how obvious” (31). In addition, those being investigated, and their associates were receiving copies of FBI reports.

Acting FBI director, Gray, later admitted that he had “contained the investigation judiciously” to the point of criminal negligence (31). Gray even destroyed documents taken from the White House safe of one of the Watergate burglars. Almost 30 years later, another FBI director, Mr. Mueller, would be accused of similar crimes in an attempt to cover up FBI, CIA, and Bush administration complicity in the 9/11/2001 attacks.

Who led the effort to sabotage the Watergate investigation? Nixon and his henchmen. Who else? We can only guess. However, what we do know is that the sabotage involved threatening and blackmailing six Democratic members of the House Banking and Currency Committee.

As later admitted by Nixon operative Maurice Stans: “There were indirect approaches to Democratic [committee] members. An all-out campaign was conducted to see that the investigation was killed off, as it successfully was.”

Kentucky Democratic Congressman William Curlin, Jr., re­vealed in 1973 that “certain members of the committee were reminded of various past political indiscretions, or of relatives who might suffer as a result of [a] pro-subpoena vote.”

Despite its charter, the CIA as well as the FBI regularly spies on members of congress, the judiciary and their staffs. Evidence of adultery, pedophilia, drug use, and so on, are stored and filed away, to be used in cases of necessity—at which time the files may be used to persuade a congressman or senator to vote a certain way. And if they don’t, the information may then be leaked to the press.

Members of Patman’s committee were apparently shown such files, and they voted on Oct. 3,1972, against continuing chairman Patman’s investigation into who had funded the Plumbers.

It was also revealed, in a tape Nixon made of his White house conversations, that Nixon had instructed Haldeman to stop an FBI inquiry into who had provided the funds to the “plumbers” unit. Haldeman was told to use the excuse that the investigation would endanger CIA operations (29).

Indeed, it was a similar excuse which led to the destruction of files taken from the White House safe of Howard Hunt. Acting FBI director “Gray was told that the files were ‘political dynamite’ and should ‘never see the light of day’” (31). Indeed, as detailed by Bernstein and Woodward (31): “the covert activities” the Nixon White House was seeking to cover up, “involve the whole U.S. intelligence community…The cover up was mainly to protect the covert operations. The president, himself, has been blackmailed.”

The involvement of the FBI in the cover-up and other improprieties and illegalities eventually became public. In consequence, acting FBI director, L. Patrick Gray was forced to resigned.

The exact role of the CIA in the Watergate cover up is still not known. However, it is known that the CIA also sought to put a halt to these investigations as so many former agents were involved. However, the concern was not with Watergate. There were yet other, even more serious crimes which had been covered up and which might now come to light, including those related to an interna­tional incident known as the “Bay of Pigs” and the assassination of President John F. Kennedy.

MURDER INCORPORATED: ASSASSINATIONS & THE CIA

In 1951, Dulles was appointed Deputy Director of the nascent Central Intelligence Agency, and in 1953 he was appointed CIA Director by President D wight D. Eisenhower. In that capacity, Allen Dulles orchestrated a number of remarkable covert intelligence operations such as the overthrow of Iranian nationalist leader Mohammed Mossagdeh in 1953.

Upon coming to power, Prime Minister Dr. Mohammed Mossadeq had the audacity to defy the British-led oil cartel which was pumping Iranian oil out of the ground but paying almost no royalties (32). In 1951 Mossadeq authorized nationalization of the Iranian National Oil company.

The Rockefeller-led oil-brotherhood retaliated by refusing to purchase Iranian oil, whereas crippling sanctions were imposed by Britain and the U.S. sending Iran spiraling into financial chaos. Rockefeller, however, had no interest in forcing the return of oil concessions to Britain. Rather, his intention was to grab Iran’s oil fields for himself (32). The hated “Shah” of Iran—who had been forced from power and was eager to return—agreed to the deal. Mossadeq, however, would have to be overthrown.

Dulles organized a campaign of terror and destabilization, in order to overthrow Mossadeq and bring the “Shah” to power in his place. Contrary to plan, the people of Iran rose up in rebellion and the “Shah” was forced to flee the country?.

Dulles and Rockefeller (and Rockefeller’s top aid, Kissinger) were not about to give up. The People of Iran, would be severely punished.

The CIA called upon the Iranian military, and a CIA-trained security force, SAVAK, and provided $10-million dollars in funds, as well as training, logistics, weapons, and supervision, and un­leashed a brutal civil war in the country. Mossadeq was deposed, the Shah was returned to power, and the CIA-trained special po­lice, SAVAK terrorized the population to maintain order (32,33). After the coup, Iranian National Oil was de-nationalized, with U.S. oil companies getting the lion’s share, rights to 40% of all output.

Dulles and the Rockefeller oil-men on Wall Street had won. In 1976, Amnesty International concluded that the Shah of Iran had the worst human rights record on the planet, and that the num­ber and variety of torture techniques the CIA had taught SAVAK were “beyond belief.”

The next major target of the Dulles clique, was Guatemalan leader, Guilermo Arbenz.

GUATEMALA & UNITED FRUIT

Dulles and his brother, John, were linked financially to the United Fruit Company. As detailed by Shlesinger and Kinzer (34) “Secretary of State John Foster Dulles and his brother CIA Direc­tor Allen Dulles had a personal interest in protecting United Fruit’s businesses. Both had investments in firms with heavy investments in United Fruit. In addition, the American ambassador at the UN was a stockholder of United Fruit and President Eisenhower’s personal secretary [Ann Whitman] was the wife of United Fruit’s public relations director.” Allen Dulles also served on the board of direc­tors, and his old law firm, Sullivan and Cromwell, had represented

The United Fruit Company (UFC) virtually owned Guate­mala. UFC paid no taxes, it dictated the laws, workers were basically slaves earning the lowest wages in the world. If anyone com­plained or tried to organize a union they were branded “communists” and dealt with harshly (34,35).

The United Fruit Company (UFC) not only owned most of the land, but it had kept 85% of it out of production (35). The vast majority of the people of Guatemala were not allowed to own or till the land, and by law, were not even considered “citizens” of the state which was ruled by a brutal, U.S. backed military dictator Jorge Ubico (25,26). As the Dulles brothers had their poisonous tentacles wrapped tightly around the throat of the U.S. government, the U.S. government backed these policies 100%.

Unfortunately for the Wall Street elite, conditions in Guate­mala began to change in 1944 with the overthrow of the military dictatorship and the election of Guatemala’s first president, Juan Arevalo who challenged UFC’s rule. The people of Guatemala were given citizenship, schools and hospitals were built… and back in Washington, plans to overthrow the new government were being mapped out (34,35). There were over two dozen failed attempts to overthrow Arevalo and crippling sanctions were passed by the U.S. congress.

In 1950 Jacobo Arbenz became president, winning 63% of the vote. He promised to extend the reforms of Arevalo, and to break the grip held on the coiintry by UFC. He also pledged to develop government based industries to provide higher paying jobs to the people and to make the country less dependent on imported goods from America. When he also began expropriating unused farmland and distributing it to the people, CIA director, Dulles, and other officials connected to UFC and Wall Street, began a pub­lic relations campaign to paint the new leader of Guatemala as a communist and a threat to the security of the free world. The New York Times, and other major newspapers began echoing these claims, warning of the dangers posed to the U.S., and the world, by the “communist leader” of Guatemala.

Eisenhower was finally persuaded to authorize the training of terrorists and saboteurs who were then unleashed upon Guate­mala from neighboring countries (34). The CIA-led coup was also supported by massive air strikes.

CIA operative, E. Howard Hunt (34) freely admitted in an interview with CNN that in leading the overthrow that “what we wanted to do was to have a terror campaign: to terrify Arbenz par­ticularly, terrify his troops, much as the Germans terrified the popu­lation of Holland, Belgium and Poland at the onset of World War II and just rendered everybody paralyzed.”

Arbenz was toppled on June 27, 1953, and a CIA-trained army and police force took over the country. Repeating the pattern employed in Iran, the CIA-backed army and police continued to employ indiscriminate mass murder and terror to “keep order.” Between 100,000 to 200,000 men, women, and children were tor­tured and murdered by CIA-trained thugs.

Dulles, and the Wall Street clique had won again. It was almost impossible for them to lose as they now had the CIA and the U.S. government to do their bidding. Any leader in any coun­try who tried to throw off the Wall Street yoke, would be deemed a “communist.” Sanctions would be imposed, and if possible, any leader who sought to put his people first, would be overthrown and killed. A Wall Street-friendly dictator and a Nazi-like SS police state would be installed in their place (13).

THE BAY OF PIGS

Cuba, 90 miles off the coast of Florida, was just another po­lice state, ruled by a fascist, Nazi-like dictator Fulgencio Batista. Batista took his orders from mobsters and Wall Street (36,37). Batista ruled Cuba with an iron fist, and was backed 100% by Wall Street, organized crime, the CIA, and the United States govern­ment, who saw him as a “stabilizing force” at least insofar as Wall and other criminal interests were concerned.

Havana was so overrun with American gangsters and Mafiosa, that under Batista, Cuba became known as “the Latin Las Vegas.” Indeed, under Batista, Havana became a playground for the Wall Street elite, CIA, and U.S. government officials, as well as the off­shore headquarters for gangsters such as Vito Genovese, Meyer Lansky, Frank Costello, and Santo Trafficante.

As Batista received a hefty cut of the action, he was pleased to keep the Cuban population suppressed, exploited, and under control. Although rebellions periodically flared up, Batista and his army had always been successful in ruthlessly and brutally quash­ing dissent (36,37).

In 1958, Batista began to lose his grip over the country. Cu­ban peasants were rising up, and Castro’s rag-tag revolutionary army were marching toward Havana (37). On New Year’s day, 1959, as the country spun out of his control, Batista, realizing that he had also lost the support of the military, departed Cuba. A mili­tary junta took over (36). Castro continued his march and on the 8th of January he arrived in Havana and was greeted by hundreds of thousands of Cubans.

On February 16th Castro became prime minister, then sev­eral months later resigned, when the new President of Cuba re­fused to enact land reform or to reduce rents and utility rates. On July 26th, Castro again became Prime Minister. Standing beside him was Che Guevara who summed up their plans for the future:

“We are now the hope of the unredeemed Americas. All eyes – those of the great oppressors and those of the hopeful – are firmly on us. In great measure the development of the popular movements in Latin America depends on the future stance that we take, on our capacity to resolve so many problems. And every step we take is being observed by the ever-watchful eyes of the big creditor and by the optimistic eyes of our brothers in Latin America… In Cuba we are slaves to sugar cane, the umbilical cord that binds us to the large northern market…. We must diversify our agricultural produc­tion, stimulate industry…so that within a short time the infant Cu­ban industries can compete with the monstrous ones of the coun­tries where capitalism has reached its highest level of development..we shall struggle to the last drop of our rebel blood to make this land a sovereign republic with the true attributes of a nation that is happy, democratic, and fraternal with its brothers of Latin America.”

Dulles and the Wall Street junta, had heard enough. Castro, they decided, was a Communist, and his government would be overthrown (39). A campaign of terror was unleashed, with both sides committing atrocities (36,38,40).

That same year, 1959, Dulles’ CIA began to train Cuban ex­iles in a terrorist training camp in Guatemala. Dulles was planning an invasion to overthrow Fidel Castro. Vice-President Richard Nixon, who hoped to be elected President in Nov. 1960, was kept informed of the plan (code named: JM/WAVE). It would be Nixon’s job to implement the plan and take back Cuba, when, it was hoped, he was elected President in November of 1960 (39).

Nixon lost the election to Kennedy. Nevertheless, in March of 1961, Dulles received authorization for the operation by Presi­dent Eisenhower who said, “Everyone must be prepared to swear that he has not heard of it.” Apparently, President-elect Kennedy was one of those who was initially kept out of the loop.

Part of the Bay of Pigs operation was also being run out of South Florida (39,41 ).The Bay of Pigs operations know as “JM/ WAVE…. proliferated across [Florida] in preparation for the Bay of Pigs invasion. A subculture of fronts, proprietaries, suppliers, transfer agents, conduits, dummy corporations, blind drops, detec­tive agencies, law firms, electronic firms, shopping centers, air­lines, radio stations, the mob and the church and the banks: a false and secret nervous system twitching to stimuli supplied by the cor­tex in Clandestine Services in Langley” (41).

Soon more and more people became aware that something was up and that an invasion of Cuba might be imminent.

Not surprisingly, with so much activity, and so much attendant excitement, the press soon got wind of it, including the fact that an army of Cuban exiles was being trained in Florida and Gua­temala. Ten days before Kennedy was sworn in, the New York Times announced: “U.S. Helps Train an Anti-Castro Force at Secret Gua­temalan Base.” Presumably, this newspaper article was the first detailed briefing Kennedy had yet received. Even after he was was sworn in, he did not learn the rest of the details until the last minute (39).

When John F. Kennedy came to office, the CIA was so powerful, that it was almost a state within a state, a power answerable only to itself. It could do whatever it wanted, and it did, and was able to resist even minimal supervision from the two previous administration. Murder, terrorist attacks, the rigging of elections, the incitement of rebellions, the instigation of coups, and plots to kill foreign leaders, were all planned and carried out with little input from outsiders, including two previous presidents of the United States.

The CIA and the Wall Street Brotherhood assumed Kennedy would also take a hands off approach, and would do what he was told, that he would bend to their wishes. They were wrong.

Kennedy was concerned about international repercussions if Cuba were attacked. Attacking another sovereign state without provocation would be a violation of international law.

The CIA informed him that the Cuban people would rise up and support the invaders and all Kennedy need to is supply 16 planes—which of course would reveal that America was behind the attack. Kennedy decided against the plan and publicly repudiated any American involvement in any unprovoked military attack on Cuba (39).

The CIA decided to go ahead with the plan.

On the morning of April 17, thirty minutes after the Cuban exiles began their invasion, the phone at the president’s bedside rang. Secretary of State Dean Rusk told Kennedy that the CIA wanted to call in U.S. planes to cover the anti-Castro Cubans who were running into unexpected difficulties. Although Kennedy had been told that the grateful Cuban population would welcome the invaders and overthrow Castro, instead they had risen up and were massacring the CIA-trained “freedom fighters.”

Send in the air strikes, now, Kennedy was told. Everything had already been arranged. All he need do is give the order and the air strikes would begin (39).

Kennedy exploded. They had lied to him, had deceived him from the very beginning, and now they were trying to force him to declare war on Cuba and call in air-strikes.

He refused, and his decision left 1,500 exiles stranded on the beaches of Cuba, in the Bay of Pigs (39). The CIA, top pentagon officials, the Wall Street elite, and the Cuban exile community felt betrayed. They were outraged. Kennedy, they decided, was a trai­tor. Kennedy was soft on communism. Kennedy deserved to die.

It was the “stab in the back” all over again (42).

CIA operative, E. Howard Hunt was still fuming about the Bay of Pigs ten years later (43): “No event since the communiza-tion of China in 1949 has had such a profound effect on the United States and its allies as the defeat of the US-trained Cuban invasion brigade at the Bay of Pigs in April 1961. Out of that humiliation grew the Berlin Wall, the missile crisis, guerrilla warfare throughout Latin American and Africa, and our Dominican Republic inter­vention. Castro’s’ beachhead triumph opened a bottomless Pandora’s box of difficulties that affected not only the United States, but most of its allies in the Free World. These bloody and subver­sive events would not have taken place had Castro been toppled. Instead of standing firm, our government pyramided crucially wrong decisions and allowed Brigade 2506 to be destroyed. The Kennedy administration yielded Castro all the excuse he needed to gain a tighter grip on the island of Jose Marti, then moved shamefacedly into the shadows and hoped the Cuban issue would simply melt away.”

Kennedy, too felt betrayed. The CIA had lied to him. De­ceived him. Made him look like a fool. Kennedy was so outraged that he fired CIA director Allen Dulles, Dulles’ deputy Richard Bissell, and deputy director Charles Cabell and numerous others. Kennedy swore he was going to “smash the CIA into a thousand pieces and scatter it to the winds.”

On June 28,1961 Kennedy signed National Security Action Memoranda 57, which (along with Memoranda 55,56) effectively stripped responsibility for covert “paramilitary” operations from the CIA, and put them under the control of the Defense Department and the Joint Chiefs of Staff. These memorandum sent shock waves and stirred up outrage throughout the CIA—feelings which reached the boiling point when rumors began to circulate that if Kennedy won a second term, he would appoint his brother, Bobby Kennedy to be head of the CIA.

Dulles had been deposed and now his private police force, his creation, his personal instrument of terror, had been stripped from his hands. Not only was Kennedy going to destroy it but he he was going to hand the remains over to his brother.

It was Kennedy who would have to be destroyed.

Over the next two years, after he refused to engage in a nuclear war with the Soviet Union over the Cuban missile crisis (44), and when he continued to refused to expand the war in Viet Nam (45), the desire to eliminate Kennedy reached fever pitch. Indeed, his refusal to invade Vietnam may have been the last straw. Not only were the “communists” threatening to take over the free world, with each free state falling like dominos (46), but if the US failed to go to war the Wall Street elite would lose billions of dollars in the sale of armaments.

Kennedy repeatedly refused to go to war.

Kennedy would have to die.

In 1945, following the surrender of Japan to Allied forces, Viet Nam’s nationalist leader, Ho Chi Minn established the Democratic Republic of Vietnam based on the idea of “National Liber-

In 1946, France declared Vietnam to be a “free state.” However, as it could only be “free” within the French Union. Ho Chi Minn’s government rebelled (47).

In 1950, China and the Soviet Union pledged to provide sup­port to Ho Chi Minn. The U.S. countered with 15 million dollars in aid to the French. As part of the package, the U.S. also sent military advisors (46,47).

But it was to no avail.

Over the course of the next four years, the Vietnamese repeatedly beat back the French. In 1954, at the “Battle of Dienbienphu” they lay siege to the French garrison at Dienbienphu and made it impossible for French supplies to arrive by air.

France was finally defeated by the Vietnam’s nationalists (47). The Wall Street elite decided that it was time to take matters into their own hands and pay these “communists” a lesson. That same year, Eisenhower and the Dulles brothers advanced the “domino” theory (46), and warned of a communist threat to the “free world” of southeast Asia, and a threat that would soon spread to the United States:

“You have a row of dominoes setup. You knock over the first one, and what will happen to the last one is the certainty that it will go over very quickly.”

The splitting of Vietnam into two states was finally proposed, as a means of containing the communists (46,47). As part of the “Agreement on the Cessation of Hostilities in Vietnam” a provi­sional demarcation line was drawn at the 17th parallel which was to divide Vietnam until nationwide elections are held. The United States, however, was opposed to democratic elections. The Dulles clique were convinced that if such elections were held, Ho Chi Minh would win in a landslide.

On October 23, 1954, President Eisenhower wrote a letter to Ngo Dinh Diem, President of the Council of Ministers of [South] Vietnam, offering significant military and financial aid: “The pur­pose of this offer is to assist the Government of Viet-Nam in devel­oping and maintaining a strong, viable state, capable of resisting attempted subversion or aggression through military means.”

Considerable military and financial assistance followed. But it was not having the desired effect. Nationalist leader, Ho Chi Minh, was becoming ever more popular and powerful. It was ap­parent that his nationalist forces in the north of Viet Nam, would soon be powerful and popular enough to drive Diem and his West­ern backers, from the coiintry. The Wall Street elite proposed to lend South Viet Nam even larger sums of money, to buy military equipment from firms controlled by the Wall Street elites (46,47,48). There was only one catch: It would be U.S. taxpayers who would supply the money, and if South Viet Nam fell or defaulted, it would be U.S. taxpayers who would reimburse the bankers.

On April 4, 1959, President Eisenhower gave a speech at Gettysburg College, in Pennsylvania, April 4, 1959:

“Viet-Nam is a country divided into two parts, like Korea and Germany. The southern half, with its 12 million people, is free but poor. It is an underdeveloped country; its economy is weak, average individual income being less than $200 a year. The north­ern half has been turned over to communism. A line of demarca­tion running along the 17th parallel separates the two. To the north of this line stand several Communist divisions. These facts pose to south Viet-Nam two great tasks: self-defense and economic growth.”

“For Viet-Nam’s economic growth, the acquisition of capital is vitally necessary. [A] way for Viet-Nam to get the necessary capital is through private investments from the outside and through governmental loans… And there is still the other of Viet-Nam’s great problem—how to support the military forces it needs without crushing its economy…. military as well as economic help is currently needed in Viet-Nam… We reach the inescapable conclu­sion that our own national interests demand some help from us in sustaining in Viet-Nam the morale, the economic progress, and the military strength necessary to its continued existence in freedom.”

1959 was a pivotal year. The Dulles Wall Street clique were hoping that with the election of their man, Nixon, as the next president of the United States, that he would launch a full scale invasion into Cuba followed by a huge military buildup in Viet Nam (46,47).

The election of Kennedy threatened those hopes.

As early as 1951, while serving as a congressman, Kennedy presciently observed: “The Indo-Chinese states are puppet states, French principalities with great resources but as typical examples of empire and colonialism as can be fond anywhere. To check the southern drive of Communism makes sense but not only through reliance on the force of arms. The task is, rather, to build strong native non-Communist sentiment within these areas and rely on that as a spearhead of defense. To do this apart from and in defiance of innately nationalistic aims spells foredoomed failure.”

And again, after his election, Kennedy stated that: “we can’t expect these countries to do every thing the way we want to do them. They have their own interests, their own personalities, their own tradition. We can’t make everyone want to go in our image. In addition, we have ancient struggles between countries….We can’t make the world over, but we can influence the world.”

Dulles and the Wall Street bankers and arms merchants wanted war: War with Cuba, and a long protracted, costly war with Viet Nam.

Kennedy, however, repeatedly refused to escalate the con­flict. Although there are those who claim otherwise, such as Walter Rostow, who headed Kennedy’s State Department Policy Planning Council, others, such as his brother (45) who served as Attorney General, and Roger Hilsman, Kennedy’s Assistant Secretary of State for Far Eastern Affairs, and presidential aides Kenny O’Donnell and Dave Powers—all maintain that he had no intention of ex­panding the war.

Kennedy’s refusal to expand the war was also the fear of the Pentagon and CIA. As summed up by William E. Colby, former director of the CIA: “President Kennedy was unalterably opposed to sending U.S. combat troops to Vietnam.”

Thus, many of those in the Pentagon, the CIA, and on Wall Street, were unalterably opposed to Kennedy as he was viewed as soft on communism and unwilling to give them the expensive war they craved. Many wanted to kill him (50), and for good reason — or so they thought.

First was the refusal to invade Cuba. Second, he fires Dulles. Third, he threatens to eviscerate the CIA. Fourth he refused to go to war with the Soviet Union over the Cuban missile crisis in Octo­ber of 1962 (44) when the right wingers, the CIA, and Pentagon were clamoring for nuclear war. Fifth, he refused to expand the war in Vietnam. And then, finally, and perhaps the last straw, Presi­dent John F. Kennedy and Premier Nikita Khrushchev signed the first major arms control agreement, the “Partial Test Ban Treaty”

With the signing of the “Partial Test Ban Treaty” outrage erupted among the Wall Street elite, the anti-communists, the Pen­tagon, the CIA, and on and on. The “Partial Test Ban Treaty” threat­ened to halt the nuclear arms race as it banned nuclear testing in the atmosphere, the oceans and outer space. Moreover, the Treaty contained a preambular promise to eventually end to all nuclear test explosions.”

American needed these weapons, the right-wing screamed. The Soviets could never be trusted. The signing of the treaty was a betrayal. And besides, think of all the money the government would spend if only Kennedy were willing to engage in an expensive arm’s race.

Kennedy was now being openly described in some circles as a traitor. Extreme right wing groups were clamoring for his head. Posters with a bull’s eye across his face were printed. On Novem­ber 22, 1963, Kennedy was killed.

–~~~~~~~~~~~~–

WHO KILLED KENNEDY

“The CIA was behaving during those years like a rogue el­ephant rampaging out of control”—Senator Frank Church, Chair­man of Select Committee on Intelligence, July 1975.

Theories and speculation abound as to who killed Kennedy and why (50,51). In the discussion which follows, we will focus primarily on well established facts, including those reported by the Warren Commission (52) in 1963.

What we know is that Kennedy had made a number of very deadly enemies, including former CIA director Allen Dulles, whom he had fired. We also know that despite his firing and his hatred for Kennedy, Allen Dulles was appointed to the Warren Commission which investigated Kennedy’s assassination.

And we know that General Charles Cabell, the CIA deputy director fired by Kennedy after the Bay of Pigs, was now working in the Pentagon. Charles Cabell’s brother, Earle Cabell, was mayor of Dallas, the city in which Kennedy was shot.

Who else was in Dallas that morning?

Vice-President Johnson, former vice-President Nixon, FBI director J. Edgar Hoover, Chase Manhattan bank president and fu­ture Warren Commission member John McCloy, and a George Bush oil-business partner, George Brown (of Brown and Root). Indeed, according to Madeleine Brown, Johnson’s mistress, these men at­tended a small party on the evening before the assassination, which was hosted by Clint Murchison. According to Ms. Brown (53):

“The group… went behind closed doors. A short time later Lyndon, anxious and red-faced, re-appeared. I knew how secretly Lyndon operated. Therefore I said nothing.” When Johnson emerged from the meeting, he squeezed “my hand so hard, it felt crushed from the pressure, he spoke with a grating whisper, a quiet growl, into my ear, not a love message, but one I’ll always remember: “After tomorrow those g—d— Kennedys will never embarrass me again – that’s no threat – that’s a promise.”

Perhaps Ms. Brown is mistaken. Perhaps Johnson never ut­tered such a prophetic message. However, that he disliked the Kennedys and feared he would not be on the ticket for Kennedy’s second term, is well known.

What we also know is that the Kennedy assassination was carried out with military precision, by at least two marksmen who were crack shots.

How do we know there were at least two marksmen?

As based on the testimony of witnesses who heard from seven to eight shots, as based on Kennedy’s movements as he was shot, and as based on the trajectories and the seven bullet holes in the bodies of Kennedy and governor Connolly.

This was also the opinion of Governor Connally who said: “there were either two or three people involved or more in this or someone was shooting with an automatic rifle.”

Lee Harvey Oswald did not use or own an “automatic rifle.”

Oswald was not a marksman. According to expert testimony presented in the Warren Commission report (52): Oswald was a good shot, somewhat better than or equal to better than the average let us say.’”

Kennedy —a moving target— was shot at least twice coordinating to the Warren Report (52), and possibly four times in a matter of seconds (50,51,54,55), i.e. in the throat and the head (52), and in the back (50,51,54,55). According to several experts, the head shot was actually two head shots which were almost simulta­neous, one coming from the rear the other coming from the right

In addition, during that same time frame, Governor Connally was struck in the wrist, and in the thigh (52). And, there was a third victim who was also wounded.

Thus, witnesses tell us that seven to eight shots were fired. Seven bullet holes appeared in Kennedy and Connally, and a third man was also injured. The Warren Commission believes that the very first shot missed and was mistaken as a car backfiring (52).

Given that all these shots occurred in less than 7 seconds, and as no automatic weapon, but only a rifle was found, it can be concluded that there were at least two and more likely, three shoot­ers. This latter supposition is consistent with the conclusions of others, as well as the reports of witnesses, some of whom believed shots were fired from the book Depository whereas many others heard the shots coming from the Grassy Knoll. The Grassy Knoll, which was to the right of Kennedy, and also offered the best loca­tion for an assassination. A third volley of shot may have come from the Dallas County Records Building.

Even if we accept the Warren Commission report, is it likely that a man who is an “average” shot would have been able to hit Kennedy—a moving target— twice from a distance “of 177 to 266 feet” (52) with a rifle, and in less than 7 seconds? In fact, expert marksmen, using the rifle allegedly used by Oswald, could not duplicate the feat (50,51).

Nevertheless, according to the Warren Report (52) “the Commission has concluded that the shots which killed President Kennedy and wounded Governor Connally were fired from the sixth-floor window at the southeast corner of the Texas School Book Depository Building. Two bullets probably caused all the wounds suffered by President Kennedy and Governor Connally. Since the preponderance of evidence indicates at least three shots were fired the Commission concluded that one shot probably missed the Presidential limousine and its occupants, and that the three shots were fired in a time period ranging from approximately 4.8 to 7 seconds.

On the morning of 11/22/1963, the Kennedy motorcade was slowly winding its way down the streets of Dallas. Kennedy’s wife sat beside him, and Governor John Connally and his wife, were sitting up front in the limousine, behind the driver.

At 12:30, the motorcade arrived in Dealey Plaza and turned right from Main to Houston Street. A few seconds later the motor­cade took the 120 degrees tarn into Elm Street passing the School-book Depository Building where Leon Oswald allegedly lay in wait.

Just as the limousine neared the grassy knoll, a man stood up and opened an umbrella, which he pumped in the air—as is appar­ent from watching the Zapruder film. It was at that moment, as the limousine passed the Stemmons Freeway sign, that Kennedy reached up and grabbed his throat. We know this, because it was caught on film.

Abraham Zapruder was standing near the grassy knoll that day filming the Kennedy motorcade. The film shows the entire as­sassination including the opened umbrella.

Mrs. Connally reports that she heard gunshots. She turned and saw Kennedy putting his hands to his throat—and this is re­corded in Zapruder Film Frame 225.

Mrs. Kennedy also heard the shots, which she thought might be firecrackers. It was at this moment that she heard “terrible noises” coming from her husband. It was gurgling sounds from the gun­shot to his throat. She turned toward, and put her hands on him when Kennedy was struck again. As detailed in Zapruder Film, beginning with Frame 232, we see Kennedy, his hands still at his throat, thrown forward as he is struck in the back. We also see John Connally turning to his right, holding his Stetson in his right hand— which means that Kennedy has been struck twice and Connally has not been hit at all. In Zapruder Film 238, we see Connally falling forward, as he is shot in the back. He cries out, “My god, they’re going to kill us all.”

On the Zapruder film, we can see Ms. Kennedy, turned to her right, facing and holding on to President Kennedy. In Zapruder Film Frame 313, Kennedy is shot in the right temporal region of his head and the rear portion of his skull splashes out onto the trunk. Over a third of his brain was blown out of the back of his skull.

We know that bullet entry wounds can be quite small. We know that exit wounds are often quite large. We know that when a bullet strikes an object, the object, such as a person’s head, will move in the direction of the trajectory of the bullet. Thus we know, based on photographic and physical evidence, that Kennedy re­ceived at least one shot from his right, which is the direction of the grassy knoll.

Hence, based on the physical and visual (54) evidence, and based on the Zapruder Film, Kennedy was first shot in the throat— meaning that he was shot from the front, then in the back, and then in the head from the right. As is also evident based on the Zapruder film, Connally was shot in the back. However, Connally was also shot in the wrist, and a bullet lodged in his thigh.

In addition to the seven bullet wounds in the bodies of these two men, there was yet a eighth wound in yet another victim, James Tague. Tague was standing near the Triple Underpass watching the motorcade approach. When the shots rang out he was wounded by a passing bullet.

In addition to the physical and visual evidence, a large crowd of witnesses at Dealey plaza reported that shots were fired from the Grassy Knoll (50,51,52). Some witnesses also stated that a whisp of smoke was visible in the area of the Grassy Knoll. Some wit­nesses even claim to have seen men with rifles in downtown Dallas before the shooting.

Photos taken from the opposite side of Elm street, shows the grassy knoll and the heads of two men standing behind a fence, one of whom appears to be holding an object that some have inter­preted to be a rifle (56).

There were also eyewitnesses who reported seeing cars roam­ing in the area behind the Grassy Knoll, some with out-of-state license plates and extra radio antennas. Some claimed to have seen men speaking into walkie-talkies (52).

Nevertheless, even if we were to dismiss the eye-witness accounts, there remains the physical and visual evidence. Kennedy was shot at least 3 separate times by 3 separate bullets. Connally was struck by a fourth bullet. Two of the shots came from behind. The throat shot appears to have come from the front. The head shot came from the right.

Based on this and additional evidence, the Warren Commis­sion in a report cosigned by the disgraced Dulles, concluded that

1. Lee Harvey Oswald was the only assassin and acted on his own.

2. He shot from the 6th floor of the Schoolbook Depository Building which was behind the President’s limousine at the time of the assassination.

3. He used an Italian Mannlicher-Carchano rifle.

4. There was no conspiracy.

But what about the witnesses who claimed the shots came from behind the grassy knoll?

Answer: They were mistaken.

What about the fact that Oswald was only an average shot? Answer: He was lucky that day.

What about the fact that the shots came in such quick suc­cession, that if there was a lone gunmen, he would have had to be firing an automatic weapon?

Answer: Oswald was a lone assassin and he used a rifle.

What about the fact that foliage from the trees along the road­way would have blocked his view?

Answer: He shot through the foliage.

What about the seven bullet wounds, several of which had different trajectories, and at least one if not two of which, came from the right and not from the direction of the book depository which was in the rear? (52):

Again, however, we are told by the Warren Commission (52) that Ruby acted alone, and that there was “no conspiracy.”

There was no conspiracy, according to the Warren Report. Yet, according to the Dallas Morning Star, which on November 22, 1963, published details describing the route of Kennedy’s motor­cade, Kennedy was supposed to go straight down Main Street. How­ever, it did not go down Main street. Instead it turned onto Houston and then Elm Street which not only offered the perfect street for a triangulated assassinated attempt from three directions, but which required Kennedy’s limousine to turn and slow almost to a crawl as it neared the grassy knoll.

The Warren Commission claimed that the reason the route was changed was that it is impossible to go from Main Street onto Stemmons Freeway. Which is not true.

Numerous witnesses, including traffic patrolman Joe Smith testified that nothing would have prevented the motorcade from going directly down Main Street and on to the Stemmons Freeway

Who was in a position to change the route? The secret service? The Dallas police? The mayor of Dallas?

Coincidental, the mayor of Dallas, on the day of the assas­sination, was Earle Cabell, the brother of the Charles Cabell, the former deputy director of the CIA who, along with Dulles, had been fired by Kennedy in 1961.

Another coincidence. Eighteen material witnesses died dur­ing the three-year period which followed the murder of President Kennedy – six by gunfire, three in motor accidents, two by suicide, one from a cut throat, one from a karate chop to the neck, three from heart attacks and two from natural causes.

Yet another oddity. The man who pumped the umbrella was never sought and never questioned by the Warren Commission. Neither was the man who sat next to “umbrella man” even though a photograph of both indicates that he appeared to be speaking into a handheld radio with a long antenna.

And yet another oddity. The Zapruder film, was quickly snapped-up by Life magazine for $250,000.00., and then locked away so that there would be no public viewing. Instead, the maga­zine published a series of still photos, lifted from the Zapruder film, showing Kennedy being shot. However, Life magazine pub­lished several of the photos in reverse order, thus making it falsely look as if Kennedy had been shot in the head, from behind, with his head lurching forward. Until the film was shown to Americans in its entirety, in 1975, no one was the wiser.

Who owned Life magazine in 1963? Henry Luce, a close personal friend of Allen Dulles, the Director of the CIA. Henry Luce was an alumni of Skull and Bones (class of 1920).

Who purchased the Zapruder film for Life magazine? C.J. Jackson, formerly a “psj’chological warfare” consultant to the CIA.

And then there is the evidence, presented in the Warren Re­port (52), which indicates Oswald was an average shot. According to data provided by the “Records Branch, Personnel Department, Headquarters US. Marine Corps” Oswald received a “sharpshooter qualification as a ‘fairly good shot’ and a low marksman rating as a ‘rather poor shot.’”

As stated in the Warren Report (52): “Major Anderson concluded: ‘I would say that as compared to other Marines receiving the same type of training, that Oswald was a good shot, somewhat better than or equal to better than the average let us say.’”

The Warren Commission using a stationary target, “had ex­pert riflemen fire the assassination weapon from a tower at three silhouette targets at distances of 175,240, and 265 feet. The assas­sination rifle [was] mounted with [a] telescopic sight. Three marks­men, rated as master by the National Rifle Association, each fired two series of three shots. In the first series the firers required time spans of 4.6, 6.75, and 8.25 seconds respectively [in order to get off three shots]. The marksmen took as much time as they wanted for the first target and all hit the target. For the first four attempts, the firers missed the second shot by several inches.”

In another test, “the three FBI experts…fired three shots from the weapon at 15 yards in 6, 7, and 9 seconds. At 15 yards each man’s shots landed within the size of a dime. The shots fired by Frazier at the range of 25 yards landed within an area of 2 inches and 5 inches respectively. Frazier later fired four groups of three shots at a distance of 100 yards in 5.9, 6.2, 5.6, and 6.5 seconds.

Each series of three shots…were a few inches high and to the right of the target.”

Thus, when experts were given “as much time as they wanted” to shoot at a stationary target, all “missed the second shot by sev­eral inches.” Likewise, when their best expert, Frazier, fired the weapon in three separate tests, and at a motionless target, he missed all three times.

And let us be clear. Shooting at a still target is much easier than a moving target, and Kennedy’s vehicle and his body were in motion. And, Oswald did not have “as much time as they wanted.”

Nevertheless, although their own experts repeatedly failed in these tests under stress free conditions and using a still target, the Warren Commission concluded that Lee Harvey Oswald, whose shooting skills were “better than or equal to better than the aver­age” was the lone assassin, and that there was “no conspiracy.”

No conspiracy?

The Warren Report itself appears to be a conspiracy of incompetence. The Warren Report is an 26 volume, 888 page morass of often irrelevant questions and incomplete answers with witnesses often being cut off before they can reply to questions. A number of witnesses were told they need not answer as investigators had questioned them in another setting—that is, off the record. The report is also padded with hundreds of pages of insignificant and irrelevant testimony and exhibits, such as pictures of Oswald’s pubic hairs and Jack Ruby’s mother’s dental charts. The 26 volumes were not arranged in any logical manner and there is no index. However, whereas often irrelevant witnesses are questioned at length, many of those who were at the scene were never questioned at all. Moreover, many who were questioned complained later that their testi­mony was altered, or that they were pressured and intimidated by investigators who made it clear that they did not believe the witness.

Who served on the Warren Commission?

The leader of the pack was Allen Dulles, former director of the CIA. A curious choice. Dulles had been fired by Kennedy be­cause Kennedy believed Dulles was untrustworthy and a liar. What kind of man was Allen Dulles? He was a man who had been in business with Nazis, who sought to have SS chief and mass murderer Heinrich Himmler take the place of Hitler, and who had re­cruited Nazi mass murderers for his CIA and into the Republican party (1,2,5,6,10,11,12,18). Whereas his Nazi partners tortured and killed millions, Dulles and his CIA were directly responsible for the mass murder and torture of 100s of thousands of men, women, and children (13,35). Dulles was a killer. He had a Nazi-mentality.

Second in command: John McCloy, chairman of Chase Manhattan bank (59)—a bank owned by the Rockefellers, and a bank that was used as a Nazi front and which laundered Nazi funds, and which stole tens of millions of dollars from Jews who were being murdered and worked to death in the concentration camps being run by Rockefeller business partner, IG Farben (1,2,60,61,62). Indeed, Rockefeller’s Chase Manhattan bank (like the Bush-Harriman gang) continued its relationship with the Nazis even after Pearl Harbor, and after the Nazis declared war on the U.S. It was because of Chase/Rockefeller collusion with the Nazis that law suits were filed by victims of its business practices (60,61). Chase and other Nazi-banks were forced to pay millions of dollars in compensation to those it stole from and who were murdered and whose property was seized by its Nazi business partners.

Earl Warren, Chief Justice of the Supreme Court, and a former Dulles-Rockefeller protege, was basically third in command. At the urgings of Dulles and Rockefeller, Earl Warren had been chosen to serve as the 1948 Republican vice-presidential candidate on the ticket headed by Thomas Dewey. They ran against Truman, accusing him and the Democrats of being communist sympathizers. They lost.

Having Dulles and McCloy head the Warren Commission is tantamount to having “murder incorporated” investigate itself. Dulles had the motive and certainly the means to kill Kennedy (63) as did his CIA lieutenants (64). Let us also recall that McCloy attended a private meeting the night before, which was attended by Nixon, Hoover, and Johnson, at the end of which comments were made to the effect that Kennedy would be no more (53).

Other commissioners included, Democratic Senator Russell, Republican Senator Cooper, Republican congressman Gerald Ford, and Democratic congressman Hale Boggs.

And then there is yet another Yale Skull and Bones connection. Arlen Specter, who graduated from Yale Law School, served as assistant counsel and investigator for the Warren Commission. Specter is credited with coming up with the “magic bullet” theory.

Warren Commission investigator Specter was promised a political career leading to a Senate seat by the money men, and Specter was elected, first as a District Attorney (in a heavily democratic district) and then to the senate with their help. Specter became chairman of the Senate Select Committee on Intelligence. As a Republic Senator, he has been described by his Senate colleagues as “a partisan hatchet man serving at the behest of the Senate Re­publican leadership” and “he has been criticized by some of his Republican colleagues on the Judiciary Committee for being too loose with the facts. They refuse to put their names on reports he authored” (65). One of Specter’s attributes is the ability to dig up or manufacture “dirt” which he uses to intimidate, destroy, or manipulate his enemies, and those of the Republican leadership

Boggs later complained that FBI director Hoover had ordered his aides to compile secret dossiers on each member of the Warren Commission so he would have adequate dirt in his files to apply certain pressures if a need arose. Boggs also complained that “Ge­stapo tactics” were applied on Commissioners to accept the Dulles, McCloy, Specter version of the evidence (66). Soon after making these statements, Boggs was killed.

LEE HARVEY OSWALD & THE U2 SPY SHOOT DOWN

“While in the Air Force, I will be treated like any other enlisted man… Keeping the secret will be a part of my training — learning to live my cover” -Phillip Agee described his experience in becoming a CIA officer with a military cover.

Who was Lee Harvey Oswald?

Oswald had served in the Marines where he received training in the Russian language. While in the Marines in 1957 and 1958, Oswald was also stationed at Atsugi Air Base in Japan (52), the home of the largest CIA station in the Pacific, and the home base of the super-secret U2 spy plane. There he worked as a radar operator (67).

After Oswald left the Marine Corps in September of 1959, he traveled to the Soviet Union where he sought to renounce his citizenship (52). Where he obtained the financing for his trip, $1,500.00 (in 1959 dollars) is unknown, given his low salary as an enlisted man.

On October 31, 1959, while living in the Soviet Union, Oswald went to the American Embassy to renounce his U.S. citizenship. Mr. Richard E. Snyder, senior consular official at the Embassy, testified that Oswald was bright, articulate, self-confident and seemed “to know what his mission was. He took charge, in a sense, of the conversation right from the beginning” (52).

Oswald was given a rent-free apartment in Minsk, near where an espionage training academy was located.

Why had Oswald gone to the Soviet Union?

In 1959, President Dwight Eisenhower took the first bold step to end the cold war with the Soviet Union. He took these steps despite vehement opposition from the Pentagon, his advisers, and the Dulles clique (68). The Dulles brother, Allen, head of the CIA, and John, Secretary of State, were calling for “united action” by the Western and Asian Allies to oppose the communists. John Dulles wanted more than “containment,” but “liberation” from communism, in the form of “massive retaliation.”

In a speech given on January 12, 1954, Dulles called upon the President to develop “a great capacity to retaliate instantly, by means and at places of our own choosing,” including the indiscriminate use of atomic weapons for attacking Moscow.

Dulles was accused, however, of wishing to go to war not because he was against communism, but to make his banking and arm’s merchant friends on Wall Street fabulously wealthy (68). Indeed, he was repeatedly accused in the early 1950s, of acting less like a statesman and more “like a corporation lawyer serving his clients.”

Dulles called his political philosophy, “brinkmanship,” that is, a willingness to go the brink of war, and then over the brink, and to massively retaliate, and destroy, with atomic bombs, all those he deemed to be enemies of Wall Street and the United States.

Eisenhower’s golfing partner, Senator Prescott Bush, was urging the same strategy.

President Eisenhower, however, wanted to end the cold war and the arm’s race with the Soviet Union (69). Contrary to Dulles and Bush, Eisenhower wanted to reduce weapons production and defense spending. Hence, in 1959, Eisenhower and Soviet Pre­mier Nikita Khrushchev agreed to meet in Paris, in May 1960, to discuss a test ban and arms reductions treaty (69,70).

But then an international incident, made the meeting impossible to hold and destroyed all hopes of an arm’s reduction treaty— much to the delight of hawks on both the Soviet and American side.

Since 1956, Eisenhower had authorized the U2, an ultra-light, high-flying spy plane, to conduct secret reconnaissance missions over the Soviet Union (70). The reason he approved these missions was that he did not believe the reports he was getting from Dulles and the CIA, which claimed a Soviet military superiority. Eisenhower hoped that the information obtained from these flights would silence the war-mongers in his administration and on Wall Street. The Soviets lacked the interceptor aircraft and missiles to shoot down the U2, so Eisenhower was confident that he could always deny their existence.

At the insistence of Allen Dulles and gang, Eisenhower reluctantly agreed to one last flight, just as the Paris summit approached. On May 1, 1960, U2 pilot Frances Gary Powers was detected and then shot down as he crossed the Soviet Union (70).

A belligerent Khrushchev was enraged and canceled the summit.

There was jubilation on Wall Street and in the Dulles’ households.

Shortly thereafter, less than 18 months after his defection, and 6 months after Gary Powers had been shot down, Oswald — who had been stationed at Atsugi Air Base in Japan, the home of the largest CIA station in the Pacific and the super-secret U2 spy plane— opened negotiations with the U.S. Embassy in Moscow (52). Amazingly, Oswald was not only granted permission to immediately return to the United States but he was allowed to bring his new Russian wife, with the U.S. picking up the tab!

Why?

As detailed in the Warren Report (52) “Oswald’s mother, Mrs. Marguerite Oswald, testified before the [Warren] Commission that a New Orleans branch of the “organization called ‘Fair Play for Cuba,’ he stated his desire that he should be accepted as a ‘friend’ of the Cuban Revolution.” He insisted that he was entitled to the Cuban visa because of his background, partisanship, and personal activi­ties on behalf of the Cuban movement. He engaged in an angry argument with the consul who finally told him that “as far as he was concerned he would not give him a visa” and that “a person like him [Oswald] in place of aiding the Cuban Revolution, was doing it harm.”

According to the Warren Report (52): “Oswald’s activities with regard to Cuba raise serious questions as to how much he might have been motivated in the assassination by a desire to aid the Castro regime.”

The Warren Commission “found no evidence that the extreme views expressed toward President Kennedy by some right-wing groups centered in Dallas or any other general atmosphere of hate or right-wing extremism which may have existed in the city of Dallas had any connection with Oswald’s actions on November 22,1963.”

In 1992 the KGB released dossier #31451: the Oswald file. Among the revelations: the KGB suspected that the American defector was a CIA operative.

Oswald, before he was killed, claimed that he was a patsy, that he had been set up (52). But why?

To justify an attack on Cuba?

As detailed in a book by James Bamford “Body of Secrets,” and as reported by David Ruppe, ABC News.com (5/1/2001), in the months before Kennedy was gunned down the “U.S. Military drafted plans to terrorize U.S. cities to provoke war with Cuba.” The plans included the killing of innocent people and [to] commit acts of terrorism in U.S. cities [in order] to create public support for a war against Cuba. Code named Operation North woods, the plans reportedly included assassination, hijacking planes, blowing up a U.S. ship, and even orchestrating violent terrorism in U.S. cities. The plans were developed as ways to trick the American public and the international community into supporting a war to oust Cuba’s then new leader, communist Fidel Castro.”

The media was also to be manipulated. Top Generals are quoted as saying “casualty lists in U.S. newspapers would cause a helpful wave of national indignation.”

The military and “the Joint Chiefs of Staff even proposed using the potential death of astronaut John Glenn during the first attempt to put an American into orbit as a false pretext for war with Cuba.” The military argued that “the objective” in killing Glenn, “is to provide irrevocable proof… that the fault lies with the Communists.”

According to ABC news, “The plans had the written approval of all of the Joint Chiefs of Staff and were presented to President Kennedy’s defense secretary, Robert McNamara, in March 1962.”

If they were willing to kill John Glenn in order to provoke war with Cuba, given their laundry list of gripes about Kennedy, why not kill him instead?

Fidel Castro was alarmed by the links being made between Oswald and Cuba. According to National Security Agency docu­ments, Castro was terrified the U.S. would retaliate against Cuba in the first hours after the assassination. He feared the assassina­tion would give the U.S. a pretext for invading his country and toppling his rule.

Many in the CIA, Pentagon, and on Wall Street were plan­ning on exactly that.

Was Oswald a CIA agent? An “undercover agent?” Some think so (71), including his mother (52).

It would be a neat trick, indeed, to train Oswald as a CIA agent, use him to provide info resulting in the downing of Gary Power’s U2 spy plane, and then bring him back, set him up for a mission which he knows little about, put him in that book deposi­tory, have 3 expert CIA marksmen kill Kennedy, and then, have Oswald, the communist defector and friend of Cuba, take the blame.

At least from the perspective of a “thought experiment” Oswald would have been the perfect patsy and the perfect “pa­triot.” Oswald not only puts a stop to an arms control agreement with the communist Soviet Union back in 1960, but in 1963, he serves as a trigger that might ignite a war with Russia and Cuba.

However, Cuba was not attacked. Instead, Lyndon Johnson, upon becoming president, escalated the war in Vietnam.

The Wall Street elite, the war mongers, were delirious with joy. Billions of dollars would be spent and were spent fighting the Vietnam war. The war was a cash cow.

War has always been good for business.

The death of Kennedy had resulted in war.

Dulles and the Bush-Harriman-Rockefeller gang, had won.

–~~~~~~~~~~~~–

HOWARD HUNT, ASSASSINATION & GEORGE BUSH

Eleven years later, George W. Bush was terrified. Nixon was about to be impeached for the cover-up of Watergate, and it had been revealed that Nixon had tape-recorded his own White House conversations. Among the incriminating remarks made on the White House tapes, were comments about the “Texans,” the “Cubans” and “the Bay of Pigs.”

According to Haldeman (72) Nixon’s chief of staff (31), Nixon always used code words when talking about the 1963 murder of Kennedy, referring to the assassination as “the Bay of Pigs.”

In that same tape (31), Nixon also discussed Robert Mosbacher, George Bush’s partner. The “Texans” were most likely George Bush, Robert Mosbacher and Jim Baker. The “Cubans” some suspect, is a reference to the men who assassinated Kennedy, i.e. the “Bay of Pigs.”

Watergate burglar E. Howard Hunt, was a CIA-operative, linked to the “Cubans,” the “Bay of Pigs,” the assassination of Kennedy, and to George H.W. Bush. In fact, four other Watergate burglars were also associated with the CIA and the anti-Castro movement, including Mr. Martinez who was still on a CIA retainer at the time of the burglary (31).

When Martinez was questioned by judge Sirica, Martinez said, “When it comes to Cuba and when it comes to Communist conspiracies involving the United States, I will do anything to pro­tect this country against any Communist conspiracy” (31).

In 1961, George Bush (despite his denials) was a CIA-op­erative (73), and was linked to E. Howard Hunt (30), the “Cubans” and the “Bay of Pigs” (30,73), and the assassination of President Kennedy (73).

As noted, acting FBI director Gray, destroyed the files taken from the White House safe of Howard Hunt after he was warned they were “political dynamite” and should “never see the light of day.” Some of those files pertained directly to President Kennedy

When the Supreme Court ruled against Nixon, and he had been ordered to turn over his secret White House tapes, George Bush was so scared that others in the Nixon White House had wryly remarked that Bush had “turned into assholes and shit himself to death” (74).

George W. Bush had a lot of reasons to “shit” his pants.

For one, there was the problem involving Watergate burglar E. Howard Hunt, the CIA operative who some believed played a role in Kennedy’s assassination (75). Hunt was a member of the White House “plumbers,” the secret team assembled to perform a number of covert and illegal services for the Republicans (29).

Hunt’s phone number was found in the address book belong­ing to one of the Watergate burglars (31). It was this phone number which enabled reporters and investigators to link the break-in to President Nixon and his reelection campaign. Later it was discov­ered that Hunt and another former CIA operative, Gordon Liddy, were at the scene and directing the burglary (31).

Hunt, after his arrest, was issuing a thinly veiled threat to talk and spill his guts to Congressional investigators unless he received hush money (31). Hunt was immediately given $75,000.

As detailed by Bernstein and Woodward (31): “the covert activities” the Nixon White House was seeking to cover up, “in­volve the whole U.S. intelligence community…The cover up was mainly to protect the covert operations. The president, himself, has been blackmailed.”

What would Hunt talk about that warranted an immediate payoff?

Three years after Watergate, Hunt was accused in an article published by the Liberty Lobby, a conservative, right wing organi­zation, of being linked to the Kennedy assassination (75). Just as Hunt had been at the Watergate directing the burglary, it was being suggesting that Hunt was in Dallas on the day of the shooting.(31).

Hunt sued in Federal Court, and lost an appeal in 1985.

The forewoman of the jury said that she and the jury be­lieved that the CIA had killed the president, and that Hunt had played a role in the assassination.

Indeed, Hunt had been playing a role in the assassination and overthrow of democratically elected leaders and presidents, since the 1950s (35,76). After his first successful mission, against the democratically elected president of Guatemala in 1953, Hunt admitted that the real reason for the coup had little to do with com­munism, and that he had been fooled into serving the interests of Wall Street and the Dulles clan. “I felt a little bit betrayed when I learned that, because I thought, ‘Hey, you know, I’m working for the United States of America, I’m not a hireling for United Fruit.’ But I went ahead with my assigned tasks in any case, and if United Fruit benefited from it, that was part of the set game” (76).

One of Hunt’s next major missions was Cuba.” I was yanked back from [where I was stationed in] Montevideo…and told: ‘What we’re doing is reassembling the OPB Success’ team’—that is, the Guatemala operational team — ‘to take care of Castro.’ My role was very similar to what it had been in the Guatemalan project; I was located down here in Miami, in Coconut Grove; I was equipped with a safe house. And by that time, several hundred thousand Cuban exiles had come over here and made their home here. President Ydigoras Fuentes of Guatemala was good enough to give our Cu­ban exiles a training area in two training areas in his country…”

And then the “Bay of Pigs “fiasco, which left Hunt, the Cu­ban exiles, and the CIA fuming and enraged at Kennedy.

Notable in Hunt’s interview with CNN are his remarks re­garding CIA “training areas” in South America.

Two formerly secret documents, “FBI, Operation Condor Cable,” dated, 9/28/1975, and “FBI, Operation Condor Cable,” dated 9/28/1976, detail how U.S. intelligence agencies oversee and coor­dinate a network of Chilean, Argentinean and Paraguayan secret police agencies which provide “special teams” trained by the CIA, and which travel “anywhere in the world… to carry out assassina­tions,” including the assassination of political opponents in the United States.

One of the teams of Cuban exiles that were to attack Cuba, had receiving special training in South America. Many of these individuals were then flown to south Florida where they waited for the signal to attack.

Like E. Howard Hunt, many of these individuals came to the conclusion that they had been betrayed by Kennedy.

One year after Hunt’s CNN interview (76) detailed above, former CIA officer Victor Marchetti alleged in the August 14,1978 edition of The Spotlight, a Washington newspaper, that “some of the figures in the [Kennedy assassination] conspiracy” included “Howard Hunt, Gerry Hemming, a long-time Cuba mercenary, and Frank Sturgis, one of Hunt’s fellow Watergate burglars.” In that same article, it was alleged that George Bush also played a role in the Kennedy assassination and it was suggested that the link was Hunt and the Cubans who had been trained for the failed Bay of Pigs invasion of Cuba.

These allegations, of course came after Watergate and the fall of Nixon. In 1974, at the height of the Watergate investigation, George H.W. Bush was faced with the possibility that the entire damn might break and that the avalanche of material that might be uncovered could bury him alive.

Bush was so frightened, he “broke out into assholes and shit himself to death.”

If Nixon was impeached, the investigation would follow the money trail, the Bay of Pigs trail, the E. Howard Hunt trail, the Kennedy trail, and it might lead to George H.W. Bush.

BUSH & THE BAY OF PIGS

In 1959 George W. Bush began running his Zapata oil company from a headquarters in Houston. He also spent a lot of time in Louisiana and Florida, where Zapata was drilling off shore, for oil.

That same year, Dulles began preparing for the coming invasion of Cuba, and a major part of the operation was being run out of Guatemala and South Florida—Bush country.

In a briefing to President Kennedy in the Cabinet Room on March 29, 1961, Richard Bissell of the CIA, mentioned that the CIA code name for the Bay of Pigs invasion was “Operation Zapata”

Seven landing craft and support ships were used in the Bay of Pigs invasion. One was named “Houston” and another, “Bar­bara” (78)—which coincidentally is the name of Bush’s wife. Houston, of course, was the headquarters of Bush’s Zapata oil company.

Coincidences, of course.

Bush was also working for the CIA at this time, and, as noted, was spending a lot of time in south Florida.

According to Joseph McBride of The Nation (73),”a source with close connections to the intelligence community confirms that Bush started working for the agency in 1960 or 1961, using his oil business as a cover for clandestine activities.”

We do not know with 100% certainty if Bush played a role in the Bay of Pigs fiasco. However, we do know that E. Howard Hunt was a Bay of Pigs veteran CIA operative. So too was Watergate burglar, Frank Sturgis.

The official CIA name for the Bay of Pigs invasion, was known as “JM/WAVE.” Even after the Bay of Pigs “JM/WAVE became a continuing and extended Miami operation, the CIA’s larg­est in the continental United States” (41).

Many of those who had trained for the invasion, were trained in South America in the same camps where “special teams” trained by the CIA, are sent “anywhere in the world… to carry out assassi­nations,” including the assassination of political leaders (63).

Likewise, just as E. Howard Hunt was seething with rage against Kennedy, so too were many in the Cuban exile community who wanted revenge for the death of their friends, comrades, broth­ers, sons and fathers, on the beaches of Cuba. They all blamed Kennedy and many wanted to kill him.

Their hatred was inflamed even further when, in 1962 Kennedy shut down a CIA program that was preparing for another invasion (Operation Mongoose). The crack down on Cuban exiles continued into 1963 with Kennedy shutting down their paramili­tary training camps in Louisiana and Florida—both locations also being states where Bush was doing business.

Many of these men were linked not just to the CIA, but to George H.W. Bush. As pointed out by Georgie A. Geyer (81), “an entire new Cuban cadre emerged from the Bay of Pigs. The names Howard Hunt, Bernard Barker, Rolando Martinez, Felix Rodriguez and Eugenio Martinez would, in the next quarter century, pop up, often decisively, over and over again in the most dangerous American foreign policy crises. There were Cubans flying missions for the CIA in the Congo and even for the Portuguese in Africa; Cu­bans were the burglars of Watergate; Cubans played key roles in Nicaragua, in Irangate, in the American move into the Persian Gulf.”

Cubans everywhere, and all working for the CIA in operations linked to George Bush. And not just Cubans, but CIA opera­tive, E. Howard Hunt who was linked to assassination of Kennedy, and who, following his arrest as a Watergate burglar, was threatening to talk.

Hunt was implicated in the Kennedy assassination, Cubans trained by the CIA were suspected of involvement, and so to was George Bush.

Consider, for example, a secret FBI memo, written by FBI director Hoover which had been accidentally released (79). In that memo (dated 11/29/63) it is stated that “George Bush of the CIA” was being kept informed about the Warren Commission investiga­tion and the assassination of Kennedy as it pertained to the Cuban exile community and any forthcoming attack on Cuba (79). The substance of the letter, is that “George W. Bush of the CIA” was in some way linked with the anti-Castro groups in Florida, which were in turn linked to Hunt and the assassination of Kennedy.

Hunt was still seething about Kennedy and the debacle in Cuba 10 years later, and both Hunt and Sturgis are alleged to have been in Dallas on the day of Kennedy’s assassination.

As noted, Hunt was even accused of being involved in the Kennedy assassination by a CIA agent, in an article that appeared in a magazine published by Liberty Lobby. Hunt sued in Federal Court for defamation and lost.

The CIA was so alarmed by these allegations that the “Commission on CIA Activities Within the United States” (the Rockefeller Commission) sought to refute them in its 1975 report (80).

The Rockefellers and Bush family had been in business together for decades, and Bush was a CIA agent in 1960, and later became director of the CIA—the same CIA whose agents were implicated in the assassination of Kennedy, and the same CIA whose director had been fired by Kennedy and who then sat on the Warren Commission which served largely as a vehicle to cover up the crime.

According to an article written by Joseph McBride and published in the July 1988 issue of The Nation, Bush was involved in the Kennedy assassination. McBride’s source observed: “I know [Bush] was involved in the Caribbean [Bay of Pigs] I know he was involved in the suppression of things after the Kennedy assassination.”

On March 8, 1974, as cries for Nixon’s impeachment grew ever louder, George H.W. Bush, chairman of the Republican National Committee, began making frantic phone calls. He “was having trouble keeping the party professionals in line” (74). An impeachment vote was becoming a certainty, and who knows where the investigation might lead.

“What in the world do we do now?” asked Bush. Bush was panicking, threatening to pack up and run (74). Finally, Bush and friends, including Republicans in congress, began suggesting that Nixon should resign in order to put a stop to any impeachment investigation.

Party loyalists, however, were outraged by the idea (74). Of course, most did not realize that it was not just Nixon’s Presidency which was at stake, but the reputations and lives of those whose dirty secrets would be exposed if congress voted for impeachment.

What was not yet clear, however, was if there were enough votes for impeachment. It all depended on what Nixon may or may not have said on the tapes he secretly made of his own conversations in the White House.

And then the transcripts of the tapes were ordered released after a protracted court fight. The Nixon team began making transcripts of the tapes, including one that sent Bush and others into paroxysms of fear.

Somebody asked John Dean, Nixon’s counsel, “Does Bush know about the transcript yet?

“Yes.”

“Well, what did he do?”

“He broke out into assholes and shit himself to death” was the reply (74).

What was on the tape?

The media referred to it as the “smoking gun.”

Nixon had taped himself, on June 23,1972, discussing with his Chief of Staff, H.R. Haldeman, how best to stop the FBI investigation into the CIA-Watergate burglary. They were worried the investigation would expose their connection to “the Bay of Pigs thing.”

According to Haldeman, in his book “The Ends of Power”, Nixon always used code words when talking about the 1963 murder of Kennedy, referring to the assassination as “the Bay of Pigs.”

In that same tape, Nixon also discussed Robert Mosbacher, George Bush’s partner. He also referred repeatedly to the “Cubans” and the “Texans.” The “Texans” being George Bush, Jim Baker, and Robert Mosbacher.

Yet another tape was even more incriminating. It contained an 18-minute gap. Six court-appointed electronics experts said that the gap was created after the tape had been erased and erased yet again, five separate times.

An impeachment inquiry would certainly lead to a lot of questions, that Bush and friends would prefer not be asked.

Bush was almost dumb with fear.

It was clear Nixon would be impeached. Who knows what might be revealed if the impeachment hearings became wide rang­ing and delved into other the crimes committed by the White House and Nixon’s associates?

An investigation would result in the opening up of a flood gates of crimes and treasonable acts committed by officials in the CIA, FBI, and the Republican Party. Everything having to do with the “Bay of Pigs,” the “Cubans” the “Texans” might come to light.

No wonder Bush “broke out into assholes and shit himself to death.”

Bush was terrified, almost dumb with fear. The situation was deteriorating. A lot of people were in a panic. They simply could not allow an impeachment investigation to proceed.

Either Nixon would have to die, or he would have to resign.

Frantic meetings were held. Emissaries were sent to consult with Nixon who was already being blackmailed (31). The horrible consequences of an impeachment investigation were explained.

On August 9, 1974, Richard Nixon resigned.

He was then pardoned by his hand-picked successor, Gerald Ford—former Warren Commissioner.

By pardoning Nixon, Ford insured that there would be no investigation.

After Ford became president, Rockefeller was chosen to be the new Vice-President. George Bush would become director of the CIA.

As to E. Howard Hunt, he would spend 33 months in prison. The cover-up was a success.

The Dulles-Bush-Rockefeller gang, had won again.


NOTES

1). John Loftus and Mark Aarons. “The Secret War Against The Jews” St. Martins Press, New York, 1994;

2). Anthony Sutton, “Wall Street and the Rise of Hitler,” Charles Higham, ‘Trading with the Enemy: An Expose of the Nazi-American Money Plot 1933-1949,” Delacorte Press, 1983; Christopher Simpson, “The Splen­did Blond Beast.”

3). The Dulles family believed themselves to be of royal blood, claim­ing they could ” trace its ancestry to Charlemagne” (New York Times 5/25/ 1959 ). The Dulles family had also been intimately involved in American politics since the 1800s, and were not just influential but rich. John Watson Foster, the Dulles brother’s grandfather, became a brigadier general in the Civil War, United States Minister to Mexico and Russia, Secretary of State under President Benjamin Harrison, and amassed a huge fortune. The Dulles brothers first sought access to the White House in 1940, supporting a Re­publican lawyer for the “mob,” Thomas E. Dewey, for President. Dewey lost the nomination to Wendell L. Willkie in 1940 (who in turn lost to Roosevelt). Dewey again sought the Presidency, with Dulles acting as his chief advisor, but lost to Roosevelt in 1944 and then again in 1948, when he lost to Truman. Dewey became governor of New York.

4). Allen Dulles, “From Hitler’s Doorstep: The Wartime Intelligence Reports of Allen Dulles, 1942-1945,” Pennsylvania State Univ Press, 1996; Allen Dulles, “The Secret Surrender.”

5). BBC News, 9/17/2001; UPI9/20/2000; National Archives, 9/17/2001; Charles Higham, “American Swastika: The Shocking Story of Nazi Collaborators in Our Midst from 1933 to the Present Day,” Doubleday, 1985.

6). Burton Hersh, “The Old Boys: The American Elite and the Ori­gins of the CIA,” Tree Farm Books, 2001.

7). Heinz Hohne. The Order of the Death’s Head.” Ballantine, New York. 1967.

8). J. Toland. “Adolf Hitler,” Doubleday, New York, 1976; W. L. S hirer. “The Rise & Fall of the Third Reich.” Fawcett World Library, New York, 1960.

9). Anthony Sutton, “America’s Secret Establishment: An introduc­tion to The Order of Skull & Bones” Liberty House, New York. 1986; Ron Rosenbaum, “The Last Secrets of Skull and Bones,” Esquire Magazine, September, 1977; Peggy Alder-Robohm, “Skull and Bones—Bush’s Boy’s Club,” Covert Action Quarterly No. 33, 1990; John Schrag, “Skeleton in His Closet,” Willamette Week, September 19-25,1991; David W. Dunlap, “Yale Society Resists Peeks Into Its Crypt,” New York Times, 11/4/88.

10). Christopher Simpson, “Blowback.”

11). National Archives, 9/17/2001; UPI9/20/2000.

12). T. H. Tetens, “The New Germany and the Old Nazis.”

13). Audrey R. Kahin, George McT Kahin, “Subversion As Foreign Policy: The Secret Eisenhower and Dulles Debacle in Indonesia;” Univer­sity of Washington Press, 1997; Vitaly, Syrokomsky, “International Terror­ism and the CIA: Documents, Eyewitness Reports, Facts,” Progress Pub­lishers, Moscow, 1983; James A. Bill,” The Eagle and the Lion: The Trag­edy of American-Iranian Relations,”Yale University Press, 1988; R. Harris Smith, “OSS: The Secret History of America’s First Central Intelligence Agency,” University of California Press, 1972; Fletcher Prouty, “The Se­cret Team: The CIA and Its Allies in Control of the U.S. and the World,” Prentice Hall, 1973; Jonathan Kwitney, “The Crimes of Patriots: A True Tale of Dope, Dirty Money & the CIA,” WW Norton, 1987; Rodney Stich, “Defrauding America: A Partem Of Related Scandals — Dirty Secrets Of The CIA And Other Government Operations,” Diablo Western Press, 1993; William Blum, “Killing Hope: US Military and CIA Intervention Since WWII,” Common Courage Press, 1995; Report to the President by the Commission on CIA Activities Within the United States, Washington, DC. 1975.

14). R. Harris Smith, “OSS: The Secret History of America’s First Central Intelligence Agency,” University of California Press, 1972.

15). The Central Intelligence Agency Act, 1949. United States Con­gress.

16). John Stockwell, “The Secret Wars of the CIA.” Speech given on 10/10/1987.

17). Richard Milhous Nixon, “The Memoirs of Richard Nixon,” Ri­chard Nixon Library Editions, 1990.

18). Russell Bowen, “The Immaculate Deception;” Charles Higham, “American Swastika: The Shocking Story of Nazi Collaborators in Our Midst from 1933 to the Present Day,” Doubleday, 1985; T. H. Tetens, “The New Germany and the Old Nazis;” Christopher Simpson, “Blowback;” Rob­ert J. Groden & Harrison Edward Livingstone, “High Treason.”

19). Robert J. Groden & Harrison Edward Livingstone, “High Trea­son.”

20). James Petras & Morris Morley, “The United States and Chile: Imperialism and the Overthrow of the Allende Government,” Monthly Re­view Press, 1975.

21). Regis Debray, “The Chilean Revolution: Conversations with Allende,” Pantheon, 1972; PaulM. Sweezy, “Revolution andCounter-Revo-lution in Chile,” Monthly Review Press, 1974.

22). Tim Weiner, “How the CIA Took Aim at Allende,” New York Times, 9/12/1998; Paul M. Sweezy, “Revolution and Counter-Revolution in Chile,” Monthly Review Press, 1974.

23). Miguel Gonzalez Pino, et al., “Los mil dias de Allende II,” Santiago, Chile: Centro de Estudios Poeblicos, 1997.

24). Gonzalez Pino, “Allende concita atenci—n de la prensa mundial,” LaTarde, 9/7/1970.

25). “CIA plot against Allende: Operating guidance cable,” 10/16/ 1970. “CIA, Operating Guidance Cable on Coup Plotting, October 16,1970.” In this cable, Thomas Karamessines, CIA deputy director, conveys Kissinger’s orders to Henry Hecksher, CIA station chief in Santiago, and includes the following statements: “It is firm and continuing policy that Allende be overthrown by a coup.” The “operating guidance” is to hide the “American hand.” The CIA is instructed to ignore any orders which are not consistent with this guidance cable. “CIA, Memorandum of Conversation of Meeting with Henry Kissinger, Thomas Karamessines, and Alexander Haig, October 15,1970.” This Memorandum includes a discussion of co­vert plans promoting a coup in Chile, and the overthrow of Allende, known as “Track II.” Kissinger orders the CIA to “continue keeping the pressure on every Allende weak spot in sight.”

26). Robinson Rojas Sandford, “The Murder of Allende and the End of the Chilean Way of Socialism,” Harper & Row, 1976; Paul M. Sweezy, “Revolution and Counter-Revolution in Chile,” Monthly Review Press, 1974.

27). Department of State, “Chilean Executions,” Memo, 11/16/1973; Tim Weiner, “How the CIA Took Aim at Allende,” New York Times, 9/12/ 1998; Thomas Hauser, Missing: The Execution of Charles Horman,” Simon & Schuster, 1983; Thomas C. Wright & Rody Onate, eds., Flight from Chile : Voices of Exile,” University of New Mexico Press, 1998; FBI Re­port to Chilean Military on Detainee, 6/6/1975.

28). Department of State, “Kubisch-Huerta Meeting: Request for Specific Replies to Previous Questions on Horman and Teraggi Cases,” 2/ 11/1974; “FBI Report to Chilean Military on Detainee,” 6/6/1975 – This 1975 document, sent by FBI attache Robert Scherrer to Chilean General Ernesto Baeza, records U.S. collaboration with Chile’s security forces. The CIA promises to provide surveillance of Chilean citizens and other sympathizers inside the United States. This document also describes “Op­eration Condor.” Condor was actually a network of secret police agencies in Argentina, Paraguay, Venezuela, Nicaragua, and Chile, who were coor­dinated by the CIA for the purposes of tracking, capturing, torturing, and killing dissidents, including those inside the United States, and including the citizens of other countries. “FBI, Operation Condor Cable,” 9/28/1976 – This cable was written also written Robert Scherrer, the FBI’s attache in Buenos Aires. This cable summarizes intelligence information and details Operation Condor, the joint intelligence operation designed to “eliminate Marxist terrorist activities in the area.” The cable goes on to provide infor­mation about “special teams” which travel “anywhere in the world… to carry out assassination against terrorists or supporters of terrorist organiza­tions.”

29). John Dean, “Blind Ambition: The White House Years,” Simon & Schuster, 1976; Elizabeth Drew, “Washington Journal: The Events of 1973-1974,” Macmillan, 1984; Carl Bernstein & Bob Woodward, “All the President’s Men,” Simon & Schuster, 1974; Theodore H. White, “Breach of Faith: The Fall of Richard Nixon,” Atheneum-Reader’s Digest, 1975.

30). Webster G. Tarpley & Anton Chaitkin, “George Bush: The Un­authorized Biography,” The Executive Intelligence Review.

31). Carl Bernstein & Bob Woodward, “All the President’s Men,” Simon & Schuster, 1974.

32). James A. Bill, “The Eagle and the Lion: The Tragedy of Ameri­can-Iranian Relations.” Yale University Press, 1988.

33). Rockefeller, and his clone, Henry Kissinger, also played a role in the downfall of the Shah, in 1978 and the subsequent Iranian hostage crises which resulted. The Shah was a hated, brutal, dictators, and it was the job of his secret police, SAVAK, to keep the rabble terrorized and under control. But it was precisely because of his despotic rule that the Iranian people increasingly rebelled, and then welcomed the return of Iran’s spiri­tual leader, the Ayatollah Khomeni. As more and more riots broke out, the Rockefeller and the Rockefeller owned, Chase Manhattan bank (which had loaned the Shah incredible sums of money, pressured the CIA which pressured SAVAK to employ increasingly horrific measures which finally trigged the Iranian revolution. The synthesis of this Hegelian dialectic was that Rockefeller and Chase Manhattan Bank came out ahead of the game and with more money that if the Shah had stayed in power. As detailed by James Brill (23), after the revolution, private policy makers such as Kissinger and Rockefeller managed one last scam. Chase Manhattan Bank appealed to the U.S. government and the courts, claiming that the new Iranian govern­ment might withdraw their funds from the bank and repudiate the shah’s loans. Rockefeller/Chase was demanding that it be awarded all Iranian assets, which was far and beyond what was owed. The new Iranian govern­ment pledged to repay those loans. The new Iranian government, however, also demanded the return of property and funds stolen by the Shah, and that the Shah—who was in exile in another country, be returned to Iran. Kissinger and Rockefeller figured they had nothing to lose and everything to gain if they could provoke a crisis. They began lobbying Washington for the ad­mission of the Shah into the U.S. and their wishes were granted. This re­sulted in the Iranian takeover of the U.S. embassy, the hostage crisis, the freezing of Iranian assets, and a declaration of default by Chase which al­lowed Chase to seize Iranian assets to offset the loans. In the end, the Ira­nian-hostage the crisis clearly benefited the American banking commu­nity.”

34). Stephen Shlesinger & Stephen Kinzer, “Bitter Fruit: the Untold Story of the American Coup in Guatemala,” Anchor Press, 1990.

35). Stacy May & Galo Plaza, “The United Fruit Company in Latin America,” Washington, National Planning Association, 1957; Alejandra Batres, “The Experience of the Guatemalan United Fruit Company Work­ers, 1944-1954: Why Did They Fail?” Texas Papers on Latin America, Pa­per No. 95-01, University of Texas at Austin, 1995; Paul Dosal, “Doing Business with the Dictators : a Political History of United Fruit in Guate­mala, 1899-1944,” SR Books, 1993; Thomas, McCann, “An American Company: the Tragedy of United Fruit,” Crown, 1976. CIA operative, E. Howard Hunt, who played a major role in the overthrow of Jacobo Arbenz in Guatemala, later told that “I felt a little bit betrayed when I learned that… the reason [for the overthrow] was because Thomas Corcoran, the famous lobbyist working for the United Fruit Company, had persuaded Eisenhower and some other high dignitaries to do something about it. I thought, ‘Hey, you know, I’m working for the United States of America, I’m not a hireling for United Fruit.’”

36). Jay Mallin, “Fulgencio Batista: Ousted Cuban Dictator,” Story House Corp, 1974; Marifeli Perez-Stable, “The Cuban Revolution: Ori­gins, Course, and Legacy,” Oxford University Press, 1998.

37). Ernesto Che Guevara, “Episodes of the Cuban Revolutionary War 1956-58,” Pathfinder Press, 1996. Julia E. Sweig, “Inside the Cuban Revolution: Fidel Castro and the Urban Underground,” Harvard Univ Press,

38). Syrokomsky, Vitaly, “International Terrorism and the CIA: Docu­ments, Eyewitness Reports, Facts,” Moscow: Progress Publishers, 1983.

39). Peter Kombluh (Editor), “Bay of Pigs Declassified: The Secret CIA Report on the Invasion of Cuba, National Security Archive Documents Reader,” New Press, 1998; James G. Blight & Peter Kornbluh (Editors), “Politics of Illusion: The Bay of Pigs Invasion Reexamined,” Lynne Rienner Publishers, 1998.

40). Marifeli Perez-Stable, “The Cuban Revolution: Origins, Course, and Legacy,” Oxford University Press, 1998.

41). Donald Freed, “Death in Washington,” Westport Press, 1980.

42. The “Stab in the Back” was a term used by Hitler and the Nazis to explain Germany’s surrender in WWI. Hitler blamed communists and the new democratic leadership which had assumed power in Germany.

43). E. Howard Hunt, “Give Us This Day,” New Rochelle: Arlington House, 1973.

44). Graham T. Allison, Philip Zelikow, “Essence of Decision: Ex­plaining the Cuban M issile Crisis;” Michael R. B eschloss, The Crisis Years: Kennedy and Khrushchev, 1960-63,” Edward Burlingame Books, 1991.

45). John Bartlow Martin, “Third Oral History Interview with Robert F. Kennedy,” 4/30/64. John F. Kennedy Library; John M. Newman, “JFK and Vietnam: Deception, Intrigue, And The Struggle For Power.”

46). Arnold, James R. “The First Domino: Eisenhower, the Military and America’s Intervention in Vietnam,” Morrow, 1991.

47). Archimedes Patti, “Why Viet Nam? Prelude to America’s Alba­tross. Berkeley,” University of California Press, 1980; Surveillant, “A chro­nological account — from 1945 to 1962 — of the decisions that led to America’s military commitment in Vietnam.”

48). Anderson, David L. “J. Lawton Collins, John Foster Dulles, and the Eisenhower Administration’s Point of No Return in Vietnam.” Diplo­matic History, 12,127-147,1988.

49). Gibbons, William C. “The U.S. Government and the Vietnam War: Executive and Legislative Roles and Relationships,” Princeton Uni­versity Press, 1986-1989.

50). Morrow, Robert D. “Betrayal,” Henry Regnery Company, 1976; Warren Hinckle & William Turner, “Deadly Secrets: The CIA-Mafia War Against Castro and the Assassination of J.F.K.” Thunder’s Mouth, 1992; Robert Groden & Harrison Livingstone. “High Treason: The Assassination of John F. Kennedy and the New Evidence of Conspiracy,” Berkley Books, 1989.

51|. Mark Lane. “Plausible Denial. “Thunder’s Mouth. 1991: Mark North, “Act of Treason: The Role of J. Edgar Hoover in ihe Assassination of President Kennedy” Carroll & Graf. 1991: C. Robert Blakey & Richard N. Billings. “The Plot to Kill the President.” Times Books. 1981: Robert Sam Anson. “They’ve Killed The President!” Bantam, 1975.

52). “Report of the Warren Commission on the Assassination of President Kennedy.” Bantam. 1964.

53). Madeleine Brown, “Texas In The Morning.”

54). Robert Grogen. “The Killing of a President: The Complete Photographic Record of the JFK Assassination, the Coaspiraey, and the Cover-up. New York: Viking Studio Books. 1994: Robert Grogen. The Search for Lee Harvey Oswald: The Complete Photographic Record.” Penguin Studio. 1995.

55) Several independent experts, including Vincent Salandria. Professor Josiah Thompson and Ray Marcus, have argued that the “third” shot, which struck Kennedy in the head, was actually two nearly simultaneous shots, one coming from the right front (the grassy knoll) and the other from the rear. In large part this argument is based on Vincent Salandria’s “Head Movement Theory” (Esquire. 12/1966) i.e. that the sudden and different movements of Kennedy’s head—which are apparent when a frame by frame analysis of the Zapruder film of the assassination— are due to two almost simultaneous bullets striking his head. Thus the third shot was really a third and fourth shot. This explanation is also consistent with the large number of witnesses who heard seven or eight shots. Aclose analysis of the Zapruder film which captured the entire assassination, shows Kennedy reaching up toward his throat, and then we see an explosion of red mushrooming from the right which is then followed, almost immediately, by the explosion of the back of Kennedy’s head as his skull and portioas of his brain are splashed onto the back of his limousine. We also see his head being thrown back— which is consistent with Newton’s second law of motion—i.e. that an object struck by a projectile will be driven in the same direction as that of the projectile. Likewise, it is clear from the Zapruder film that the bullet struck the right temporal region of his head. It is also evident from autopsy photos that the right temporal injury is rather small, whereas the left parietal injur)’ is massive. It would thus be expected that his left parietal skull and brain would be ejected, as entry wounds are almost always smaller than exit wounds which tends to blow outward. As the book depository was behind Kennedy, it is thus rather apparent that a right frontal entry was not caused by a bullet fired from behind.

56). Orvillc Nix. a UP1 photographer, was standing opposite the grassy knoll taking pictures. An analysis of the Nix film showed what looked to be a car with a man standing on it holding what appeared to be a rifle that to be pointed in the direction of Kennedy’s car. Maurice Schonfeld, Jack Fox, and Burt Reinhardt, all of U.RI. also believe the photograph shows a man pointing a rifle. UPI reporter, Jack Fox subsequently interviewed several witnesses to the assassination. S. M. Holland, who was standing on the overpass, told Fox there were four shots: “…the first came from the book building and hit the President. The second came from the same place and hit Governor John Connally….The third shot came from behind the picket fence to the north of Elm Street. There was a puff of smoke under the trees like someone had thrown out a Chinese firecracker and a report entirely different from the one which was fired from the book building.” Seven other witnesses on the overpass also saw a puff of smoke rising. J. M. Smith, a Dallas policeman, claimed to have “caught the smell of gunpowder” behind the wooden fence. Holland also claimed he ran toward the fence and saw a station wagon with two muddy marks on the bumper “as if someone had stood there to look over the fence.”

57). The “magic bullet,” according to the Warren Commission, entered Kennedy’s back, turned upward and exited his neck, then it struck Connally in the back, turned right and struck Connally in the wrist, and then turned left and entered Connally’s thigh, and then, it fell out on Connally’s stretcher in the Dallas hospital where he had been taken. Others, such as Mark Lane, Vincent Salandria, Ray Marcus, Leo Sauvage, Harold Weisberg, and Professors Richard H. Popkin and Josiah Thompson, propose a more logical explanation for the “magic bullet.” The bullet was fired from Oswald’s rifle before the assassination and then it was left on the Connally’s stretcher, where it was found later that day. Also, three doctors, Finck, Humes, and Shaw testified that bullet fragments were found in Connally’s wrist whereas the bullet found on the stretcher only had a slight dent, as if it had been shot into something soft, like a pillow.

58). Theodore H. White’s The Making of the President, 1964. “On the flight [back to Washington aboard Air Force One] the party learned that there was no conspiracy; learned of the identity of Oswald and his arrest.” Air Force landed in Washington at 4:58 p.m. Dallas time. According to Dallas District Attorney Henry M. Wade he had received a number of tele­phone calls from the FBI, the State Department and White House, that afternoon, and the calls continued into the evening.

59). John McCloy served as a Member of Committee on the Na­tional Security Organization from 1948 to 1949. Because of his extensive business connections with Germany prior to and during the war (serving Rockefeller-Nazi interests), he served, at the urgings of Rockefeller and the Dulles brothers, as US Military Governor and High Commissioner for Ger­many from 1949 until 1952. In 1953 until 1960, he served as Chairman of the Board, Chase National Bank and then, after it merged with another bank, the Chase Manhattan Bank. During the war, IG Farben owned 40% of Chase stock, whereas Rockefeller owned much of the rest.

60. Newsweek 12/1/98. Daily News 12/21/98: “Chase National Bank – the precursor of today’s Chase Manhattan Bank, helped the Nazis to plun­der Jewish property in France during World War II. The New York-based bank controlled by the Rockefeller family closed Jewish accounts even be­fore the Germans ordered them to do so and did business with the Nazis while they were sending Jews to the gas chambers. And while the U.S. was at war with the Nazis, Chase also helped German banks do business with their overseas branches. Chase Manhattan is now the largest bank company in the U.S. with more than $300 billion in assets. Lawyers representing Holocaust survivors” named “Chase Manhattan in their lawsuit” and “an­other big U.S. bank, J.R Morgan. While many other U.S. businesses and banks closed down their Paris operations after France fell to the Germans, Chase National remained open and even thrived. The relationship between Chase and the Nazis apparently was so cozy that Carlos Niedermann, the Chase branch chief in Paris, wrote his supervisor in Manhattan that the bank enjoyed ‘very special esteem’ with top German officials and ‘a rapid expansion of deposits.’ Niedermann’s letter was written in May 1942 – five months after the Japanese bombed Pearl Harbor and the U.S. also went to war with Germany.”

61). Daily News, 12/24/98, “Chase Named In Holocaust-Asset Suit. Two American banks were named in a class-action lawsuit yesterday that accuses them of collaborating with the Nazis to deprive Jewish depositors of their rightful assets. ‘They froze and blocked Jewish accounts during the period of the Nazi occupation in France, depriving Jewish families of the financial means to flee France,’ said attorney Kenneth McCallion, who filed the suit against Chase Manhattan Bank, J.P. Morgan and seven French banks. McCallion charges Chase’s Paris branch – with full backing of its New York office – displayed “excessive zeal” in enforcing anti-Jewish laws and was held in “very special esteem” by Vichy authorities. Court papers also say Chase prospered under German occupation, nearly doubling its depos­its between 1942 and 1944 from 27 million to more than 50 million French francs. Chase officials said in a statement that it has been in settlement talks with the World Jewish Congress for several weeks and that it was disap­pointed that an ‘unnecessary” lawsuit has been filed.”

62. NMT, IG. Farben case, Volumes VII and VIII, pp. 1304-1311; “Elimination of German Resources, p. 1085.”

63). The CIA have a huge network of contract killers that can be called upon from any country, and imported into any country, for the pur­poses of terrorism and murder, including the murder of politicians and presi­dents. For example, as revealed in a cable written FBI attache Robert Scherrer, “FBI, Operation Condor Cable,” 9/28/1976, the CIA maintains a joint intelligence operation involving a network of secret police agencies and “special teams” which travel “anywhere in the world… to carry out assassination against terrorists or supporters of terrorist organizations,” in­cluding individuals or organizations inside the United States.

64). CIA contract agent and electronics expert, Robert D. Morrow, in his book, First Hand Knowledge—How I participated in the CIA-Mafia Murder of President Kennedy, claims that in July of 1963, Tracy Barnes, CIA head of Domestic Operations ordered him to procure “four Mannlicher 7.35 mm surplus rifles. I received a second phone call. It was del Valle calling from, I assumed, Miami. He asked me to supply him with four trans­ceivers which were not detectable by any communications equipment then available on the market. I told him that I could provide him with sub-min­iaturized units whose operation would be confined to a range of fifty or one hundred kilohertz. To operate any sizable distance, the units would require an antenna at least several feet in length. A wire taped to the user’s leg would easily suffice for this purpose. Del Valle then requested that I deliver the transceivers and the rifles to David Ferrie. Del Valle explained to me that the rifles and communications equipment were for his Free Cuba Com­mittee, and that Clay and Ferrie were assisting him in the operation. Then he dropped the bomb. Del Valle exclaimed, “They had better be perfect, compadre. They are for Texas! …Kennedy is going to get it in Dallas!”

65). Jim Oliphant. Legal Times, 6/21/2000

66). Robert Groden & Harrison Livingstone. “High Treason: The Assassination of John F. Kennedy and the New Evidence of Conspiracy,” Berkley Books, 1989; Mark North, “Act of Treason: The Role of J. Edgar Hoover in the Assassination of President Kennedy,” Carroll & Graf, 1991.

67). Edward Jay Epstein, “Legend: The Secret World of Lee Harvey Oswald,” Hutchinson, 1978.

68). Richard H. Immerman, “John Foster Dulles: Piety, Pragmatism, and Power in U.S. Foreign Policy,” Scholarly Resources, 1999; Richard H. Immerman (Editor), “John Foster Dulles and the Diplomacy of the Cold War,” Princeton University Press, 1992.

69). Tom Wicker & Arthur M. Schlesinger, “Dwight D. Eisenhower 1953-1961,”Times Books, 2000; Robert R. Bowie & Richard H. Immerman, “Waging Peace: How Eisenhower Shaped an Enduring Cold War Strat­egy,” Oxford University Press, 2000.

70). Fred J. Cook, “The U-2 Incident, May, 1960: An American Spy Plane Downed over Russia Intensifies the Cold War,” Franklin Watts, 1973.

71). John M. Newman, “Oswald and the CIA,” 1995.

72). Haldeman, “The Ends of Power”,

73). Joseph McBride, ‘”George Bush,’ CIA Operative,” The Nation, July 16,1988.

74). Bob Woodward & Carl Bernstein, “The Final Days,” Avon Books. 75). Victor Marchetti, The Spotlight, Liberty Lobby, 8/14/1978. 76). CNN, “Howard Hunt: CIA Operative, Central America,” 9/1997 & 10/1997.

77). “Operation Zapata.” See page 89, Michael R. Beschloss, The Crisis Years: Kennedy and Khrushchev, 1960-63,” Edward Burlingame Books, 1991.

78). “Houston” and “Barbara” were the names of two of the ships used in the Bay of Pigs. See pages 79-80, Quintin Pino Machado, “La Batalla de Giron,” La Habana: Editorial de Ciencias Sociales, 1983; and see pages 98-99, “Schumacher, Operation Pluto,” and Peter Wyden, “Bay of Pigs, The Untold Story,” Simon and Shuster, 1979.

79). “Date: November 29,1963 To: Director Bureau of Intelligence and Research Department of State From: John Edgar Hoover, Director Subject: ASSASSINATION OF PRESIDENT JOHN F. KENNEDY NO­VEMBER 22, 1963 Our Miami, Florida, Office on November 23, 1963 advised that the Office of Coordinator of Cuban Affairs in Miami advised that the Department of State feels some misguided anti-Castro group might capitalize on the present situation and undertake an unauthorized raid against Cuba, believing that the assassination of President John F. Kennedy might herald a change in US policy, which is not true. Our sources and informants familiar with Cuban matters in the Miami area advise that the general feel­ing in the anti-Castro Cuban community is one of stunned disbelief and, even among those who did not entirely agree with the President’s policy concerning Cuba, the feeling is that the President’s death represents a great loss not only to the US but to all Latin America. These sources know of no plans for unauthorized action against Cuba. An informant who has fur­nished reliable information in the past and who is close to a small pro-Castro group in Miami has advised that those individuals are afraid that the assassination of the President may result in strong repressive measures be­ing taken against them and, although pro-Castro in their feelings, regret the assassination. The substance of the foregoing information was orally fur­nished to Mr. George Bush of the Central Intelligence Agency and Captain William Edwards of the Defense Intelligence Agency on November 23, 1963, by Mr. W.T. Forsyth of this Bureau.”

80). “Report to the President by the Commission on CIA Activities Within the United States,” Washington: US Government Printing Office, 1975, pp. 251-267.

81). Georgie Anne Geyer, “Guerrilla Prince,” Little, Brown, 1991.

Joseph, R.

America Betrayed, R. Joseph — 1st ed. Includes Extensive Footnotes & References ISBN 0971644578 1. Terrorism 2. 9-11 3. Osama bin Laden 4. George Bush 5. Hitler 6. Nazi 7. Saudi Arabia 8. Taliban 9. Iraq University Press .info University PressC alifomia. com San Jose, California

–~~~~~~~~~~~~–

Chapter 5

THE TERRORIST ASSASSINS

-Operation Gladio, Rockefeller, Bush, the Ford-Reagan Assassinations-

front-page

“A coalition of multinational corporate executives, big-city bankers, and hungry power brokers… want to give you George Bush… their purpose is to control the American government.” -Ronald Reagan, 1980.

cheney_rumsdX

The resignation of Richard Nixon set off a scramble for the Vice-Presidency. The place guard that surrounded President Ford were divided, with Kissinger pushing for the appointment of his former boss (1), Nelson Rockefeller. Ford’s chief of staff, Donald Rumsfeld (2) and his aid, Dick Cheney, were instead suggesting Rumsfeld as a possible candidate for the job. Bush, too, was actively seeking the vice-presidency, as was Rockefeller (2,3).

As George H.W. Bush had only won one election in his life, serving as a one term congressman, to name him vice-President did not seem to be a logical choice.

But there were considerations that had nothing to do with the Vice-Presidency, and everything to do with putting a stop to the Senate’s intention to begin hearings into the illegal activities, assassinations, and other crimes committed by the CIA—investigations that had been stimulated by Watergate.

William Colby, the new CIA director, as he was responsible for spilling the beans, would soon be shown the door. A replacement, a cover-up artist, would be needed to fill his leaky shoes.

Bush, as he had been in the CIA since at least 1960 or 1961, seemed the logical choice to become the director of the CIA, for a number of reasons, including those related to his having “turned into assholes and shit himself to death” (3) when it appeared that certain of his past CIA indiscretions might come to light (see chapter 4). For Bush, to become CIA director would almost be like a home coming, like a family and class reunion. Indeed, the agency was already overrun with Bush cousins from the Walker side of the family—Walkers who were also Skull and Bones alumni (4). Indeed, there was so many Yale’s Skull and Bonesmen in the CIA, it was joked that meetings involving top CIA officials could be likened to a Yale class reunion (5).

Bush, having been with the agency since at least 1960 (6), also had personal, political, and business-related reasons to take command and to prevent the Senate’s prying eyes from ever getting a detailed look inside the American version of the Gestapo. But then, so did the Rockefeller clan.

Nelson Rockefeller had been associated with the CIA—the Brotherhood of Death— since the Eisenhower and Nixon administrations, when he served on panels which oversaw the highly secret agency (7). Rockefeller also frequently made speeches in which he referred to “the brotherhood”—which may have been a veiled reference to Yale’s Skull and Bones or Hitler’s SS (the Brotherhood of Death). In fact, he so often repeated the phrase, “the brotherhood of man under the fatherhood of God,” that reporters shortened it to create the acronym BOMFOG.

Rockefeller liked to pretend he was a man of the people. However, once when his aids proposed a plan that would increase worker’s take-home pay, Rockefeller asked (8), “What is take-home

Rockefeller also held a controlling interest in a Standard Oil subsidiary (Creole Petroleum Company) in Venezuela (8)—a country that housed CIA-bases for the training of special assassination teams that could be sent anywhere in the world, even America (9).

More importantly, at least in regard to a choice for vice president, whereas Bush had been a one term congressman, Rockefeller had been elected governor of New York four times.

President Ford faced two difficult choices, and one of his main concerns was covering up CIA malfeasance and its involvement in terrorist plots and political assassinations (10). It was not so much a matter of which man to pick for which job. Rather, Bush and Rockefeller would require Senate confirmation, and both men were distrusted by various Senate factions. Some senators, such as Frank Church, were already grumbling about Bush, accusing him of being a fascist bent on installing a totalitarian government pay.’

Finally, Ford chose Rockefeller to be his vice-president. George Bush got the nod for the CIA post, in November, after the firing of CIA director William Colby because of his failure to contain the Senate and House investigations. Bush was confirmed in December. However, whereas the choice of Rockefeller triggered applause from man)? quarters, especially the media, the choice of Bush provoked outrage (11).

As summed up by nationally syndicated Washington Post columnists: “the Bush nomination is regarded by some intelligence experts as another grave morale deflator [and] would aggravate the CIA’s credibility gap.”

CIA Dart Gun

Senator Frank Church accused Bush of being involved in past coverups, and warned that Bush would abuse his power and engage in future coverups if he got the post (12): “There is no question in my mind but that concealment is the new order of the day.”

Church even accused Bush of being a fascist who hid his evil acts behind the secrecy of government. Church said of Bush (12), “Hiding evil is the trademark of a totalitarian government.”

A totalitarian government, however, is the Hegelian/Hitler ideal—the same ideal worshipped by the Yale Bonesmen—the Brotherhood of Death. As detailed in previous chapters, the Bush family made its fortune doing business with Nazis, and continued supporting the totalitarian Hitler regime even after Hitler declared war on the United States (13).

The CIA, too, was a manifestation of the Hegelian/Hitler ideal. Thousands of murderers who had been Nazi SS Gestapo officers, were recruited into the CIA (14). As detailed by the Church Committee (15) and others (16) terror, torture, mass murder, and the assassination of democratically elected leaders was official CIA policy.

Frank Church intended to lead the Senate investigation into past CIA-abuses. Even before the appointment of Bush and the firing of CIA director, William Colby, he had described the CIA as a rogue operation, “a self-serving bureaucracy which feeds on itself. Those involved are constantly sitting around thinking up schemes for [foreign] intervention which will win them promotions and justify further additions to the staff… It self-generates interventions that otherwise never would be thought of, let alone authorized.”

Given that Bush-Walker family tentacles had spread throughout the CIA, like a cancer, Senator Church and others were convinced that if George W. Bush became the next director of the CIA, it would be bad for country.

“The wrong kind of guy at the wrong place at the worst possible time” —Nationally syndicated columnist, George Will.

Despite these objections, and with the help of powerful business and banking interests, George Bush got the job in December of 1975.

Nelson Rockefeller—after extensive hearings into his wealth, and despite the fact that he had been discovered paying bribes to government officials, including Henry Kissinger (8)—was sworn in as the 41 st vice president of the United States on Dec. 19,1974.

Rockefeller envisioned taking charge of domestic policies. Much to his chagrin, Rockefeller was immediately challenged and blocked at every turn by a formidable clique headed by Ford chief of staff Donald Rumsfeld and his aid, Dick Cheney (17).

Instead, Rockefeller (as well as Kissinger, Rumsfeld, and Cheney) would be used to head off the Senate investigation of the CIA—an investigation triggered by Watergate and a December 1974, article in the New York Times in which Seymour Hersh published an expose of the CIA and its violation of the CIA’s charter.

MKULTRA: PROGRAMMABLE ASSASSINS

Master Hypnotist Derren Brown Tests Plausibility of Claims Sirhan Sirhan was Programmed Assassin

The results are surprising, to say the least.

As later reported by the Church Committee, in addition to murder, assassination, torture, and terrorism, the CIA had been engaging in Nazi-like experiments, often on unwitting human subjects, exposing them to diseases and mind altering drugs, such as LSD. The objectives of CIA projects, such as “BLUEBIRD,” “ARTICHOKE,” and “MKULTRA” included using drugs, hypnosis, and terror, to create alternate “split” personalities. One objective was to create artificial personalities which could be programmed to assassinate specified targets, such as labor leaders or politicians, and which could be used to engage in other high risk assignments that might normally be avoided. Related to this was the goal of defeating interrogation. That is, once the altered, secondary personality carried out its mission, the main personality would return to the forefront of consciousness, but would have no memory of being programmed as those memories would be locked away in the split-off portion of the alternate personality.

It is unknown if the CIA was successful in creating programmed assassins, as CIA director Helms destroyed most (but not all) the records. Nevertheless, some have wondered if Sirhan Sirhan (the assassin of Robert Kennedy), Artur Bremer (the 1972 attempted assassin of presidential candidate George Wallace), Squeaky Fromm and Sarah Jane Moore (the attempted assassins of Ford) and Hinckley (the attempted assassin of Reagan) may have been programmed by “MKULTRA.”

THE CIA-CONTROLLED MEDIA: PROPAGANDA AS TERROR

Following Nixon’s resignation there were other embarrassments as well—not only for the CIA, but for the nation’s media. According to William Colby, former Director of the CIA: “The Central Intelligence Agency owns everyone of any significance in the major media.”

CIA Admits Using News to Manipulate Americans

Indeed, the Church committee verified this revelation, and determined that the CIA had co-opted several hundred journalists, including some of the biggest names in the business. Big name reporters and some of the “Talking Heads” that were featured on network news, were being paid big bucks by the CIA to lie, to distort, and to spread propaganda.

For example, Lesley Gelb, of the New York Times, was accused of having been on the payroll of the CIA. It has been alleged that one of Gelb’s duties was to recruit journalists in Europe, who would write stories that would create public acceptance for the use of the neutron bomb.

Frank Snepp, a CIA field officer, had also revealed how the CIA and British intelligence was “using journalists as field operatives.”

A 1968 memorandum from CIA headquarters to CIA director Richard Helms described how the CIA had coopted a commercial news agency, Forum World Features, which sold weekly packets of news stories to newspapers all over the world. “Forum… has provided the United States with a significant means to counter propaganda, and it has become a respected feature service well on the way to a position of prestige in the journalism world.”

“One journalist is worth twenty agents.” —anonymous CIA agent.

Carl Bernstein, writing in the October 1977 issue of Rolling Stone magazine, reported that more than 400 American journalists worked for the CIA, and that the New York Times was one of the CIA’s closest media collaborators. Yet other CIA assets included Philip Graham, publisher of the Washington Post, as well as Newsweek and Time magazine and CBS news. In December of 1977, the New York Times reported that “more than eight hundred news and public information organizations and individuals,” had been on the CIA’s payroll.

As summed up by Bernstein: “America’s leading publishers allowed themselves and their news services to become handmaidens to the intelligence services.”

Nor has the practice of using the media to lie to the American people gone away. A classified CIA report which was accidentally released in 1992, revealed the CIA “has relationships with reporters from ever}? major wire service, newspaper, news weekly, and television network in the nation.”

Since 1996, the task of the CIA to coopt the mass media has been made much simpler. Less than two dozen corporations now control or own over 90% of the nearly 10,000 newspapers, magazines, and radio and TV stations in America (18).

Should we be surprised, therefore, that whereas the mass media put President Clinton’s minor sex scandal under the microscope for nearly two years, that this same corporate-controlled media has avoided examining CIA, FBI and Bush administration complicity in the 9/11 terrorist attacks?

Controlling the media is a classic Nazi tactic. “Propaganda” Hitler once said, “is the most effective form of terrorism.”

In 1974, there were only the grossest hints as to the CIA’s involvement in assassinations, torture, mind-control experiments, and the manipulation of the media. It was to be the job of Rockefeller, as well as Rumsfeld and Cheney, to cover all tracks and to stop any House or Senate investigation, or at least throw it off the track (19).

OPERATION STAY BEHIND

Despite the efforts of the Ford-Rockefeller White House, the Senate and House each established their own Select Committee on Intelligence Activities, chaired by Frank Church and Otis Pike (respectively). Rockefeller, with the assistance of Kissinger, Rumsfeld, and Dick Cheney, began obstructing Senate and House inquiries, particularly those which in any way concerned the training and employment of CIA assassination teams (10,15,19) or terrorist attack squads, such as Operation Gladio.

The Pike Committee finally issued a contempt of Congress citation against Henry Kissinger for his refusal to provide documentation of covert operations. Kissinger, Rockefeller et al., thumbed their noses at Pike.

The coverup effort was a partial success. For example, there is only a brief mention of “Operation Stay Behind” within the Church reports (Pike’s report being suppressed). Operation Stay Behind was a CIA terrorist operation aimed at the citizens and politicians of European countries and their democratically elected leaders (20).

According to the 1976 Senate report on the CIA by the Church Committee, this program was first conceived by the US Joint Chiefs of Staff was staffed and funded by the CIA, and put into operation in 1948 by the National Security Council.

Essentially, the CIA was using Nazis, Neo-Nazis, SS-offic-ers, and CIA-trained terrorists to indiscriminately murder European men, women and children, and to assassinate or otherwise remove or eliminate communist, socialist, and left-wing politicians.

In Italy, this program was referred to as “Operation Gladio (which means “sword”). In Austria it was named “Schwert” (“sword”). In France it was called “Glaive” (“sword”). It was called “Operation Sheepskin” in Greece. “Sveaborg” in Sweden. In Belgium, Operation Stay Behind had the name: “SDR-8.” Likewise, in Switzerland it was given an alpha-numerical name: “P26.”

Regardless of country, Operation Stay Behind was run by the CIA and British Intelligence under the umbrella of NATO, and involved the use of snipers, police officers, and para-military units to kill people at random and to conduct brutal raids on supermarkets, theaters, and other public places (2128). In one series of attacks, in Brussels in the mid 1980’s, 28 people were murdered while shopping at local supermarkets. Again, the purpose of these attacks was to strengthen the hand of right-wing governments and to prevent left-wing governments or politicians from coming to power.

It was the duty of Bush, Kissinger, Rockefeller, Cheney, and Rumsfeld, to try to cover up these crimes. Indeed Rumsfeld (the Secretary of Defense when the U.S. was attacked on 9/11) had served as U.S. Ambassador to NATO in Brussels, Belgium in 1973 and 1974—when some of the worst atrocities were taking place— and thus had a special personal interest in preventing any damaging disclosures.

OPERATION GLADIO: CIA TERRORIST ATTACKS ON EUROPE

 

Gladio-B“The Americans had gone beyond the infiltration and monitoring of extremist groups to instigating acts of violence.” -General Gianadelio Maletti, Director of Italian Counter-intelligence 1971

Operation Sword (“Gladio/Schwert/Glaive, etc.”) was an outgrowth of Dulles’ “Operation Stay Behind.” Initially, this program served to recruit high ranking Nazis and SS Gestapo agents into the OSS and the CIA after the close of WWII. By 1952, Dulles and his CIA had created a secret guerrilla terrorist army whose primary mission was terrorism and assassination—often of random targets who might be murdered by snipers, as they shopped or walked down the street. Dulles believed that through random acts of terror, left-wing governments could be overthrown, or prevented from ever coming to power if the blame for those terrorist acts could be placed on leftists (20). Right wing governments are always the beneficiaries of terrorism.

Operation Sword was first put into operation in Italy, in 1947. Italian citizens were gunned down by snipers, trains were derailed, and buildings and planes were blown up by CIA-Nazi agents, and then blamed on “communists.” The purpose of this terrorist campaign was to prevent a communist electoral victory in the 1947 Italian elections. This CIA orchestrated terrorist campaign was a success (21).

gladio_cover

These and other acts of random terror (Operation Stay Behind), although directed by the CIA (in conjunction with British Intelligence) were administered under the protective umbrella of the Clandestine Co-ordinating Committee at the Supreme Headquarters Allied Powers Europe “SHAPE” (22). SHAPE would later became the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO).

Although these CIA-terrorist cells were spread all over Europe, the training bases were located in Germany, Italy and France. Likewise, these terrorist operations were directed and funded by CIA agents working in the US Embassies in Rome, Paris, and Berlin. These same CIA agents not only controlled these terrorists cells, but had infiltrated and often directed the Intelligence services of these and other countries (23).

In Italy, project “Stay Behind” was known as Operation Gladio.

As detailed by Charles Richards and Simon Jones (24), the purpose of Operation Gladio was “to engage in clandestine, non-conventional” acts of terrorism. Over 600 “people were recruited and trained by American and British intelligence at the Capo Marrargui base on the northern tip of Sardinia. They were organized in 40 independent cells. Six were responsible for intelligence-gathering, 10 for sabotage, 6 for codes and radio communications, 6 for running escape routes and 12 for guerrilla warfare. Five of the guerrilla units were named after flowers such as azalea, rhododendron and broom. Gladio established 139 arms caches [which] were used by right-wing terrorists.”

Ed Vulliamy, of the Guardian (25) uncovered “a briefing minute of June 1,1959” which revealed that Gladio was built around “internal subversion.” It was to play “a determining role” in national politics, by employing “non-orthodox” warfare at the “national level” in “close cooperation between the Italian and American secret services.”

The purpose of Operation Gladio, in Italy, was to preserve the legitimate authority of the right wing government put in place by the US, and to combat any threats against its integrity, such as, the election of socialist or communist leaders. According to the briefing minute (25) Gladio should be ready “to adopt, with timely readiness, preemptive action to assure the state’s prestige, capacity for action and for government”.

In other words, the purpose of Operation Gladio was to use terror and murder not to combat any external threat, but to combat internal threats by using terrorism. However, the targets of these terrorist acts would not be opposition politicians per se, but rather, the citizens of the state. Through terrorism directed at citizens, and if that terrorism could be blamed on political parties or groups striving, through democratic means, to gain elective office, then the population would turn against those groups and vote instead to maintain the status quo; i.e. a government that would act according to the best interests of Britain, the United States and Wall Street.

Immediately prior to and after the 1963 Italian elections which gave the premiership to Christian Democrat Aldo Moro and 25% of the vote to the Communists, CIA-trained terrorists, which included a number of Nazis, began a campaign of terror which included indiscriminate bombings and murder. The purpose was to blame the “communists” so as to justify the overthrow of Moro and the installation of a right-wing military dictatorship.

Dossiers were compiled on over 150,000 Italians, mostly teachers, students, union leaders, priests, and left-wing politicians, all of whom were marked for arrest, imprisonment, and possible torture and death (26).

The bombing and indiscriminate killings continued and even according to CIA handlers, soon became out of control (27). Nevertheless, CIA “decided not to close [Gladio] down because it fostered useful contacts with the Italian security establishment.”

Gladio also served as a useful weapon to keep the Italian electorate under control. Citizens would be shot and killed by snipers, they and their families might be blown up while strolling down the street. No one was safe. Even police were targeted (28).

Vincent Vinciguerra (a neo-Nazi who took part in a 1972 bomb attack that killed three police officers) confessed at trial “that every bombing in Italy after 1969 was linked to one group. “The orders are given by an apparatus belonging to the state, specifically by a secret parallel structure of the Interior Ministry” (29).

And who controlled that “secret parallel structure?” In the 1960s and 1970s, the Nixon White House, the CIA under William Colby and George W Bush, as well as Henry Kissinger and Alexander Haig—a presidential wanna-be (30).

“In an interview the exNATO operative [Vinciguerra] said that Ted Shackley, the CIA’s deputy station chief in Rome, fixed a meeting between Alexander Haig and Gelli [a Nazi terrorist] at the US embassy in Rome in the early 1970s, when Haig was President Nixon’s Chief of Staff. “Money” he said was then filtered to Stay Behind or Gladio with the blessing and knowledge of both Haig and the then head of the US National Security Council, Henry Kissinger”

After Nixon’s resignation, Alexander Haig became NATO Supreme Commander, from 1974 to 1979. And who is “Gelli?”

Licio Gelli was a Nazi who belonged to a secret society, known as “P2” and the “Brotherhood of Death.”

In Italy, the secret Brotherhood “P2” served as “a right-wing shadow government, ready to take over Italy. Among its members: four Cabinet Ministers, all three intelligence chiefs, 48 MPs, 160 military officers, bankers, industrialists, top diplomats and the Army Chief of Staff. After meetings between Gelli, Italian military brass and CIA men in the embassy, Gladio was given renewed blessing -and more money – by Haig and the then head of the National Security Council, Henry Kissinger” (31). Again, the purpose of Gladio was to engage in random as well as targeted acts of terror against civilians.

In 1976, while George Bush served as director of the CIA, Kissinger as Secretary of State, and Haig as commander of NATO, the “Brotherhood” was given orders to kidnap and kill Italian premier, Christian Democrat Aldo Moro, and overthrow his democratically elected government.

After several failed attempts “terrorists” finally kidnapped Aldo Moro in 1978 and held him in a Milan apartment “safe house.” While held captive, Moro was questioned as to exactly how much he and his government knew about the involvement of NATO and the CIA in his abduction and Italy’s secret “parallel” arm)?. Indeed, before he was killed, Moro was forced to provide detailed notes—which later were discovered (and then suppressed) when the safe house was raided by police (32). By then, Italian premier Aldo Moro was already dead.

Although the kidnapping and murder were blamed on terrorists known as the “Red Brigade” it was later discovered that this terrorist organization had been infiltrated and was acting as yet another CIA front (33).

As to Operation Gladio, when the existence of this organization came to light, and when it was then blamed for the numerous murders, terrorists acts and massacres that had been committed against Italian citizens, the new Italian Prime Minister, Guilio Andreotti, was forced to give a speech in the Italian parliament, during which he explained that Gladio “must not drift from its formal NATO military brief (34).

As to the Secret Brotherhood, P2, the existence of this secret society did not come to light until 1981. However, it was not until 1990, that evidence began to surface directly linking P2, not only to the CIA (35), but to George W. Bush (36).

As detailed on Italian television, and by Richard Bassett, of the Times (36), Mark Hosenball, of the Sunday Times (37) and Paddy Agnew of the Irish Times (28): “in the 1976 general election, the huge success of the Communist Part}?…encouraged some to believe that Italy might be close to voting in its first ever Communist government. In order to forestall this possibility, the CIA allegedly sponsored a series of right wing terrorist attacks, via Mr. Gelli’s P2…Bush, then director of the CIA, not only knew about these CIA activities in Italy (during the late 1970s and early 1980s) but was in fact one of the masterminds behind them.”

–~~~~~~~~~~~~–

THE “ASSASSINATION” OF PRESIDENT FORD

Ford_rushed_from_Sacramento_assassination_attempt

It should be rather obvious that an organization which commits random acts of murder and terror against the citizens and leaders of democratic nations, and which orchestrates the murders of democratically elected leaders, such as Chile’s Allende or Italy’s Moro, would also engage in similar acts against the citizens of the United States.

We should not be surprised that if people like George Bush, Dick Cheney, and Rumsfeld et al, were part of previous administrations which indulged in these terrorist crimes, that they, or in the case of Bush, he or his son, would also be in power when terrorist atrocities are committed against the United States.

“Mr. George Bush of the CIA” (6) had been a CIA agent since at least 1960. In all likelihood, he never ceased to be a member of this Nazi-like terrorist organization, even while serving as a congressman or chairman of the Republican Party?.

In the 1960s and 1970s, George Bush, and the CIA, were dedicated to serving their own financial, personal, and political interests as well as those of the Wall Street elite. Of course, the)? did so in the name of “national security.” Ostensibly, their goal the reason the)? authorized the murder of innocent men, women, and children, was to fight communism.

In 1975, Bush and Rockefeller were also in pursuit of another shared goal. Both men wanted to be president of the United States. Rockefeller had in fact been seeking the Presidency since 1960, running in 1960,1964, and 1968.

Ever “since I was a little boy… I had wanted to be President,” Rockefeller said (38). “After all, when you think of what I had, what else was there to aspire to?” The vice-presidency, he believed, was beneath him: “I Never Wanted to be Vice-President of Anything!”

In 1975, with Nixon gone, and Ford now president, George Bush saw the as yet vacant vice-presidency as an obvious stepping stone to the presidency. He desperately wanted to be vice-president. With the help of his allies, he had campaigned unceasingly to be chosen for the V.P. slot instead of Rockefeller. Bush was convinced, once he became vice-president, the Presidency would be but a heart-beat away (39).

And then, Ford chose Rockefeller who also wanted to be President.

Hence, in 1974 and 1975, two related questions and goals dominated the respective minking of the Rockefeller – Bush camps: How to obtain the Presidency – Vice-Presidency of the United States.

The answer was in California.

Lynette Fromme

On September 5,1975, after meeting with an Army Corps of Engineer’s general, Lynette “Squeaky” Fromme, wearing an unusual, attention-grabbing red outfit, pulled a 45-caliber pistol from beneath her coat and stuck it into the belly of President Gerald Ford as he was reaching out to shake her hand (40).

She had been standing behind a rope, along with others in a cheering crowd, waiting as President Ford walked along the roped-off sidewalk of Capitol Park, shaking hands with well wishers. Although Ford had noticed her well before the fateful moment, due to her bright red garb, secret service agents did not, for reasons that have never been explained.

Lynette “Squeaky” Fromme, had long been known to the FBI and Secret Service. She had been an outspoken member of the Manson murder family (40,41), and lived close to Sacramento, where Charlie Manson was imprisoned—the city that Ford was visiting that afternoon. The FBI knew of Fromme, not just because of the Manson-connection, but as she had repeatedly called attention to herself by appealing to and threatening corporate CEO’s, several judges, as well as the commanding general of the Army Corps of Engineers, demanding that they do something to clean up the environment (40).

Lynette “Squeaky” Fromme, had also been to the White House—but not as an activist or a Manson family member, but as a child. Lynette had been one of the star performers in the Westchester Lariats, a children’s dance group that performed at the White House

Why did she want to kill Ford?

As explained by Lynette in a “History Channel” interview: “The very evening that I returned from San Francisco after speaking with the general, I saw President Ford on TV, getting off the plane in Sacramento. His visit was to address about 2000 area businessmen about enhancing their economic opportunities. Basically he was beginning his 1976 campaign.”

After her visit with “the general” Lynette decided she would kill President Ford.

“I simply stepped through the crowd to the President and raised the gun to his midsection between his heart and stomach at about two feet distance.”

Although Ford had noticed her even before she pulled the gun, the Secret Service still did not react.

Then she pulled the trigger, and yelled, “Do you believe it? It didn’t go off.”

And then the Secret Service reacted. Lynette “Squeaky” Fromme was knocked to the ground and they confiscated her weapon (40).

“Nelson Rockefeller came within a 32nd of an inch of becoming president of the United States,” said Donald Heller, an assistant U.S. attorney who prosecuted Fromme.

And if Rockefeller became President, who would he have chosen to be Vice-President? The leading candidate would have been George Bush.

And of course, we were told, “there was no conspiracy}?.” And, maybe there wasn’t. And, likewise, we were told, “there was no conspiracy}?,” when, 17 days later, an FBI and police informant pulled out her gun, and pointed it at President Gerald Ford.

On September 22, 1975, Sarah Jane Moore aimed, and then fired.

071231-sara-jane-moore-hmed-3p.grid-6x2

Again, the Secret Service did not react.

Sarah Jane Moore was well known to the FBI. She had been recruited by them. Married five times, mother of four children, a mentally disturbed nursing school drop out, Sarah Jane Moore finally joined the Women’s Army Corps, where she may have first been recruited by the FBI.

At age 42, Sara “dropped out” of society and immerse herself in the radical counter-culture lifestyle. Sara was a spy. She went “underground” at the behest of the FBI, to gain information on the terrorist organization, the “Symbionese Liberation Army” which had kidnapped Patty Hearst (42,43).

Sarah Jane Moore was still working for the FBI when she pointed and fired her standard police-issued .38 Smith and Wesson at President Gerald Ford as he left the St. Francis Hotel in San Francisco.

But then the unexpected happened. As Secret Service agents stood and watched, a bystander, Oliver Sipple, grabbed Moore’s arm when he saw the gun, causing the bullet to miss Ford by just a few feet. Instead it ricocheted off a wall and wounded a cab driver.

Sipple, an ex-Marine, wrestled her to the ground, and shoved his hand into the firing mechanism, which prevented her from getting off a second shot (44).

Why did she do it?

Sarah Jane Moore explained: “It would have elevated Nelson Rockefeller to the Presidency, and then people would see who the actual leaders of the country are.”

Two months later, in November, 1975, Vice-President Nelson Rockefeller announced that he was removing himself from consideration as a possible running mate for President Ford in 1976.

As scientists, we do not believe in “coincidence.” “Coincidence” is not a scientific explanation.

As to why Secret Service agents twice failed to react, on two separate occasions, and basically stood by and watched as “Squeaky” Fromme, and then, 17 days later, Sarah Jane Moore, tried to kill Ford, we can only speculate.

As to “Squeaky” Fromme and Sarah Jane Moore, perhaps they were just “crazy” and mentally disturbed. And yet, what are we to make of the fact that Sarah Jane Moore worked with the FBI? Or that “Squeaky” Fromme had just left the office of the “general” when she decided to kill Ford?

Although we can only speculate, it is noteworthy that in addition to having had repeated contact with government officials, that both women were mentally disturbed. This again, may simply mean that they were just crazy, and it was just a coincidence that the Secret Service ignored both women and stood by and watched. On the other hand, as part of the CIA’s operation “MKULTRA” it was discovered that those who are mentally disturbed are also the best candidates for hypnosis and the trauma-induced splitting of the personality. That is, subjects who are “mentally ill” are the most susceptible to psychological manipulation (mind control) and to becoming a programmed assassin.

In this regard, Squeak}? Fromm and Sarah Jane Moore have a lot in common with Sirhan Sirhan (the assassin of Robert Kennedy), Artur Bremer (the attempted assassin of presidential candidate governor George Wallace who had a good chance of beating Nixon in 1972), and Hinckley (the attempted assassin of Reagan) as all were mentally ill, and as all would have been ideal candidates to be programmed by “MKULTRA.”

As to the assassination of foreign leaders, however, “MKULTRA” would not be necessary as the CIA has an entire army of willing murderers.

TERROR AND THE ASSASSINATION OF ORLANDO LETELIER

Letelier1975

Much to his astonishment, George Bush was not chosen to be Ford’s running mate for the coming 1976 presidential elections. That honor went to Senator Bob Dole—thus earning him a black mark in the Bush book of enemies.

Instead, “George W. Bush of the CIA” became director of the organization that he had belonged to since at least 1960. As director of the CIA, Bush now had complete power over the American version of Hitler’s Gestapo. And Bush had a lot of enemies who he wished to punish: including the Italian people and Italian premier, Christian Democrat Aldo Moro; the Jamaican people and the Prime Minister of Jamaica (45), the people of Angola (46), the British Labor party (47), and the list goes on.

Under the guidance of director Bush, the CIA, sought to destabilize, undermine or overthrow a number of democratically elected leaders, including Mr. Michael Manley, the prime minister of Jamaica (45), the Harold Wilson government in Britain (45), and, as detailed above, the government of Italian premier, Christian Democrat Aldo Moro, whose abduction and murder, it has been claimed, was masterminded by George Bush (28).

Bush, of course, was carrying on a CIA tradition, including the use of terrorist attacks on Western democratic countries. Terrorism was justified as it was a means of stopping communists.

George Bush was also eager to put a stop to those “communists” who were daring to speak out, in the United States. Bush was especially annoyed about those communists who were making speeches and appearing before congress in order to denounced the U.S.-backed dictatorship and terrorist-government of Chile.

As detailed in chapter 4, the CIA and Nixon White House (Nixon, Helms, Kissinger, and other criminals) orchestrated the murder of Mr. Allende, the new president of Chile. Following his overthrow and the installation of a right-wing Nazi-like military dictatorship, the people of Chile were subjected to an unrelenting campaign of terror, torture, and mass murder—courtesy of the U.S. back military government.

However, much to the annoyance of Bush et al., Allende’s minister of defense, Orlando Letelier, had not only escaped the carnage, and had come to the United States, but he was making speeches and was going to appear before Congress to denounce the atrocities being committed against his people. Mr. Letelier would have to die.

The CIA is a criminal, terrorist organization, which employs murder, torture, and terrorism to achieve its goals (10,14,15,16). When a “threatening” voice speaks out in Europe, the CIA can call upon CIA-backed European-based terrorists cells to do its bidding (2037).

As detailed in chapter 4, the CIA also oversees, directs, and coordinates a network of Chilean, Argentinean and Paraguayan CIA-trained secret police agencies which provide “special teams” that travel “anywhere in the world… to carry out assassinations,” including the assassination of political opponents in the United States (9,48).

In 1976, while Bush served as director of the CIA, one of these “special teams” was dispatched to the United States for the explicit purpose of committing terrorists acts which would include the murder of a U.S. citizen, Ms. Ronnie Moffitt of the Washington Institute for Policy Studies.

Presumably, Ronnie Moffitt, was collateral damage.

As detailed in chapter 4, the Nixon White House and the CIA had orchestrated the assassination of Chile’s democratically elected president, Salvardor Allende, and had installed a brutal, ruthless dictatorship in his place. Two years later, thousands of students, teachers, doctors, nurses, and peasants were still being rounded up and tortured by the US-backed government of General Augusto Pinochet. However, one high ranking member of Allende’s government had got away, defense minister, Orlando Letelier.

Orlando Letelier was in the United States and speaking out about the horrors and atrocities committed by the U.S. backed police state. Letelier had been meeting with newspaper editors and congressional leaders and was starting to draw attention to U.S. policy in Chile. Now, Letelier was scheduled to testify about the involvement of various U.S. agencies’ in the political environment in Chile before and during the Allende government. (49).

Orlando Letelier had to be stopped. Orlando Letelier had to be killed.

86910696-orlando-letelier

He would be murdered, on September 21, 1976, along with Ronnie Moffitt, in a car bombing on the streets of Washington DC, with the connivance and under the watchful eye of the Bush CIA, and FBI. Letelier and Moffitt were murdered, by a CIA agent, who used a car bomb to kill them in the heart of Washington’s Embassy Row (49).

The agent in question, Michael Vernon Townley, worked for David Atlee Philips who was director of the CIA’s western hemisphere operations in Chile. However, Townley, was also working for DINA, the Chilean secret police (50,51). DINA and the CIA had played a direct role in the overthrow and murder of the democratically elected president of Chile, Salvador Allende (52,53).

In the days before this terrorist act and these two murders took place in the streets of our nation’s capital, “the US Ambassador to Chile, George Landau, sent a cable to the State Department with the singular request that two agents of the DINA be allowed to enter the United States with Paraguayan passports (50,51). The cable also indicated that the two DINA agents also wanted to meet with Gen. Vernon Walters, the outgoing Deputy Director of the CIA. The cable was read by Walters, and was also passed into the hands of CIA Director George Bush. Bush not only had this cable in his hands; Bush and Walters discussed it (49,51).

Later on, in 1980, Bush denied that he had ever seen this cable; he had been out of the loop, he claimed (51).

car-bomb-12708575191

However, during Senate confirmation hearings on December 15,1975, when asked by Senator Gary Hart about “assassinations and coups d’etat in various countries around the world,” Bush replied, “You mean in the covert field? Yes. I would want to have full benefit of all the intelligence. I would want to have full benefit of how these matters were taking place.”

Nevertheless, in this instance, Bush claimed to be “out of the loop,” that he did not have benefit of knowing about these matters. “Out of the loop” was to become a George H.W. Bush mantra— especially in regard to knowledge of doing business, cooperating with, or allowing terrorists into the United States.

In a story that is basically identical to what occurred in the months, weeks, and days before the tragedy of 9/11, the two DINA men were on the FBI’s “watch list” and were to be picked up if they tried to enter the US. Nevertheless, the two DINA terrorists entered the US without difficulty on August 22, and then journeyed to Washington while under the watchful eye of at least one U.S. government intelligence agency (49).

Likewise, 9/11/2001 hijackers, Khalid Al-Midhar and Nawaf al-Hazmi had been closely monitored by the CIA since at least January 2000 (54). The CIA and FBI knew the men were linked to al-Qaeda and had met with Osama bin Laden. The CIA and FBI also knew that they had entered the United States soon after attending an al-Qaeda conference in Malaysia, in January 2000. And yet, for the next 18 months, both agencies permitted these two terrorists to move about freely and to hold meetings with at least six of the other 9/11 hijackers, including Mohammed Atta and Hani Hanjour.

The CIA also had contact with the terrorists who would assassinate Orlando Letelier and Ms. Ronnie Moffitt.

According to US-Chilean Ambassador George Landau, after the two DINA terrorists arrived in Washington they “alerted the CIA by having a Chilean embassy employee call General Walters” at CIA headquarters (49).

Soon thereafter, the DINA agents assassinated their targets by blowing up their car on a Washington street near embassy row.

Following the assassination, the FBI, CIA, and George Bush began orchestrating a massive coverup. Indeed, when Assistant US Attorney Eugene M. Propper, the prosecutor in the Letelier-Moffitt murders, asked CIA director Bush for CIA cooperation, Bush replied (49,51): “Look. I’m appalled by the bombing. Obviously we can’t allow people to come right here into the capital and kill foreign diplomats and American citizens like this. It would be a hideous precedent. So, as Director, I want to help you. As an American citizen, I want to help. But, as director, I also know that the Agency can’t help in a lot of situations like this. We’ve got some problems.”

What kind of problems?

The problem of keeping secret the fact that the CIA employs terrorist squads in South America and Europe. The problem of keeping it secret that these terrorist squads are under CIA control. The problem of keeping it secret that the CIA coordinates and directs terrorist cells in Europe and South America and that the CIA, through its surrogates, carries out terrorist acts, including kidnappings, torture, murder, and car bombings which can then be blamed on “leftists” or “terrorists” when in fact they are being conducted by the CIA.

As detailed earlier in this chapter, the CIA employs terrorists even in Western, democratic countries, in order to terrorize and destabilize governments not to their liking, and to murder government leaders who they are unable to overthrow (20,23,33,36,50).

Who ordered the assassination of Orlando Letelier?

One guess.

George Bush not only refused to help in any investigation because “we’ve got some problems” but he and the CIA actively disrupted and sabotaged Assistant US Attorney Eugene M. Propper’s investigation into the assassination.

Twenty five years later, another Bush, upon becoming president, would use his administration and the FBI, to sabotage and hinder investigations into the so called intelligence failures that led to 9/11, and would prevent lower level FBI agents from conducting investigations that might have uncovered the 9/11 plot.

CREATING MIDDLE EASTERN TERRORISTS

By January, 1977, and with the election of President Carter, Bush was out of a job. He had lasted two years.

Bush became a board member of the Purolator Oil Company and the Eli Lilly & Co., a major pharmaceutical company. But one of his main areas of activity was in banking, becoming chairman of the executive committee of First International Bank in Houston, and director of First International Bankshares Ltd. and First International Bankshares Inc. of London (39,55), a merchant bank whose investors included his good friends the Emir of Kuwait, the Sultan of Brunei, King Fahd of Saudi Arabia, and the bin Laden family.

Bush was also holding meetings with CIA officials, at CIA headquarters—meetings which the new CIA director, Stansfield Turner, claims he knew nothing about (55). Some of these meetings were likely related to Bush’s business dealings with the King Fahd famify, the bin Laden family, the Emir of Kuwait, and the Sultan of Brunei.

Since the 1950s, the CIA had been working on a plan to extend its grip into the Middle East, and to create terrorist cells, similar to Operation Condor in South America, and Operation Gladio in Europe (9,20,23,33,36,48). In the 1970s, part of the plan called for additional Middle Eastern terrorist cells to be created, controlled and directed by the CIA, in conjunction with the Saudi, Pakistani, Iranian, and Iraqi Intelligence services.

Some of these terrorist cells were to be dispatched into the oil-rich southern states of the Soviet Union whose populations were predominantly Muslim. These terrorist cells would be employed to spread terror among civilians and to assassinate government officials (56). The purpose of these attacks, would be to destabilize the Soviet Union, and to eventually gain access to these oil-rich states which would then be exploited.

Other terrorist cells were directed to attack Middle Eastern and European targets. As was the case with Operation Gladio and Operation Condor, these terrorist acts would be directed at civilians and were to be blamed on leftists, communists, and the Soviet Union. Thus, although the CIA was conducting these terrorist operations, the Soviets would be blamed for “fostering, supporting, and expanding” terrorist activity worldwide” (57,58)—when as often as not, the terrorists were under CIA control.

Bush was an oil-man. In 1978, the long range objective in the Middle East and along Russia’s southern border, was to stir up an Islamic revolution and thus strip the oil-rich states away from the Soviet sphere of influence (56). “Holy warriors” (“mujahideen”) financed, trained, and armed by the CIA would be the vanguard, and one of its leaders would be a young charismatic Saudi multimillionaire, Osama bin Laden—a member of the bin laden family, with whom the Bush family had been doing business (59). In 1979, Osama bin Laden, who was representing his family company in Istanbul, began working with the CIA to recruit “Arab-Muslim volunteers for Afghan’s resistance against the Red Army” (60).

THE ”ASSASSINATION” OF RONALD REAGAN

In 1978 and 1979, the main focus of Bush’s activities was the next presidential election. What Bush wanted most was to become President of the United States. He had wanted to be President since his days at Yale, but so far, he had lost every election but one (39,61). Although the public was willing to elect him, once, to the position of congressman, Bush was repeatedly rejected in his bid for higher office, including a Senate seat in his adopted home state of Texas. Knowing that the public and many conservative Republicans did not like him and viewed him with mistrust, Bush had instead sought the presidency by being appointed to the vice presidency—a position he sought in 1968, 1972, 1973, 1974, and

No matter how hard he tried, Bush just could not get the job.

His former position as CIA director, however, provided Bush with new contacts, new influence, and lots of money as well as the “dirt” to quiet at least some of the opposition and to make a direct run for the Presidency, which he sought in 1980.

George H.W. Bush was rejected yet again. The people and the Republican party refused him the Republican nomination for President. Bush was rejected not just because Ronald Reagan was the superior man and the superior candidate, but also because of the persistent questions about slush funds, illegal activities, cover-ups, and his role in the “Trilateral Commission” (39)

On February 7, 1980 Reagan gave a speech in which he pointed out that Bush was a member of the Trilateral Commission, which, according to Reagan, “had led to a softening on defense.” George Bush, Reagan pointed out, believed that making money by doing business with the enemies of America was more important than defending America. Bush, he implied believed that business and commerce “should transcend, perhaps, the national defense.”

Bush would betray America, Reagan implied, because money was more important to Bush than principles, honesty, or our national security.

The Reagan camp also began running political ads, one of which showed a drawing of Bush juxtaposed above a headline which read in part: “A coalition of multinational corporate executives, big-city bankers, and hungry power brokers… want to give you George Bush… their purpose is to control the American government.”

“He wants to be king” added Republican Senator, Bob Dole. Bush resigned from the Trilateral Commission (39,61) but it was too late.

Reagan got the nomination, and Bush, with the help of his Wall Street, CIA, Skull and Bones network, began working full tilt on Reagan’s entourage to convince them that having Bush on the ticket would help elect Reagan. Reagan, however, did not like and did not trust George Bush. In the days just before the Republican convention, Reagan is quoted as saying: “I want to be very frank with you. I have strong reservations about George Bush. I’m concerned about turning the country over to him.”

Image_003

Reagan didn’t just distrust him, he thought Bush was an effeminate “wimp.”

Finally, at the very last minute, despite Reagan’s distrust and scorn, Bush became his running mate.

In November of 1980, Reagan won the Presidency in a landslide. Bush was sworn in as vice-president of the United States on January 20.

Bush still wanted to be President. Bush had wanted the Presidency since childhood. Bush believed it was his birthright (39). Bush, with his long history and expertise in the use of covert operations to undermine governments and overthrow democratically elected leaders, intended to become President. Indeed, many on the Bush team, thought Reagan was unworthy of and too old and stupid to do the job (39) —an idea which was nurtured by the “liberal press” (62).

Bush believed that he should be president, and not Reagan.

Two months after Reagan took office, there was an incredible lapse of security, and the son of a Bush supporter shot and nearly killed Ronald Reagan.

Yes, that right, John Hinckley, the man who shot Reagan, was the son of a Bush supporter and the brother of a Bush family friend

“BUSH’S SON WAS TO DINE WITH SUSPECT’S BROTHER!” screamed the March 31, headline of the Houston Post: “Scott Hinckley, the brother of John Hinckley Jr., who is charged with shooting President Reagan and three others, was to have been a dinner guest Tuesday night at the home of Neil Bush, son of Vice President George Bush, The Houston Post has learned.”(63).

“Bizarre happenstance, a weird coincidence” said, Bush spokeswoman Shirley M. Green.

“Coincidence” is not, however, a scientific explanation.

Another “coincidence.” In the days before the assassination attempt, plans had been made for Vice-President Bush to assume the presidency on March 31,1981, should Reagan die or be killed.

Reagan was shot at close range on March 30, 1981.

As recalled by Bush ally, James Baker—one of the “Texans” mentioned by Nixon when discussing the Bay of Pigs-Kennedy Assassination—: “there had been a FEMA [Federal Emergency Management Administration] exercise scheduled for the next day on presidential succession.”

Bush spokeswoman Shirley M. Green, called it another “weird coincidence.”

“Coincidence” is not, however, a scientific explanation.

Immediately after Reagan was shot, and given the absolutely incredible lapse of security which surrounded the assassination attempt, some cabinet members began to suspect a conspiracy. General Alexander Haigh insisted that “no matter what the truth is about this shooting, the American people must know it.” If a conspiracy were discovered, Haigh promised, it will be exposed (64).

Haigh didn’t know it yet, but he had now become the enemy of George H.W. Bush. Within a year, Haigh who had publicly worried about a conspiracy, was gone, driven from the White House by George Bush and friends.

It did not take a year, however, to rule out a conspiracy. Five hours after Reagan had been shot, George Bush categorically ruled out a conspiracy: The shooting was a completely isolated incident and the work of a lone gunmen. “There was no conspiracy,” Bush proclaimed.

And what about the fact that the shooter was the son of a supporter and the brother of a family friend?

“Bizarre happenstance, a weird coincidence,” repeated Bush spokeswoman Shirley M. Green.

And then the cover-up began.

On March 31, in addition to the Houston Post, the Associated Press reported that (63) “the family of the man charged with trying to assassinate President Reagan is acquainted with the family of Vice President George Bush and had made large contributions to his political campaign. Scott Hinckley, brother of John W. Hinckley Jr. who allegedly shot at Reagan, was to have dined tonight in Denver at the home of Neil Bush, one of the Vice President’s sons.”

Not true—proclaimed Bush spokesman Peter Teeley.

Neil Bush, however, was not yet with the program. He admitted that he knew the Hinckley family. He also told reporters that the Hinckley family had made large financial contributions to the Bush 1980 presidential campaign. Likewise, Neil’s wife, Sharon Bush recalled that the Hinckley family “have given a lot of money to the Bush campaign” (63).

Not true—proclaimed Bush spokesman Peter Teeley.

Neil Bush, however, had worked on his father’s campaign for the presidency, his primary duties being the raising of campaign contributions. So it is unlikely he would have been mistaken.

He’s mistaken, claimed the Bush team.

When asked why Bush’s son would claim otherwise, Teeley replied, “I don’t have the vaguest idea. We’ve gone through our files and we have absolutely no information that he [Hinckley] or anybody in the family were contributors, supporters, anything.”

John Hinckley’s father, Scott Hinckley, vice president of the Denver-based firm, Vanderbilt Energy Corp., became unavailable to reporters. He refused comment.

What about the friendship between Neil and Hinckley?

No comment.

Neil lived in Lubbock, Texas, throughout much of 1978, where John Hinckley lived from 1974 through 1976 and where he again resided from 1977 through 1980, after returning from Hollywood

“A coincidence” said, Bush spokeswoman Shirley M. Green. Neil had invited Hinckley’s brother over for dinner just before the shooting.

No comment.

Another “bizarre coincidence:” John Hinckley should have been on the Secret Service “Watch List.” Like Sara Jane Moore and Squeak}? Fromm, Hinckley was already known to the FBI prior to the attempted assassination. (65).

Six month earlier, Hinckley had been arrested by airport authorities in Nashville, when three guns were found in his possession. Both Reagan and then President Carter had been campaigning in Nashville at about the same time, Reagan two days before Hinckley’s arrest, and Carter on the same day (65).

The FBI was informed of his arrest, and they may have learned about his mental problems and suicidal tendencies (65). Yet, although he was known to be dangerous and a threat to the president, on the day of the attempted assassination Hinckley was allowed to stand right next to Secret Service agents, for over 30 minutes, as they waited for Reagan to emerge from a hotel where he had given a speech. But, in a scenario similar to the events leading up to 9/11, the FBI, it is claimed, failed to inform the Secret Service that Hinckley was dangerous.

The FBI, like Bush, also assured the public that “there was no conspiracy and Hinckley acted alone.”

In September of 1980, Hinckley left Texas to attend a writing course at Yale—the home of Skull and Bones. Hinckley never enrolled. What exactly he did there, is unknown, except for the fact that he tried several times to make contact with one of Yale’s undergraduates: the actress Jodie Foster (65).

Prior to his visit to Yale, Hinckley, we are told, developed an obsession with Ms. Foster, after viewing the movie Taxi Driver. Taxi Driver is the tale of a psychotic taxi driver, Alex Bickle (played by Robert DeNiro). Bickle had decided to assassinate a politician that he knew to be linked to the love of his life. At the last moment, Bickle changes his mind, and instead rescues a young prostitute, Iris (played by Jodie Foster), from her violent pimp.

After spending several weeks at Yale, Hinckley decided to assassinate, we are told, either President Carter or Bush running-mate, Ronald Reagan. However, after he apparently stalked both candidates, he returned to Yale where he met with unknown parties and again sought to make contact with Ms. Foster (65). On October 6, Hinckley flew to Lincoln, Nebraska where he was to meet with “one of the leading ideologicians” of the American Nazi Party. We are told that this meeting never took place.

NO CONSPIRACY

From Lincoln Hinckley flew to Nashville only to be arrested at the Nashville airport for carrying handguns. Handcuffs were also found in his luggage. Hinckley paid a fine, was released, and then flew back to Yale, where he again met with unknown parties. From Yale it was then to Dallas, where he purchased more handguns.

On the afternoon of March 29, he picked up a copy of the Washington Star and noticed that Reagan would be speaking to a labor convention at the Washington Hilton.

At 1:45 PM, Hinckley was waiting outside the hotel and drew attention to himself by approaching Reagan and waving (65). Reagan waved back. His Secret Service agents did nothing. At 2:25, Hinckley was still waiting as Reagan, accompanied by secret service agents, left the hotel. As Reagan was walking towards his waiting limousine a voice shouted, “President Reagan, President Reagan!”

Hinckley—crouching like a marksman in full view of secret service agents who stood to his left and to his right —fired his gun six times, hitting press secretary James Brady, Thomas Delahanty a police officer, then a building, then secret service agent Timothy McCarthy, and then the bullet-proof glass of the President’s limousine, and finally Reagan’s limousine. The bullet ricocheted off the car, then hit the President in the chest. It was only after he emptied his gun that secret service agents reacted and wrestled Hinckley to the ground.

Hinckley, however, had been lurking outside the hotel, near Reagan’s waiting limousine, for over 30 minutes!

According to our sources at Saint Elizabeth’s Psychiatric Hospital, Hinckley was immediately taken to the FBI academy, located on a Marine base in Quantico, Virginia. At Quantico, the FBI provides diverse training in a variety of areas, including interrogation, psychological operations, psychological profiling, and the study of serial killers, murderers and assassins. The Drug Enforcement Administration also has their training academy at Quantico, Virginia.

Hinckley was drugged and given major tranquilizers almost immediately after he was arrested. While in this drugged condition, Hinckley underwent a variety of unknown procedures while he tried to explain that others had been involved in the assassination attempt. Although professing his love for Ms. Foster, Hinckley claimed he was acting out a script, and had been helped and assisted by the CIA who had given him drugs and put the idea in his head. The FBI, showed little interest in his story which they dismissed.

When the FBI was presented with detailed notes Hinckley had written about a “conspiracy “to assassinate the President, the FBI brushed them aside, calling his claims and his notes an “imaginary conspiracy.”

And yet, although all claims of a “conspiracy” were “imaginary” the FBI has refused to release almost 100 pages of documents concerning Hinckley’s associates, any organizations he may have belonged to, or his personal finances.

What could not be swept away or under the rug was the fact that members of the Bush family knew members of the Hinckley family (63).

To get around this “coincidence” the Bush team began describing John Hinckley Jr. as a “black sheep…. a renegade brother in the family.” The Hinckley family “must feel awful.”

Almost the same exact language would be used by George H. W. Bush and his son, George W. Bush, 20 years later, after 9/11, when the Bush family friendship and business relationship with the family of Osama bin Laden was reported.

Osama bin Laden, the Bush team explained, was a black sheep, an outcast, a renegade brother who had been disowned by the bin Laden family. The bin Laden family must “feel awful.”

Three days after 9/11, although he had grounded all private and commercial planes, President George W. Bush made personal arrangements for 11 members of the bin Laden family to escape the United States and to fly back to Saudi Arabia, where they would be beyond the reach of reporters and the FBI (66).

Bush wished to spare them the embarrassment and pain of being questioned, we are told, because, we are assured, they must feel awful.

NOTES

1). Before serving in the Nixon administration, Henry Kissinger had originally served as Rockefeller’s foreign policy adviser. Nixon’s “tough” stands in Vietnam and Cambodia had been shaped by Kissinger in consultation with Rockefeller, which is why Rockefeller openly voiced admiration for Nixon’s policies in south east Asia.

2). Robert T. Hartmann, “Palace Politics: An Inside Account of the Ford Years,” 1980; Joseph E. Persico, “The Imperial Rockefeller: A Biography of Nelson A. Rockefeller,” 1982; Paul C. Light, “The Institutional Vice Presidency,” Presidential Studies Quarterly, 13,1983; Paul C. Light, “Vice-Presidential Power: Advice and influence in the White House,” 1984; Michael Kramer & Sam Roberts, “I Never Wanted to be Vice-President of Anything!” An Investigative Biography of Nelson Rockefeller,” 1976.

3). Bob Woodward & Carl Bernstein, “The Final Days,” Avon, 1976.

4). Walker, Charles Rumford (1916); Walker, George Nesmith (1919); Walker, Horace Flecher (1889); Walker, Jeffrey Pond (1944), Walker, John Mercer (1931), Walker, John S. (1942); Walker, Joseph Burbeen (1844); Walker, Louis (1936); Walker, Ray Carter (1955); Walker, Samuel Johnson (1888); Walker, Stoughton (1928); Walker HI, George Herbert (1953); Walker, Jr. George Hebert (1927); Walker, Jr., Samuel Sloan, (1948), Walker, Francis Amasa (1948).

5). Yale, Professor of History, Gaddis Smith, has said, “Yale has influenced the Central Intelligence Agency more than any other university, giving the CIA the atmosphere of a class reunion.”

6). Joseph McBride, ‘”George Bush,’ CIA Operative,” The Nation, July 16,1988.

7). Joseph E. Persico, “The Imperial Rockefeller: A Biography of Nelson A. Rockefeller,” 1982; Michael Kramer & Sam Roberts, “I Never Wanted to be Vice-President of Anything!” An Investigative Biography of Nelson Rockefeller,” 1976; Peter Collier and David Horowitz, “The Rockefellers: An American Dynasty, 1976.

8). Joseph E. Persico, “The Imperial Rockefeller: A Biography of Nelson A. Rockefeller,” 1982.

9). “FBI Report to Chilean Military on Detainee,” 6/6/1975 – This 1975 document, sent by FBI attache Robert Scherrer to Chilean General Ernesto Baeza, records U.S. collaboration with Chile’s security forces. The CIA promises to provide surveillance of Chilean citizens and other sympathizers inside the United States. This document also describes “Operation Condor.” Condor was actually a network of secret police agencies in Argentina, Paraguay, Venezuela, Nicaragua, and Chile, who were coordinated by the CIA for the purposes of tracking, capturing, torturing, and killing dissidents, including those inside the United States, and including the citizens of other countries.

10). Thomas Powers, “The Department of Dirty Tricks,” Atlantic Monthly, August, 1979; On February, 28, 1975, Daniel Schorr reported on the CBS Evening News that “President Ford has reportedly warned associates that if current investigations go too far, they could uncover several assassinations of foreign officials in which the CIA was involved.”

11). Time magazine in applauding the choice of Rockefeller, referred to him as a “dynamic personality.” Newsweek offered congratulations for adding a “dollop of high style” to Ford’s “homespun Presidency.” he New York Times referred to the choice of Rockefellers as a “masterly political act.” When Ford was asked what he considered the top achievements of his first hundred days in office, Ford replied: “Number one, nominating Nelson Rockefeller.” In November of 1975, newspapers and columnists from around the United States blasted the choice of Bush for CIA director: “The Bush Appointment… .should not be regarded as a political parking spot” (The Washington Post), “George Bush, Bad Choice for CIA Job” (Fort Lauderdale News); “The wrong kind of guy at the wrong place at the worst possible time” (George Will); “the Bush nomination is regarded by some intelligence experts as another grave morale deflator. They reason that any identified politician, no matter how resolved to be politically pure, would aggravate the CIA’s credibility gap. Instead of an identified politician like Bush…what is needed, they feel, is a respected non-politician, perhaps from business or the academic world” (Roland Evans and Robert Novak). Likewise, politicians were urging that Bush not be appointed, due to fear that he would use the CIA for political purposes (see Ford Library, John O. Marsh Files, Box 1. Letter from Collins to Ford, November 12,1975.

12). Loch K. Johnson, “A Season of Inquiry: The Senate Intelligence Investigation,” University Press of Kentucky, 1985, pp. 108-109.

13). John Loftus and Mark Aarons. ‘The Secret War Against The Jews” St. Martins Press, New York, 1994; Anthony Sutton, “Wall Street and the Rise of Hitler,” Charles Higham, “Trading with the Enemy: An Expose of the Nazi-American Money Plot 1933-1949,” Delacorte Press, 1983; Christopher Simpson, ‘The Splendid Blond Beast.”

14). BBC News, 9/17/2001; UPI9/20/2000; National Archives, 9/17/ 2001; Charles Higham, “American Swastika: The Shocking Story of Nazi Collaborators in Our M idst from 1933 to the Present Day,” Doubleday, 1985; Burton Hersh, “The Old Boys: The American Elite and the Origins of the CIA,” Tree Farm Books, 2001;Christopher Simpson, “Blowback;” T. H. Tetens, “The New Germany and the Old Nazis;” Thomas Powers, “The Department of Dirty Tricks,” Atlantic Monthly, August, 1979.

15). The Senate Select Committee on intelligence agencies, Frank Church, Chair; 10/31/1975- letter is sent to Senator Church by President Gerald Ford demanding that the Church Committee’s report on US (CIA) assassination plots against foreign leaders be kept secret. Church issues a press statement in response to Ford’s letter: “I am astonished that President Ford wants to suppress the committee’s report on assassination and keep it concealed from the American people.”

16). Audrey R. Kahin, George McT Kahin, “Subversion As Foreign Policy: The Secret Eisenhower and Dulles Debacle in Indonesia;” University of Washington Press, 1997; Vitaly, Syrokomsky, “International Terrorism and the CIA: Documents, Eyewitness Reports, Facts,” Progress Publishers, Moscow, 1983; James A. Bill,” The Eagle and the Lion: The Tragedy of American-Iranian Relations,” Yale University Press, 1988; R. Harris Smith, “OSS: The Secret History of America’s First Central Intelligence Agency,” University of California Press, 1972; Fletcher Prouty, “The Secret Team: The CIA and Its Allies in Control of the U.S. and the World,” Prentice Hall, 1973; Jonathan Kwitney, “The Crimes of Patriots: ATrueTale of Dope, Dirty Money & the CIA,” WW Norton, 1987; Rodney Stich, “Defrauding America: A Pattern Of Related Scandals — Dirty Secrets Of The CIA And Other Government Operations,” Diablo Western Press, 1993; William Blum, “Killing Hope: US Military and CIA Intervention Since WWII,” Common Courage Press, 1995; Report to the President by the Commission on CIA Activities Within the United States, Washington, DC. 1975.

17). Robert T. Hartmann, “Palace Politics: An Inside Account of the FordYears,” 1980.

18). Ben Bagdikian, ‘The Media Monopoly.” 2000; see also: http:// www.corporations.org/media/

19). The House and the Senate set up separate investigating committees. The House committee was chaired by conservative Congressman Otis Pike, who despite CIA and Ford administration objections, subpoenaed documents, held public hearings, resisted compromises, and tried, often without success to pry into activities that the CIA and FBI preferred to keep secret. In fact, the Pike Committees final report was suppressed by the Congress itself. The Senate committee, chaired by Senator Frank Church tried to get around these roadblocks and reached agreements with the CIA that allowed intelligence officials to even sensor large portions of the committees final report and to delete much of the information related to secret CIA intelligence networks involving the intelligence agencies of other western-democratic nations. See also, U.S. Presidents Commission on CIA Activities Within the United States: Files, [1947-1974] 1975.

20). William Scobie, Observer, 11/18/90; Wolfgang Achtner, Sunday Independent, 11/11/1990; Searchlight, 11/1991; Associated Press, 11/13/90; John Palmer, Guardian, 10/11/90; Anarchy/Refract, 1984; Richard Norton Taylor, Guardian, 11/15/90; Time Out, 4/7/70; Charles Richards & Simon Jones, Independent, 11/16/90; dVulliamy, Guardian, 12/5/90; Edward Lucas, Independent, 11/16/1990.

21). Sunday Independent, 11/11/1990.

22). Searchlight, January 1991.

23). Wolfgang Achtner, Sunday Independent, 11/11/1990; Observer,11/18/90; Associated Press, 11/13/90; Searchlight, 11/1991. William Scobie of the Observer (11/18/90) reports that “Former defense minister Paulo Taviani [told Magistrate Casson during his 1990 investigation] that during his time in office (1955-1958), the Italian secret services were bossed and financed by the boys in Via Veneto,” —the CIA agents in the US Embassy in of Rome.

24). Independent, 11/16/1990.

25). Guardian, 12/5/90,12/10/1990.

26). Anarchy/Refract, 1984; Wofgang Achtner, Sunday Independent, 11/11/1990.

27). Edward Lucas, Independent, 11/16/1990.

28). Paddy Agnew, Irish Times, 11/15/1990.

29). Wolfgang Achtner, Sunday Independent,l 1/11/1990.

30). Anarchy/Refract, 1984.

31). William Scobie, Observer, 11/18/1990.

32). Paddy Agnew, IrishTimes, 11/15/1990; Charles Richards & Simon Jones, Independent, 11/16/1990.

33). Operation Gladio had engaged in a reign of terrorist bombings across the country that left at least thousands injured and dead. The bombings were blamed on the extreme left as part of a strategy to mold public opinion to the idea of an alternative government taking power by force. The Gladio personnel created a parallel government called P2 (Propaganda Duo), a neo-Nazi secret society composed of most of the country’s top industrialists, bankers, and diplomats. P2 had close connections with the CIA and carried out drug smuggling missions and assassinations for them. PT not only infiltrated the Red Brigades but took over the organization, and carried out the murder of Aldo Moro in 1978. Colonel Oswald Le Winter of the CIA, who served as U.S. liaison officer with Gladio, has stated that the planning staff of the Red Brigades was made up of CIA intelligence agents. Gladio carried out the 1980 bomb attack on Bologna Railway station in which 85 people were killed and hundreds injured. Subsequent investigation led to the exposure of much of the conspiracy and in consequence, the CIA arranged for P2’s Grandmaster, fascist Lucio Gelli to escape to Argentina.

34). Ed Vulliamy, Guardian, 1/16/1991.

35). Richard Bassett, Times, 7/24/1990.

36) “A former CIA agent, Dick Brenneke, told Italian television the CIA sent him to Czechoslovakia to buy arms and explosives for terrorists. ‘Weapons, revolvers, bombs, explosives like Semtex were bought in Czechoslovakia. In the late 1960s and early 1970s, I was dealing with Czechoslovakia,’ he said. The CIA has denied his claim that it had backed terrorism in Italy through the illegal P2 Masonic lodge” (Independent, 2/8/90). “Four programmes on state television (RAI) allege that the CIA paid Lucio Gelli to “foment terrorist activities. “In the first programme someone described simply as “Agent Zero” described how [ex-Swedish Prime Minister Olaf] Palme had been caught in a deal between the CIA and Iran to release American hostages in Tehran. ‘Palme was a fly in the ointment so we got P2 to rub him out,” the agent said. The second programme, which showed the gaunt silhouette of ‘Agent Zero One’, alleged that P2 was not wound up in the mid-1980s, after the arrest of its leader Licio Gelli. “It still exists. It calls itself P7,” he said. According to the agent, the lodge is still functioning with branches in Austria, Switzerland and East Germany. ‘Zero One’ has now been revealed by the Italian press to be Dick Brenneke, allegedly a career CIA officer” (Richard Bassett, Times, 24/7/90). “In the programme, Mr. Brenneke alleged that, throughout the 1970’s the CIA had made large sums of money available to the subversive Masonic Lodge, P2, widely believed to have been involved in the August, 1980 Bologna train station bombing in which 85 people were killed. Furthermore Mr. Brenneke claimed that, not only does the CIA continue to secretly finance a revived P2, but that it was involved in the 1986 killing of the Swedish Prime Minister, Mr. Olaf Palme. According to Mr. Brenneke, P2, under the guidance of its Grand master, Mr. Licio Gelli, used some of the finance made available by the CIA to set up agencies in West Germany, Austria and Switzerland. These agencies in turn were used by P2 to set up the assassination of Mr. Palme, on the orders of the CIA. Finally, and perhaps most sensationally, Mr. Brenneke alleged that President Bush, then director of the CIA, not only knew about these CIA activities in Italy (during the late 1970s and early 1980s) but was in fact one of the masterminds behind them. In the 1976 general election, the huge success of the Communist Party…encouraged some to believe that Italy might be close to voting in its first ever Communist government. In order to forestall this possibility, the CIA allegedly sponsored a series of right wing terrorist attacks, via Mr. Gelli’s P2…The CIA denied the charges and said Mr. Branneke had never worked for the agency” (Paddy Agnew, Irish Times, 7/24/90). “In a four part special on RAI, the main Italian state-run television network, Brenneke claimed he had been making payments to members of P2, a right-wing Masonic lodge, on behalf of the CIA from 1969 to 1980. He saidhehad made payments which ranged from $lm to $10m a month and were part of the struggle against communism. He said P2 was also involved in arms and drugs trafficking for the CIA…The programme sparked a political storm in Italy…However a note of caution….Earlier this year he was put on trial in Oregon for allegedly lying under oath about his claims that Bush traveled to Paris in 1980 to make a deal with the Iranians over the American hostages. Brenneke was acquitted on all charges”(Mark Hosenball, Sunday Times, 7/ 29/90).

37). Mark Hosenball, Sunday Times, 7/29/90.

38). Michael Kramer & Sam Roberts, “I Never Wanted to be Vice-President of Anything!” An Investigative Biography of Nelson Rockefeller,” 1976.

39). Webster G. Tarpley & Anton Chaitkin, “George Bush: The Unauthorized Biography,” The Executive Intelligence Review.

40). Jess Bravin, “Squeaky : The Life and Times of Lynette Alice Fromme,” St. Martins Press, 1997; The Editors of Time-Life Books, True Crime: Assassination,” Time-Life Books, 1994.

41). Using “mind control” and drags, Charlie Manson ordered his followers to commit a series of gruesome murders, including a mass murder on the 9th of August 1969. At least nine people were murdered, among them Sharon Tate, the young, beautiful, pregnant, actress and wife of Roman Polanski, Abigail Folger, the coffee heiress and her boyfriend Voytek Frykowski, and an internationally known hair stylist Jay Sebring. Vincent Bugliosi, Curt Gentry,” Helter Skelter: The True Story of the Manson Murders,” WW. Norton & Company, 1974; Ed Sanders, “The Family,”Thunder’s Mouth Press, 2002.

42). The Editors of Time-Life Books, True Crime: Assassination,” Time-Life Books, 1994.

43). Patricia Campbell Hearst, Alvin Moscow, “Patty Hearst: Her Own Story,” Avon, 1988.

44). Oliver Sipple was not considered a “hero” by the White House. Sipple was “outed” as “gay” by Harvey Milk, “The Mayor of Castro Street.” Sipple had always avoided publicity and he had hid the fact that he was gay and certainly had never told his conservative Baptist mother. However, Harvey Milk wanted the world to know that Sipple was “gay… That guy saved the President’s life. It shows that we do good things, not just all that ca-ca about molesting children and hanging out in bathrooms.” Harvey Milk passed the exciting gossip to Herb Caen’ who splashed it in his gossip column. A despairing Sipple told reporters: “I want you to know that my mother told me today she can’t walk out of her front door because of the press stories.” He insisted: “My sexual orientation has nothing to do with saving the President’s life.” The White House, and President Ford, however, were embarrassed by his Sipple’s homosexuality and never invited him to the White House or made any formal acknowledgment thanking him for his help—other than a brief note of thanks which was written by a White House aid. Sipple felt that his life had been destroyed by Harvey Milk, and drifted into alcoholism and drag addiction. A few months later, he was dead.

45). Terror, murder, and economic sanctions were the method of choice for the island nation of “Jamaica ” as Bush and the Wall Street elite saw it as in their best interests to prevent the re-election of Prime Minister Michael Manley whose socialist ideas they found threatening.

46). Just as Nixon had been ordered his Nazis to make the Chile’s economy “scream” in Chile prior to the overthrow of Allende, now Angola was the target. The collapse of the Portuguese regime, and the subsequent likelihood of her African colonies gaining independence and control over their own destiny, was an anathema to the Wall Street elite. This led to a decision to fund a civil war in Angola, and to install a Wall Street-friendly military dictatorship rather than allow elections which might lead to “leftist” regimes gaining power. However, in December, 1975 the Clark Amendment was passed by the Senate, which explicitly cut off US funding and banning CIA operations for the military actions in Angola which had erupted in civil war with the end of Portuguese colonial rule. Nevertheless, even after the Clark Amendment became law on February 9,1976, Bush defied the law and directed the CIA to continue providing planeloads of weapons and to make large cash payoffs to pro-westem terrorist factions who were murdering, torturing, starving, and terrorizing the men, women, and children of Angola. However, as this had to be done covertly and secretly, the CIA and Republican leadership controlling the U.S. government sought to use two “surrogates” Britain and South Africa, to provide soldiers to fight Wall Street’s war by proxy.

47). Harold Wilson, Prime Minister of Britain, refused to play Bush’s game in Angola. Nor did he wish to have anything to do with the racist regime governing South Africa. Nor would he allow the British government to assist Bush with his Angola project, which was to train and then unleash terrorists attacks on innocent men, women, and children. Wilson’s British Labour government not only had sympathy for the leftists in Angola but the people of Chile who were being brutalized by the CIA-backed military dictatorship of General Pinochet.

Thus, the Bush-Kissinger clique, and the other remnants of the Nixon administration, decided that the Wilson government would have to be overthrown.

In conjunction with right-wing ideologues in the British Intelligence service, M15, a viscous rumor campaign was unleashed in the British press against Wilson who was accused of harboring communists in his cabinet. Cabinet Minister Judith Hart, for example, was accused in 1974, of being part of a “Communist cell.” British newspapers repeated rumors spread by the CIA and MI5 officers that there were so many communist ministers in Wilson’s cabinet, that they could not be trusted to see intelligence information because they might pass it to the communists.

The second factor that increased Wall Street alarm was the rise in trade union militancy and the swing to the left in the Labour party. Worker’s rights, and demands for better wages and working conditions are the natural enemy of the Wall Street elite.

Trade unionists, cabinet Ministers, left-wing political activists, and even Harold Wilson himself, became the objects of illegal telephone taps, letter intercepts, office and home break-ins, and various forms of physical intimidation. By the end of the 1970s, 2 million British citizens had security files held on them by MI5 and the CIA, and when dirty was found, threats and blackmail followed.

The aim was to destabilize Wilson and the Labour government by making them appear to be untrustworthy, a security risk, and pro communist. Indeed, it was even being said that Wilson was a secret KGB agent. The Bush team were instead hoping to replace Wilson with a right wing Wall Street friendly administration under the leadership of Mrs. Thatcher who could be counted on, once she came to power, to not only support CIA adventures in Africa, but in Europe. Wilson finally resigned, because he was “sickened by the numerous personal snipe attacks” against him. In 1979 the Conservative party of Mrs. Thatcher came to power. Seem David Leigh, “The Wilson Plot.”

48). “FBI Report to Chilean Military on Detainee,” 6/6/1975 – by FBI attache Robert Scherrer. “FBI, Operation Condor Cable,” 9/28/1976 – by Robert Scherrer.

49). John Dinges,” Assassination on Embassy Row,” McGraw-Hill, 1981; Luis Rivano, “La CIA matao a Letelier: otra hipaotesis,” Ediciones de la Libreraia de Luis Rivano, 1980; Donald Freed, “Death in Washington: the murder of Orlando Letelier,” Lawrence Hill, 1981; Mark Zapezauer, ‘The CIAs Greatest Hits.”

50). “FBI, Directorate of National Intelligence DINA, January 21, 1982.” This report is based in part, on prison letters written by Michael Townley, the DINA agent responsible for the assassination of Orlando Letelier. This report is also based on correspondence between Townley and his DINA handler, and includes code names and activities of DINA personnel, and collaboration between DINA and anti-Castro Cubans. This “Directorate” also reveals a direct link between “Operation Gladio” in Italy and the Chilean secret police, including meetings attended by President Pinochet and Italian terrorists and spies. As is the case with Operation Gladio, this “Directorate” also reveals the creation of a fake left-wing terrorist organization which is to be blamed for DINA kidnappings and terrorist attacks in Argentina and Chile. It also reveals DINA involvement in the current disturbances disrupting the “peace process” between Great Britain and Northern Ireland. See also, Jaime Castillo Velasco “El asesinato de Letelier” 1987 -text of the claim presented by the lawyers representing the Letelier family in the case of the homicide of former Foreign Minister Orlando Letelier del Solar Revista Hoy.

51). Scott Armstrong & Jeff Nason, “Company Man,” Mother Jones, October, 1988.

52). “CIA, Operating Guidance Cable on Coup Plotting, October 16, 1970.” In this cable, Thomas Karamessines, CIA deputy director, conveys Kissinger’s orders to Henry Hecksher, CIA station chief in Santiago, and includes the following statements: “It is firm and continuing policy that Allende be overthrown by a coup.” The “operating guidance” is to hide the “American hand.” The CIA is instructed to ignore any orders which are not consistent with this guidance cable. “CIA, Memorandum of Conversation of Meeting with Henry Kissinger, Thomas Karamessines, and Alexander Haig, October 15, 1970.” This Memorandum includes a discussion of covert plans promoting a coup in Chile, and the overthrow of Allende, known as “Track II.” Kissinger orders the CIA to “continue keeping the pressure on every Allende weak spot in sight.”

53). Tim Weiner, “How the CIA Took Aim at Allende,” New York Times, 9/12/1998; Paul M. Sweezy, “Revolution and Counter-Revolution in Chile,” Monthly Review Press, 1974; Miguel Gonzalez Pino, et al., “Los mil dias de Allende II„” Santiago, Chile: Centro de Esttidios Pceblicos, 1997; Gonzalez Pino, “Allende concita atenci—n de la prensa mundial,” La Tarde, 9/7/1970.

54.) Joint House and Senate Intelligence Committees, United States Congress, June-September 2002.

55). Bob Woodward and Walter Pincus, “At CIA, a Rebuilder ‘Goes With the How,’” Washington Post, 8/10/1988; Bob Woodward & Walter Pincus, “Doing Well With Help From Family, Friends,” Washington Post, 8/ 11/1988.

56). LeNouvel Observateur, 11/15-21/1998; Bill Blum, “Killing Hope;” Peter Schweizer, “Victory-The Reagan Administration’s Secret Strategy that Hastened the Collapse of the Soviet Union.” The CIA officially launched this long ranged plot in 1979, during the waning days of the Carter administration.

57). On January 28,1981, Alexander Haig, the new Secretary of State, announced at a news conference that Russia was trying to “foster, support, and expand” terrorist activity worldwide through the “training, funding, and equipping” of terrorist armies. “International terrorism will take the place of human rights” as the major focus of the Reagan Administration.

58). Edward S. Herman & Gerry O’Sullivan “The Terrorism Industry,” Pantheon.

59).Wall Street Journal, “Vetting the Frontrunners: From Oil to Baseball to the Governor’s Mansion,” 9/28/1999; Jonathan Beary & S.C. Gwynne, “The Outlaw Bank: A Wild Ride Into the Secret Heart of BCCI,” Random House, 1993; James H. Hatfield, “Fortunate Son,” St. Martins Press; Arthur Frederick Ide, et al., “Bush in business with bin Laden. Jihad, Mujahideen, Taliban, Osama bin Laden, George W. Bush & Oil: A Study in the Evolution of Terrorism & Islam,” Liberal Press, 2002.

60). Le Figaro 10/31/2001.

61). Fitzhugh Green, “George Bush: An Intimate Portrait,” Hippocrene Books.

62). The cartoon series, “Doonsbury” regularly made fun of Reagan’s intellect as did a number of publications and reporters. For the opposite perspective, see Peggy Noonan, “When Character Was King: A Story of Ronald Reagan,” Viking Press, 2001.

63). Houston Post, 3/31/1981; Associated Press, 3/31/1981.

64). C. David Mortensen, “Violence and Communication: Public Relations to an Attempted Presidential Assassination,” University Press of America, 1988; Herbert L. Abrams, “The President Has Been Shot’: Confusion, Disability, and the 25th Amendment,” Stanford University Press, 1994.

65). Lincoln Caplan, ‘The Insanity Defense and the Trial of John W. Hinckley,” Dell, 1987; James W. Clarke, “On Being Mad or Merely Angry: John W. Hinckley, Jr., and Other Dangerous People,” Princeton University Press, 1990.

66). Bryon York, “The bin Ladens’ Great Escape. How the U.S. helped Osama’s family leave the country after 9/11,” National Review, 9/ 11/2002; London Telegraph, “My brother Osama,” 12/16/2001. The plane was chartered by the Saudi government, and the excuse for the great escape from the U.S. to Jeddah, Saudi Arabia, was that bin Laden family members were afraid they might suffer retribution. With the help of the FBI, a chartered aircraft picked up family members in Los Angeles, Florida, Boston, and Washington, D.C.

–~~~~~~~~~~~~–

Chapter 6

Wahhabism, Nicaragua, Iran Iraq War, Iran Contra, and the Sadat Assassination

 

“The U.S.A. has supplied arms, security equipment and train ing to governments and armed groups that have committed torture, political killings and other human rights abuses in countries around the world.” Amnesty International, October 1998

The CIA is like a living organism, that has its own brain. The CIA has the ability to function independently of those who have been elected to sadate92c“power,” or those who have been appointed to tem porarily head the agency.

CIA directors, like Presidents, come and go. What remains in place, is the mission, the networks, and the operatives who make things happen, even as President, like CIA directors, come and go.

And often the “mission” has nothing to do with national se curity, but instead serves the long range financial interests of bank ers, arms merchants, drug dealers, oilmen, and the Wall Street elite (1). The mission, more often than not, is corporate terrorism and the enslavement and mass murder of those who resist.

“War is just a racket. A racket is best described, I believe, as something that is not what it seems to the majority of people. Only a small inside group knows what it is about. It is conducted for the benefit of the very few at the expense of the masses.”

“I believe in adequate defense at the coastline and nothing else. If a nation comes over here to fight, then we’ll fight. The trouble with America is that when the dollar only earns 6 percent over here, then it gets restless and goes overseas to get 100 percent. Then the flag follows the dollar and the soldiers follow the flag.”

“I wouldn’t go to war again as I have done to protect some lousy investment of the bankers. There are only two things we should fight for.”

“One is the defense of our homes and the other is the Bill of Rights. War for any other reason is simply a racket.”

“There isn’t a trick in the racketeering bag that the military gang is blind to. It has its “finger men” to point out enemies, its “muscle men” to destroy enemies, its “brain men” to plan war prepa rations, and a “Big Boss” SuperNationalisticCapitalism.”

“It may seem odd for me, a military man to adopt such a comparison. Truthfulness compels me to. I spent thirty three years and four months in active military service as a member of this country’s most agile military force, the Marine Corps. I served in all commissioned ranks from Second Lieutenant to MajorGen eral. And during that period, I spent most of my time being a high class muscle man for Big Business, for Wall Street and for the Bankers. In short, I was a racketeer, a gangster for capitalism.”

“I suspected I was just part of a racket at the time. Now I am sure of it. Like all the members of the military profession, I never had a thought of my own until I left the service. My mental faculties remained in suspended animation while I obeyed the orders of higherups.”

“This is typical with everyone in the military service.”

“I helped make Mexico, especially Tampico, safe for Ameri can oil interests in 1914. I helped make Haiti and Cuba a decent place for the National City Bank boys to collect revenues in. I helped in the raping of half a dozen Central American republics for the benefits of Wall Street. The record of racketeering is long. I helped purify Nicaragua for the international banking house of Brown Brothers in 19091912 (where have I heard that name before?). I brought light to the Dominican Republic for American sugar inter ests in 1916. In China I helped to see to it that Standard Oil went its way unmolested.”

“During those years, I had, as the boys in the back room would say, a swell racket. Looking back on it, I feel that I could have given Al Capone a few hints. The best he could do was to operate his racket in three districts. I operated on three continents.”

Major General Smedley Butler, USMC.

Wpictures-from-history-04-742870ar, terror, and instability are great for those in the business of war. War and civil unrest is a wonderful means of achieving short and longterm political and financial goals, such as the over throw of sovereign nations and the acquisition of another country’s and another people’s resources, such as land, labor, minerals, and black gold—oil that is.

During the Nixon and Ford years, the United States was fight ing a multifront “terrorist war” against the people of South and Central America (2), the people of South East Asia (3), the people of the Middle East, Iraq in particular (4) and as detailed in chapter 5, the people of Europe. In Germany, Belgium, and Italy in par ticular CIAdirected terrorist teams were bombing, shooting, and killing civilians. In Italy this resulted in the destabilization and overthrow of the democratically elected government of Italian Prime Minister Moro who was taken hostage and killed. It has been said that Bush masterminded the plot (5).

In the late 1970s, the CIA hatched a plan for the Middle East, which was designed to woo away Arabic, Islamic, and terrorist states, such as Libya, Iraq, and Egypt, from the Soviet sphere of influence. The long range goal was to gain control over Middle Eastern, and Central Asian oil reserves. This was to be accom plished, in part, through secret military and financial aid provided by the CIA. However, in the case of Libya and Iraq, the provision of aid was illegal as these were designated terrorist states.

Simultaneously, Islamic “holy warriors” and terrorists were trained, financed, and armed by the CIA—with the assistance of the bin Ladens and the Saudi Royal family as well as Pakistan’s Intelligence Service, the ISI. These CIAtrained terrorists were then unleashed on Afghanistan (6), Iraq (4), Egypt (7), and in 1980, Iran (8,9).

OIL, WAHHABISM & COMMUNISM

The economy of the world is dependent on black gold, oil that is. Saudi Arabia has the largest pool of oil reserves. The desert kingdom is awash with oil. The second largest known reserves are beneath the soil of Iraq (10). However, in the 1970s, evidence be gan to accrue to suggest that beneath the Caspian Basin and in the adjoining Central Asian states of Turkmenistan, Kazakhstan, Azerbaijan, and Uzbekistan, lay incredible huge pools of oil, per haps as much or more than the total reserves of Iraq (11).

Total world oil consumption, in 1979, was 23.41 billion bar rels. Prior to 1979, estimates of yearly oil consumption had been based on a simple mathematical formula, i.e. multiplying the world population by the factor 4.43. Thus, based on estimates of world population growth, reasonable and quite accurate predictions could be made (12).

However, oil is consumed at different rates by two different groups, i.e. the people of highly industrialized countries vs third world countries where oil consumption is relatively minimal. For example, Canadian consumption of oil, in the year 2000, was 20.71 barrels per person. By contrast, in India only 0.75 barrels per per son were consumed (10,12).

In the 1970s, it was recognized, that India and China, each with over 1 billion citizens, would gradually, then more rapidly, become industrialized, and oil consumption would explode. Some analysts were estimating that oil consumption, in these two countries alone, might be more than 75 billion barrels in the year 2010, and that world oil consumption would thus be in excess of 100 billion barrels per year (13).

It was also recognized, that whoever controlled the refining, shipping, and distribution of this oil, would thus have a strangle hold on these two emerging industrial nations.

Oil is produced by a number of independent, interdepen dent, and closely aligned groups, such as the “seven sisters” (Exxon, Gulf, Texaco, Mobil, Socal, BP and Shell), and OPEC which has eleven members (Libya, Nigeria, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, United Arab Emirates, Venezuela, Algeria, Indonesia, Iran, Iraq, Kuwait).

In the 1970s, it was recognized that oil production in most of the nonOPEC countries, would begin to peak and might even be gin to decline by the year 2000—and this in fact is the case (13). By contrast, it was recognized that OPEC oil production would not begin to peak until well after the year 2010. Strategically, this means that OPEC nations would become stronger, and the nonOPEC nations would become weaker, such that, at some “crossover event” the balance of power might shift. This is one of the main reasons why the U.S. has attributed so much importance to dominating this region, and maintaining a positive relationship with Saudi Arabia in particular. Indeed, the strategic importance of the oilproducing Gulfstates and Saudi Arabia was recognized even before 1950.

In the 1970s, there were two superpowers: the U.S. and the Soviet Union. Both were struggling to gain or maintain influence in the Middle East and among the Gulf states. Libya, Egypt, and Iraq were in the Russian corner. Moreover, the incredibly oilrich, albeit undeveloped regions of Central Asia and the Caspian basin were part of the Soviet Union.

In the 1970s, it was recognized that in the future, who ever controlled and developed the oil resources of the Caspian basin and Central Asia, as well as that of Saudi Arabia and Iraq, would also have a strangle hold, not just on India and China, but the world.

Those who established this control would also become wealthy beyond their dreams.

By the late 1970s, one of the keys to gaining access to the oilrich central Asian states, was Afghanistan. If these states were to be destabilized and stripped away from the Soviet Union, then Afghanistan, with its Sovietbacked government, would have to be torn lose first. Before and after Afghanistan fell, terrorist attacks would be launched into the underbelly of the Soviet Union (14).

Afghanistan was also a key, because Afghanistan offered the best route for an oil pipeline—a pipeline that would pump the oil extracted from the central Asian states, across Afghanistan, to Pa kistan, and thus to the world markets via the Arabian sea.

However, in order for western oil companies and the CIA to accomplish this, required Saudi Arabia and Pakistan as a partner.

The willingness to involve Saudi Arabia was strategic and based on political reality. If the ruling families of Saudi Arabia were not promised a huge piece of the central Asian pie, they would refuse to cooperate in any destabilizing attacks on the Soviet Union. As Saudi Arabia was also a major source of funds to Pakistan and its ISI, if Saudi Arabia were not part of the equation, Pakistan too would refuse to cooperate, and might even align itself with the Soviet Union.

The Saudis were willing to cooperate for a number of rea sons, including those related to the spread of the Islamic religion, and the creation of an Islamic superstate, and because they wished to retain their power. If America alone won the central Asia oil “prize” the Saudis would lose the power of oil and their ability to effect the world economy by turning the oil spigot on or off.

Likewise, given that Saudi Arabia has the world’s largest oil reserves, they key to controlling the world’s economy, and thus the world, required a partnership with the Saudi kingdom. Moreover, without Saudi help and Saudi funding, it would have been impos sible for the CIA and the Wall Street elite, to destabilize or signifi cantly influence those Middle Eastern states, such as Libya, Egypt, Iraq, and Afghanistan, which, in the 1970s, were in the corner of the Soviet Union.

As noted, religion was also a major factor in the establishment of the partnership. Before and after the 1970s, the Saudis were eager to destabilize and overthrow the Soviet Communist state, as well as the rulers of even fellow OPEC members, because of major issues related to religion, i.e. the Sunni vs the Shiit branches of Islam (14,15).

The Saudi agenda was to export their Wahhabism brand of the Sunni Islamic religion not only into the southern Asian states of the Soviet Union, but into Egypt, Iran, Iraq, Libya and Afghanistan (14,

15). It was a SaudiSunniWahhabi dream to create a unified, fascist, Islamic superstate, and to terrorize, murder, and destroy not just those worshipping non-Islamic religions, but the Shiit and all other vari ants of Islam, especially those variants which emphasized the toler ant, peaceful, poetically mystical schools of thought such as Sufism.

As detailed, for example, in Stephen Schwartz’s recent book, The Two Faces of Islam, “Wahhabism exalts and promotes death in every element of its existence, the suicide of its adherents, mass murder as a weapon against civilization, and above all the suffoca tion of the mercy embodied in Islam” as represented by the “bright aspect of Sufi traditionalism, [which is] happy, filled with love of God and humanity….. Wahhabi fundamentalism,” he writes, is “ugly… narrow, rigid, tyrannical, separatist, supremacist and violent.”

It could thus be argued that Wahhabism is a Nazi version of Islam, which in turn might explain why the Saudis linked up with Hitler in the 1930s (see chapter 3). In the 1930s, the Saudis em braced Nazism for a number of reasons, including their shared goal of destroying the Soviet Union, and gaining access to the oilrich underbelly.

Forty years later, the goal remained the same: to first topple the Sovietbacked regime, and to then take the “holy war” into the underbelly of the Soviet Union, in order to grab the oilrich central Asian states of Turkmenistan, Kazakhstan, Azerbaijan, and Uzbekistan (14,15,16). “Holy Warriors” would do the dirty work.

In the late 1970s and continuing into the 1990s, the primary mission of these CIAtrained and Saudifinanced terrorists, referred to as the mujahideen, was to attack Afghan villages, and bomb health centers, government offices, and even Kabul University, and to rape, murder, and terrorize the civilian population. In this regard, they were highly successful. Tens of thousands of civilians, as well as Soviet troops were “butchered in a hideous fashion” (5). The mujahedeen’s battle for supremacy resulted in the death and maiming of over 100,000 civilians and the displacement of millions people who be came refugees (17).

Iraq, too, was and is a target of the Wahhabis, as the Saudis believe that Iraq is a broken off piece of Arabia. Indeed, for the last several centuries, and until 1922, Iraq, as well as Kuwait, were part of Arabia. However, at the close of the first world war, and with the collapse of the Ottoman Empire, Britain and France pounced on the Middle East, and divided up the spoils. They created artificial bound aries and thus new states in the Middle East, as they believed that by fragmenting the Arab peoples they would be easier to dominate and control.

Britain broke Arabia into three states: Iraq, Kuwait, and Arabia. Each state was then given its own ruler, who in turn owed their posi tions to France and Britain. Kuwait was handed to the alSabah family. The Hashemite King Hussein was awarded Jordan. And Arabia was given to the Saud family and which was then renamed after Ibn Saud.

King Ibn Saud, however, was determined to someday unify his country and to erase the artificial boundaries which created the bastard states of Kuwait and Iraq. Like his ancestors, he also dreamed of creating an Islamic superstate, encompassing all the nations of the Middle East, and in fact, the world. In 1922, how ever, it was an impossible dream.

LIBYA & EGYPT

In the 1970s, U.S. and Saudi Arabia formed an unholy alli ance. Under the guise of fighting communism, terrorists were trained, funded, equipped and then unleashed on the nations of Egypt, Libya, Iraq, and Afghanistan. At the same time, Saudi Arabia was actively funding and establishing fundamentalist Islamic schools in nations, such as Pakistan and Egypt, which in turn be came breeding grounds for terrorists. Likewise, the US was trying to curry favor with some of these same countries in order to woo them from the Soviet sphere.

As will be detailed, part of that strategy involved funding and providing arms and weapons to Libya—a Soviet ally—which were used to attack Egypt. Egypt repeatedly beat back these assaults which the Egyptians erroneously believed were sponsored, through Libya, by the Soviet Union.

The first tangible fruits of these well devised plans were plucked from the tree in 1976, when Egyptian President, Anwar al Sadat ended Egypt’s Treaty of Friendship with Soviet Union (18).

Nevertheless, Sadat remained cool to U.S. proposals for increased U.S. military involvement in his own armed forces (18).

Then the unexpected, Sadat began making peaceful overtures toward Israel. Simultaneously, he began signaling a willingness to accommodate Islamic fundamentalists who were demanding a greater role in the Egyptian government. These events and poli cies upset Saudi Arabia and U.S. planners, albeit for different reasons.

Sadat would soon be targeted for assassination.

The CIA has a history of forming alliances with terrorists, Nazis, dictators, and the like. In some instances, the CIA is playing the “Great Game” and engaging the Hegelian dialectic. That is, it creates entities that threaten the US, in order to strengthen the hand of rightwing Republican administrations who then promise to de stroy the threat. In some instances, as was the case with Iraq and Iran in the late 1980s, and Libya, during the 1970s, the CIA pro vided resources so that these nations would be better equipped so as to encourage them to attack each other.

In the 1970s, the terrorist government of Libya was targeted— but not for overthrow, but as an instrument of power to be wielded by the unseen hand of the CIA.

CIA agent, Edwin Wilson was put in charge of the Libya mission (19).

Like the Mafia, no one ever really ever leaves the CIA. Edwin P. Wilson who “left” the Brotherhood in 1971, continued to run high level operations until the 1980s and this included providing weapons, funds, and strategic information to Libya when it was illegal to do so. Although illegal, the Libyan operation had the bless ing of the CIA, and Wilson met frequently with two of the agency’s top executives while running this and other illegal CIA programs: Thomas G. Clines, the director of training for clandestine services, and Theodore G. Shackley, the No. 2 man in the espionage branch (19,20). Wilson and Shackley also worked together in the planning and implementation of the failed “Bay of Pigs” invasion of Cuba.

In 1977, Edwin P. Wilson, working under the auspices and with the approval of the CIA, sold Libyan dictator Moammar Gaddaffi, over 20 tons (42,000 pounds) of C4, an extremely concentrated but powerful explosive. C4 is perfect for terrorist operations, including the bombing of schools, hospitals, government buildings and the downing of commercial airlines.

Wilson also provided Libya with “secret CIA cables from the Far East, NSA computer procedures for detecting submarines and missiles, assassination devices from CIA suppliers, and exotic secret weapons from the Navy and CIA testing base at China Lake in California. Wilson clandestinely exported to Libya all the com ponents (including specially developed exploding plastics from the CIA) for manufacturing terrorist bombs disguised as ashtrays and other innocent looking objects” (20).

Other CIA agents also took an active role in the Libya mission.

“Mulcahy” a specialist in secret communications technology supervised the smuggling of electronic and military equipment into Libya (20).

“Dubberstein” worked for the Pentagon and specialized in compiling the daily military intelligence summary for the Secre tary of Defense and the Joint Chiefs of Staff. “Dubberstein” provided Libya with this data including the “ultra secret Single Inte grated Operational Plan” for nuclear war (20).

Of course, this was all illegal, particularly so as this infor mation and these weapons posed a danger to our allies and our national security. Libya was not only a sponsor of “terrorism,” but was aligned with the Sovet Union.

It is precisely because Libya was a sponsor of terrorism that the CIA covertly sold weapons of mass destruction to this nation. The CIA fully expected Libya to engage in terrorist attacks against Western targets as well as against Egypt which was on the verge of signing a peace treaty with Israel.

Based on the evidence which was revealed at his trial, the CIA, through Wilson, paid one million dollars to have Sadat assassinated. A CIA agent, “Villaverde who had served the CIA as a saboteur in Cuba, was recruited by Wilson as a hired gun and prom ised a million dollars” for the “assassination” in Egypt (20).

Sadat who had boldly visited Israel in 1977, then signed the 1978 Camp David Accords with Israel, and then a peace treaty with Israel in 1979, was assassinated while observing a military parade on October 6, 1981.

Immediately following the assassination of Sadat, a U.S. carrier battle group, including the 552nd Airborne Warning and Con trol Wing, and the Mediterranean Amphibious Ready Group were ordered to take up positions north of Egypt and to the east corner of Libya. These massive forces were deployed because of the “possibility of Libyan involvement,” and were thus set to strike and invade Libya in order to prevent any further aggression against Egypt (21).

That myth was quickly dispelled. However, in consequence, U.S. forces came to be permanently deployed in Egypt, beginning immediately following the Sadat assassination in 1981. Since then, every year around October, Egyptian forces join with and become part of the Rapid Deployment Joint Task Force. These are multi nation coordinated exercises for infantry, airborne, artillery, and armored forces. These annual exercises have been named, Opera tion “Bright Star.”

U.S. military forces were not only situated near Egypt when Sadat was assassinated, but Operation “Bright Star” was just about to get under way off the coast of Egypt, when terrorists struck the U.S. on 9/11/2001. U.S. and British forces were conveniently in place when President Bush ordered the attack on the Taliban government of Afghanistan.

BIN LADEN & THE ASSASSINATION OF SADAT

That the assassination of Egyptian President Sadat was the result of a well organized conspiracy, is beyond dispute. Sadat was seated at the front of a virtually unguarded podium. Many of those in his security detail, including his plainclothes U.S. trained security guards had mysteriously been dismissed for the day. In fact, he was provided almost no protection, which initself was extremely unusual (22).

His four attackers were thus able to approach Sadat without being challenged. Moreover, for reasons that are unknown, Sadat, and only Sadat, stood up as his attackers approached, thus making him an easy target. Speculation is that he was instructed to stand up by those sitting near him.

Although we are told that he was assassinated because his attackers wished to establish an Islamic state, the gun fire was concentrated only on Sadat (22). Although vicepresident Hosni Mubarak and many other top army officers and diplomats, sat to Sadat’s left, to his right, and behind him, thus making them easy targets, they were spared injury, which is surprising if the attackers wished to overthrow the government. If they had really aspired to establish an Islamic state, then why didn’t they kill all the top poli ticians and military men seated around President Sadat?

In fact, by killing Sadat, and then sparing Hosni Mubarak and the others, the assassins actually hindered their supposed extremist Islamic and anti-Western cause. Hosni Mubarak, who be came president, was far more pro-western than the more independent-minded Sadat (18). Whereas Sadat was more accommodating, Murabak immediately began a massive campaign of retaliation against Islamic fundamentalists which included the arrest of over 10,000 clerics and students (22).

As noted, the CIA paid at least 1 million dollars for an assassination that was to take place in Egypt (20). Who else, how many other groups were also paid, we do not know.

What we do know is that the terrorist organization, Islamic Jihad group, claimed responsibility (22) and that this group is linked to Saudi Arabia and bin Laden (23). Several of the so called masterminds of the plot, Nabil Soliman and Ayman alZawahiri, are members of Islamic Jihad, and Ayman al-Zawahiri is also a member of al-Qaeda.

Islamic Jihad’s specialty is assassination.

Islamic Jihad, however, is in actuality, al-Qaeda (23). In deed, some, such as the CIA and U.S. State Department, claim that the leader of Islamic Jihad, Ayman al-Zawahiri is Osama bin Laden’s chief lieutenant. Others, such Osama bin Laden’s handpicked biographer, Hamid Mir, claim that Ayman alZawahiri is actually the leader of alQaeda, whereas Osama is just a “front man” (24)—an issue we will explore in detail in chapter 13.

Nevertheless, regardless of which position we accept, it is beyond dispute that Osama and Ayman alZawahiri, work closely together and that alZawahiri is one of the chief strategist for al Qaeda.

What is in dispute, is the possibility that al Zawahiri may have also worked for the CIA—which may also explain why he was able to visit the United States several times where he openly raised funds as recently as 1995 (25). An undercover FBI infor mant, linked to the CIA, in fact, made the arrangement for al Zawahiri to visit (see chapter 11).

Osama bin Laden is also linked to the CIA, and he is be lieved to have first begun working with this intelligence organiza tion in 1978 or 1979 (26). Presumably Osama was still in the employee of the CIA in 1981, when Sadat was assassinated. The CIA, along with the Saudi royal family, were providing Osama and his nascent terrorist organization with millions of dollars in funds, and Saudi Arabia was covertly supporting terrorist groups whose mis sion was to overthrow Sadat (7,15,27).

Nabil Soliman, one of those involved in the assassination, left Egypt after Sadat was killed and lived in Saudi Arabia (28). Nabil then moved to Yemen in 1988 and then to the United States in 1992 where he lived unmolested for almost 10 years (28). On July 12, 2002, he was extradited from the United States to Egypt (28).

Ayman alZawahiri was jailed after the assassination, but was then released! He too traveled to Saudi Arabia, and then to Af ghanistan where he fought with the Saudi and CIAbacked mujahideen.

We are told that Sadat was assassinated because Islamic Jihad (alQaeda) wished to usher in a pure Islamic state in Egypt, and because Sadat had made peace with Israel (22). In part, that may have been the motives of at least some of the plotters.

However, the result of the assassination, was to remove an independently minded leader who had ushered in Islamic law and who was making overtures to Islamic fundamentalists and offering them a role in his government.

For example, in 1981, Sadat declared that the Shari’a, that is, orthodox, Sunni, Islamic law (29), would be the basis of Egyp tian law. Egyptian law would become Shari’a (18). Sadat was in fact an extremely devout Sunni Muslim. His forehead was marked with the permanent bruise of those who bow their heads to the ground and pray five times a day (18). Indeed, there was a fear, among some Western leaders, that because of Sadat, Islamic fundamentalism would mushroom out of control, and that Egypt was in danger of being a radicalized Islamic nation, similar to Iran.

The assassination of Sadat did not help the Islamic cause but resulted in a massive and brutal crackdown on Islamic fundamen talism. Over 10,000 Islamic leaders were eventually jailed.

The assassination also resulted in the regular deployment of U.S. forces in Egypt, as well as the installation of a prowestern government in Sadat’s place—a government that is so friendly to the U.S. that it receives massive military and economic aid from the United States, the OECD countries and the World Bank— over $52 billion from the U.S. alone (30) —massive financial and mili tary aid that was not available in the 1970s. This aid, of course, makes Egypt that much more dependent on the U.S. Indeed, since Sadat’s death, Egyptian society has been increasingly shaped by Western hands and the Western strings attached to foreign aid (30). Hence, the consequences of killing Sadat were completely oppo site to the ideas Islamic Jihad and Osama bin Laden espouse— which can only make us wonder as to what may have been the real agenda.

To answer that question, we need only ask: who benefits? Answer: The U.S. and Wall Streets merchants of death.

Likewise, we are told that one of the reasons for the 9/11 attack on America, was to further Islamic ideals and to remove western influences and to drive Western military forces from the Islamic states (31).

Instead, the 9/11/2001 assault on the Pentagon and World Trade Center, resulted a devastating attack on the Islamic funda mentalist rulers of Afghanistan, and the permanent installation of the U.S. military and a prowestern government in its place.

If we dare to assume that the planners of 9/11 and the Sadat assassination, also considered the likely consequences of their acts, one would have to conclude, that the purpose of both 9/11 and the assassination of Sadat in 1981, was to serve western and not Is lamic interests, and in this regard, we note that Osama bin Laden had began working with the CIA since at least 1979 or 1978.

–~~~~~~~~~~~~–

IRAN-CONTRA SAUDI BIN LADEN

Reagan and Bush were in power when Sadat was assassinated. Those implicated in the assassination include Osama bin Laden, Saudi Arabia, Libya, as well as terrorists linked to Iran and the Sudan (22,27). In the early 1990s, the Sudan would become yet another base for Osama bin Laden (26).

Likewise, although there are different terrorists groups linked to Iran, one Iranian terrorist organization was Paris-based in 1981, and was linked to the Paris-based bin Laden organization (9,33) which in turn is closely allied with the royal family of Saudi Arabia. Saudi Arabia, the Saudi Royal family, the bin Ladens, and a number of Saudi Arabia’s richest families have also provided millions of dollars in aid to bin Laden and his terrorist network (26,33,34,35,36,37). Some of those funds were laundered through banks and corporations located in London, Geneva, Paris, and the Sudan—banks and corporations which are owned or controlled by the bin Laden family or their associates including members of the royal family (3538).

For example, the Saudi government and the wife of Prince Bandar bin Sultan, the Saudi ambassador to the United States, provided over $100,000.000, each, to Osama Bassnan, a Saudi agent who made arrangements for 9/11 hijackers, Khalid alMidhar and Nawaq alHazmi, to live in San Diego. Osama Bassnan even paid their rent. The payments from the Saudi government and the Saudi royal family continued up until the 9/11 hijackings.

Moreover, some of these same high ranking Saudis, includ ing Prince Bandar and members of the bin Laden family, have been business partners with the Bush family, including “Mr. George W. Bush of the CIA” (38). All are heavily invested in the Carlyle Group—whose board members included a number of exCIA heavyweights. Bin Laden, in turn, had been working with the CIA, since 1978 or 1979 (26,39).

Thus, it could be reasonably argued that the bin Ladens, the Saudis, the CIA, George Bush, and the Reagan-Bush administration are implicated to varying degrees, as having played some role in the assassination of Sadat as well as terrorist acts that have resulted in the assassination of a number of foreign leaders. As we have seen in earlier chapters, Bush and the CIA, as well as previous Republican administrations, have been linked to terrorism, mass murder, torture, and the assassination and attempted assassination of a number of foreign presidents and prime ministers, including Italian Prime Minister Moro and Allende of Chile (1,2,32).

Likewise, as to the Libya and Iran connection to the Sadat assassination, there is substantial evidence to indicate that the CIA was providing illegal financial or military aid to both countries either prior to, during, or after the assassination, and that part of the motive for this illegal activity was to curry favor and gain influences on Libyan and Iranian terrorist and intelligence organizations (19,20,40,41,42).

Although an arm’s embargo and other sanctions were in place against Libya and Iran, and presumably, vigorously enforced by the CIA, State Department, and Reagan-Bush administration, the facts indicate otherwise (19,20,40,41,42). Indeed, the CIA had been providing weapons and technology to Libya since 1977. Like wise, despite its being a “terrorist” state, it is now well established that the Reagan and Bush administration were supplying weapons and related technology to Iran —despite laws forbidding any such trade with this “terrorist” state (40,41,42).

BUSH PAYS TERRORISTS TO KEEP AMERICANS HOSTAGE: THE BIN LADEN CONNECTION

According to official records, including those of the “Inde pendent Counsel for Iran/Contra Matters” (40) and the Tower Com mission (41), the Reagan-Bush administration were also illegally selling arms to Iran in 1985 though in fact, the evidence suggests that the CIA and the Reagan-Bush administration had been trading with the enemy, since October of 1980 (43). And the evidence indicates that the Reagan-Bush team utilized the services of the bin Laden family in carrying out these illegal terrorist related actions.

According to a number of independent sources including French Intelligence, and as reported by PBS Frontline, and “Be hind the Scenes in the Beltway” columnist, Al Martin (43), Bush, along with Salim bin Laden and Amiram Nir (an intelligence agent with Israel’s Mossad), personally met with Iranian government officials and offered unspecified bribes, in October of 1980. These meetings took place in Paris. Paris is also a corporate base for the bin Laden family, and a number of other Saudi business men implicated in funding Osama bin Laden and other terrorist groups (33).

The purpose of these meetings was to persuade Iranian offi cials to keep 52 American hostages imprisoned in Teheran, until after the November, 1980 election—men and women who had been taken hostage at the U.S. Embassy in Iran, after the U.S. provided sanctuary to the deposed Shah of Iran. That is, George Bush met with representatives of a terrorist nation, in order to persuade them to keep American citizens hostage long enough to help insure the defeat of President Jimmy Carter and the election of the Reagan Bush ticket (43,44).

The Reagan-Bush administration, and George Bush, were not just dealing with Iranian terrorists, but the bin Ladens.

As also noted by Frontline (2001), “if the French report is correct, it points to a longstanding connection of highly illegal behavior between the Bush and bin Laden families.”

That Bush would conspire with terrorists and put his own interests above those of the American people, is consistent with everything we know about this man and his family.

Bush, of course, claims that these meetings never happened. Nevertheless a number of independent witnesses, including French Intelligence agents, observed George H.W. Bush and Iranian officials in Paris in October, when these meetings took place.

What other evidence do we have which indicates that these Bush bin Laden Iranian meetings actually occurred, and that bribes were offered?

For one, we know that the Iranians held off on freeing the hostages until after the November elections. They were freed on the day Reagan and Bush were sworn into office.

We also know that the Reagan-Bush administration illegally provided arms to Iran (40,43).

The evidence indicates that the “bribe” offered to Iran included offensive weapons, and that in return for the promise of weapons, Iran continued to hold American hostage until after the election.

As scientists, we do not believe that “coincidence” is a scientific explanation.

IRAN-CONTRA: THE BIN LADEN CONNECTION

As noted, not only George H.W. Bush, but Israeli agent, Amiram Nir, and the bin Ladens played a prominent role in the October 1980 meeting in Paris. These same individuals also played a significant role in the illegal operation code named “arms for hostages,” i.e. the illegal provision of offensive weapons to the Ira nian regime, and the provision of illegal funds to terrorists operat ing in bases outside Nicaragua.

Amiram Nir and Salem bin Laden played a significant role in arming not just the Iranians, but Central American terrorists.

To quote the New Yorker (11/5/01), “During the nineteen eighties, when the Reagan Administration secretly arranged for an estimated thirtyfour million dollars to be funneled through Saudi Arabia to the Contras, in Nicaragua. Salem bin Laden aided in this cause, according to French intelligence.”

Yet another coincidence, Salem bin Laden died in a 1988 air crash in Texas. Nothing was ever proven, but Salem bin Laden’s death led to speculation that he might have been “eliminated.” If he was in fact purposefully killed, his murder may have been related not to the Contras, but to the illegal arms trade with Iran and the Paris meeting in 1980.

Likewise, Amiram Nir died in a plan crash after departing Texas and while flying over Mexico, presumably in route to South America. His death, too, may have had little to do with the Contras, per se, but with operation code named: “arms for hostages,” and the Paris meeting where Bush traded the lives of Americans to en hance his chances to be elected VicePresident.

As will be explained, the Contras were a terrorist army wag ing a terrorist campaign of murder, torture, and terrorism, against the people of Nicaragua. The contrast were funded, trained, and equipped by the CIA, with the assistance of the Saudi royal family, including the bin Laden family and Salem bin Laden.

SAUDI ARABIA

By 1980, 50 patriarchs of the ruling Saud family had become multi-billionaires. The royal family’s budget was estimated be between $6 to $7 billion annually. The king’s palace, in 1980, was estimated to beworth $17 billion. Saudi Arabia, the richest and thus the most powerful state in the Gulf region, is also the most repressive and the most inscrutable. The population is kept under extremely tight control, women have almost no rights, and Jews are forbidden entry except under exceptional condi tions, i.e. U.S. diplomats who are Jews (15,45).

Foreign researchers and reporters are almost always refused en try into the country unless specifically invited. They are then accompanied wherever they go.

American soldiers and oil company staff are required to live in prison-like compounds, which are fenced off to prevent unsupervised interaction with Saudi citizens.

Arrest and imprisonment without trial, torture, solitary confinement for years on end, political executions, beheadings, amputation, and the most barbaric of criminal penalties are imposed on men, women, and children, for crimes such as criticizing the Royal family. A typical case reported by Amnesty International: a ten year-old child was tied to a rope and left exposed to the merciless desert sun until he died of expo sure.

Likewise, the armies of foreigners who labor at extremely low wages in Saudi Arabia. have no rights, are denied citizenship, and are ruled with an iron hand (15,45).

It is a suffocating world of the most extremist oppression. In November of 1990, as U.S. forces began to arrive in preparation for war in Iraq, 47 Saudi women did the unthinkable: They drove cars. The women were covered from head to foot. There was nothing un-Islamic about their appearance. However, they had broken Saudi Arabia’s version of Islamic law and the religious police pounced. The women were ar rested, branded “harlots,” “bitches” and “whores” and threatened with death.

On March 15, 2002, over a dozen Saudi girls burned to death, when they were not allowed to escape a burning school building. Saudi Arabia’s religious police stopped the schoolgirls from escaping the blaze because they were not wearing correct Islamic dress (headscarves and black robes—abayas). Because the girls, in their panic, refused to return to the burning buildings, the religious police—also known as the Com mission for the Promotion of Virtue and Prevention of Vice—began beating them and tossing them bodily back into the inferno. Men who stopped and tried to help the girls, were warned back by the religious police because “it is a sinful to approach them.”

These incredibly repressive policies have been fully supported by a succession of U.S. Presidents, who, like the Kings of Arabia, know that it is in the strategic and economic interests of the bankers, oil men, and the arms merchants, to keep the kings in power and the people under control. Indeed, Saudi Arabia is the world’s largest single oil producer, and thus controls the spigot which provides the major life blood of the world’s economy, oil, that is (12,45).

Because of its police state mentality, the exclusion or confinement of foreign visitors, and its hyper-secrecy, Saudi Arabia is thus the perfect partner for men of power who wish to engage in criminal acts or commit terrorist atrocities against the people and leaders of other countries who do not share their views. All becomes permissible, nothing is forbidden, if there is enough secrecy. Saudi Arabia is a religious fascist state which under the cloak of secrecy seeks to impose its world view and its repressive interpretation of Islam, on other countries and peoples.

THE SAUDI-CONTRA CONNECTION

The Bush family—with its Nazi connections, the Saudi royals—with their Nazi connections—and other rich and influential Saudi families were naturally drawn to one another as they share similar ideologies and goals: the “new world order” which is to be governed and controlled by a small ruling class elite, that is, the “Brotherhood” (15,46). In the 1960s, and certainly by the 1970s, they were all doing business together (38,43).

However, in the case of the Saudis, that new world order will be a worldwide Islamic state, governed according to Sunni Wahhabi interpretations of Islam (15). Although that goal is not shared by the Bush Wall Street corporate elite, the Bush team and the Sau dis are nevertheless willing to work closely together, to increase their wealth and their power, and to combat and eliminate common enemies and competitors for world domination, such as the Soviet Union and its communist allies. In the 1980s, these “communist” enemies targeted for elimination included those in South and Central America which, despite its distance from the Persian gulf, is a perfect target for Islamic extremists.

Indeed, due in part to Saudi efforts, since the 1980s, Islam has become the fastest growing religion among Latinos in the Americas (47,48). This is not entirely surprising, as Islam has a long history in Spain, beginning with the Spanish rule of the Mus lim Moors from the 700s to the 1400s. It is Spain, with its Muslim colored culture, which conquered Mexico and South America during the 1500s.

In fact, in the semi-isolated jungles of countries like Peru (e.g., in a region called Cañete) as well as in cities such a Lima, there are houses which resemble Muslim Masjids. Peasants of many villages sill dress in turbans and thobes—Arab robes (49).

Although the peoples of South and Central America are pre dominantly Catholic, Islam has made strides by stressing and pro moting the idea that converts are actually reverting back to their original religion. For example, Ibrahim Gonzalez, raised as a Catholic, says he “didn’t convert to Islam” rather, he says, “I reverted. We’re returning to a religion that we once belonged to and was very much a part of our historical heritage” (48).

The Saudis thus looked to Central America as another breeding ground for their brand of Sunni Wahhabism. The Saudis were happy to assist the Reagan-Bush administration in funding terrorists who would be unleashed on South and Central American countries such as Nicaragua.

As the CIA and the Reagan-Bush administration were working with the Saudis to unleash terrorists on Middle Eastern countries, it was only natural that they would work together in promoting terrorism in South and Central American countries.

As was the case in the 1980 Paris meeting that Bush held with Iranian officials, Salem bin Laden would act on behalf of the Saudi royal family for the Central American operation.

As confirmed by French Intelligence sources, and as reported by PBS Frontline (43), during the 1980s, “Salem bin Laden, Osama’s oldest brother, [was] one of the two closest friends of Saudi Arabia’s King Fahd. As such, he often performed important missions for Saudi Arabia.”

Thus, the CIA, Bush and associates, and various Saudi fami lies and Saudi officials, including Prince Bandar and the bin Ladens began working hand in glove (40,41,43) to help support terrorist organizations, including the Contras who were raping, torturing and terrorizing the people of Nicaragua (50).

Bush business partner and friend, Adnan Khashoggi, a Saudi billionaire oil and arms trader, admitted in a televisioninterview, that he funneled $5 million dollars to help finance arms shipments to the Contras who were terrorizing Nicaragua. In addition, the Sultan of Brunei — the richest man in the world — pitched in another $10 million.

According to the Tower Commission, led by Senator John Tower (41) Saudi officials linked to Saudi King Fahd donated from $1 million to $2 million a month from July 1984 to April 1985, over 32 million dollars, to support the Contras. According to the New York Times the contribution may have been part of a 1981 secret agreement between Riyadh and Washington “to aid anti communist resistance groups” in return for “sophisticated American AWACS radar planes, according to United States officials and others familiar with the deal.”

As detailed in the “Final Report of the Independent Counsel for Iran/Contra Matters” (40) “Saudi Arabia had contributed to the support of the Nicaraguan contras at a time when Congress had forbidden the use of appropriated funds for this purpose.” The re port goes on to say that the Reagan-Bush administration were soliciting “foreign countries including Saudi Arabia … to provide funds for the contras, and that … Saudi Arabia was providing $25 million in assistance to the contras.”

The Saudi royal family was intimately involved in these illegal activities.

“During the period between 19841987…daily diary notes record at least 64 separate contacts with Prince Bandar bin Sultan, the Saudi Ambassador to the United States….” the subjects dis cussed ranged “from political strategy for handling the revelation of the Iran arms sales, and included discussions of helping Saudi Arabia acquire United States weapon systems.”

Some of those who attended or were privy to those meetings included the Secretary of Defense (Caspar Weinberger), the Direc tor of the CIA, the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff (40), as well as Bush and Cheney.

Although Bush later claimed he was “out of the loop”, Secretary of State George Shultz later told the Tower Commission (41)

that George Bush was completely aware of the complex arrange ments between the Saudis, the Reagan-Bush administration, the Contras, and even the operation coded named: “arms for hostages.” Likewise, according to Reagan Press Secretary James Brady, “Bush” was “functioning much like a co-president” and was “involved in all the national security stuff because of his special back ground as CIA director. All the budget working groups he was there, the economic working groups, the Cabinet meetings. He is included in almost all the meetings.”

In the “Final Report of the Independent Counsel for Iran/ Contra Matters” (40) it is also noted that Reagan-Bush administration officials repeatedly lied and perjured themselves by attempting to cover up these illegal activities. The Independent Counsel also concluded that “Prince Bandar” repeatedly made false state ments including: “Saudi Arabia is not and has not been involved either directly or indirectly in any military or other support activity of any kind for or in connection with any group or groups concerned with Nicaragua,” he claimed.

As an aside, this is the same Prince Bandar, who, some 15 years later, and again acting as a spokesman for the terrorist re gime of the Saudi royal family, refused to let U.S. investigators interview the families of 15 of the 9/11 hijackers, all of whom Saudi citizens. It was the wife of Prince Bandar, and the Saudi government which also provided over $200,000.00 to Osama Bassnan who in turn provided cash to 9/11 hijackers, Khalid al-Midhar and Nawaq alHazmi.

Just as we know that the Saudi royals and other Saudi families helped finance the 9/11 terrorist attack on the United States (3437), we also know, based on Reagan-Bush administration documents which escaped destruction in the 1980s, that “Saudi Arabia had agreed to give financial support to the Nicaraguan contras during the period when U.S. funds for the contras were virtually exhausted and Congress had refused to appropriate additional funds” (40). In yet another administration note it is written: “Bandar is giving $25 million to Contras.”

TERRORISM IN NICARAGUA

“Somoza may be a son of a bitch, but he’s our son of a bitch.”

—President Franklin Delano Roosevelt

For two generations the Somoza family had used terrorism, torture, and mass murder to intimidate and control the people of Nicaragua and to remove all opposition as they systematically plundered the country and became multimillionaires. Although a small clique of closely aligned Nicaraguan families, and of course, the CIA, supported the Somoza dictatorship, the people of Nicaragua did not. In 1956, Somoza Garcia was gunned down. Unfortunately, for the people of Nicaragua, his son Anastasio Somoza Debayle, “the vampire dictator,” took control. The Somozas continued to plunder Nicaragua (51).

In 1972, Nicaragua and the Somoza dictatorship were rattled by a massive earthquake which injured and killed over 100,000 Nicaraguans. The Somoza family, however, capitalized on the mis ery of the people, by seizing, with the help of the National Guard, over $30 million in international relief (51).

In 1979, Somoza was finally overthrown by a rebel group who called themselves the Sandinistas. The Sandinista National Liberation Front, founded in 1962, was named after General Cesar August Sandino, a revolutionary hero who had been murdered by Somoza Garcia.

When the Sandinistas came to power, they formed a demo cratic government which accepted help from Cuba and the Soviet Union, as well as from the World Bank. The Sandinistas offered a social program that was designed to improve education, health care, and social services. The Carter administration, and the World Bank, pledged over 100 million dollars in financial support to the new regime, and the country prospered. The World Bank called its development projects “extraordinarily successful” and “in some sec tors” of Nicaragua “better than anywhere else in the world.”

Improved health care, education and social services? Wall Street and the CIA became alarmed (50).

When Reagan and Bush took office in 1981, they canceled all financial aid to Nicaragua, which they accused of being a “Marx ist” and “communist” state. The Reagan-Bush team imposed an embargo in an attempt to destroy the economy and overthrow the government. On November 17, 1981, President Reagan signed National Security Directive 17, which authorized covert support to anti-Sandinista terrorists who wish to overthrow the democratically elected government of Nicaragua. Over $19 million was provided initially, to train a guerrilla force which would operate and launch terrorist attacks from training camps in Honduras and Costa Rica (50,51,52).

Thus, the “Contras” were born.

The Contras consisted of former Somoza National Guard units, men who had ruthlessly used Nazi tactics during the rein of Somoza, to keep the people terrified and under control. This was the same National Guard, who helped Somoza steal over $30 mil lion in international relief.

Now, with the backing of the Reagan-Bush administration, the Contras were turned loose on the citizens and cities of Nicaragua. The Contras proceeded to blow up schools, health centers, bridges, boats, government offices, and massacred tens of thou sands of innocent men, women, and children (51,52).

These attacks were not entirely random. Doctors, nurses, and teachers were singled out, as were volunteers in the health and literacy programs.

The targeting of those who provide health and educational services had been a tactic first refined by Adolf Hitler and the SS. Opponents who are ignorant, sickly, and unhealthy, are easier to suppress and control (54).

By 1983, the Reagan-Bush team had armed and trained 16,000 Contra terrorist troops. They were christened the Nicaraguan Democratic Force (FDN). However, by 1984, the FDN, de spite its use of terror and intimidation, had failed to win the hearts and minds of a single village (50).

The FDN were feared and hated—which is exactly what they desired. The aim of the Contras was to use terrorist tactics to stop Nicaraguan development projects in economic, education, health services and political organizations. It was through terror that the FDN hoped to come to power, and it was through terror that they hoped to remain in power.

The Contras, with Saudi, CIA and US backing, raped, murdered, kidnapped, and massacred tens of thousands of peasants and government officials. They burned crops, killed farmers, and blew up bridges, civilian power plants, schools, and hospitals (50,51,52).

An American Protestant organization, “Witness For Peace” and the human rights organization “Americas Watch” documented thousands of incidents where the Contras attacked farms and villages, and captured, tortured, and maimed children, women and men. The Contras cut off hands, arms, legs and feet, pulled out the tongues of their victims, gouged out eyes, castrated men and boys, bayoneted pregnant women and cut open their bellies, and tossed babies and children into fires or dashed their heads against the ground.

One survivor of a Contra raid reported: “Rosa had her breasts cut off. Then they cut into her chest and took out her heart. The men had their arms broken, their testicles cut off and their eyes poked out. They were killed by slitting their throats and pulling the tongue out through the slit.”

Rosa, was not an isolated cases. Similar atrocities were being carried out all over by the Contras—men Ronald Reagan and George Bush called “freedom fighters” and “the moral equal of our founding fathers.”

In October 1984 the Associated Press and the Boston Globe disclosed the discovery a 90 page CIA terrorist warfare training manual called “Psychological Operations in Guerrilla Warfare.” This document, which this author has examined (54) was later authenticated by the House Intelligence Committee as a CIA manual that provided helpful terrorism tips for the Contras. The manual provided advice and instruction on political assassinations, kidnappings and blowing up public buildings and the use of “shock troops” to disrupt public and political meetings. The “Shock troops” the manual instructs, must be “armed with clubs, iron rods and placards, and if possible, small firearms, which they shall carry hidden [as well as] knives, razors, chains, clubs and bludgeons.”

Once a village meeting began, the Contras would attack.

The manual also instructed the Contras in the “Selective use of Violence” and to “neutralize carefully selected and planned tar gets such as court judges, police or state security officials, etc. [and to] kidnap all officials or agents of the Sandinista government.” The manual called for “implicit terror” and stated: “If possible, professional criminals will be hired to carry out selective jobs.”

In Congress, the question was asked “Is this not, in effect, our own state-sponsored terrorism?”

The Contra leadership readily admitted that they committed atrocities. They were proud of it:

“It is cynical to think that the Contra respect human rights. During my four years as a Contra director, it was premeditated practice to terrorize civilian noncombatants to prevent their coop eration with the government… No serious attempt has been made to stop because terror is the most effective weapon of the Contra.”

— Contra Leader, Edgar Chamorro

In the years from 1981 to 1984 the contras assassinated 910 government officials, attacked nearly 100 civilian communities and caused the displacement of over 150,000 people from their homes and farms. Bridges, dams, port facilities, granaries, water and electrical power stations, telephone lines, health centers, hospitals and schools were destroyed (52,55). And all this was orchestrated by the Reagan-Bush administration—the inner circle of which included men such as Dick Cheney.

Finally, the Sandinista government of Nicaragua filed suit against the U.S., in the World Court at the Hague. In 1986, the World Court ruled against the United States for blockading Nicaragua, mining its harbors, and for providing training and financial support for the terrorist acts of the Contras. In issuing this Judgment, the Court also demanded that the U.S. pay reparations to Nicaragua.

Being labeled international outlaws and terrorists mattered little to the Reagan-Bush team, who refused to acknowledge the jurisdiction of the court. The U.S. also vetoed a U.N. Security Council resolution to enforce the judgment of the World Court. In fact, in 1984, the Reagan administration legalized “murder,” i.e. “pre-emptive” self-defense against civilians and other targets in Nicaragua and other nations that sponsored “terrorism.” Terrorism teams, directed by the CIA, would be “shielded… from legal action under

U.S. law if they were acting in good faith” (56).

The Reagan-Bush administration were proud sponsors of murder and terrorism.

Should we be surprised that when Cheney and 300 other former Bush administration officials again came to power and joined the new Bush administration in 2001, that terrorists would again be unleashed? This time against U.S. cities and U.S. citizens?

A man who orders others to commit murder or acts of terror, is still a murderer and a terrorist, regardless of where the crime first took place. And those who employ terror and murder, are the most likely to again resort to murder and terror if its suits their needs.

In order to put a halt to U.S. sponsored terrorism, Congress passed the “Boland Amendment” which read in part: “None of the funds provided in this Act [the Defense Appropriations Bill] may be used by the Central Intelligence Agency or the Department of Defense to furnish military equipment, military training or advice, or other support for military activities, to any group or individual… for the purpose of overthrowing the government of Nicaragua” (57).

Not only was the Boland Amendment quite clear in its in tent, but so was the penalty for doing so. It would be an “impeachable offense.”

This did not stop the Reagan-Bush administration, however. George Bush, like a true Hegelian Bonesman, created a shadow government, outside the law and in violation of the U.S. constitution (60). This shadow government was formed to carry out covert policies: to make war when the constitutional govern ment had decided not to make war; and to support enemies of the nation (terrorists and drugrunners) who were the friends or agents of the secret Bush government.

The true number and nature of the many secret, non-constitutional government agencies created by Bush will never be known. What is known from the discovery of secret memorandum, is that Bush created illegal agencies and then named himself the chief (40,41,60).

According to one memo: the “National Security Decision Directive 3, Crisis Management, establishes the Special Situation Group (SSG), chaired by the Vice President. The SSG is charged… with formulating plans in anticipation of crises.”

The “Standing Crisis PrePlanning Group” (CPPG) was yet another illegal government agency, the purpose of which was to gather intelligence for covert action by Bush’s SSG, against any one or any group or state, including American citizens, that Bush deemed to be an enemy. The members of the CPPG included not just Bush, but members of the National Security Council, CIA, and State Department (41,60), i.e. Caspar Weinberger, Admiral Poindexter, Ollie North, et al.

As also revealed by the same secret memo, the CPPG also served to provide “cover” that is, a cover up, if any of these illegal actions came to light.

Those illegal activities included selling weapons to the gov ernment of Iran (40,41,42) a state that was sponsoring terrorism and which had held American citizens as hostages, and then con tinued to hold them hostage at the request of George W. Bush in return for military assistance.

In July of 1985, and under the pretext of combating terror ism, when in fact he was fomenting terrorism, Bush became head of the newly formed Task Force on Combating Terrorism (or Terrorism Task Force).

In addition to Bush, members of The Terrorism Task Force included Marine Corps Lt. Col. Oliver North and Amiram Nir who was also a Counter-terrorism adviser to Israeli Premier Shimon Peres. North and Nir would play a central role in providing not just U.S. arms, but Israeli arms to the Islamic government of Iran (40,41)— the sworn enemy of both the U.S. and Israel.

As a cover for these traitors and impeachable offenses, the entire illegal deal would henceforth be code named operation “arms for hostages.”

On December 18, 1985, Charles E. Allen, a CIA official and member of George Bush’s Terrorism Task Force, wrote a memo providing an update on the “arms for hostages” deal with Iran (60): Rafsanjani [Speaker of the Iranian Parliament] believes Vice Presi dent George Bush is orchestrating the U.S. initiative with Iran. In fact, according to Subject, Rafsanjani believes that Bush is the most powerful man in the U.S. because in addition to being Vice President, he was once Director of CIA.”

On December 31, 1985, a Paris-based CIA agent Bernard Veillot, was informed by Iranian arms dealer Cyrus Hashemi that Vice President Bush was offering 3,000 American TOW missiles, that is, $2 billion in secret arms to Iran, and that the secret deal was “going to be signed by Mr. Bush…on Friday.”

What we are told is that the Bush team intended to over charge the Iranians for missiles and that the surplus funds would be diverted to the Contras (40,41).

What we have also learned is that Salem bin Laden, the brother of Osama bin Laden, played a direct role in the transfer of arms to Iran, as well as the funneling of cash to the contras.

On January 6, 1986 President Reagan met with George Bush and then signed a “Presidential Finding” that called for shipping arms to Iran through Israel (41,60)—a deal that was in direct violation of the National Security Act, but, which according to the “Presidential finding” was “important to the national security of the United States… The USG [chaired by Bush] will act to facilitate efforts by third parties and third countries to establish contacts with moderate elements within and outside the Government of Iran by providing these elements with arms, equipment and related materiel in order to enhance the credibility of these elements.”

Although Bush later claimed he was “out of the loop” Secretary of State George Shultz later told the Tower Commission that George Bush completely supported the arms for hostages deal (41).

On January 18, 1986, the Bush-Reagan administration, in collusion with the CIA, prepared to ship 4,000 TOW antitank missiles to Khomeini’s Iran (40,41,60). It has been alleged that Lt. Gen. Colin L. Powell was assigned to handle the arrangements for the illegal arms transfer which would first enter Israel and then be shipped to the terrorist government of Iran.

On July 29, 1986 George Bush traveled to Jerusalem and met with Nir who was to handle the transfer of the missiles from Israel to Iran. He instructed Craig Fuller, his chief of staff, to pre pare a secret memorandum of the meeting (41,61).

BUSH: THE BUSINESS OF TERRORISM

Why did Bush sell arms to a terrorist state?

It should be stressed that there never was any clear indication in the documents that came to light, that the purpose of the “arms for hostages” operation was to obtain funds for the Contras, or to free hostages held in Lebanon. Although Oliver North, for example, wrote that $12 million of the $15 million expected to be paid by Iran for the arms could be “set aside for the contras” (40) it was never established that the reason for selling arms was to obtain funding for the Contras. In fact, the Contras never did want for funds during this period. The Contras were flush with cash, and had never stopped terrorizing the people of Nicaragua. That cash, as always, was coming from drug sales (58), from the Saudis (40), from the CIA (60,61) and the U.S. government which was divert ing up to 100 million dollars earmarked for other programs, to the Contras (40,41,42)—and the provision of this assistance was not just illegal, but an impeachable act.

Rather, the facts suggest that the links between Iran and Nica ragua are much more complex and multifacted, and that the pri mary purpose in supplying offensive arms to Iran, was, to supply arms to Iran.

As noted earlier, many of the same Saudi families and orga nizations which were providing support for the terrorists who had attacked Egypt, were also providing financial support for the “freedom fighters” in Afghanistan and the Contras who were terroriz ing Nicaragua. A tangled web of motives made for common ground that linked the Saudis to Reagan-Bush.

One common motive concerned the only other superpower, in the 1980s, the Soviet Union, and involved the desire to pry away, from the Soviet orbit, Iraq, Afghanistan, and the central Asian states, which the Bush team and the Saudis wished to gobble up.

A CIA position paper in 1985 detailed this thinking, by con cluding that whichever superpower got to Iran first would be “in a strong position to work towards the exclusion of the other” so as to gain domination over the oilfields of the Middle East and Central Asian States (41). Indeed, CIA officials (41), and Reagan-Bush administration officials (41) were in agreement that by providing offensive arms to Iran, they were “on the way to something that can become a truly strategic gain for us at the expense of the Sovi ets.”

The Reagan-Bush administration’s explanation that they were illegally selling arms to Iran to get money to illegally buy arms for the terrorists waging war against the Sadinista government in Nicaragua, or to free hostages held in Lebanon, is just another in a series of endless cover ups within cover up within cover ups.

And then, on October 5, 1986, everything went terribly wrong. The secret arm’s deal began to unravel. A C123k cargo aircraft was shot down by a groundtoair missile. “10,000 pounds of small arms and ammunition, consisting mainly of AK rifles and AK am munition, hand grenades, and jungle boots’’ which was meant to be air dropped to the Contras was found in the wreckage. CIA operative, Eugene Hasenfus, the only survivor, was taken prisoner (59).

Later that same day, CIA operative, Felix Rodriguez made a phone call to the office of Vice President George Bush.

Six days later, The Washington Post broke the story (59): “Captured American Flyer to be Tried in Nicaragua. Bush is Linked to Head of Contra Aid Network.”

Bush who was gearing up to run for president at the end of Reagan’s second term, responded by lying and orchestrating a massive coverup. Bush spokesman, Marlin Fitzwater responded to the charges by stating in a press conference that: “Neither the vice president nor anyone on his staff is directing or coordinating an operation in Central America.’’

Bush’s entire career was on the line. If it could be proved that he had been directing gunrunning into Latin America, not only would he not be elected president in the upcoming election, but he could be impeached. And if he were impeached, the ensuing investigation could lead to the uncovering of almost 30 years of crimes and illegal behavior.

Repeatedly Bush proclaimed his innocence: “To say I’m run ning the operation … it’s absolutely untrue.’’

And then the dam broke and the entire “arms for hostages” deal came to light (40,41,42).

Bush, who was “involved in all the national security stuff because of his special background as CIA director,” repeatedly pleaded ignorance. “I was out of the loop” Bush whined over and over again.

President Reagan went on TV to announce: “We did not repeat did not trade weapons or anything else for hostages. Nor will we.”

As the special prosecutor (40) and the Tower Commission (41) began its investigation in the Fall of 1986, the coverup went into overdrive. Pressure, promises, bribes, and threats were made. Those intent on pursuing the investigation were threatened that secret FBI files with damaging dirt would be leaked to the press and that they’d be ruined.

Five months later, on February 26, 1987 “The President’s Special Review Board” (also known as the “Tower Commission”), praised George Bush for his “vigorous reaffirmation of U.S. oppo sition to terrorism in all forms,” and then went on to blame White House Chief of Staff Donald Reagan for the “chaos that descended upon the White House” in the IranContra affair (41).

The cover up was a success. Bush had won again.

After Bush was elected President, Texas Senator John Tower, the commission’s chairman, received his promised reward. He was appointed U.S. Secretary of Defense.

When Tower was asked if his nomination was a “payoff for the clean bill of health” he gave Bush, Tower replied that “the commission was made up of three people, Brent Scowcroft and Ed Muskie in addition to myself. I wonder what kind of payoff they’re going to get?”

Brent Scowcroft received his payoff when Bush appointed him his chief national security adviser.

Who else received a payoff? Admiral Poindexter.

Poindexter, as national security adviser, played a key role in the covert sale of U.S. armaments to the government of Iran, and the diversion of funds from the arms sales to support the contra terrorists in Nicaragua. On March 8th, 1990, Poindexter was brought to trial in Washington, D.C., and was found guilty of five criminal charges, including conspiracy, obstruction of Congress, and mak ing false statements to Congress.

Poindexter took the fall, tried to accept full responsibility in order to protect Bush and Reagan, and one year later, with the help of now President Bush, a federal appeals court panel reversed the conviction on November 15th, 1991.

Ten years later, Admiral Poindexter was hired by the new Bush administration and the Pentagon, and appointed head of DARPA, which is a counterterrorist office which will be used to spy on Americans.

–~~~~~~~~~~~~–

IRAN-IRAQ WAR

BUSH PROVIDES IRAQ WITH WEAPONS OF MASS DESTRUCTION

The “arms for hostages” explanation, as the reason for pro viding arms to Iran, was readily accepted by the general public and a gullible and compliant press, despite the patent absurdity of its premise, to wit: Iran was overcharged for weapons, and the extra money was funneled to the Contras (40,41).

Let us recall that Saudi billionaire, Adnan Khashoggi, was providing millions of dollars to support the Contras, as was the Sultan of Brunei, and the royal family of Saudi King Fahd (40). How many other sources were also kicking in cash, we don’t know though we do know that the bin Laden family was involved and that the Contras were also flush with cash thanks to the drug trade (58).

We should ask, was Bush really selling arms for the release of hostages, or was that just icing on the cake? Was the prospect of getting a few dollars of “chump change” left over after overcharg ing Iran, really the reason why Reagan-Bush sold arms to Iran?

If not, then why did Reagan-Bush sell this terrorist state of fensive weapons?

And we should ask, why would the government of Israel (40,41,63), wish to assist in the arming of a radical Islamic funda mentalist regime that was preaching “death to Israel”?

And, why would Saudi Arabia also willingly become part of this triangle when Iran’s Shiit revolution was threatening their Sunni kingdom?

There are several answers all of which center on Middle East ern and Central Asian oil, the Soviet Union, and the fact that Iran was at war with Iraq (64).

Iraq has the second largest oil reserves in the world. The Saudis believe that Iraq is a broken off part of Arabia, and they want it back. Israel believes that God promised then a huge hunk of Iraq as part of the promised land (65). And, U.S. oil companies, and the “New World Order” brotherhood of death, wanted Iraq for its oil and its strategic importance in gaining control over the energy needs of the developing world (66).

What all parties wanted in common, was for Iran and Iraq to destroy one another, but that neither should win the war.

It was the ‘ol Hegelian synthesis of controlled conflict where only the bankers, arm’s merchants, and the predators waiting on the sidelines win.

The Iran Iraq war, which began in 1980, was a losing propo sition for Iraq from the start, placing incredible economic, social, religious, and political strains on the country and its people. And, yet, Saddam Hussein started the war, and in this regard it is note worthy that he was urged on by Saudi Arabia which promised to help fund the conflict (67).

Saddam did not make the decision to invade Iran solely be cause of the promises of Saudi Arabia. Rather, he did so because of a sense of incredible vulnerability. Saddam Hussein and his Baath Party, had spent years trying to forge an Iraqi nationstate and to unify a diverse people with diverse religions, which included an almost equal number of Sunnis and Shiits (68). Saddam Hussein believed that Iran’s new Islamic revolutionary Shiit government was planning to throw his own government into chaos and destroy all he had accomplished, by encouraging an uprising among the Shiit population (67,68). The ruling families of Kuwait and Saudi Arabia also feared that Iran’s Shiit revolution might spill over into their own borders, and thus, they too felt threatened, and they fanned Saddam’s sense of paranoia (64,67).

Indeed, Iran’s new leader, the Ayatollah Khomeini, had al ready vowed revenge on Iraq, which had expelled him after fifteen years in An Najaf. The Ayatollah Khomeini also claimed that Shiits of Iraq were victims of Baathist repression. Khomeini promised to come to their aid. In April of 1980, the Iranians attempted to assas sinate Iraqi foreign minister Tariq Aziz and Latif Nayyif Jasim, the Iraqi Minister of Culture (67).

Saddam had every reason to worry, and thus launched the war preemptively. He did so during a period of Iranian weakness, the result of the overthrow of the Shah of Iran and the disintegration of the Imperial Iranian Army whose highest ranking officers had been executed following the 1979 Iranian revolution. The Ira nian armed forces were not only without effective leadership, but according to Iraqi intelligence estimates, it also lacked spare parts for their Americanmade equipment (64,67).

Saddam launched his war on September 22, 1980. Within a few weeks it looked as if Iraq would win the war. Saddam even offered to end the war. The Ayatollah Khomeini scornfully rejected his terms.

Almost all experts agree that Saddam miscalculated, that he may have been lured into a war that in the long run, he could not win. Saddam and the world didn’t know it, but Saudi Arabia, Is rael, and the Reagan-Bush administration, were also secretly and covertly backing Iran (40,41,63,69,70).

In October, a few weeks after the IraqIran war began, George Bush secretly met with Iranian officials in Paris, accompanied by Salem bin Laden and Mr. Nir, an Israeli agent (43,44). He made the Iranians an offer, that given their precarious position, they dared not refuse: Keep the Americans hostage and aid would on the way.

Tehran accepted the bribes offered by Bush and rejected Iraq’s settlement offer, as they now knew they were going to begin receiving needed spare parts and supplies. Over the next several weeks, the Iranians desperately sought to hold the line against the militarily superior Iraqi forces, as American arms, supplies, spare parts, and logistics and technological assistance began to arrive in massive amounts from unknown sources—most probably Israel (63).

In January, 1981, as Reagan and Bush took office, Iran be gan releasing imprisoned military officers, the Iranian Army sud denly began cooperating and coordinating attacks with the armed units under the control of Khomeini, and Iran began a series of increasingly effect counteroffensives (64). In 1982 and continuing until 1984, Iraq was repeatedly forced to retreat and Iran began to invade Iraqi territory.

This was made possible with the assistance of the Reagan Bush administration, via Israel (63,70) and Saudi allies, Pakistan and Algeria (71) which transferred vast quantities of U.S. made weapons and spare parts to Iran. In addition to arms, spare parts and supplies, the Reagan-Bush team also passed to the Iranians “intelligence” about the threat on Iran’s borders as well as internal threats posed by Iranian communists (41). According to the Tower Commission (41): “In 1983, the United States helped bring to the attention of Teheran the threat inherent in the extensive infiltration of the government by the communist Tudeh Party and Soviet or pro-Soviet cadres in the country. Using this information, the Khomeini government took measures, including mass executions, that virtually eliminated the pro-Soviet infrastructure in Iran.”

After the Iran-Contra scandal broke, in 1986, Reagan announced in November that his administration provided arms “to find an avenue to get Iran back where it once was and that is in the family of democratic nations” (63). Of course, Iran had never been a democratic nation.

The Tower Commission also justified the illegal provision of materials and intelligence, by echoing the claims of the Reagan Bush administration that they were trying to make friends with Iranian moderates: “a strategic opening to Iran may have been in the national interest” (40).

The Reagan-Bush administration further claimed that their efforts in Iran were designed to build ties to moderates, when in fact they were well aware that they were dealing with religious fanatics and that the weapons would go to the Revolutionary Guards, the shock troops of the mullahs (41). In August 1986, the special assistant to the Israeli prime minister briefed George Bush, telling him, “we are dealing with the most radical elements….This is good because we’ve learned that they can deliver and the moderates can’t” (41).

By the end of 1984, the Iran Iraqi war had become a war of attrition (64). Over 300,000 Iranian soldiers and 250,000 Iraqi troops had been killed, and the Iranians were now using children as weapons. According to Iranian eyewitnesses, the Iranian government rounded up thousands of orphans and street urchins, both girls and boys, gave them a “plastic key” to paradise, and wrapped them in blankets and forced them to roll over mine fields. Other witnesses tell of thousands of children, mostly boys, who were tied together with ropes, and then driven forward as human shields.

In 1986, Iran again became flush with new American made offensive weapons and supplies, as well as intelligence about the Iraqi front. Iran, flush with illegal U.S. assistance began a series of highly successful attacks, capturing large land masses in the southern regions of Iraq as well as the Iraqi oil port of Al Faw (64). CIA deputy director John McMahon remarked that this intelligence gave the Iranians “a definite edge,” which would produce “cataclysmic results” (41).

In January of 1987, Iranian units began a massive offensive into Iraqi terrorize, and almost broke Iraq’s last line of defense east of Basra. Victory was almost within their grasp (64).

However, the Israelis, the Saudis, and the American had no stomach for an Iranian victory. The goals was to bleed these nations dry. If Iraq fell, Saudi Arabia and Kuwait would be the next targets of the Islamic revolution, and Reagan had already declared, after becoming President, that “we will not permit [Saudi Arabia] to be an Iran.”

The United States now began to openly supply Iraq. In May 1987, U.S. Assistant Secretary of State Richard Murphy met with Saddam Hussein and promised him arms and assistance. He also assured Saddam that the UN would pass a mandatory arms embargo against Iran.

The strategy was pure Hegelian. A weak Iraq was in need of friends and money, and the Reagan-Bush administration and the bankers and arms merchants of Wall Street were happy to provide loans and to sell him whatever he needed. This strategy also served to pry Saddam away from the Soviet Union, thus making him more dependent on the U.S.

In truth, however, the Reagan-Bush administration, in true Hegelian tradition, had been supplying arms to Iraq since 1981, including five Boeing jetliners (72). However, to do so legally, the Reagan-Bush removed Iraq from its list of nations supporting international terrorism. The Reagan Bush team extended a $400 mil lion credit guarantee for U.S. exports to Iraq (73).

This assistance was increased in 1987, whereas all support for Iran disappeared. As a result, by late 1987 Iran had become less able to mount an effective defense against the resupplied Iraqi army and air force (64).

The Reagan-Bush team also began authorizing U.S. military attacks on Iran, including in October 1987, the destruction of Ira nian oil platforms (74).

The U.S. Navy was also “deployed aggressively and provocatively in the hottest parts of the Persian Gulf” the purpose of which was “to start fights, not to end them.” According to one commanding officer, “We behave at times as if our objective was to goad Iran into a war with us” (77).

That same year, the U.S. cruiser “Vicennes” shot down an Iranian commercial jetliner, killing all 290 people aboard. Although the Reagan-Bush administration claimed it was an accident, it was well known among Navy personnel, that the Vicennes had behaved in a “consistently aggressive” fashion, attacking neutral and non threatening Iranian targets. Because it seemed programmed to at tack, some Navy personnel referred to the ship as “Robo Cruiser” (74,76).

With U.S. assistance to Iraq, and by attacking and denying the Iranian military further assistance, the tide of the Iraqi-Iranian war began to turn. “Four major battles were fought from April to August 1988, in which the Iraqis routed or defeated the Iranians. In the fall of 1988, the Iraqis displayed in Baghdad captured Iranian weapons amounting to more than three-quarters of the Iranian armor inventory and almost half of its artillery pieces and armored personnel carriers” (77).

However, again, it was not the intention of the Reagan-Bush administration, or the Saudis or the Israelis, for Iraq to win. In 1988, Iraq and Iran were so badly bruised and battered, that in response to international pressure, they agreed to end the war.

THE WAHHABIS LUST AFTER IRAQ: THE ISLAMIC SUPERSTATE

The Iraq-Iranian war served the long-term objectives of the CIA, Wall Street, the oil men, the Bush family, Israel, and, initially, the Saudi royal family. Iraq and Iran were greatly weakened, thus reducing both not only as a potential threat to Israel and Saudi Arabia, but rendering Iraq more susceptible, in its weakened state, to someday being conquered by Israel, the U.S., or the Wahhabis of Saudi Arabia.

As detailed in chapter 7, at the end of the first world war, and with the collapse of the Ottoman Empire, Britain and France pounced on the Middle East, and divided up the spoils. They created artificial boundaries and thus new states in the Middle East. France and Britain believed that a fragmented people, ruled by leaders appointed by them, would be easier to exploit, and could be more easily forced to accept whatever terms were offered in return for their oil.

France took Syria and Lebanon, and Britain broke Arabia into three states: Iraq, Kuwait, and Saudi Arabia which was re named after king Ibn Saud. The modern borders of Saudi Arabia, Iraq, and Kuwait were established by British Imperial fiat at what became known as the Uqauir Conference.

King Ibn Saud, however, was determined to someday unify his country and to erase the artificial boundaries which created the bastard states of Kuwait and Iraq. This has been the goal of the Saudi royal family ever since.

However, the Saudi SunniWahhabis not only believe that Iraq is a broken off province but that Iraq’s secular government, led by Saddam Hussein, is an affront to God. Indeed, the Saudis have the same view as to the leaders and the peoples of many other Islamic states. It is the long term goal of the followers of the Sunni-Wahhabi school of Islam is to recapture Iraq, and to create a single unified Islamic superstate which includes not just the coun tries of the Middle East, but the world (14,15).

The Sunni-Wahhabis are advocates of “oneness” (Muwahiddun) and the creation of a single unified Islamic world and state, where all the people of the planet belong to “the one true religion” of the Sunni branch of Islam. As preached by the Sunni Wahhabis, the followers of other religions, including Jews, Christians, Hindus, and even Shiits, are heretics, apostates, and infidels, who must be forcibly converted, or killed (15).

It is the Wahhabism connection which also explains why Salem bin Laden, the Saudi king’s best friend, was playing a major role in the “arms for hostages” program and why the Saudis were willing to provide millions of dollars to the Contras as well as other terrorist groups that were attacking western targets as well as other Muslim nations. It is because of their belief in Wahhabism, that the Saudi royals and other leading Saudi families have been eager to fund terrorism, as it is their goal to overthrow non-Islamic governments, including the secular and Shiit leaders of other Islamic nations, and to covert the people of others faiths (14,15).

In this regard, not just Iraq, but Iran with its Shiit population and Shiit leadership has also been a Wahhabi target. However, prior to 1979, both nations appeared to be too strong to conquer.

In 1979, an unexpected event brought the Saudis and the Western powers even closer together and seemed to provide a pos sible solution to the Wahhabi problem of Iran and Iraq. The Shah of Iran, was overthrown and replaced by an anti-U.S. fundamentalist Shiit Muslim regime.

Whereas the U.S. lost an important ally, the Saudis now had to contend with a Shiit revolutionary revival that threatened to spread into Iraq and then into other Islamic nations including even Saudi Arabia—and the Shiite branch of Islam was something the Saudis were intent to destroy.

However, if Iraq and Iran were to go to war, then both might be bled to weakness, thereby eliminating Shiit Iran as a threat and thus making Iraq that much easier to conquer.

It is for these, and reasons related to the control of oil, that the Saudis were willing to work with the Reagan-Bush administration, and initially provide arms to Iran: The Bush team and the Saudis were hungrily eyeing Iraq’s oil fields which some day they hoped to seize. Indeed, Bush, Israel, and Saudi Arabia were all eyeing the same prize and all were happy to initially provide Iran with arms—but not enough arms to win the war with Iraq which Israel hopes to someday annex and which the Saudis hope to some day seize and covert to Wahhabism.

In this regard, the U.S., Saudi Arabia, and Israel were of one mind, which is why all three covertly provided arms and intelligence to Iran, while overtly (with the exception of Israel) providing assistance to Iraq.

It was the ‘ol Hegelian dialectic. Controlled conflict. The synthesis was that whereas in 1988 Iran and Iraq had both lost, Israel, Saudi Arabia, the oil companies and the Wall Street elite were now a few steps closer to someday achieving their long range goals: the creation of a “new world order.”

The following year, in 1989, yet another battle was won. The Soviets, bloody and bruised were forced to withdraw from Afghanistan.

The next phase of the battle for the Central Asian states, and the oilfields of Iraq, had just begun.

NOTES

1). Stephen Shlesinger & Stephen Kinzer, “Bitter Fruit: the Untold Story of the American Coup in Guatemala,” Anchor Press, 1990? Stacy May & Galo Plaza, “The United Fruit Company in Latin America,” Wash ington, National Planning Association, 1957; Alejandra Batres, “The Experience of the Guatemalan United Fruit Company Workers, 19441954: Why Did They Fail?” Texas Papers on Latin America, Paper No. 9501, University of Texas at Austin, 1995; Paul Dosal, “Doing Business with the Dictators : a Political History of United Fruit in Guatemala, 1899 1944,” SR Books, 1993; Thomas, McCann, “An American Company: the Tragedy of United Fruit,” Crown, 1976; E. Howard Hunt, “Give Us This Day,” New Rochelle: Arlington House, 1973; Audrey R. Kahin, George McT Kahin, “Subversion As Foreign Policy: The Secret Eisenhower and Dulles Debacle in Indonesia;” University of Washington Press, 1997; Vitaly, Syrokomsky, “International Terrorism and the CIA: Documents, Eyewitness Reports, Facts,” Progress Publishers, Moscow, 1983; James A. Bill, “ The Eagle and the Lion: The Tragedy of American-Iranian Relations,” Yale University Press, 1988;Fletcher Prouty, “The Secret Team: The CIA and Its Allies in Control of the U.S. and the World,” Prentice Hall, 1973; Jonathan Kwitney, “The Crimes of Patriots: A True Tale of Dope, Dirty Money & the CIA,” WW Norton, 1987; Rodney Stich, “Defrauding America: A Pattern Of Related Scandals — Dirty Secrets Of The CIA And Other Government Operations,” Diablo Western Press, 1993; William Blum, “Killing Hope: US Military and CIA Intervention Since WWII,” Common Courage Press, 1995.

2). Robinson Rojas Sandford, “The Murder of Allende and the End of the Chilean Way of Socialism,” Harper & Row, 1976; Paul M. Sweezy, “Revolution and Counter-revolution in Chile,” Monthly Review Press, 1974; “CIA plot against Allende: Operating guidance cable,” 10/16/1970. “CIA, Operating Guidance Cable on Coup Plotting, October 16, 1970.”

3) William C. Gibbons, “The U.S. Government and the Vietnam War: Executive and Legislative Roles and Relationships,” Princeton University Press, 19861989.

4). The CIA has been interfering with the nation of Iraq since the 1950s. In 1958, when the U.S.British puppet regime of Nuri Said was overthrown by an uprising of the population, and Abdul Karim Kassem, came to power in his place, the CIA began recruiting operatives from the Iraqi Baath Party, whose leaders included Saddam Hussein. Kassem was overthrown in 1963, by a CIAled Baath party coup. A CIA chief, in testifying before the Senate in the CIA’s role in the bloody coup, whimsically remarked, “The target suffered a terminal illness before a firing squad in Baghdad.” The Baath party was then given a long list of Communists and other undesirables, who were to be arrested and assassinated. How ever, the Baath party then proved to be to independent, particularly when it came to Iraq’s vast oil reserves, which is the prize the CIA, the oil men, and the Wall Street were after in the first place. The CIA thus began a program of destabilization and bribery. In 1964, Mulla Mustafa Barzani, the leader of the former Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) was paid $14 million dollars by the CIA, and was given promises of support for Kurdish independence. Kurdistan, has been broken apart and chunks had been given away to Turkey, Iran and Iraq following the close of WWII. The catch was that Mulla Mustafa Barzani and the KDP had to help over throw the ruling Iraqi Baath Party and then turn over the rights to all Iraqi oil fields to U.S. oil companies.

5). William Scobie, Observer, 11/18/90; Wolfgang Achtner, Sun day Independent, 11/11/1990; Searchlight, 11/1991; Associated Press, 11/ 13/90; John Palmer, Guardian, 10/11/90; Anarchy/Refract, 1984; Richard Norton Taylor, Guardian, 11/15/90; Time Out, 4/7/70; Charles Richards & Simon Jones, Independent, 11/16/90; d Vulliamy, Guardian, 12/5/90; Edward Lucas, Independent, 11/16/90. These terrorists groups were part of Operation Stay Behind and in Italy they were referred to as operation Gladio (the Sword). In Belgium the Stay Behind group was called SDRA 8 and regularly employed terror and several attempted coups. In 1983, in order to convince the Belgian public that a security crisis existed, Gladio operatives staged a series of seemingly random shootings, killing people on the street, at gas stations, and in supermarkets.

6) Le Nouvel Observateur, 11/1521/1998; Bill Blum, “Killing Hope;” Ali A. Jalali & Lester W. Grau, “Night Stalkers and Mean Streets: Afghan Urban Guerrillas,” Infantry, 1999;” Haji MohammadYakub, “Four Urban Bomb Attacks,” Infantry, 1999; Vladislav Tamarov, “Afghanistan Soviet Vietnam,” HRussia, 1995.

7). Yoram Schweitzer, “Osama bin Laden and the Egyptian Terror ist Groups;” Hamid Algar, “Wahhabism: A Critical Essay,” Islamic Publications International, 2002.

8). Leslie H. Gelb, “U.S. Said to Aid Iranian Exiles in Combat and Political Units,” New York Times, 3/7/1982; Farhang, “Iran-Israel Connection;” Bob Woodward, et al., “The Secret Wars of the CIA, 1981 1987,” Simon & Schuster, 1987. Starting in 1979, the CIA, working with the Saudi Royal family, and the bin Laden group’s Paris headquarters, began organizing a group in Paris called the Front for the Liberation of Iran. By 1982, the FLN was receiving $100,000 a month, The FLN was headed by Ali Amini, a CIA operative since 1953. It was Ali Amini who assisted in the 1953 CIA-backed coup which resulted in the denationalization of Iranian oil which was then grabbed up by Standard oil and others. The U.S. also provided support to Iranian terrorists groups based in Turkey, which were headed by General Bahram Aryana, the former chief of the Shah’s armed forces.

9). Yet another group, the “MEK” received financing from the bin Laden group in Paris, in 1980 or 1981. The MEK was established in the late 1960s, and participated in the 1979 Islamic revolution that led to the overthrow of Shah Mohammad Reza Pahlavi. However, as the MEK preached a brand of Islam that included Marxist ideology, and as some of its leaders were allegedly Sunnis, the Kohmeini regime began arresting and executing its leaders, and the group was driven from its bases on the Iran-Iraq border. The MEK reestablished itself in Paris, the headquarters of the bin Laden group. After the Iran-Contra scandal broke, and the U.S. began openly siding with Iraq, the MEK the moved to Iraq where it then began orchestrating terrorist attacks against Iran.

10). “World Petroleum Assessment 2000 Description and Results,”. U.S. Geological Survey, 2000; “World Factbook of the Central Intelligence Agency of the U.S.A.”

11). John J. Maresca, vice president of Unocal, in his testimony before a House of Representatives committee, reported that “the region’s total oil reserves may reach more than 60 billion barrels of oil. Some estimates are as high as 200 billion barrels,” may lie beneath the soil of Turkmenistan, Kazakhstan, Azerbaijan, and Uzbekistan.

12). J.H. Walsh, Parabolic Projection of World Conventional Oil Production Based on Year 2000 Resource Assessment of the U.S. Geo logical Survey;” John H. Walsh, “World Per Capita Oil Consumption, 19652000; “BP Statistical Review of World Energy;” 2000.

13) “Energy Annual Report. World Oil Consumption, 19802000.”

14). Ahmed Rashid, Jihad: The Rise of Militant Islam in Central Asia,” Yale Univ Press, 2002.

15). Hamid Algar, “Wahhabism: A Critical Essay,” Islamic Publications International, 2002.

16). Le Nouvel Observateur, 11/1521/1998; Bill Blum, “Killing Hope.”

17). Berliner Institut für Vergleichende Sozialforschung, Refugees from Afghanistan (1980 to 1990 ) Quelle: World Refugee Survey, 1999.

18). Kirk J. Beattie, “Egypt During the Sadat Years,” Palgrave Macmillan, 2000; Kenneth W. Stein, “Heroic Diplomacy: Sadat, Kissinger, Carter, Begin and the Quest,” Routledge, 1999.

19). Jason Hoppin, The National Law Journal, 6/12/2000.

20). Parade, “Edwin Wilson: The CIA’s Great Gatsby,” 9/18/1993. 21). U.S. Department of Defense, News, 10/8/1981; American Forces Information Services, U.S. Department of Defense, October, 1981. This well established series of events became the grist for a work of fiction, by the name of “Bright Star” (by Harold W. Coyle, Paul McCarthy) “In the not too distant future, an assassination attempt by Libyan terrorists sparks an Egyptian retaliatory raid across the borders. As the conflict intensifies, U.S. and Soviet troops are drawn into the battle. Frontline soldiers on both sides embark on daring commando raids and face horrific nerve gas attacks.”

22). Mohamed Heikal, “Autumn of Fury: The Assassination of Sadat,” Random House, 1984.

23). Jehl, Douglas, “Egyptian Doctor Believed to be bin Laden’s No. 2,” The New York Times, 9/24/2001.

23). Yoram Schweitzer, “Osama bin Laden and the Egyptian Terrorist Groups.” According to Peter Bergen, author of “Holy War, Inc.: Inside the Secret World of Osama bin Laden,” “the relationship of the al Jihad group and al Qaeda is essentially they are the same organization.” According to the U.S. State Department, AlQaeda and Islamic Jihad “officially” merged in 1998.

24). Scott Baldauf, “The Cave Man and Al-Qaeda,” Christian Science Monitor, 10/31/2001.

25). San Francisco Chronicle, 10/12/2001; United Press International, 10/12/2001.

26). Charles Brisard & Guillaume Dasquie “Forbidden Truth: U.S. Taliban Secret Oil Diplomacy and the Failed Hunt for Bin Laden,” Avalon Books, 2002.

27). Yoram Schweitzer, “Osama bin Laden and the Egyptian Terrorist Groups.”

28). AFP, Agence France Presse, 6/16/2002.

29). The Shari’a is a strictly fundamentalist version of the revealed and the canonical laws of the Sunni brand of Islam and are based on the Qur’an and the Sunnah of the Prophet (s.a.w.).Today, many radical Islamic groups raise the slogan of making the Shari’a the law of a new Islamic state.

30). Howard Schneider, “U.S. Aid Remakes Egypt,” Washington Post Foreign Service, 12/26/2000.

31). Ledenese Epistle, 1996, 1998.

32). Paddy Agnew, Irish Times, 11/15/1990,

33). The “Bin laden Brothers for Contracting and Industry,” is head quartered in Jiddahh, Saudi Arabia. However, Yeslam bin Laden heads up a portion of the group’s international activities in Geneva and Paris; Ali bin laden lives in Paris, and in the 1980s the bin Laden’s Saudi Arab Finance Corporation, was headquartered in Paris, and Salem bin Laden, as well as Saudis, Khalid Ben Mahfouz, Salam Ahmed Bogshan, Saad Khalil Al Bahjat, Taha Baksh, etc. were major shareholders of the Saudi Arab Finance Corporation which also controlled a number of other companies, and which are believed to have funneled money to various terror ist organizations. Saudi Sheikh Khalid bin Mahfouz, of the Saudi Arab Finance Corporation, has been discovered to have laundered money to finance terrorism and bin Laden’s terrorist organization.

34). Sheikh Khalid bin Mahfouz, is Osama Bin Laden’s Brother In Law, and like the bin Ladens, is also linked to George W. Bush. As deter mined following a U.S. audit of Saudi government finances, five of Saudi Arabia’s wealthiest businessmen, including National Commercial Bank (NBC) founder and chairman Khalid bin Mahfouz, transferred over $3 million dollars from a Saudi pension fund, to New York and London banks with accounts linked to terrorism (USA Today, 102899). NCB deposited the money into accounts of such Islamic charities as Islamic Relief — and Blessed Relief, where Abdul Rahman Mahfouz, Mahfouz’s son, serves on the board in Sudan, and Egyptians officials have charged that funds for supporting terrorism against Egypt has its source, in part, in the Sudan.

35). Ronald Motley, representing nine hundred families of the 9/11 victims, filed a trillion dollar lawsuit against members of the royal Saudi family, Saudi Sheikh Khalid bin Mahfouz as well as a number of Saudi banks and charities, charging them with financing Osama bin Laden and alQaeda. The lawsuit alleges that Saudi money has “for years been funneled to encourage radical antiAmericanism as well as to fund the Al Qaeda terrorists.”

36). As detailed by Ben Barber, The Washington Times, 5/7/2002, “The Saudi government gave $135 million in….16 months to” fund terrorism. The money goes to a list of 13 charities, and seven of them fund Hamas,” which the State Department lists as a terrorist organization. As detailed in The Washington Times, 8/24/2002, another Saudi charity, Al Haramain also uses “its funds to finance terrorism.

37). Kenneth Damm, the U.S. Deputy Secretary of Treasury testi fied in Congress, in May of 2002, that the Saudi-based AlHaramain Charity and a number of other Saudi-connected charities have abused its funds to finance terrorism.

38). Wall Street Journal, “Vetting the Frontrunners: From Oil to Baseball to the Governor’s Mansion,” 9/28/1999; Jonathan Beaty & S.C. Gwynne, “The Outlaw Bank: A Wild Ride Into the Secret Heart of BCCI,” Random House, 1993. See also, Wall Street Journal, 9/27/2001; Daniel Golden et al. “Bin Laden Family Could Profit From a Jump In Defense Spending Due to Ties to U.S. Bank,” Wall Street Journal, 9/27/2001.

39). Le Figaro, 10/31/2001; Charles Brisard & Guillaume Dasquie “Forbidden Truth: U.S.Taliban Secret Oil Diplomacy and the Failed Hunt for Bin Laden,” Avalon Books, 2002.

40). United States Court of Appeals for the District of Columbia Circuit Final Report of the Independent Counsel for Iran/Contra Matters Lawrence E. Welch, Independent Counsel, August 4, 1993, Washington D.C. Volume 1. Investigations and Prosecutions.

41). President’s Special Review Board, “The Tower Commission,” Bantam Books/Times Books, 1987.

42). Jonathan Marshall, Peter Dale Scott & Jane Hunter, “The Iran Contra Connection: Secret Teams and Covert Operations in the Reagan Era,” South End Press, 1987.

43). PBS Frontline, 2001; Al Martin, “Behind the Scenes in the Beltway.”

44). Gary Slick, “October Surprise: America’s Hostages in Iran and the Election of Ronald Reagan,” Random House, 1991.

45). William B. Quandt, “Saudi Arabia in the 1980s: Foreign Policy, Security, and Oil,” Brookings Institute, Washington, DC, 1981; Frank E. Vogel, “Islamic Law and Legal System: Studies of Saudi Arabia,” Brill Academic Publishers, 2000; A. M. Vasilev, Alexei Vassiliev, “The His tory of Saudi Arabia,” New York University Press, 2000.

46) The “Ikhwan,” or “Brotherhood,” is the military arm of Wahhabism. George H.W. Bush, and his son, George W. Bush, are both alumni of the “Brotherhood” the Brotherhood of Death, “Skull and Bones;” Webster G. Tarpley & Anton Chaitkin, “George Bush: The Unauthorized Biography,” The Executive Intelligence Review; Anthony Sutton, “America’s Secret Establishment: An introduction to The Order of Skull & Bones” Liberty House, New York. 1986; Ron Rosenbaum, “The Last Secrets of Skull and Bones,” Esquire Magazine, September, 1977.

47). Margaret Ramirez, “New Islamic Movement Seeks Latino Converts,” Los Angeles Times, 5/15/1999: James W. Blair Jr. “Islam in Latin America,” The Christian Science Monitor; Susan Ferriss, “Spanish Muslim mission grows in Mexico, Links to Mayan, Moorish roots sur vive centuries of oppression,” Cox Washington Bureau News Service, 8/ 12.2002; Stephen Magagnini, “A Matter of Faith: Islam is Fastest Growing Religion in the U.S.,” Sacramento Bee, 7/1/2001; Chris L. Jenkins, “Islam Luring More Latinos Prayers Offer a More Intimate Link to God,” Washington Post , 1/7/2001; “Islamic Da’wah Center of Brazil,” Sao Paulo, Safar /5/17/2001.

48). Deborah Kong, “Islam has Long and Resurging Presence in Hispanic Culture.” July, 2002.

49). Pobladores Usan Túnicas Y Turbantes: Descubren Pueblo Que No Figura En Mapa (see http://www.latinmuslims.com/ history/ pueblo.html).

50). Christopher Dickey, “With the Contras: A Reporter in the Wilds of Nicaragua, Henry Holt and Co., 1991; Robert Kagan, “A Twilight Struggle: American Power and Nicaragua, 19771990,” Simon & Schuster, 1996; Holly Sklar. “Washington’s War on Nicaragua,” South End Press, 1988; Gary Webb, “Dark Alliance: The CIA, The Contras, and the Crack Cocaine Explosion, Seven Stories Press, 1998; L. Francis Bouchey (editor), “The Real Secret War,” Council for Inter-American Security, 1987; Sam Dillon, “Comandos: The CIA and Nicaragua’s Contra Rebels;” Scott Armstrong (Editor), “The National Security Archive, The Chronology: The Documented Day by Day Account of the Secret Military Assistance to Iran and the Contras,” Warner Books, 1987.

51). Robert Kagan, “A Twilight Struggle: American Power and Nicaragua, 19771990,” Simon & Schuster, 1996; Holly Sklar. “Washington’s War on Nicaragua,” South End Press, 1988.

52). National Security Archive Electronic Briefing Book No. 27, Washington, DC.: This document and a State Department funded investigation in 1986 and 1987 details repeated instances of the murder or torture of prisoners by the Nicaraguan contras as CIA agents watched or “turned the other way.”

53). Adolf Hitler, “Mein Kampf.”

54). “Psychological Operations in Guerrilla Warfare.”

55). Sam Dillon, “Comandos: The CIA and Nicaragua’s Contra Rebels.” Peter Kornbluh and Malcolm Byrne, “The Iran Contra Scandal: The Declassified History. A National Security Archive Documents Reader,” W.W. Norton & Co.

56). National Security Decision Directive (NSDD) 138 was signed by Ronald Reagan on April 3, 1984. Although much of it remains classified, this NSDD, authorized both the CIA and the Federal Bureau of Investigation to form covert operations teams and to use military special operations forces to conduct guerrilla-style terrorist acts and preemptive operations, retaliation, expanded intelligence collection, sabotage and when necessary, killing of guerrillas in “preemptive” self-defense. States that sponsored “terrorists,” were targeted for these operations including Iran, Libya, Syria, Cuba, North Korea, Nicaragua and the Soviet Union. Other unnumbered NSDD issued in November 1984, shields these teams authorized by NSDD 138 from legal action under U.S. law if they were acting in “good faith,” as long as the teams were engaged in authorized anti-terror operations. The NSDD also provided funds of recruiting and training indigenous “preemptive self-defense teams.” In one attack, 80 civilians were murdered. An unnumbered NSDD) signed on 11/13/194, Nov. 13, 1984 provides carte blanche exemption from U.S. legal proceedings for operatives engaged in anti-terrorist activities outside the U.S. Murder, if conducted in “good faith” was legalized.

57). The Boland Amendment to the War Powers Act of 1973. Passed December 8, 1982, 1984.

58). Gary Webb, “Dark Alliance: The CIA, The Contras, and the Crack Cocaine Explosion,” Seven Stories Press, 1998.

59). The Washington Post, 11/11/1986.

60). Scott Armstrong (Editor), “The National Security Archive, The Chronology: The Documented DaybyDay Account of the Secret Military Assistance to Iran and the Contras,” Warner Books, 1987.

61). As reported in the Tower Commission Report (41) “Craig Fuller Memorandum,” July 30, 1986: “SUMMARY. Mr. Nir indicated that he had briefed Prime Minister Peres and had been asked to brief the V[ice] P[resident] by his White House contacts. He described the details of the efforts from last year through the current period to gain the release of the U.S. hostages. He reviewed what had been learned which was essentially that the radical group was the group that could deliver. He reviewed the issues to be considered—namely that there needed to be ad [sic] decision as to whether the items requested would be delivered in separate shipments or whether we would continue to press for the release of the hostages prior to delivering the items in an amount agreed to previously. 2. The VP’s 25 minute meeting was arranged after Mr. Nir called Craig Fuller and requested the meeting and after it was discussed with the VP by Fuller and North…. 14. Nir described some of the lessons learned: `We are dealing with the most radical elements…. They can deliver … that’s for sure….they can deliver and the moderates can’t.”

62). The CIA was responsible for organizing a 500 member “interdiction force” to train, arm, support, and advise the Contras. The agency established a base of operations for its Central American Task Force in Honduras, and by 1983 was spending $45 million to sustain 7,000 Contras.

63). Mansour Farhang, “The IranIsrael Connection,” in Abbas Alnasrawi and Cheryl Rubenberg, “Consistency of U.S. Foreign Policy: The Gulf War and the IranContra Affair,” Belmont, MA: AAUG, 1989.

64). Anthony H. Cordesman,” The IranIraq War and Western Security, 198487,” Jane’s Publishing Co., 1987; Mansour Farhang, “The Iran-Iraq War: The Feud, the Tragedy, the Spoils,” World Policy Journal, vol. 2, Fall 1985; Cordesman, “Iran-Iraq War,” Center for Strategic and International Studies, October 2000; John W. Amos II, “The Iraq-Iran War: Conflict, Linkage, and Spillover in the Middle East,” in Robert G. Darius, et al., “Gulf Security into the 1980s: Perceptual and Strategic Dimensions,” Hoover Institution Press, 1984.

65). Genesis 15:18 “On that day the LORD made a covenant with Abram and said, “To your descendants I give this land, from the river [ 15:18 Or [ Wadi ] ] of Egypt to the great river, the Euphrates.

66). Robert G. Darius, John W. Amos II, Ralph H.Magnus, (Editors) “Gulf Security into the 1980s: Perceptual and Strategic Dimensions,” Hoover Institution Press, 1984; Harold Brown, “Thinking About National Security,” Westview, 1983; Michael Renner, “Restructuring the World Energy Industry,” MERIP Reports, no. 120, 1/1984; William B. Quandt, “Saudi Arabia in the 1980s: Foreign Policy, Security, and Oil,” Brookings Institute, 1981.

67). Mansour Farhang, “The Iran-Iraq War: The Feud, the Tragedy, the Spoils,” World Policy Journal, vol. 2, Fall 1985.

68). Charles Tripp, “A History of Iraq,” Cambridge Univ Press, 2000.

69). Israel provided Iran with logistics support, to assist them in destroying Iraq’s newly constructed nuclear reactor. Iran launched an unsuccessful attack on the Iraqi Osirak nuclear reactor on 9/30/1980. On 6/7/1981 Israel initiated an air attack on the same Iraqi Osirak reactor, destroying it.

70). Leslie H. Gelb, “Iran Said to Get Large Scale Arms From Israel, Soviet and Europeans,” New York Times, 3/8/1982; Cordesman, “Iran Iraq War;” Benjamin BeitH allahmi, “The Israeli Connection: Who Israel Arms and Why,” Pantheon, 1987.

71). Zbigniew Brzezinski, “Power and Principle,” Farrar, Straus, Giroux, 1987.

72). Robert O. Freedman, “Soviet Policy Toward the Persian Gulf from the Outbreak of the Iran-Iraq War to the Death of Konstantin Chernenko,” in W. J. Olson (Editor) “U.S. Strategic Interests in the Gulf Region,” Westview, 1987.

73). Joe Stork & Martha Wenger, “U.S. Ready to Intervene in the Gulf War,” MERIP Reports, nos. 125/126, July-Sept. 1984.

74). Federation of American Scientists, Military Analysis Network, “Iran-Iraq War (19801988),” 1999; Francis V. Xavier “Lessons Learned: Iran-Iraq War,” Marine Corps Historical Publication, FMFRP, 0, 12/1990.

75). Gary Sick, “Failure and Danger in the Gulf,” New York Times, 7/6/1988.

76). David R. Carlson, “The ‘Vicennes’ Incident,” proceedings, U.S. Naval Institute, 9/1989.

77). Federation of American Scientists, Military Analysis Network, “Iran-Iraq War (19801988),” 1999.


–~~~~~~~~~~~~–

Chapter 7

WAHHABISM AND A LESSON IN HISTORY

tumblr_mbk6rlZp861rdlo0io1_1280

It was thirteen hundred years ago, in the seventh century AD., that the religion known as Islam arose in the Arabian peninsula (1). Arabia became the holiest of all Muslim lands, the land of Mecca. Arabia, today, is known as Saudi Arabia (1,2)—Saud being the name of King Ibn Saud who had aligned himself and his family, with Britain’s Imperial government.

With astonishing rapidity, Islam quickly spread across and conquered the Middle East, Byzantium, Persia, northern Africa, and Spain.

Islam was spread by the sword (1,2,3).

Over a thousand years ago, after driving out the polytheists and those who worshipped multiple gods and those who profaned the lands of Arabia, the prophet Muhammad declared that hencefore there shall “not be two religions in Arabia.”

And then, Arabia became the home of two Islamic religions: The Sunni Islamic religion (which claims the vast majority of followers, i.e. over 80%), and the Shiit Islamic religion which today, is the dominant religion of Iran (1,2).

The origins of this schism and the creation of two branches of Islam is in dispute. According to some versions, Islam became fragmented after the murder of Ali al-Husain, the son of Muhammad’s daughter, Fatima. It is said that Ali was murdered after a Jewish convert to Islam, claimed prophethood, and then declared that Ali was Allah (in the flesh). Ali (and others) believed these declarations to be sacrilegious and had the man, along with seventy others who attributed divinity to him, burned alive (1,4).

In a related version, internal squabbling developed when two of Muhammad’s original followers, Talha and Az-Zubair saw Ali as a rival to their leadership. Ali believed, that since he was the grandson of Muhammad that he had the right to leadership, and to claim the caliphate (1,4).

Talha and Az-Zubair rejected that, and preached that anyone who is pious, and accepted as a devout Muslim can potentially be a caliph.

Ali mobilized his forces to fight them, in order to claim what he believed to be his birthright. Those who followed Ali were called “Shiits” (1,4).

The Shiits rejected the leadership of Talha and Az-Zubair as they believed the caliphate could only be held by descendants of Muhammed through his daughter Fatimah, beginning with Ali alHusain. According to the Shiits only the descendants (Imam) of Muhammed could become the caliph, because Muhammed and thus his descendants, were saintly and divinely appointed (4).

Ali was defeated and beheaded. However, his followers refused to follow Talha and Az-Zubair, and thus Shi’ism became an independent entity with a distinctive identity.

As Ali was the loser and his followers defeated, Sunni Islam became the dominant sect, and Shiits became the minority.

Although Sunnis and Shiits share the same Koran, they differ in regard to its interpretation and application (1,4,5). Sunnis take the Koran literally, as meaning exactly what it says. Shiites believe it is permissible to interpret the text and that their Imams can expand on it.

In Arabia, the home of Mecca, the Sunni branch of Islam is thus the more conservative. Since 800 AD, there has been an increasing emphasis on strictly obeying the authority of traditional doctrines. The Sunnis believe in the unquestioning adoption of previous authority, i.e. taqlid (“tradition”). New interpretations to fit the times or new circumstances (bida’ = innovation) is strictly forbidden (5).

According to the Sunni branch, God (Allah) is served by worshipping Him by what He prescribed. He is not served by innovation.

This belief system soon became known as the creed (or school) of Ahmad Ibn Hanbal. Ahmad Ibn Hanbal, the imam of Baghdad, was a Muslim jurist and theologian who lived and taught during the years 780-855. He was also the medieval founder of the most rigorous school of Islamic law. It was his disciples who founded the fourth major Sunni school of jurisprudence, the Hanbali (6).

Ibn Hanbal based his teaching on hädith traditions (6). The hädith are a collection of the traditions of Muhammad, the Prophet of Islam, including his sayings and deeds. The hadith also include his tacit approval of what was said or done in his presence (7).

Ibn Hanbal taught that the Koran was the uncreated word of God. He advocated a literal interpretation of the Revealed Text. Rational or dialectical attempts to dissect the meaning of the Koran, Ibn believed, would only lead to error and sin. He taught that only God could understand the Divine mystery and no one should attempt to interpret, dissect, analyze, or search for a deeper truth, beyond the obvious and literal meaning found in the words of the Koran (1,4,6).

This view continued to be championed and codified over the next four hundreds years. Taqi al-Din Ibn Taymiyya (1263-1328), was the leading conservative or traditionalist voice of the Hanbali School of Islamic thought in the Middle Ages. He preached that the purpose of human life is not to know God. Life’s purpose is not to speculate about God. Nor is the goal to love God. The purpose of human life is to serve God through worship and obedience (1,4).

The school of Ibn Hanbal and that of Taqi al-Din Ibn Taymiyya, inspired what became the Wahhabi school of Islam, which was led by Muhammad Ibn Abd al-Wahhab (1703-1792) in the late 18th century (1,4,5).

Because of wars, the repeated crusades by the Catholic West, and the battles fought with the Mongols of the East, as well as internal strife between Sunni and Shiits and the numerous rival Caliphs, the Muslim peoples had become fragmented and were now battling among themselves. Instead of Islam, some Arabs were even worshipping rocks, trees, caves, and the moon and the stars.

Muhammad Ibn Abd al-Wahhab saw it as his mission to unify the various factions and to recreate a single, unified, Islamic state. This became known as the “Wahhabi” movement: “those who advocate oneness” (Muwahiddun).

In the late 1700s, Muhammad Ibn Abd al-Wahhab formed an alliance with Muhammad Ibn Saud, a local war lord. Together they would lead a militant Islamic fundamentalist revival movement in Arabia (1,2,5). They called themselves Muwahiddun and demanded a strict monotheism based, in part, on the Islamic doctrines of Ibn Hanbal and Taqi al-Din Ibn Taymiyya.

The Wahhabis, now led by Muhammad Ibn Saud, went on a rampage against Shiits, Sufis, and all those deemed unfaithful to the Wahhabis’ strict interpretation of the Sunna of the Prophet Muhammad. Heretics and apostates were tortured and killed if they refused to accept the Wahhabi’s faith. Ibn Abd al-Wahhab and Ibn Saud had declared holy war (jihad) on other Muslims and neighboring Arab tribes (1,2,5).

As preached by the Wahhabis, the customs and community of Muhammad and his followers at Medina are the only acceptable models for behavior, and all Muslims must adhere to these models and avoid “objectionable innovations” (bida’).

Even the structure and architecture of homes, Mosques, and graveyards had to conform to the Wahhabis’ brand of Sunni Islam (5). In 1802, the Wahhabis captured Karbala in Iraq and destroyed the tomb of the Shia Imam Husayn. In 1803 the Wahhabis captured Mecca and Medina. The tomb of the Prophet in Medina was attacked. Even minarets and funeral markers were destroyed. Religious police, called mutawi’oon (“enforcers of obedience”) were also set loose on the people and charged with maintaining Wahhabi moral order.

In 1901 Saudi amir Abd al-Aziz al-Saud captured Riyadh. Al-Saud soon gained control over the entire Arabian peninsula, at which point the Wahhabis went on a rampage smashing the tombs of Muslim saints and imams, and destroying the tomb of the Prophet’s daughter Fatima (1,2,5).

ARABIA IN PIECES

At the end of the first world war, and with the collapse of the Ottoman Empire, Britain and France pounced on the Middle East, and divided up the spoils. They created artificial boundaries and thus new states in the Middle East, as they believed that by fragmenting the Arab peoples they would be easier to dominate and control (2,8).

Although the Arabs had collaborated with the British, all war-time promises were scrapped at the urging of big oil companies in the name of “national security.” Thus, input from Arab leaders was not taken into consideration when Britain and France began creating new, artificial states in the Middle East.

Insofar as the oil men were concerned, a fragmented people, ruled by leaders appointed by France and Britain, would be easier to exploit, and could be more easily forced to accept whatever terms were offered in return for their oil. A single, powerful independent Arab state in the Middle East would be dangerous as the oil companies might be forced to pay oil royalties that would dip into their profits (8).

France took Syria and Lebanon, and Britain broke Arabia into three states: Iraq, Kuwait, and Arabia (2,10). Each state was then given its own ruler, who in turn owed their positions to France and Britain. Kuwait was handed to the al-Sabah family, the Hashemite King Hussein was awarded Jordan, and Arabia was given to the Saud family. Arabia was then renamed after King Abdul Aziz bin Abdul Rahman Al Saud (Ibn Saud).

Ibn Saud was not pleased by the outcome. The division of Arabia into three artificial states was not what the British had promised. Ibn Saud sought to convince British High Commissioner, Sir Percy Cox, to change his mind.

As detailed by Glenn Frankel and Harold Dickson (10), the British military attaché to the region, British High Commissioner Sir Percy Cox met with Saud in a 1922 conference in Baghdad: The meeting went on for five grueling days with no compromise in sight. Finally, one night in late November Cox, summoned Sheik Abdul-Aziz Ibn Saud, to his tent, and then explained the facts of life as the British carved up the remnants of the defeated Ottoman empire. Cox, in no uncertain terms, laid down the law and told Saud that he, Sir Percy Cox, would make the final decisions as to the boundaries.

“This ended the impasse. Ibn Saud almost broke down and pathetically remarked that Sir Percy was his father and mother who made him and raised him from nothing to the position he held and that he would surrender half his kingdom, nay the whole, if Sir Percy ordered.”

Thus, the modern borders of Saudi Arabia, Iraq, and Kuwait were established by British Imperial fiat at what became known as the Uqauir Conference (8, 9,10).

King Ibn Saud, however, was determined to someday unify Arabia and to erase the artificial boundaries which created Kuwait and Iraq. Saud not only lusted after Iraq and Kuwait, but the southern states of the Soviet Union, whose populations were predominantly Muslim. Ibn Saud dreamed of spreading Sunni-Wahhabi control over this region, thus creating an even greater Islamic state which would be under the domination of the Saud family (3,5). In 1922, however, it was an impossible dream.

That changed in 1938, when huge deposits of oil were discovered beneath the ground. Ibn Saud was to become rich beyond his dreams, and his dreams included the Wahhabism ideal of a super-Islamic state that encompassed Iraq and the southern states of the Soviet Union (3,5).

Others too, shared some of those dreams, including Adolf Hitler, and the Rockefellers and their associates such as Prescott Bush and the Harrimans. The future director of the CIA, Allen Dulles, who worked as a lawyer for Prescott Bush, the Rockefellers, and Harrimans, and assisted them in establishing and covering up their extensive business partnerships with the Nazis (11), went to work establishing several interlocking financial networks between IG Farben, Rockefeller’s Standard Oil and the ruling family of Saudi Arabia, the House of Saud. Dulles played a significant role in the formation of the Arabian-American Oil Company (ARAMCO), the principle American partners of which were Standard Oil, Mobile, and Texaco (12).

THE SAUDI-BIN LADENS

The bin Laden family, were also part of the equation, as they had already formed a very close relationship with the house of Saud, in the early 1930s. Specifically, in 1931, Sheik Mohammed bin Laden, who had immigrated from South Yemen to Saudi Arabia around 1901, was awarded a contract to construct a royal palace for King Ibn Saud. Saud was so pleased with the work that he gave bin Laden an exclusive contract to renovate the holy of holies: Mecca. Soon the bin Ladens and only the bin Ladens were granted the exclusive rights to perform all construction that was of religious significance, including restoration of the holy places in Jerusalem (13).

The work of the bin Ladens was not limited to palaces, tombs, temples, and mosques, but oil-related construction projects. When ARAMCO was formed, the bin Ladens were part of the deal. The bin Ladens were the official contractor for the house of Saud (13).

The bin Ladens have had a very close relationship with the Saud family which has been maintained for over 70 years. It is said that Sheik Mohammed bin Laden was one of King Saud’s closest friends—a friendship has been passed down from generation to generation (13).

In addition to the Rockefellers et al., in the 1930s, the Saudis also cultivated a “friendship” with the Nazis and achieved an understanding with Adolf Hitler, as both were eyeing the same prize: the Caspian Basin, and the southern states of the Soviet Union. As Hitler stated in Mein Kampf (14): If we speak of soil in Europe today, we can primarily have in mind only Russia and her vassal border states.”

SAUDI NAZIS

Hitler wanted “living space” and “oil.” And, he planned that upon conquering the Soviet Union, that Russia would be “divided up into individual states with governments of their own.” King Ibn Saud would be an ally in this campaign (15). Indeed, Hitler explicitly promised to Ibn Saud and his representatives that: “In this struggle which will decide the fate of the Arabs I can now speak as a man dedicated to an ideal and as a military leader and a soldier. Everyone united in this great struggle who helps to bring about its successful outcome, serves the common cause and thus serves the Arab cause…. The situation is as follows: We are conducting the great struggle to open the way to the North of the Caucasus…during the struggle… we will reach the Southern Caucasus…then I would like to issue a declaration; for then the hour of the liberation of the Arabs will have arrived.”

Hitler, however, was not just speaking to the Arabs, but to his partners, the oil companies, the Rockefellers, the Harrimans, the Bush family, as well as the Sunni-Wahhabi clan of Saudi Arabia. Indeed, the Nazis were also in business with Bush, Rockefeller, et al., (see chapter 3), who in turn, would go into business with the Saud family, thus creating an international axis joining Nazi Germany with Saudi Arabia, and Bush, Rockefeller, and thus big oil. Indeed, all had their eyes on the same prize:

“Our intelligence sources believe that the most important event of this period was the alliance between American oil companies and Saudi Arabia. It was the indispensable precondition for the war and the Nazi holocaust” (16).

The Nazis wanted oil, sought world domination, and supported mass extermination and terrorism. Standard oil wanted oil and funneled money to Himmler’s SS and supported terrorism (Chapter 2). And the Wahhabis, like the Nazis, were seeking world domination through mass conversion to Sunni-Wahhabism, and failing that, the mass extermination of those who resisted (3,5). And all had their eyes on the oil-rich southern Caucuses, the Caspian basin, and the southern Asian underbelly of the Sovet Union.

Thus, in the 1930s and continuing into the 1940s, the royal family of Saudi Arabia, Bush and associates, the CIA, and American Oil formed an unholy alliance with a terrorist (Nazi) regime (11,17), and part of the mix was the bin Laden family (13).

At the close of World War II, the United States government discovered what the oil companies already knew. A report issued by the U.S. State Department in 1945 described Saudi Arabia and its oil resources as “a stupendous source of strategic power, and one of the greatest material prizes in world history” (18).

Thus, the needs of the Saudi royal family, and the need to protect this “stupendous prize” became of paramount concern to the U.S. government. In 1950, President Truman wrote a letter to King Saud in which he said, “No threat to your kingdom could occur which would not be a matter of immediate concern to the United States.”

Middle Eastern policy became centered on Saudi Arabia, and the Saudi royal family who could do no wrong.

Ibn Saud and other local sheiks became rich and powerful men.

The Arabian people, however, remained ignorant, uneducated, impoverished, and thus easily controlled. In 1946, Ibn Saud spent $2 million just to maintain the upkeep of the garages which housed his three dozen luxury automobiles. By contrast, the Saudi government spent $150,000 on education (19).

THE SAUDI—MULTI-BILLIONAIRES

In 1922, as noted, Arabia was split apart into separate states. King Ibn Saud, like his ancestors, was also a Wahhabi and an advocate of Muwahiddun (oneness). He was determined to someday unify his country and to erase the artificial boundaries which created the bastard states of Kuwait and Iraq. And, he and his family were determined to spread the Wahhabi movement to every corner of the globe in order to create a single, unified, Islamic state (3,5) — which, of course, would be ruled by his family.

Ibn Saud was succeeded by his son, the crown prince, Saud bin Abdul Aziz (King Saud) who reigned from 1953 to 1964. With the wealth pouring into his family’s coffers, King Saud began establishing ministries whose duties would include the export of the Sunni-Wahhabi brand of Islam to other nations. During his reign, the King Saud University was opened in Riyadh (2).

In 1960, Western hegemony was rocked to the core following the formation of OPEC (Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries). OPEC was formed at a meeting held on September 14, 1960 in Baghdad, Iraq, by five Founder Members: Iran, Iraq, Kuwait, Saudi Arabia and Venezuela. Control over oil from the Middle East was wrestled away from the big oil companies. However, the big oil corporations were content to go along as they continued to control the distribution and marketing of oil. Indeed, it was well recognized that if OPEC increased the price of oil, then American owned oil would also go up in price (19).

Riches beyond belief began pouring into Saudi Arabia.

In 1962, the Muslim World League was founded in Saudi Arabia for the specific purpose of exporting Wahhabism throughout the world (3,5,20).

In 1964, Faisal bin Abdul Aziz (King Faisal) became the third king of Saudi Arabia, reigning from 1964 to 1975. Faisal was a man wise to the ways of the world, having served as a successful general in the 1920s, Minister of Foreign Affairs in the 1930s and then Prime Minister under King Saud (2).

The huge surge in the price of oil following the 1973 ArabIsraeli war, made not just oil companies, but the royal family of Saudi Arabia incredibly wealthy. Faisal and over fifty of the patriarchs became billionaires (19). By the mid-1990s, over 680 billion dollars of Saudi money would be invested in the U.S. economy.

Faisal was dedicated to serving the Wahhabi ideals, and this, he believed could be best achieved by forming alliances with the rulers and the up and coming leaders of other countries, such as the United States (20). Faisal knew that the road to success was paved with gold, black gold (19), and that most men, no matter how “honorable” or “distinguished” had a price and could thus be bought and sold like whores. Faisal began buying friends and influence in America and elsewhere, “friends” who could be counted on for assistance or to look the other way.

The Bush family, with their outstretched hands, eagerly stepped up to the plate.

This incredible wealth also meant huge amounts of money were now available to fund Wahhabi missionary movements and Wahhabi centers of learning throughout the Muslim world.

Millions of dollars were spent on developing Islamic colleges and seminaries throughout the Islamic world as well as in the Americas and the European states. The Wahhabis began supporting Islamist fundamentalist movements in Egypt, Pakistan, Afghanistan, Iraq, the central Asian states of the Soviet Union (Turkmenistan, Kazakhstan, Azerbaijan, and Uzbekistan), Western China, Malaysia, Indonesia, East Africa, and within the growing Muslim communities of Europe, Britain, and the Americas (3,5,20).

The Saudis also had the wealth to export their brand of Sunni Islam to other parts of the world through murder and terror. Wahhabism would be spread by the sword (3,5,20).

Terror, of course, had long been an instrument of the CIA and a succession of U.S. governments and Presidents. Insofar as their goals were congruent and compatible, the Saudis and the CIA, the oil companies, and the Wall Street elite, were happy to partner together in murder, terror and crime.

This partnership, which has its roots firmly entrenched in Nazi Germany, was given renewed emphasis when Khalid bin Abdul Aziz (King Khalid) became the fourth King of Saudi Arabia, reigning from 1975 to 1982. King Khalid, however, had a serious heart condition, and he was assisted in these Wahhabi-related endeavors by Fahd bin Abdul Aziz who, in 1982, became King Fahd, “Custodian of the Two Holy Mosques” (2).

It was during the co-reign of these two monarchs, that the bin Ladens became business partners with the Bush family. The Bush clan also forged relations with other Saudi families who would later play a significant role in financing and aiding the 9/11 terrorist attack on America.

BUSH-LADENS

With the election of Jimmy Carter, in 1976, George H. W. Bush (the director of the CIA) would soon be out of a job. George H.W. Bush, immediately began scouring the country, and other nations, for financial and other support, as he intended to run for the presidency in 1980.

That same year (1976), CIA director Bush personally recruited James R. Bath into the CIA (21). According to Bath business associate Charles W. “Bill” White: “Bath told me that he was in the CIA. He told me he was recruited by George H. W. Bush himself in 1976.”

James R. Bath, CIA operative, and friend of the Bush family, “was named a trustee for Sheik Salem bin Laden of Saudi Arabia. Bath’s job was to handle all of bin Laden’s North American investments and operations” (22).

James Bath also had the good fortune to become the representative of yet another rich and influential Saudi family, that of Khalid bin Mahfouz, the brother-in-law of Osama bin Laden (23).

Investing in the family of a man who might soon be president, made good business sense to the bin Ladens and other Saudis, and James R. Bath, invested $50,000 in the younger Bush’s first company, Arbusto Energy, even though it was nearly bankrupt with no hope of making a buck (23,24). These and other funds were provided by the bin Ladens and the Mahfouz families. Indeed, “most of Bath’s investments….were really fronts for Mahfouz and other Saudis connected with the Bank of Credit and Commerce (BCCI)” (24) as well as the bin Ladens (22).

James R. Bath was well connected to and trusted by the Bush family, having served not only as a CIA-operative, but in the Texas Air National Guard with George W. Bush (23). This friendship was apparently maintained during those periods when George W. was constantly drunk, snorting cocaine, as well as AWOL from his unit (25).

Over the next two decades the Bush family would continue to sell themselves to the Saudis and bin Ladens. Indeed, one he became vice-president and then President, an assortment of Saudi terrorists, crooks, gangsters and murderers eagerly lined up buy influence and to invest in the Bush family during the 1980s and beyond (21-25,26).

For example, Bin Laden brother-in-law, Sheik Mahfouz, the NCB banker for Saudi billionaire financier Abdullah Bakhsh (and David Edwards—a close friend of Bill Clinton who was also representing Bakhsh’s U.S. interests), arranged for Bakhsh to purchase 17% of another Bush company, Harken Energy, in 1987 (26). Harken was struggling with debt, and like Arbusto before it, was in danger of going bankrupt.

Bush, in a deal that has been described as classic, illegal, “insider trading,” dumped most of his stock before it tanked (27). Bush, and his Harken Energy company were desperately in need of a cash, and the Saudis stepped up to the plate and pitched him $25 million (26).

Talet Othman, a Palestinian representative of Bakhsh was also given a seat on Harken’s board of directors whose members included George W. Bush—the son of vice president, soon to be President George H.W. Bush.

It was soon thereafter that George W. Bush’s nearly bankrupt Harken Energy, was given a drilling contract with Bahrain. Money began pouring in (25,26).

The Saudis bought more than board membership, but a seat at President George H. W. Bush’s White House foreign policy table (23,26). In exchange for bailing out his son, George H.W. Bush also sold these men the right to help determine U.S. foreign policy.

In 1990, Othman, acting as a representative of Mahfouz, Bakhsh, and the Saudi royal family) along with 15 other Saudis, began attending White House meetings with the President George H.W. Bush and National Security Advisor Brent Scowcroft, to discuss not only Middle East policy, but Iraq (23,25). Three of these meetings took place during the period just before and after Iraq invaded Kuwait.

Although Saddam Hussein didn’t know it, the Saudis and the Bush men were plotting the demise of Iraq as an independent nation.

IRAQ: THE GULF WAR

From 1980 to 1988, as the Afghan Mujahideen battled the Soviets, the Iraqi and Iranian armies were also slaughtering one another in a war that seemed to be without end.

The war between Iran and Iraq, which took over 1 million lives, was yet another manifestation of the Hegelian ideal: controlled conflict; or, in other words: “Lets you and him fight!”

Bankers loaned money to Saddam, knowing that if Iraq lost the war and defaulted, that U.S. taxpayers would pick up the bill. Defense contractors sold Iraq weapons that were paid for by U.S. backed loans.

The Hegelian synthesis, however, required that neither side win, and that both sides lose by nearly bleeding themselves to death in the ensuing war.

Finally, in 1988, a cease fire was agreed to, and Saddam turned his attention to settling old scores with the Kurds. Two of the largest Kurdish parties, the KDP (Kurdistan Democratic Party) and the PUK (Patriotic Union of Kurdistan) had collaborated with Iran during the war. Saddam murdered 200,000 Kurds in retaliation, with the assistance of the Reagan-Bush administration who provided chemical and biological weapons (39,40), including “19 containers of Anthrax bacteria” (39)

Indeed, all manner of advanced biological weapons were shipped to Iraq between 1988 and 1990, some of which was supplied by the American Type Culture Collection company, located near Fort Detrick, MD, the site of the US Army’s high security germ warfare labs” (39).

In return for U.S. assistance, Saddam agreed to allow the CIA and government scientists to study the effects of biological warfare on large population centers. With U.S. help and assistance, Saddam used biological weapons on the Kurds whose two main political parties, the PUK and the KDP, had backed Iran during the war.

It was not just biological weapons that the Reagan-Bush team made available to Saddam, but “weapons of mass destruction.”

Bush was the point man in dealing with Saddam, and at his urgings, the Reagan-Bush administration provided Saddam with advanced weapons, technology, military training, and the scientific know-how and the aid to develop a wide array of biological and chemical weapons, such as Sarin gas and military grade anthrax (39,40).

In 1988 and 1989, the Bush administration also approved licenses to U.S. firms to sell biological products to the Iraqi Atomic Energy Agency. In July 1988—two months after Saddam used chemical weapons to wipe out the Kurdish village of Halabja—the California-based Bechtel Corp. was awarded a contract to build a petrochemicals plant which would enable Iraq to produce mustard gas and fuel-air explosives. With the assistance of the Bush administration, U.S. businesses created a virtual “Saddam lobby” to increase weapons sales to Iraq (40).

U.S. firms also sold almost $800 million in “dual use” aircraft—ostensibly to be used for civilian purposes, but easily convertible to military use, as well as electronics equipment to Iraqi missile-producing plants. In fact, George H.W. Bush and his allies in the defense and banking industries, made it possible for Saddam to continue building up his war machine right up until August 1990, when Saddam invaded Kuwait (39,40,41,42).

As revealed by the Los Angeles Times (41) the administration of President George H.W. Bush signed a number of “National Security Decision Directives in 1989 ordering closer ties with Baghdad and paving the way for $1 billion in new aid. Secretary of State James Baker, after meeting with Iraqi foreign minister Tariq Aziz in October 1989, intervened personally to support U.S. government loans guarantees to Iraq.”

Of course, it must be pointed out that what Bush and Baker were guaranteeing is that U.S. tax payers would bail out any banks which provided loans, should Iraq be unable to pay, or if Iraq was subsequently destroyed—such as following a war with the United States.

As reported by Ted Koppel and ABC News Nightline (42) “It is becoming increasingly clear, that George Bush, operating largely behind the scenes throughout the 1980s, initiated and supported much of the financing, intelligence, and military help that built Saddam’s Iraq into the aggressive power that the United States ultimately had to destroy.”

–~~~~~~~~~~~~–

THE BANK OF CRIMINALS & CUTTHROATS INCORPORATED: BCCI

In the late 1980s, Bush also used his relationship with the Bank of Credit and Commerce International (BCCI), and the Banca Nacional del Lavoro (BNL) to help Iraq acquire funds and weapons. These banks, thanks to Bush, served as paymaster and provided Saddam with loans that would enable him to create a huge army that the U.S., in 1991, would fight and destroy (21,24).

Among their many sordid activities, George H.W. Bush, and his father, Prescott Bush, were also bankers—and banks are perfect for laundering funds including those obtained through the illegal drug trade or those destined to support terrorism or terrorist regimes. One of the owners of BCCI included powerful Saudi banker, Khaled bin Mahfouz, also known as the “king’s treasurer.” Mahfouz owned 20% of BCCI stock during the Reagan-Bush ad

banker, Khaled bin Mahfouz, also known as the “king’s treasurer.” Mahfouz owned 20% of BCCI stock during the Reagan-Bush administration. Funds from BCCI were used not only to arm Iraq but the terrorist organization of Abu Nidal (24).

BCCI was in fact a criminal enterprise, a corrupt global banking empire operating in 73 nations. BCCI clients included the Medellin drug cartel, Panama dictator Manuel Noriega, and Khun Sa—the heroin kingpin in Asia’s Golden Triangle (24).

BCCI was thus a large conduit of illegal funds, and BCCI was also being used to “loan” money to Saddam Hussein—money that U.S. tax payers would have to repay if Hussein defaulted.

In 1988, however, the entire criminal enterprise began to crumble, and BCCI as well as the Banca Nacional del Lavoro became implicated in the largest bank-fraud case in U.S. history (21,24).

The BCCI scandal soon enveloped the Bush family (43). Neil Bush, brother of Jeb and George W., became implicated in the pillaging and subsequent failure of the Silverado Savings and Loan of Denver, Colorado, which went bankrupt and had to be seized by federal regulators during 1988. Not only had Neil Bush lost $1.6 billion which would be repaid by tax payers, he had illegally received a $1.25 million line of credit and a $100,000 personal loan (never repaid) from two local land speculators who were very prominent in the Republican Party. In return Neil Bush’s Silverado Savings and Loan lent $235 million to these two men, and the money was also never repaid. Again, the tax payers were required to foot the bill (24,43).

Neil was soon ordered to testify, under oath, before a congressional committee probing fraud in the S & L banking industry (43).

Soon the head of the Bush crime family and his intimate associates were implicated in not just the S & L crisis, but in the criminal enterprise known as BCCI.

As was the Bush custom, a coverup was immediately put into place, and administration officials, claiming “national security” began interfering with the investigation.

William von Raab, director of the US Customs, reported that top Reagan-Bush officials, including Secretary of the Treasury, James Baker, had hindered and sabotaged his efforts to investigate BCCI (24,44).

Fortunately for Bush, before the scandal broke, he appointed his cousin and Skull and Bones alumni John Walker, to be the assistant secretary of the Treasury for enforcement. John Walker would have the primary responsibility for conducting any and all investigations into the BCCI scandal.

Yet another Bush “cover-up artist” was appointed to the BCCI investigation, Robert Mueller (44,45) the same Robert Mueller who would be appointed by a second Bush administration to head the FBI and who would be accused by FBI veterans of a “cover up” of FBI complicity in the 9/11 tragedy.

Mueller was initially installed in the Department of Justice in 1986. During the second term of the Reagen-Bush administration, Mueller helped “investigate” the Iran-Contra scandal, in which it had been discovered that top Reagan-Bush officials had been selling arms to the terrorist regime of Iran, in exchange for cash that could be funneled to terrorists who were trying to overthrow the Sadinista government in Nicaragua. Mueller’s duties, it has been charged, was to coverup the involvement of George H.W. Bush (44).

When G.H.W. Bush was elected President, Robert Mueller was called upon again. He was appointed chief of the Justice Department’s criminal division. His duties now included “investigating” the BCCI scandal. However, as was the case with IranContra (44), Mueller was accused by many critics, including democratic Senator Christopher Dodd, then Chairman of the Senate Foreign Relations Committee, of having shredded documents that would have implicated Bush and other senior Bush officials in illegal BCCI transactions.

A number of critics including the American Free Press (45), former US Navy Lt. Commander, Office of Naval Intelligence, Al Martin, and members of congress, and the Federation of American Scientists have either implied or directly accused Mueller, as well as the CIA, of purposefully undermining the BCCI investigation.

In a detailed report by the Federation of American Scientists (46), it was concluded that “ Under Assistant Attorney General Mueller… the Department sought to impede the investigations of others through a variety of mechanisms, ranging from not making witnesses available, to not returning telephone calls, to claiming that every aspect of the case was under investigation in a period when little, if anything, was being done” (46).

Similar to statements he would make following the 9/11 terrorist attack on America, Mueller responded to his critics by stating in testimony before the Senate, that “At no time, to my knowledge, has anyone from the CIA, or any agency, attempted to obstruct or interfere with the Department of Justice’s investigation and prosecution of BCCI.”

Nevertheless, the Justice Department was later forced to admit that it had committed “critical strategic errors.” As pointed out by the Federation of American Scientists, these errors were “compounded by the Justice Department’s attempts to hinder other legitimate investigative efforts, and by the Justice Department’s inability to admit that it had made any of these mistakes” (46).

As summed up by the Federation of American Scientists, “the US Attorney’s office chose to bring…a limited, money-laundering case against the bank in Florida and indicted several mid-level BCCI officials, throwing out a possible Racketeering Influenced and Corrupt Organizations (RICO) case that would have enabled it to have gone after all of BCCI’s assets in the United States… The result was that the Justice Department permitted BCCI… to continue its worldwide criminal activity… the Justice Department [gave] the public impression that it was aggressively moving against BCCI, at a time when it was doing very little concerning the bank.”

Like Iran-Contra, the BCCI “cover up” was successful. Although others went to prison, John Walker, Robert Mueller and their accomplices, were unable to find any evidence to implicate Bush, Baker, or any other members of their crime family (24,46).

A lot of Bush cronies, however, had lost money and they were eager to recoup their losses. Bush rose to their rescue by proposing a Savings & Loan bailout that would require U.S. taxpayers to pony up $500 billion (24). One of the beneficiaries of this bail out, was Khaled bin Mahfouz and members of the Saudi royal family (24).

In the late 1990s, Khaled bin Mahfouz would again go into business with Bush and Reagan-Bush cabinet members, including James Baker (former Secretary of the Treasury), and Frank Carlucci (former deputy director of the CIA, and Secretary of Defense) investing huge sums of money in the Carlyle Group, a defense-industry investment group and whose chairman is former CIA deputy director, Frank Carlucci. In August of 2002, Khaled bin Mahfouz, along with 3 Saudi princes, would be named in a trillion dollar lawsuit filed by families of some of the victims of the 9/11/2001 terrorist attack on America.

THE HEGELIAN GAME: IRAQ

In the late 1980s, Bush and team were still playing the great Hegelian game. Because Iraq was rearming, Saudi Arabia would have to do the same. However, whereas the U.S. tax payers would foot the Iraqi armaments bill, thus making Bush banking and defense industry associates very rich, Saudi Arabia would pay cash.

The Iraq-Iranian war served the long-term objectives of the CIA, Wall Street, the oil men, the Bush family, Israel, as well as the Saudi royal family. However, by rearming Iraq, with U.S. weapons replacing Soviet arms (28,41,42,47), the Saudis too were forced to purchase arms as was Israel, because a strong Iraq was not what they had been striving for (28).

The United States was willing to accommodate the needs of all concerned throwing in the added bonus that the U.S. would also protect Saudi Arabia and other Gulf states, if in return, the U.S. was able to increase its military presence in the gulf and could use Saudi Arabia as a base of operations in the future (28,48).

Saudi Arabia was agreeable and spent nearly $50 billion building a Gulf-wide air defense system to U.S. specifications. The U.S. Army Corps of Engineers also constructed a $14 billion network of military facilities across the desert sands of Saudi Arabia, all of which were designed to accommodate U.S. forces (49).

From the perspective of the U.S. the Iran Iraq war followed by the arms buildup in the Gulf, was just a prelude to further military expansion into the Middle East (48,49). Although Saddam Hussein didn’t know it, the U.S. was preparing to attack Iraq in order to serve the interests of Saudi Arabi, Kuwait, and big oil.

It had been U.S. policy since the 1950s to protect Saudi Arabia. This protective policy, in regard to Saudi Arabia, was reaffirmed in 1979, when President Carter announced his “Carter Doctrine” which stated that because of U.S. dependency on Persian Gulf oil for its material wealth, the U.S. was required to use military force to maintain its control over the region. Again, this had been U.S. policy since 1950s. The only difference was that by 1979, competing imperialist powers such as Britain and France had already been driven from the Gulf. That left only the Soviet Union which had been supporting and arming Iraq.

As detailed in the previous chapter, during the 1980s, Iraq was the designated proxy for America in its covert “cold” war against communism, the Soviet Union, as well as the fundamentalist Islamic regime controlling Iran. Iraq was to become the thorn, or rather, the tip of the sword, that America would wield and point at the throat of the Soviet Union, and which the U.S. would use to threaten and fight wars against radical Islamic states, such as Iran.

However, by 1990, the Soviet Union was on the verge of collapse. On March 11, 1990, Lithuania declared its independence and pulled out of the union, and on March 30, 1990, the Estonian supreme council announced its intentions to follow suit. It was clear to all that within another year or two, the Soviet Union would be no more.

The Soviet Union was taking its last gasps. It was also clear to all that it would be decades before Iraq would be able to repay its loans. It was also becoming apparent that Iraq, with its military machine and the second largest oil reserves in the world, would have to be conquered and destroyed before it has the opportunity to regain strength.

As noted earlier and in previous chapters, the Saudis had long lusted after Iraq, which they believed to be a broken off piece of Arabia.

In 1990, a delegation of 16 Saudis, began attending White House meetings with the President George H.W. Bush and National Security Advisor Brent Scowcroft, to discuss the fate of Iraq (23,25).

THE GULF WAR

In 1979, after the overthrow of the Shah of Iran, and with the subsequent fear that Iran would import its fanatical fundamentalist Shiit Islamic revolution in to neighboring states, the ruling families of Saudi Arabia and Kuwait offered financial backing and assistance to Iraq, if Saddam Hussein would defend them all and destroy the Iranian enemy (49).

Iraq emerged victorious, but instead of the promised assistance in repaying the $65 billion debt accrued through Western Loans to fight Iran, Saudi Arabia turned hostile and Kuwait began dumping oil on the world market, thus lowering prices when Iraq needed better oil revenues to pay for the war. Saddam felt that both Saudi Arabia, and especially Kuwait, had stabbed him in the back and were trying to undermine his rule (49,50).

For reasons that Saddam couldn’t understand, Kuwait also felt emboldened to steal oil from Iraq by over pumping the Rumailia oil field, located along the Iraq-Kuwait border (49,50).

Saddam was being provoked. He was being lured into a trap. Hussein began publicly complaining about the Kuwaiti thefts, as well as demanding assistance from Saudi Arabia. As was repeatedly pointed out, he defended Kuwait as well as the Sunniruling family of Saudi Arabia, from the fanatical fundamentalist Shia regime of Iran’s Khomeini. Iraq had suffered incredible losses, had run up a ruinous debt, and now Kuwait and Saudi Arabia, who he had protected, were not only refusing to repay their debts but were thumbing their noses at him.

Finally, after months of saber rattling to no effect, Saddam Hussein began threatening to take what he believed to be rightfully his. His threats included the use of his military to force Kuwait to either pay up or again become what it had always been, part of Iraq (49,50,51).

As noted, the “borders” of Iraq, Kuwait, Jordan, Syria, Israel, and other Middle Eastern countries are totally artificial, a creation of the Imperialistic colonial government of Britain and France. Kuwait, Iraq, and Arabia, had for centuries been one state. However, just as the Saudi royal family believed that Kuwait and Iraq were broken off parts of Arabia, Saddam Hussein and his Baath party, believed that Kuwait and Arabia were in actuality, broken off parts of Iraq (that is, Arabia), Kuwait in particular.

Saddam felt justified in threatening to take Kuwait by force if Kuwait did not begin paying its debts, and cease and desist from its thieving ways.

Saddam also thought that with the exception of Saudi Arabia and Israel, that other countries in the Middle East would not object to his attack on Kuwait. Jaber el Saba, the Emir of Kuwait, was widely hated throughout the Islamic and Arab world. It was not because Kuwait was little more than the Emir’s private plantation, that upset so many, but his close relationship with the West. Indeed, Sheik Jaber al Ahmed al Sabah, had been partners with Bush since the late 1950s when Bush was running his Zapata Offshore oil companies. Likewise his family had been partnering with this British since 1900. Jaber el Saba was seen as a Western-imperialist pawn.

Perhaps not surprisingly, given his western connections, although Saddam huffed and puffed, the Emir of Kuwait continued to thumb his nose at Iraq.

Saddam was being lured into a trap.

However, before he dared act, Saddam turned to the United States, and received, what he believed, was a “green light.”

In July of 1990, the Washington Post reported that the Bush administration would not object if Iraq seized a small amount of Kuwaiti territory.

On July 24, 1990, U.S. State Department spokeswoman, Margaret Tutweiller, announced that “We do not have any defense treaties with Kuwait, and there are no special defense or security commitments to Kuwait.”

On July 25, US Ambassador April Glaspie met with Saddam Hussein, and assured him that she was acting on direct instructions from Bush. She then informed him: “We have no opinion on the Arab-Arab conflict, like your border disagreement with Kuwait. I have direct instructions from the president to seek better relations with Iraq.”

Saddam had every reason to believe these assurances, for an identical green light had been given to Indonesia to invade East Timor, when Bush was director of the CIA. That “green light” was given by Secretary of State Henry Kissinger and his aid, Brent Snowcroft, to President Suharto of Indonesia, in 1975. Kissinger authorized the illegal invasion of East Timor and the mass murder of 100,000 women, children and men. Suharto began the invasion knowing that he had the full approval of the White House (52). It has been argued that the “green light was given because the Kissinger-Rockefeller-Bush clique believed it would be easier to get access to Timor’s oil reserves by dealing with Indonesia rather than with an independent East Timor.

Saddam was dealing with many of the same Republicans who had given that “green light” 25 years before to Indonesia, including Brent Snowcroft and George Bush (in 1975 the director of the CIA), as well as Dick Cheney. Based on history and the weapons he had been so recently been provided, Saddam had every reason to believe that his illegal invasion of Kuwait had the full approval of the Bush White House.

On July 31, the Washington Post reported that the Iraqi troop buildup had reached 100,000 men who were stationed on the Kuwaiti border. The Bush Administration expressed “concern” but was otherwise silent. On the same day, when the New York Times (53) reported that Iraq was poised to invade and that hostilities were about to break out, President George Herbert Walker Bush said nothing.

On Wednesday, August 1, Iraqi forces invaded Kuwait. Late that evening, just before midnight, Bush released a statement strongly condemning the Iraqi invasion and demanding “the immediate and unconditional withdrawal of all Iraqi forces.”

However, Bush did not threaten any specific consequences if Saddam failed to withdraw. Saddam believed he was listening to standard Bush propaganda designed for U.S. public consumption, and that these words were not to be taken seriously.

Over the ensuing weeks and months, Bush began attacking Saddam’s honor, his masculinity, and his courage, and repeatedly referred, to him as Hitler (54). Saddam Hussein was completely taken by surprise. He was not just surprised, but insulted. Nevertheless, there was no way Saddam Hussein could back down— which is exactly what Bush and team hoped for: Thesis, Anti-Thesis, a controlled conflict stage managed by the U.S., the synthesis being the destruction of Iraq and the eventual seizing of its oil reserves by the Bush oil-men.

Bush had been instrumental in building up Iraq’s army and in urging his friends in the banking community to loan the regime vast amounts of money (40-42,47). Now, his presidency (and his own “masculinity”) on the line, Bush the effeminate “wimp” was determined to destroy the Iraqi people and to create an Iraq that would become so weak, that in just a few years it could be invaded, occupied and its oil reserves seized.

Of course, the Saudis were partners in this Hegelian game and Saudi Arabia agreed to serve as the main base of attack against Iraq. However, it has been implied that not all of the Saudi ruling family were of the same mind. For example, according to some reports, King Fahd was cool to the Bush plan to base hundreds of thousands of U.S. troops on Saudi soil, whereas Prince Bandar was pushing for the stationing of permanent U.S. ground troops, explaining to Fahd that the troops would be necessary to protect Saudi Arabia from Iraq. Prince Bandar, we are told, however, never believed that Iraq was a threat. Instead, he saw the presence of these troops as necessary to destroy Iraq, and believed they would be useful for further joint military operations in the future.

On August 6, 1990, the first of 230,000 American troops arrived in Saudi Arabia to take up “defensive action” as part of “Operation Desert Shield.” This was followed by an additional 200,000 troops who were deployed to take offensive action by the U.S.-led coalition forces (51,55).

The U.S. led coalition carried out over 120,000 air attacks against Iraq (51,55). If each bombing sortie claimed only 3 Iraqi civilian lives, then at least 360,000 Iraqis, men, women, and children, were killed during the Gulf War. The actual figure was probably well over 500,000.

As is well established, U.S. bombers concentrated on obliterating the civilian infrastructure of Iraq, wiping out the Iraqi’s ability to supply water or electricity to its cities, and destroying highways, bridges and all means of mass transportation—targets which had no military value, but which were designed to inflict maximal punishment on the “sand niggers.” Members of the Bush administration joked that this was the “bomb now, die later” strategy.

The goal was not to eliminate Saddam Hussein, but genocide, the mass murder of Iraqi civilians and their children, and the creation of an Iraqi state so weak, that after a few years time it could be easily invaded and occupied.

The first fruit’s of the Gulf War included an astronomical rise in infant mortality.

Even after Saddam Hussein cried uncle, after more than a month of bombing, and agreed to accept the UN resolution calling for Iraq’s withdrawal from Kuwait, the Bush administration continued to strike at civilian targets (51,55).

Even after Saddam announced that his army was pulling out of Kuwait, and even as Iraqi soldiers began streaming toward Iraq, the Bush administration continued to strike (51,55).

As described by Lance Selfa (40): on February 28, U.S. and British forces mounted a relentless assault against retreating and defenseless Iraqi soldiers. The road leading from Kuwait to Basra became known as the ‘Highway of Death.’ Iraqi soldiers fled Kuwait in every possible vehicle they could get their hands on. Allied tank units cut the Iraqis off. U.S. warplanes bombed, strafed and firebombed the stranded columns for hours without resistance. In a slaughter that a U.S. pilot described as ‘like shooting fish in a barrel,’ thousands of Iraqi conscripts were killed on a 50-mile stretch of highway. So many planes filled the skies over southern Iraq that military air traffic controllers maneuvered to prevent mid-air collisions.”

Bush, however, was unwilling to actually topple Saddam Hussein as he feared the political cost and as it was not part of the long ranged strategy. If the coalition forces actually invaded Iraq, the horrendous street to street fighting would have resulted in thousands if not tens of thousands of U.S. casualties (51,55). The fighting could go on for weeks, months, and even years, and this would be unacceptable given that Bush would soon be running for reelection. Better to slowly strangle Iraq to death through crippling sanctions that would make it impossible for Iraq to rebuild its infrastructure (48)—part of the “bomb now die later” strategy. Also, as Iraq slowly died, it could still be presented to the world as a threat, thus justifying an increased American military presence in the gulf—and this is exactly what happened. The Bush administration established a ring of permanent military bases throughout the Persian Gulf and Middle East.

The results of this “controlled conflict” were exactly as expected. Indeed, they were better than expected as Iraq’s army was defeated in an admittedly brilliant and lightning-fast campaign within 100 hours after the ground offensive started (51,55).

Iraq rapidly became a basically a conquered country that in due time would be strangled to death by sanctions. Its oil reserves were almost within grasp (56).

Indeed, oil, and only oil, was the main reason the Bush administration attacked Iraq—to eventuallyseize its oil reserves.

“They know we own their country. We own their airspace… We dictate the way they live and talk. And that’s what’s great about America right now. It’s a good thing, especially when there’s a lot of oil out there we need.” -U.S. Brig. General William Looney (56).

At the close of the Gulf War, the U.S. not only dominated Iraq, it had achieved dominion in the Middle East by placing American military bases in all the oil producing nations of the Persian Gulf. With the establishment of these military bases, the U.S. also gained a potent weapon aimed right at the hearts of the emerging industrial giants of the region, India and China.

With the successful completion of the Gulf War, the oil weapon was now within Washington’s grasp. Now Bush need only wait until after the 1992 presidential election and after Iraq became sufficiently weak, so as to make a successful occupation of Iraq that much easier to achieve. Associates of the Bush crime family looked eagerly forward to the benefits they would reap when Bush was elected to a second term.

But then the unexpected.

George H.W. Bush lost the 1992 election.

TERRORISM: THE NEW WORLD ORDER

1991 was a banner year for George H.W. Bush: Iraq had been defeated and was slowly being strangled to death. Najibullah, the communist leader of Afghanistan had been overthrown by the mujahideen. The Soviet Union had ceased to exist on December 21, 1991. And George H. W. Bush was riding high in the polls, with a 90% approval rating. Bush was so overcome with glee that he proclaimed “the new world order” (57)—echoing the words of Adolf Hitler some 60 years before.

Hitler sought to establish his “new world order” through terror. And to maintain that new world order, and his own power, Hitler first unleashed the terror on those he ruled, the German people.

George H.W. Bush (and his partners in crime, Kissinger, Nixon, Dulles, the Saudis, and on and on), had been associated with and helping to fund and train terrorists and murderers for much of his life. Bush liked to call these terrorists “freedom fighters.” For decades these fighters against freedom, had been unleashed by a succession of Republican administrations on defenseless civilians who were seeking democracy, education, health care, or a living wage — “Freedom fighters” whose job was to fight freedom and to rape, torture, maim, castrate, burn, and disembowel women, children, infants, babies, boys, girls, and innocent men.

George H.W. Bush and his partners in crime had unleashed “freedom fighters” on the women and children of Guatemala, Nicaragua, Chile, El-Salvador, East Timor, Afghanistan, and the list goes on and on.

However, when George H.W. Bush announced the “new world order” what the public didn’t know is that terrorists would soon be unleashed on America’s daughters and sons.

The Hegelian dialectic requires controlled conflict between opposing parties: thesis anti-thesis. For the last half of the 20th century, the communist Soviet Union had made up half of that equation. But in December, 1991, the Soviet Union, the communist threat, and the “Cold War,” had died and was no more.

Bush, the CIA, the bankers and arms merchants, and the Wall Street elite, needed a new boogey man.

So Bush and team met with his Saudi friends… And they plotted and they planned…

The American people did not know it yet…

Terrorism was coming home, courtesy of the CIA, George Bush, and his Saudi friends.

THE 1993 WORLD TRADE CENTER BOMBING

The Bush family had been partnering with terrorists for decades, using murderers, rapists, gangsters, and the like, in innumerable operations which were designed to increase the power and wealth of the Bush clan and their associates.

A man who would order or make it possible for others to carry out the worst of atrocities, obviously has no sense of humanity, and no love for his fellow man—be they American or otherwise. Only a fool would believe that a man like George Bush would make a distinction between the morality of terrorizing and murdering foreigners or American citizens. Indeed, as detailed in chapter 3, the Bush family in fact partnered with the regime of Adolf Hitler, and thus assisted Hitler and the Nazis to wage war against the United States.

The Bush family has a history… and although a snake may shed its skin, it is still a snake. A leopard can be painted, or covered up, but it cannot change its spots.

Thus we should not be surprised to learn, that in 1990, the administration of George H.W. Bush—an administration which included Dick Cheney, Colin Powell, Condoleeza Rice, and 300 other individuals who would 10 years later become part of the administration of his son—began laying the ground work for the first major terrorist attack on U.S. soil.

The attack would serve as justification for Bush and team to finally destroy a greatly weakened Saddam Hussein, and seize the oil reserves of Iraq.

In July of 1990, the administration of George H.W. Bush called upon a “valuable” CIA “asset” (58), Sheik Omar Abdul Rahman—a man who was also linked to the assassin who killed Senator Robert Kennedy (59). Sheik Omar, a Saudiand CIAfinanced cleric had been in Peshawar, coordinating and attempting to unify the various mujahideen groups fighting in Afghanistan. He arrived in New York, via Saudi Arabia on “a tourist visa issued by an undercover agent of the CIA” (58).

Initially, “his primary purpose was to set up a U.S. infrastructure, a funding mechanism, and an organizational base for militant Islamic groups” (58). However, in truth, he had been brought here to create terror.

In 1993, he was arrested in connection with the February, 1993, World Trade Center bombing, and for conspiring to attack several New York landmarks.

The FBI, acting, apparently, according to plan, initially tried to blame the 1993 WTC bombing on Iraq (60).

Several months after the 1993 bombing, the New York Times reported that the FBI had advanced knowledge that the WTC would be attacked (61). An FBI informant, acting at the behest of the FBI, even offered to build the bomb (61,62). Yet another FBI informant, even suggested the World Trade Center as a target.

Unfortunately for Bush and his cronies, they were out of power in 1993, and thus could not reap the geo-political and financial benefits that would have been theirs following this crime.

Instead, they would have to wait nearly 10 years before again orchestrating yet another terrorist assault on the World Trade Center. And as was the case in 1993, we would learn that a man recruited by the CIA would be held accountable, and that the FBI and CIA, knew of the attack, in advance.

NOTES

1). John L. Esposito (Editor), “The Oxford History of Islam,” Oxford University Press, 2000.

2). A. M. Vasilev, Alexei Vassiliev, “The History of Saudi Arabia,” New York University Press, 2000.

3). Robert Spencer, David Pryce-Jones, “Islam Unveiled: Disturbing Questions About the World’s Fastest Growing Faith,” Encounter Books, 2002; Ahmed Rashid, Jihad: The Rise of Militant Islam in Central Asia,” Yale Univ Press, 2002; Stephen Schwartz, “The Two Faces of Islam,” Double Day, 2002.

4). John L. Esposito, “Islam: The Straight Path,” Oxford University Press, 1998; al-Fihrist, “Ibn al-Nadim;” Ash-Shi’a wat-Tashayyu, “Ehsan Elahi Zaheer.”

5). Hamid Algar, “Wahhabism: A Critical Essay,” Islamic Publications International, 2002.

6). Frank E. Vogel, “Islamic Law and Legal System: Studies of Saudi Arabia,” Brill Academic Publishers, 2000.

7). Rashad Khalifa, “Quran, Hadith, And Islam,” Universal Unity, 2000; Muhammad Ali, Maulana Muhammad Ali, Maulana Myhammad, “A Manual of Hadith,” Ahamadiyya Anjuman Ishaat Islam Lahore, 1992.

8). Micah L. Sifry and Christopher Cerf, “The Gulf War Reader,” Random House, 1991.

9). Phillip Knightly, “Imperial legacy.”

10). Glenn Frankel, “Lines in the Sand,” The Gulf War Reader, Random House, 1991; Harold Richard Patrick Dickson, “The Arab of the Desert,” Unwin Hyman, 1983.

11). John Loftus and Mark Aarons. “The Secret War Against The Jews” St. Martins Press, New York, 1994; Charles Higham, “Trading with the Enemy: An Expose of the Nazi-American Money Plot 1933-1949,” Delacorte Press, 1983.

12). From 1927 to 1941, Dulles worked as lawyer and international finance specialist for Sullivan & Cromwell, a Wall Street law firm in New York. Dulles performed work for Bush, Harriman, and Rockefeller in setting up business relationships with the Nazis and with top Nazi industrialists and played a pivotal role in promoting U.S.-Nazi corporate relations. Allen Dulles was also legal counsel for Standard Oil and the Nazi’s I. G. Farben, co-owned by the Rockefellers. Dulles was recruited by OSS intelligence chief Colonel William J. Donovan, in 1941, and was posted to Berne, Switzlerland. Dulles was picked because of his great expertise on Germany which he acquired through his law firm during the 1930s. From October 1942 to May 1945, he gathered intelligence information on Nazi Germany related to all aspects of the war effort, including as it pertains to commerce and industry.

13). PBS Frontline, 2001; Jean Charles Brisard & Guillaume Dasquie, “Bin Laden: The Forbidden Truth.”

14). Adolf Hitler, “Mein Kampf.”

15). OFFICE OF U.S. CHIEF OF COUNSEL FOR PROSECUTION

OF AXIS CRIMINALITY No. 792-PS 17 September 1945 Source of Original OKW Files, Flensburg [Excerpt] LEADS: CANARIS, IBN SAUD, GRAND MUFTI. SUMMARY OF RELEVANT POINTS (with page references): 1. Only through the funds made available by Germany to the Grand Mufti of Jerusalem was it possible to carry out the revolt in Palestine. (Page 1). 2. Germany will keep up the connection with the Grand Mufti. Weapons will be stored for the Mufti with Ibn Saud in Arabia. (Page 2). 3. Ibn Saud himself has close connections with the Grand Mufti and the revolting circles in TransJordan. (Page 2). 4. To be able to carry out our work one of Germany’s agents will be placed in Cairo (Page 3). 5. The document is undated but obviously written before the outbreak of the war in 1939. It is not signed. Analyst Landmann Doc. No. 792-PS.

16). John Loftus & Mark Aarons, “The Secret War Against the Jews.”

17). Webster G. Tarpley & Anton Chaitkin, “George Bush: The Unauthorized Biography,” The Executive Intelligence Review; Robert Lederman, Philadelphia City Paper, 1/18/01; Office of Alien Property Custodian Vesting Order No. 248, Vesting Order No. 259, Vesting Order No. 261, Vesting Order No. 370; BBC News, 9/17/2001; UPI, “CIA says Nazi general was intelligence source” 9/20/2000.

18). Joe Stork, “Middle East Oil and the Energy Crisis,” Monthly Review, 1975.

19). SaÔd K. Aburish, “A Brutal Friendship: The West and the Arab Elite,” St. Martins Press, 1997.

20). Gilles Kepel, “Jihad: The Trail of Political Islam,” Cambridge, Belknap Press, 2002.

21). Jonathan Beaty & S.C. Gwynne, “Scandals: Not Just a Bank,” Time Magazine, 9/2/1991.

22). Peter Brewton, “The Mafia, CIA, and George Bush,” Shapolsky Book Pub., 1992.

23). Wall Street Journal, “Vetting the Frontrunners: From Oil to Baseball to the Governor’s Mansion,” 9/28/1999.

24). Jonathan Beaty & S.C. Gwynne, “The Outlaw Bank: A Wild Ride Into the Secret Heart of BCCI,” Random House, 1993.

25). James H. Hatfield, “Fortunate Son,” St. Martins Press.

26). Peter Brewton, “Harken Energy: George W.’s Perfect Storm,” 7/ 15/2002.

27). According to U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) records, George W. Bush disregarded federal statutes on four different occasions, by failing to file insider stock trade reports on a timely basis. George W. Bush also illegally back-dating one trade by four months. By selling his stock based on illegal insider knowledge, Bush made around $1 million in profit. The SEC was forced to investigated, and the investigation was led by general counsel James R. Doty who had previously served as George W. Bush’s personal lawyer. The chairman of the SEC was Richard Breedon, deputy counsel to Bush’s father when he was vice president. Not surprisingly, Bush was cleared of insider trade wrongdoing by his personal attorney and by his father’s vice-presidential counsel. See also, Time magazines, 10/28/1991; New York Times, 7/7/2002.

28). John Prados, “Afghanistan lessons from the Last War. U.S. Analysis of the Sovet War in Afghanistan: Declassified,” 10/9/2001.

29). Defense Intelligence Agency, Directorate for Research, “The Economic Impact of Soviet Involvement in Afghanistan,” DIA Declassification Release, May 1983; Central Intelligence Agency, Directorate of Intelligence, “The Costs of Soviet Involvement in Afghanistan,” CIA Declassification Release, February 1987; Vladislav Tamarov, “Afghanistan Soviet Vietnam,” H-Russia, 1995.

30). Central Intelligence Agency, Directorate of Intelligence, Office of Political Analysis, “The Soviets and the Tribes of Southwest Asia,” CIA Declassification Release, 9/23/1980.

31). Michael C. Hudson, “To play the hegemon: 50 years of U.S. policy toward the Middle East,” Middle East Journal, Volume 50, 3, 1996.

32). Le Nouvel Observateur, 11/15-21/1998; Bill Blum, “Killing Hope.”

33). Sayed Qasim Reshtya, “The Price of Liberty: The Tragedy of Afghanistan,” Bardi Editore, Roma Italy, 1984.

34). Le Figaro, 10/31/2001.

35). Peter Schweizer, “Victory-The Reagan Administration’s Secret Strategy that Hastened the Collapse of the Soviet Union.”

36). Central Intelligence Agency, “Special National Intelligence Estimate 37-89, Afghanistan: The War in Perspective,” November 1989.

37). CBS, 12/23/1998.

38). Le Figaro, 10/31/2001.

39). William Thomas, “Bringing the War Home” 1998.

40). Lance Selfa, “What We Say Goes,” International Socialist Review, 7, Spring, 1999.

41). Los Angeles Times, 2/23/1992. 42). ABC News Nightline, 6/9/1991.

43). Alan Friedman, “The Neil Bush Bailout,” Vanity Fair, October, 1990.

44). Al Martin, “The Conspirators. Secrets of an Iran Contra Insider.” 45). American Free Press, “New FBI Head Is Old Bush Cover-Up Man,” 8/20/2001.

46). Federation of American Scientists, “BCCI AND LAW ENFORCEMENT: The Justice Department.”

47). “How the U.S. helped keep Hussein in power,” International Socialist Review 4, Spring, 1998.

48). Anthony Cordesman, The Gulf and Transition: U.S. Policy Ten Years After the Gulf War,” Center for Strategic and International Studies, October 2000; Robert G. Darius, et al., “Gulf Security into the 1980s: Perceptual and Strategic Dimensions,” Hoover Institution Press, 1984.

49). Micah L. Sifry and Christopher Cerf (editors), “The Gulf War Reader,” Random House, 1991.

50). Turi Munthe (Editor), “The Saddam Hussein Reader,” Thunder’s Mouth Press, 2002; Said K. Aburish, “Saddam Hussein: The Politics of Revenge,” Bloomsbury, 1999; Sandra MacKey, “The Reckoning: Iraq and the Legacy of Saddam Hussein,” W.W. Norton & Company, 2002.

51). Rick Atkinson, “Crusade : The Untold Story of the Persian Gulf War,” Mariner Books, 1994.

52). Embassy Jakarta Telegram 1579 to Secretary State, 6 December 1975 [Text of Ford-Kissinger-Suharto Discussion], Gerald R. Ford Library, Kissinger-Scowcroft Temporary Parallel File, Box A3, Country File, Far East-Indonesia, State Department Telegrams 4/1/75-9/22/76; Enclosure to Document 3, State Department Briefing Paper, “Indonesia and East Timor,” ca. 21 November 1975, National Archives, Record Group 59, Department of State Records, Executive Secretariat Briefing Books,1958-1976, Box 227, President Ford’s Visit to the Far East Indonesia Nov-Dec. 1975; Ford, Kissinger and the Indonesian Invasion, 1975-76; National Security Archive Electronic Briefing Book No. 62 Edited by William Burr and Michael L. Evans December 6, 2001; James Dunn, “The Timor Affair in International Perspective,” in Carey and Bentley, (editors) East Timor at the Crossroads.” Militias, death squads, and paramilitary forces were organized to terrorize the population and were under the direction of Kopassus, the Indonesian special forces who were “legendary for their cruelty” and who had been trained by U.S. forces. “Kopassus engaged in every kind of atrocity, including systematic rapes, tortures, and executions. Many of the Kopassus army officers attended courses in the United States under the International Military Education and Training program. The tactic employed were similar to those used by the Contras in Nicaragua. Their aim was to terrorize everyone including the Red Cross and journalists.

53). New York Times, 7/31/1990.

54). Washington Post. “Describing Moral Debate, Bush Spellbinds Audience,” 1/26’1991; Washington Post, “Bush and Saddam’s Holy War of Words,” 2/3/1991.

55). Department of Defense, “21st Century Complete Guide to the Gulf War, Operation Desert Shield and Desert Storm, from the Invasion by Iraq and Saddam Hussein to the Liberation of Kuwait, with Declassified Military and CIA Files,” Department of Defense, Progressive Management, 2002.

56). Washington Post, 8/30/1999.

57). Washington Post, “Bush: Out of These Troubled Times… a New World Order,” 9/12/1990; Washington Post, “Bush’s Talk of a ‘New World Order:’ Foreign Policy Tool or Mere Slogan?” 5/26/1991.

58). Mary Anne Weaver, “Blowback,” The Atlantic Monthly; May 1998.

59). The FBI had inserted listening devices into Sheik Rahman’s home and offices, and taped a conversation between him and one of his followers who was urging that they bomb several NewYork buildings. “Slow down; slow down a little bit,” Sheik Rahman whispered. “The one who killed Kennedy was trained for three years.”

60). James Fox, the FBI’s chief investigator into the February 26, 1993 bombing proposed that an Iraqi agent had masterminded the bombing. See also Laurie Mylroie, “Study of Revenge: Saddam Hussein’s Unfinished War Against America.”

61). New York Times, Oct. 28, 1993. As also reported in court documents in the trial of Sheik Omar Abdul Rahman et al, it was revealed that the FBI had recruited Emad Salem, to infiltrate radical Islamic groups. Emad Salem did so, and not only became involved in the plot to bomb the World Trade Center, but at the behest of the FBI, offered to build the bomb. See also Gov Exhibits 55119. In tape recordings of meetings he had with the FBI, Salem discusses how the FBI had planned on “building the bomb with a phony powder and grabbing the people who were involved in it.” The Sheik was not sentenced for carrying out the World Trade Center bombing; however, phone calls to the Sheik by Muslim defendants in that case had been presented and accepted as evidence implicating his involvement. The conspiracy theory was also supported by the testimony of Abdo Haggag, an Egyptian, who quoted an unrecorded conversation he allegedly had with the Sheik. Haggag was a paid informer and admitted under oath to having received $100,000 for his services to the US government.

62). When James Fox, the FBI’s chief investigator. was asked by a reporter if it was true that the FBI had advance notice of the bombing, but allowed the bombing to take place anyway, Fox denied the allegation. Fox was later suspended from the FBI by FBI director Freeh.

Continued: America Betrayed, Part 2

Contents


31077

1. THOSE WHO BURN BOOKS….

Indeed, like the Nazi laws passed 70 years prior, the Patriot Act, signed into law by Bush, suspends or curtails a number of constitutionally guaranteed civil rights, i.e., individuals can be arrested and detained indefinitely without charge; police powers are increased enabling them to monitor private telephone conversations or to conduct secret searches with minimal judicial oversight; private business records can be seized even if there is no evidence of a crime; American citizens can be spied on for “intelligence” purposes and without the need of a warrant; even librarians can be ordered to provide police with lists of all books and reading material checked out by a “person of interest” even though there is no evidence of a crime.Continue reading ?

The_Sandman_a_B-24_Liberator,_piloted_by_Robert_Sternfels

2. THE NAZI-TERRORIST OIL-CONSPIRACY

The attendees included the owners and representatives of Germany’s largest companies and corporations including those that were controlled or directed or in business with Prescott Bush, his father-in-law George Walker, and their associates, Harriman and Rockefeller: Standard Oil, IG Farben, Hamburg-Amerika shipping, Consolidated Silesian Steel Corporation, German Steel Trust’s Union Banking Corporation, etc. Continue reading ?

Compare the emblem of the Skull & Bones, which preceded the Nazis and supported them, to the Nazi Death Head

3. THE BROTHERHOOD OF DEATH

“Some of the biggest men in the U.S. in the fields of commerce and manufacturing know that there is a power so organized, so subtle, so complete, so pervasive that they had better not speak above their breath when they speak in condemnation of it.” -President Woodrow Wilson, 28th President of the USA Continue reading ?

SwastikaGoogle_468x318

4. CIA-NAZIS: TERROR & MURDER INCORPORATED

Throughout the 1930?s and early 1940s, Prescott Bush, the Harrimans, Rockefellers, and their associates, had been in business with Nazis and the terrorist brotherhood, the SS. With the assistance of the Dulles brothers, who were playing pivotal roles in and out of the White House, the Brotherhood of Death began expanding its cancerous tentacles into the heart of the United States government. With the help of friends in high places, including Dulles and hundreds of Nazis in the new CIA, Bush and friends were not only able to completely cover up their treacherous crimes, but would use the government of the United States as a tool for committing new ones. Continue reading ?

Chairman Frank Church, D- Idaho., the Senate Intelligence Committee, holds up a poison daft gun as co-chairman John G. Tower, R-Texas looks at the weapon during a session the panel's probe of the Central Intelligence Agency Tuesday, Sept. 17, 1975 in Washington. (AP Photo/Henry Griffin)

5. THE TERRORIST ASSASSINS

“Carl Bernstein, writing in the October 1977 issue of Rolling Stone magazine, reported that more than 400 American journalists worked for the CIA, and that the New York Times was one of the CIA’s closest media collaborators. Yet other CIA assets included Philip Graham, publisher of the Washington Post, as well as Newsweek and Time magazine and CBS news. In December of 1977, the New York Times reported that “more than eight hundred news and public information organizations and individuals,” had been on the CIA’s payroll.” Continue reading ?

pictures-from-history-04-742870

6. THE TANGLED ROOTS OF TERRORISM

The economy of the world is dependent on black gold, oil that is. Saudi Arabia has the largest pool of oil reserves. The desert kingdom is awash with oil. The second largest known reserves are beneath the soil of Iraq. However, in the 1970s, evidence began to accrue to suggest that beneath the Caspian Basin and in the adjoining Central Asian states of Turkmenistan, Kazakhstan, Azerbaijan, and Uzbekistan, lay incredible huge pools of oil, perhaps as much or more than the total reserves of Iraq. Continue reading ?

tumblr_mbk6rlZp861rdlo0io1_1280

7. BUSH-LADEN, WAHHABISM & THE GULF WAR

This partnership, which has its roots firmly entrenched in Nazi Germany, was given renewed emphasis when Khalid bin Abdul Aziz (King Khalid) became the fourth King of Saudi Arabia, reigning from 1975 to 1982… It was during the co-reign of these two monarchs, that the bin Ladens became business partners with the Bush family. The Bush clan also forged relations with other Saudi families who would later play a significant role in financing and aiding the 9/11 terrorist attack on America. Continue reading ?

q

8. BIOLOGICAL ETHNIC WEAPONS: THE U.S.A. BIOTERRORIZES AMERICANS

Although many Nazi doctors were hanged, just as many be came agents of the CIA and United States government, including Walter Schreiber, who helped conduct many of the Nazi medical experiments at Dachau. Yet another famous Nazi, Dr. Josef Mengele—the ultra-sadistic “angel of death”— also began working for the good ‘ol USA. Continue reading ?

Enduring Freedom

9. OSAMA BIN LADEN, AFGHANISTAN, TALIBAN, AL-QAEDA, FLORIDA & GEORGE BUSH, 1996

The “new world order” is, however, a “Hegelian” concept, and the Hegelian dialectic requires controlled conflict, between opposing parties: thesis antithesis = Synthesis (the New World Order). Continue reading ?

condoleezza-rice

10. TREASON & THE 9-11 COVER UP: BUSH, FBI & CIA & SABOTAGE PRE-9-11 INVESTIGATIONS

The Bush administration and high ranking members of the FBI and CIA, have claimed that it is impossible for the CIA to plant or recruit spies from within terrorist organizations such as al-Qaeda. That differences of language, religion, and ethnicity, make recruitment impossible. American spies would “stand out like a sore thumb” and would be killed and eliminated by “evil doers.” Continue reading ?

bush_shunned

11. 9-11: BUSH KNEW & ALLOWED IT TO HAPPEN

Indeed, just as the Bush family and their associates have partnered with the bin Laden family and a number of Saudis and Pakistanis who helped finance the 9/11 attack, George H.W. Bush, his CIA and FBI, the Saudis and Pakistanis were also linked to the 1993 World Trade Center bombers.Continue reading ?

BUSH SAUDI 1

12. TERROR FOR OIL

In 1996, soon after the Taliban took Kabul, and following the arrival of bin Laden, the Taliban leaders were persuaded to start talking business with the Bush clan, and to agree to the construction of an oil pipeline. Soon, the Taliban were on their way to Houston, Texas—Bush country. The Taliban were then dined and lavishly entertained by executives of the oil company, Unocal, the same Unocal that has extensive ties to the current administration of George W. Bush. Continue reading ?

44af24cd0a95c57a70dc21a5a0bc8608

13. BIN LADEN THE BUSINESSMAN

Immediately following 9/11, George Bush, Dick Cheney, and Condoleezza Rice, made it vehemently clear that they opposed any public or congressional inquiry into the so called “intelligence failures” which led to this horrible tragedy. Bush, Cheney, and Rice, all mouthed the same self-serving absurdities: an investigation would interfere with the war on terrorism. Continue reading ?

Image_003

14. A TAIL OF TWO “HEROES”

White House aids entered the room where Cheney was still enjoying the spectacle on TV. They told him that a Boeing 757, an American Airlines commercial jet had been hijacked by terrorists. They feared that it might be headed directly toward Washington, the nation’s capital. Continue reading ?

 Continued: America Betrayed, Part 2

«- Previous | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | View All | Next -»

Be the first to comment

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.